KONICA MINOLTA CS7 Installation & Service Manual

Installation/Service Manual
Version H
Safety Precautions &
Warnings 1
Product Overview 2
Preparation for Installation 3
Installation Procedure for This Device and

AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection) 4

AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection) 5
Installation Procedure for

This Device and REGIUS 6
The Mixed Installation Procedure for This Device,

7
AeroDR SYSTEM and REGIUS

8
AeroDR Portable RF Unit (S-SRM connection)
DIRECT DIGITIZER
9
AeroDR Portable RF Unit (SRM connection)
Installation Procedure for This Device

10
and AeroDR Portable UF Unit

11
and AeroDR Stitching Unit
Installation of Options 12
Installation of Function System Options 13
Other Installation Procedures 14
Troubleshooting 15
Error Code 16
Maintenance 17
Specifications 18
Appendix 19
EN
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.7.5 How to display the intermediate

screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.7.6 Functions of the intermediate screen. . . 59
Disclaimer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2.8 Service tool screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Trademark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2.8.1 Structure of the device icon screen . . 60
Option/license. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2.8.2 Structure of the sub-menu screen . . . 62
Terms description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.9 User tool screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Structure of pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 3
Chapter 1
Preparation for Installation. . . . 65
Safety Precautions & Warnings. . . 19
3.1 Preparation of tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.1 Symbols relating to safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.2 Check of the installation environment . . . 67
1.1.1 Safety alert symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.2.1 Check of the power supply condition. . . 67
1.1.2 Warning notice (signal words). . . . . . . 20
3.2.2 Check of the installation location. . . . . 67
1.1.3 Description of graphic symbols . . . . . . 20
3.3 Check of the network environment . . . . . . 68
1.2 Warning labels/instruction displays . . . . . 21 3.3.1 IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1.2.1 Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.3.2 Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1.2.2 This device (during the portable X-ray
3.3.3 Ethernet cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
device operation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Chapter 4
1.3.1 General caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.3.2 Caution during operation. . . . . . . . . . . 22
Installation Procedure for This
1.3.3 LCD monitor precautions. . . . . . . . . . . 23 Device and AeroDR SYSTEM
1.3.4 Precaution when temporarily stopping (SRM connection) . . . . . . . . . . . 71
use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3.5 Precaution when resuming usage. . . . 23
4.1 Connection example of this device and
1.3.6 Precaution regarding disposal. . . . . . . 23 AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection) . . . . 72
4.2 The workflow to install this device and
Chapter 2 AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection) . . . . 73
4.3 Check of bundled items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . 25 4.4 Check of startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.1 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 4.4.1 Temporary connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.1.1 System configuration example. . . . . . . 26 4.4.2 Check of startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . 27 4.5 Setting of touch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2.2.1 Example of connection in the exposure 4.5.1 Installation of the driver for the touch
room. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2.2.2 Example of connection with the 4.5.2 Adjusting the position of the touch
portable X-ray device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2.2.3 Connection example of the AeroDR 4.6 Registration of license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Stitching System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . 83
2.3 Connection example of REGIUS . . . . . . . 44 4.7.1 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM . . . 83
2.3.1 1-to-1 connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 4.7.2 Startup of respective devices. . . . . . . . 83
2.3.2 n-to-m connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 4.8 System setting of this device . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.4 Component name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 4.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related
2.4.1 This device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
2.4.2 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.4.3 This device (during the portable X-ray
4.10.1 Flow chart for setting up the network. . . 88
device operation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
2.5 Login with a service account . . . . . . . . . . 51 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.5.1 Login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 4.10.3 RM setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2.5.2 Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 4.10.4 Exposure room setting . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2.6 Screen transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 4.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting . . . . . . . 91
2.7 Operating the service tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
2.7.1 Startup of the service tool . . . . . . . . . . 53 registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2.7.2 Exiting from the service tool. . . . . . . . . 54 4.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector
2.7.3 Startup of the setting tool. . . . . . . . . . . 56 communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2.7.4 Switching to the user tool. . . . . . . . . . . 57
3
Contents
4.10.8
4.10.9
AeroDR I/F Cable setting . . . . . . . . . . 96
AeroDR Battery Charger setting . . . . . 98
Chapter 5
4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting . . . . . . . . . . 99 Installation Procedure for This
4.10.11 AeroDR Generator Interface Unit Device and AeroDR SYSTEM
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting . . . . . . . . . . 106
(Aero Sync connection) . . . . . 151
4.10.13 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 5.1 Connection example of this device and
4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device . . 108 AeroDR SYSTEM
4.12 Restart of this device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 (Aero Sync connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.13 Change of network of this device/ 5.2 The workflow to install this device and
addition of AeroDR Detector after AeroDR SYSTEM
completing the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 (Aero Sync connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.13.1 When changing the network setting of 5.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related
this device after completing the devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 5.3.1 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related
4.13.2 When adding an AeroDR Detector. . 113 devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4.14 Analysis of AeroDR Detector . . . . . . . . . 114 5.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.14.1 Flow chart of AeroDR Detector 5.4.1 Flow chart for setting up the network. . . . 157
analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 5.4.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
4.14.2 Analysis of AeroDR Detector. . . . . . . 115 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4.14.3 Gain calibration of AeroDR Detector. . . 120 5.4.3 RM setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.14.4 Offset calibration of AeroDR Detector . . 122 5.4.4 Exposure room setting . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.15 Deployment to the installation location and 5.4.5 AeroDR Access Point setting . . . . . . 160
connection to the institution network . . . 124 5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
4.15.1 Deployment of respective devices registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
to the installation locations. . . . . . . . . 124 5.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector
4.15.2 Connecting to institution network. . . . 124 communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
4.16 Peripheral devices setting . . . . . . . . . . . 125 5.4.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting . . . . . . . . . 165
4.16.1 Preparation for setting the 5.4.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting . . . . 167
DRYPRO 832. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 5.4.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting . . . . . . . . . 168
4.17 Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 5.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.18 Confirmation of the version of this device . . 132 5.4.12 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.19 Roaming environment settings . . . . . . . . 133 5.5 Change of network of this device/addition of
4.19.1 Workflow to set roaming environment . . . 133 AeroDR Detector after completing the
4.19.2 Advance preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.19.3 RM client machine settings . . . . . . . . 134 5.5.1 When changing the network setting of
4.19.4 Consolidation of exposure room this device after completing the
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.19.5 Resetting of device information. . . . . 140 5.5.2 When adding an AeroDR Detector. . 174
4.19.6 Start of RM client machines. . . . . . . . 142 5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector . . . . . . . . . 175
4.19.7 Restart of RM hybrid machine. . . . . . 142 5.6.1 Flow chart of AeroDR Detector
4.19.8 Restart of RM client machines. . . . . . 142 analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4.19.9 Restart of AeroDR Detector. . . . . . . . 142 5.6.2 Analysis of AeroDR Detector. . . . . . . 176
4.19.10 Power on/off linkage settings. . . . . . . 143 5.6.3 Gain calibration of AeroDR Detector. . . 181
4.20 Optional installation and data migration . . 145 5.7 Roaming environment settings . . . . . . . . 184
4.20.1 Optional installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 5.7.1 Workflow to set roaming environment. . . 184
4.20.2 Data migration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 5.7.2 Advance preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.21 Backup of the setting data of this device . . 146 5.7.3 RM client machine settings . . . . . . . . 185
4.22 Final operation check and delivery . . . . . 149 5.7.4 Consolidation of exposure room
4.22.1 Exposure confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . 149 information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.22.2 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 5.7.5 Resetting of device information. . . . . 191
5.7.6 Start of RM client machines. . . . . . . . 193
5.7.7 Restart of RM hybrid machine. . . . . . 193
5.7.8 Restart of RM client machines. . . . . . 193
5.7.9 Restart of AeroDR Detector. . . . . . . . 193
5.7.10 Power on/off linkage settings. . . . . . . 194
5.8 Final operation check and delivery . . . . . 196
5.8.1 Exposure confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5.8.2 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4
Contents
Chapter 6 Chapter 8
Installation Procedure for This Installation Procedure for This
Device and REGIUS. . . . . . . . . 197 Device and AeroDR Portable RF
6.1 The workflow to install this device and Unit (S-SRM connection) . . . . 237
REGIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 8.1 Connection example of this device and
6.2 Temporary connections and startup of AeroDR Portable RF Unit
devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 (S-SRM connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
6.2.1 Temporary connections of devices. . . . 199
8.2 The workflow to install this device and
6.2.2 Startup of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
AeroDR Portable RF Unit
6.3 System setting of this device . . . . . . . . . 200
(S-SRM connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
6.4 Activation of REGIUS icon . . . . . . . . . . . 202
8.3 Check of bundled items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
6.5 REGIUS setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
8.4 Check of startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
6.5.1 Displaying the CR unit setting screen . . . 203
8.4.1 Attachment of accessories. . . . . . . . . 242
6.5.2 Basic settings of REGIUS . . . . . . . . . 204
8.4.2 Check of startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
6.5.3 JM setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
8.5 Hardware setting of this device . . . . . . . 243
6.5.4 REGIUS setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.5.1 Attachment of external CD/DVD drive. . . 243
6.5.5 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
8.5.2 Adjusting the position of the touch
6.6 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
110/110HQ images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
8.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR
6.6.1 Check of the image quality of REGIUS
Portable RF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
110/110HQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
8.6.1 Temporary connections of AeroDR
6.6.2 Check of the pixel count and the reading
Portable RF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
start position of REGIUS 110/110HQ . . . 212
8.6.2 Startup of respective devices. . . . . . . 244
6.6.3 Adjustment of the settings of the image size
and position of REGIUS 110/110HQ. . . . 215
8.8 Setting of user tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
6.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS
8.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related
170/190/210 images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.7.1 Check of the image quality of REGIUS
8.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 252
170/190/210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
6.7.2 Check of the pixel count and the
reading start position of REGIUS
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
170/190/210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
8.10.3 RM setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
6.7.3 Adjustment of PLL value and the
8.10.4 Exposure room setting . . . . . . . . . . . 254
reading start position of REGIUS
8.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting . . . . . . 255
170/190/210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
6.8 Connection of this device and REGIUS to
registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
the institution network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
8.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector
6.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS . . 223
communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
6.10 REGIUS common environment setting . . 225
8.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting . . . . . . . . . 260
Chapter 7 8.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting . . . .
8.10.10 AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting. . . .
262
263
The Mixed Installation Procedure 8.10.11 AeroDR Detector setting . . . . . . . . . . 265
for This Device, AeroDR 8.10.12 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
8.11 Delay time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
SYSTEM and REGIUS. . . . . . . 229 8.11.1 Prep-Delay time measurement . . . . . 267
7.1 The workflow to install this device, 8.12 Analysis of AeroDR Detector . . . . . . . . 270
AeroDR SYSTEM and REGIUS . . . . . . . 230 8.13 Deployment to the installation locations and
7.2 Temporary connections and startup of connection to the institution network . . . 271
devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 8.13.1 Deployment of respective devices
7.2.1 Temporary connections of devices. . . 232 to the installation locations. . . . . . . . . 271
7.2.2 Startup of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 8.13.2 Connection to the institution network. . . 271
7.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related 8.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point . . 272
devices and REGIUS icon . . . . . . . . . . . 233 8.14.1 AeroDR Access Point auto setting. . . 272
7.4 Connection of this device, AeroDR 8.14.2 AeroDR Access Point manual setting. . . 274
SYSTEM, and REGIUS to the institution 8.14.3 Addition of the AeroDR Access Point
network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
5
Contents
8.14.4 Change of the AeroDR Access Point 10.5.2 Adjusting the position of the touch
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
8.14.5 Deletion of the AeroDR Access Point 10.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Portable UF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
8.15 Network configuration for each area . . . 282 10.6.1 Temporary connections of AeroDR
8.15.1 Creating a new area. . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Portable UF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
8.15.2 Network configuration for each area. . . 284 10.6.2 Startup of respective devices. . . . . . . 319
8.15.3 Initial area selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 10.7 System setting of this device . . . . . . . . . 320
8.15.4 Other settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 10.8 Setting of user tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
8.16 Final operation check and delivery . . . . . 287 10.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related
8.16.1 Exposure confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . 287 devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
8.16.2 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 10.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 326
Chapter 9 10.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
Installation Procedure for This screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Device and AeroDR Portable 10.10.3 RM setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.10.4 Exposure room setting . . . . . . . . . . .
328
328
RF Unit (SRM connection) . . . 289 10.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting . . . . . . 329
9.1 Connection example of this device and 10.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
AeroDR Portable RF Unit registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
(SRM connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 10.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector
9.2 The workflow to install this device and communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
10.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting . . . . . . . . . 334
10.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting . . . . 336
(SRM connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
10.10.10 AeroDR Detector setting . . . . . . . . . . 337
10.10.11 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
9.3.1 System setting for this device . . . . . . 293
10.11 Setting of the wireless LAN with the
9.4 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 296
AeroDR Portable UF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . 339
9.4.1 Flow chart for setting up the network. . . . 296
10.11.1 Setting of the IP address of the
built-in wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
10.11.2 Network setting of the built-in wireless
9.4.3 RM setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
9.4.4 Exposure room setting . . . . . . . . . . . 298
9.4.5 AeroDR Access Point setting . . . . . . 299
10.12 Removal of temporarily connected
9.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data Ethernet cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 10.13 Analysis of AeroDR Detector . . . . . . . . . 345
9.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector 10.14 Deployment to the installation locations and
communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 connection to the institution network . . . 346
9.4.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting . . . . . . . . . 304 10.14.1 Deployment of respective devices
9.4.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting . . . . 306 to the installation locations. . . . . . . . . 346
9.4.10 AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting. . . . 307 10.14.2 Connection to the institution network. . . 346
9.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting . . . . . . . . . . 309 10.15 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point . . 347
9.4.12 Saving of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 10.15.1 AeroDR Access Point auto setting. . . 347
10.15.2 AeroDR Access Point manual setting. . . 349
Chapter 10 10.15.3 Addition of the AeroDR Access Point
Installation Procedure for This information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
10.15.4 Change of the AeroDR Access Point
Device and AeroDR Portable UF information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 10.15.5 Deletion of the AeroDR Access Point
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
10.16 Network configuration for each area . . . 357
AeroDR Portable UF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
10.16.1 Creating a new area. . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
10.2 The workflow to install this device and 10.16.2 Network configuration for each area. . . 359
AeroDR Portable UF Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 10.16.3 Initial area selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
10.3 Check of bundled items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 10.16.4 Other settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
10.4 Check of startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 10.17 Final operation check and delivery . . . . . 362
10.4.1 Attachment of accessories. . . . . . . . . 317 10.17.1 Exposure confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . 362
10.4.2 Check of startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 10.17.2 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
10.5 Hardware setting of this device . . . . . . . 318 10.17.3 Chassis registration preparation . . . . 362
10.5.1 Attachment of external CD/DVD
drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
6
Contents
Chapter 11 12.1.10
12.1.11
Other settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New RemoteCOM registration. . . . . .
392
392
Installation Procedure for This 12.1.12 Change of RemoteCOM settings. . . . 394
Device and AeroDR Stitching 12.1.13 Confirmation of the RemoteCOM
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 12.1.14 Confirmation of operation. . . . . . . . . 397
11.1 Connection example of this device and 12.2 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter
AeroDR Stitching Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 (MOXA Nport 5110A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
11.2 The workflow to install this device and 12.2.1 Temporary connection of this device
AeroDR Stitching Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 and the Ethernet-serial converter and
11.3 Temporary connection of AeroDR Stitching the X-ray device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 12.2.2 Ethernet-serial converter setting . . . . 398
11.4 Activation of AeroDR Stitching System . . . 367 12.3 Connection of this device and the hub
11.5 AeroDR Stitching System setting . . . . . 368 for portable X-ray device side . . . . . . . . . 403
11.5.1 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching 12.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board . . . 404
Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 12.4.1 Changing of the bracket. . . . . . . . . . . 404
11.5.2 Setting the AeroDR UF Cable in the 12.4.2 Add-in Ethernet board installation. . . 405
AeroDR Stitching Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 12.4.3 Add-in Ethernet board connection
11.6 Saving of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
11.7 Setting of user tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 12.4.4 Network setting of add-in Ethernet
11.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 12.5 Installing additional memory . . . . . . . . . . 410
11.8.1 Checking the AeroDR Stitching 12.6 Installation of the USB wired LAN
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
11.8.2 Adjusting SID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 12.6.1 Driver installation of USB wired LAN
11.8.3 Illuminance selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
11.8.4 Initializing exposure position correction 12.6.2 Network setting of the USB wired LAN
value (when correcting picture top adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
position). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 12.7 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter
11.8.5 Measuring the picture top position (USB type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
correction value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 12.7.1 The workflow to install the wireless
11.8.6 Measuring the picture center position LAN adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
correction value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 12.7.2 Installation of the wireless LAN
11.8.7 Initializing exposure position correction adapter driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
value (when correcting picture lower 12.7.3 Connection of the wireless LAN
position). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
11.8.8 Measuring the picture lower position 12.7.4 Setting of the wireless LAN adapter. . . 418
correction value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 12.8 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter
11.8.9 Setting the correction values. . . . . . . 385 (card type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
11.8.10 Correction values confirmation . . . . . 386 12.8.1 Installation of the wireless LAN
adapter driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Chapter 12 12.8.2 Setting of the wireless LAN adapter. . . 422
Installation of Options. . . . . . . 387 12.9 Attaching of a high precision monitor . . 423
12.9.1 Attaching of a high precision
12.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter
monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
(SYSMEX RA TA-402X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
12.9.2 High precision monitor setting. . . . . . 424
12.1.1 Start and check of the Ethernet-serial
12.9.3 Setting the multi monitor
converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
12.1.2 Ethernet-serial converter network
12.10 Attaching of the sub monitor . . . . . . . . . . 429
settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
12.10.1 Installation of the Sub Monitor Adaptor
12.1.3 Change of the Ethernet-serial converter
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
address and connection of this device
12.10.2 Checking of the bundled items. . . . . 431
and the Ethernet-serial converter. . . 389
12.10.3 Attachment of the sub monitor . . . . . 431
12.1.4 Searching for Ethernet-serial
12.10.4 Setting the Sub Monitor Adaptor . . . . 433
converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
12.10.5 Modification of the Sub Monitor
12.1.5 Change of the mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Adaptor IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
12.1.6 LAN and serial settings . . . . . . . . . . . 390
12.10.6 Additional Settings for Using an
12.1.7 Setting confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Expansion Ethernet Board. . . . . . . . . 436
12.1.8 Changing the mode again. . . . . . . . . 392
12.1.9 Closing the TA remote setup. . . . . . . 392
7
Contents
12.11 Attaching of a monitor for checking 12.17.3 Setting of maintenance personal

images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
12.11.1 Attaching of a monitor for checking 12.17.4 Setting of the PDA Type1. . . . . . . . . . 477
images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 12.17.5 Other settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
12.11.2 Setting of a monitor for checking 12.18 Installation of the PDA Type2 . . . . . . . . . 490
images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 12.18.1 Basic operation of the PDA Type2. . . 490
12.12 Installation of the monitor for checking 12.18.2 Setting of this device. . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
images (via NetDA-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 12.18.3 Setting of maintenance personal
12.12.1 Installation of the NetDA-1 driver. . . . 441 computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
12.12.2 Checking of the bundled items of the 12.18.4 Setting of the PDA Type2. . . . . . . . . . 499
NetDA-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 12.18.5 Other settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
12.12.3 Attaching of the NetDA-1 and 12.19 UPS installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
monitor for checking images . . . . . . . 444
12.12.4 Setting the NetDA-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Chapter 13
12.12.5 Modification of the NetDA-1 IP Installation of Function System
address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
12.12.6 Change of the display setting of the
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
monitor for checking images . . . . . . . 448 13.1 Setting of the S-SRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
12.13 Installation of the FPM-5171G monitor . . . 449 13.1.1 S-SRM installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
12.13.1 Installation of the touch panel driver. . . . 449 13.1.2 Exposure room setting. . . . . . . . . . . . 518
12.13.2 Adjustment of touch sensor. . . . . . . . 451 13.1.3 Prep-Delay time measurement . . . . . 520
12.13.3 Windows setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 13.1.4 Bucky-Delay time measurement . . . . 522
12.13.4 Final adjustment of the touch sensor. . . 455 13.1.5 X-ray exposure sync setting. . . . . . . 523
12.14 Installation of magnetic card reader . . . . 457 13.2 X-ray information linkage setting . . . . . . 525
12.14.1 Installation of magnetic card reader. . . 457 13.2.1 Overview of X-ray information linkage
12.14.2 Magnetic card reader connection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 13.2.2 Workflow for setting X-ray information
12.15 Installation of bar code readers . . . . . . . 459 linkage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
12.15.1 Installation of a single bar code 13.2.3 Confirmation of X-ray information
reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 linkage environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
12.15.2 Installation of a multi-bar code 13.2.4 Installation of Ethernet-serial
reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
12.16 Installation of the Bluetooth bar code 13.2.5 X-ray device setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 13.2.6 X-ray exposure conditions setting. . . 531
12.16.1 Basic operation of the Bluetooth bar 13.2.7 Exposure confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . 534
code reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 13.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this
12.16.2 Charging of the Bluetooth bar code device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 13.3.1 Setting of the IP address of the built-in
12.16.3 Turning on the power of the Bluetooth wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
bar code reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 13.3.2 Network setting of the built-in wireless
12.16.4 Turning off the power of the Bluetooth LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
bar code reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 13.4 Setting of the remote maintenance . . . . 540
12.16.5 Setting of the HID connection . . . . . . 462 13.5 Web electronic medical records settings . . 541
12.16.6 Setting of the Bluetooth connection. . . 463 13.6 Setting of examination sharing . . . . . . . 544
12.16.7 Setting of multiple reading of bar 13.6.1 System setting of the examination
codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 sharing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
12.16.8 Setting of the data format. . . . . . . . . 465 13.6.2 Screen setting of the examination
12.16.9 Setting of the read time-out time. . . . 466 sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
12.16.10 Setting of the NW7 start/stop code . . . . 466
12.16.11 Setting of the minimum number of Chapter 14
digits for bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Other Installation Procedures. . . 547
12.16.12 Selection and setting of the bar
code to be used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
14.1 Aero Sync signal acquisition . . . . . . . . . 548
14.1.1 Execution procedure for Aero Sync
12.16.13 Setting of the date of bar code
signal acquisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
12.16.14 Initialization of bar code reader. . . . . . . 467 14.2 Setting example for AeroDR UF Cable
12.17 Installation of the PDA Type1 . . . . . . . . . 468 connection position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
12.17.1 Basic operation of the PDA Type1. . . 468 14.2.1 When using only one AeroDR UF
12.17.2 Setting of this device. . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
14.2.2 When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables. . . 553
8
Contents
14.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to 14.9.1 Settings for REGIUS common
this device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 environment in CS-3/5 and this device
14.3.1 Installing MSXML 4.0SP3 . . . . . . . . . 556 mixed environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
14.3.2 Preparations before converting. . . . . 556 14.9.2 Installation example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
14.3.3 Converting the Exam. Tag. . . . . . . . . 557 14.10 Method to display Windows taskbar on the
14.3.4 Reflecting the Exam. Tag to this service tool screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 14.11 Access control of external storage
14.3.5 Adjustment of the mammogram devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
exposure condition key . . . . . . . . . . . 561
14.4 How to migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to this Chapter 15
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 613
14.4.1 Creating an overlay exposure deviation
information file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 15.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector . . 614
14.4.2 Importing an Exam. Tag to an excel 15.1.1 AeroDR Detector replacement flow . . . 615
file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 15.1.2 AeroDR Detector replacement in
14.4.3 Integrating an Exam. Tag file and overlay environment with RM hybrid machine
exposure deviation information file. . . . 567 only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
14.4.4 Creating an Exam. Tag for this 15.1.3 AeroDR Detector replacement in
device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 roaming environment for single RM
14.4.5 Reflecting Exam. Tag to this device . . . 570 hybrid machine with RM client machine
turned off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
14.5 How to change the network settings when
15.1.4 AeroDR Detector replacement in roaming
the RIS/HOST is using the same network
environment for RM hybrid machine with
segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . 571
RM client machine running. . . . . . . . . . 624
14.5.1 Examples of network environments in which
15.1.5 Measures in case where deleted AeroDR
setting changes are necessary. . . . . . . 572
Detector correction data is restored. . . 628
14.5.2 Table used for the setting. . . . . . . . . . 575
15.2 Change of roaming environment . . . . . . 631
14.5.3 Checking interface information . . . . . 576
15.2.1 Changing the settings of AeroDR
14.5.4 Acquiring an interface number. . . . . . 578
SYSTEM related devices after change
14.5.5 Confirming the IP address of the AeroDR
of roaming environment. . . . . . . . . . . 631
SYSTEM and RIS/HOST to be used. . . 581
15.2.2 Method for transferring hybrid functions
14.5.6 Setting routing information. . . . . . . . . 583
to another unit of this device . . . . . . . 632
14.5.7 Confirming the setting details. . . . . . 585
15.2.3 Releasing roaming environment . . . . 633
14.5.8 Deleting unnecessary routing
15.3 Method for deleting AeroDR Detector
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
14.6 Multilingual environment settings . . . . . . 588
14.6.1 Basic method of language-specific 15.4 Measures in case where AeroDR Detector is
environment building . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 not properly displayed on this device . . . . . 636
14.6.2 Multilingual output setting . . . . . . . . . 589 15.4.1 Handling chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
14.6.3 Setting of patient registration screen 15.4.2 FpdManege.csv file confirmation
and property area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
14.6.4 Visibility setting of input items of the 15.4.3 RM debug window confirmation
user tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
14.7 Method for adding the AeroDR SYSTEM not 15.5 If the RM setting data is corrupted . . . . 638
containing the AeroDR Detector to the existing 15.5.1 For 1 unit of this device. . . . . . . . . . . 638
15.5.2 If there are multiple units of this device,
AeroDR SYSTEM environment . . . . . . . . . 593
and the RM setting data of the RM client
14.7.1 Configuration example. . . . . . . . . . . . 593
machine is corrupted. . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
14.7.2 Installation procedure (When the device
15.5.3 If there are multiple units of this device,
sub ID cannot be entered). . . . . . . . . 594
and the RM setting data of the RM
hybrid machine is corrupted. . . . . . . . 639
sub ID can be entered) . . . . . . . . . . . 596
15.6 Logs (operation history) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
14.8 Installation method when there are fewer
15.6.1 Confirmation of the log . . . . . . . . . . . 641
AeroDR Detectors than units of this device . . . 598
15.6.2 Log collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
14.8.1 Configuration example. . . . . . . . . . . . 598
15.7 Logs (AeroDR Detector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
15.7.1 Log collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
sub ID cannot be entered). . . . . . . . . 599
15.7.2 Confirmation of the log. . . . . . . . . . . . 646
sub ID can be entered) . . . . . . . . . . . 601 15.8 Collection of images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
14.9 Settings for REGIUS common environment in 15.9 Analysis of false detection of a panel, etc. . . 650
CS-3/5 and this device mixed environment . . . 603
9
Contents
15.9.1 Procedure for ing false detection of a

panel, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Chapter 17
15.10 Linkage problem between this device and Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
REGIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 17.1 Maintenance and inspection items . . . . . 710
15.10.1 When unable to connect with REGIUS. . . 653 17.1.1 Maintenance and inspection interval. . . 710
15.10.2 If the power control and error notification 17.1.2 Confirmation and cleaning. . . . . . . . . 711
of REGIUS is not activated . . . . . . . . 656 17.2 Replacement of the hard disk . . . . . . . . . 712
15.11 If a fault occurs with the sub monitor . . . 657 17.3 Defragmentation of the hard disk . . . . . . 714
15.11.1 If the screen goes black or freezes after 17.4 System information backup and
disconnecting the Ethernet cable. . . . 657 restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
15.11.2 If the screen is displayed vertically. . . . 657 17.4.1 System information backup. . . . . . . . 715
15.11.3 If the screen is not displayed on the sub monitor 17.4.2 System information restoring. . . . . . . 715
at the time of starting this device. . . . . . . . 658 17.5 Upgrading of AeroDR SYSTEM . . . . . . . 718
15.11.4 To revert the Sub Monitor Adaptor 17.5.1 Upgrading of AeroDR Detector . . . . . 718
settings to their defaults. . . . . . . . . . . 659 17.5.2 Upgrading of AeroDR Generator
15.12 Adjusting the print area of the requested Interface Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
image dimensions (Using third party 17.5.3 Upgrading of AeroDR Portable RF
printers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
15.13 Acquiring setting values of each device . . . 662 17.5.4 Upgrading of AeroDR Stitching
15.13.1 Acquiring AeroDR Detector setting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 17.6 Upgrading of REGIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
15.13.2 Acquiring the setting values for the 17.7 Upgrading of Sub Monitor Adaptor
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
(AeroDR Portable RF Unit) . . . . . . . . 663 17.8 Maintenance of AeroDR Detector . . . . . . 731
15.13.3 Acquiring the setting values for the 17.8.1 Offset calibration for AeroDR
AeroDR Stitching Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
15.14 Trouble caused by multiple use of 17.8.2 Gain calibration of AeroDR Detector. . . 731
wireless LAN adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 17.9 Maintenance of REGIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
15.15 How to migrate data when replacing the 17.9.1 Unevenness calibration. . . . . . . . . . . 732
device housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 17.9.2 Sensitivity calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
15.15.1 Operation using replacement source . . . 666 17.10 Adjustment of the position of the touch
15.15.2 Operation using replacement panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 17.11 Monitor brightness adjustment . . . . . . . . 738
15.16 Collecting images for analysis . . . . . . . . 669 17.11.1 Work flow of monitor brightness
15.17 How to reset passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
15.18 AeroDR Stitching Unit Version Upgrade 17.11.2 Brightness adjustment for Chroma5. . . 738
Failure Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 17.11.3 Display of history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
17.11.4 Application of LUT to the monitor. . . . 744
Chapter 16 17.11.5 Setting of environmental information. . . 745
Error Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 17.11.6 Setting to disable display gradation
correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
16.1 Types of error codes and recognition
17.12 Deletion of the device information . . . . . 748
methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
17.13 Reset/change/deletion of the counter . . . 749
16.1.1 Types of error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
17.14 Uninstallation of the touch panel driver . . . 752
16.1.2 Recognition method for error codes. . . 674
16.2 Error codes and countermeasures . . . . . 675 Chapter 18
16.2.1 Communication errors. . . . . . . . . . . . 675
16.2.2 Software errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
16.2.3 AeroDR Detector errors. . . . . . . . . . . 682 18.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
16.2.4 AeroDR Generator Interface Unit 18.1.1 Software specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 756
errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 18.1.2 Hardware specifications. . . . . . . . . . . 757
16.2.5 AeroDR Portable RF Unit errors . . . . 690 18.1.3 Hardware specifications (during the
16.2.6 AeroDR Stitching System errors . . . . 692 portable X-ray device operation). . . . 758
16.2.7 REGIUS series errors . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 18.1.4 Optional products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
10
Contents
Chapter 19
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
19.1 Using bar code reader for REGIUS to
register devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
19.1.1 Procedure to change the bar code
reader settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
19.1.2 Procedure to reset the bar code reader
settings to REGIUS read-only
settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
19.2 How to add a bar code setting . . . . . . . . 765
19.2.1 Work flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
19.2.2 Added bar code reading operation
check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
19.2.3 Additional bar code list. . . . . . . . . . . . 767
19.3 Precautions for network connections . . . 773
19.3.1 Network connections for this device. . . 773
19.3.2 Subnet configuration within the
institution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
19.4 Study deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . 785

Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
11
12
Introduction
13
Introduction
This Installation/Service Manual describes the operation precautions and series of procedures, and has
been prepared for service engineers who install, repair, and carry out maintenance inspections for this
device (DIRECT DIGITIZER CS-7).
Please keep this manual on hand so that it can be easily read, even after initial use.
CAUTION
• Before performing installation tasks, read thoroughly "Safety Precautions &
Warnings" of the Operation Manual and acquaint yourself with the described
precautions for the handling of this device.
• Explain the operations based on the Operation Manual to the users after the
completion of the installation according to this document.
• "..." attached to the end of characters or message is omitted.
• If you changed the setting of this device using the service or user tools, a pop-up
window may be shown to prompt you to restart this device. Follow the instructions
to restart this device. The modified setting will not take effect until this device is
restarted.
• For service tool and user tool screens, refer to "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for
Service Tool/User Tool Screen".
• To manually change the setting of this device, stop this device first before editing
the configuration file.
• CS-3/5 screens are used in some parts, but the functions are the same as this
device.
14
Introduction
Disclaimer
(1) This manual may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of Konica Minolta Medical &
Graphic, Inc.
(2) The contents of this manual may be subject to change without prior notice.
(3) Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any claims made for malfunction or damage caused
by installation, relocation, modification, maintenance, and repair made by anyone except Konica Minolta and
contractors designated by Konica Minolta.
(4) Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any claims made for malfunction or damage to
Konica Minolta products, caused by third-party products not installed by Konica Minolta.
by maintenance or repair using maintenance parts other than those specified by Konica Minolta.
by not observing the precautions and operation methods described in the operation manual.
by the environment, such as power source and installation environment, that is described in the Installation
Requirement or operation manual, that is not suitable for the installation requirements.
(8) Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any claims for malfunction or damage caused by
acts of nature such as fires, earthquakes, floods, or lightning strikes.
(9) Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any claims for malfunction or damage caused by
using this device for any purpose other than that specified for this device.
(10) Diagnostic and treatment action is performed under the responsibility of the physician(s). Konica Minolta Medical
& Graphic, Inc. is not responsible for any diagnostic/treatment conditions or diagnostic/treatment results.
Trademark
Company names and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of U.S. Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
Windows 7 is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows 7 operating system Professional Edition.
Please note that ©, ® and ™ marks are omitted hereafter.
Copyright © 2012 Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Option/license
For certain functions of this device, separate options and licenses are needed.
15
Introduction
Terms description
The meanings of terms used in this manual are as follows:
Terms Description
Collective term indicating AeroDR Detector, AeroDR Interface Unit, AeroDR Generator
AeroDR SYSTEM
Interface Unit, AeroDR Battery Charger, AeroDR Access Point, etc.
AeroDR Detector Collective term indicating AeroDR 1417HQ, AeroDR 1417S and AeroDR 1717HQ.
AeroDR Battery Charger Charges the AeroDR Detector. It also has the registration function for the AeroDR Detector.
AeroDR I/F Cable Used for wired connection with the AeroDR Detector.
AeroDR UF Cable Used when the AeroDR Detector is used only for the wall stand or table position.
AeroDR Portable RF Unit Used when this device is operated through the portable X-ray device.
Used when this device is operated through the portable X-ray device for performing expo-
AeroDR Portable UF Unit
sure in Aero Sync mode.
AeroDR Stitching System Used when performing stitching exposures using the AeroDR Detector.
Calibration Processing for calibrating the characteristics of the AeroDR Detector for each pixel
CR An acronym for computed radiography
DR An acronym for digital radiography
JM An acronym for job manager
RM An acronym for roaming manager
Refer to the REGIUS series.

REGIUS When indicated individually, they are shown as "REGIUS 110", "REGIUS 110HQ",
"REGIUS 210", "REGIUS 190", and "REGIUS 170".
Abbreviation for Radiology Information System

RIS A system to manage reservation and result of examinations and treatment that use radiol-
ogy equipment
Host A server to save image information
An X-ray exposure device constructed of an X-ray generator device, an operation panel,

X-ray device
and so on
Image processing to reduce noise

HS processing
Used to reduce the noise while maintaining the definition of an image.
Image processing for adjusting the sharpness of an image

F processing
Used to maintain the sharpness of each image depending on the exposure body part.
Image processing for compressing the dynamic range

E processing Depending on the body part, used to provide a suitable diagnostic image even with high
contrast images.
Exposure body part This is the exposure body part, such as head, neck, and chest.
Exposure condition master An exposure condition predefined for each body part for the convenience of setting
Exposure condition key Another name of the exposure condition master
The exposure body part and conditions for layout on the body part selection screen. Single
Set key or multiple Exam. Tags are combined in a unit called the set key, which is positioned on the
body part selection screen.
This is a mode in which exposure is performed without being synchronized with the X-ray
Aero Sync
device. (This is sometimes described as "DXARM" or "DXARM link.")
16
Introduction
Structure of pages
(1) 8.4 Check of startup
Before the actual connection, make sure that this de-

vice starts properly. 8.4.2 Check of startup
(2) IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Start up this device and check that the initial screen is
• When multiple units of this device are installed, attach displayed.
the accessories and confirm the startup of each device.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 Turn on this device. (4)
• Start up messages are displayed sequentially.
8.4.1 Attachment of • Internal system initialization is performed while
the system start up screen is displayed.
accessories • Upon completion of initialization, the initial
Attach the accessories to this device. screen is displayed, and this device is ready for
operation.
(3) Reference ••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • The initial screen

• For details, refer to the operation manual of this device.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

OAttachment of the pen cable and the pen
8 1 Attach the pen to this device with the pen (5)

cable.

OAttachment of the battery pack
8.4 Check of startup
1 Flip over this device.
2 Hold the battery pack so the connector is

HINT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• (6)
• The software version is displayed on the system
at the position shown in the figure, and startup screen. Initialization will be completed a few
insert the battery pack in the direction of minutes after turning on the power.
arrow until it clicks. • A progress bar is displayed on the system startup screen,
indicating the status of the system initialization process.
Connector
IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• If there are two battery packs, attach both battery
packs.
• Do not plug in the power cable before the completion of
all of the connections.
• The specifications of this device might be different de-
pending on the date of delivery and the destination.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
242
Number Item Description Icon

(1) Item heading Describes the titles of described content. -
(2) Important items Describes the important items for operation. Be sure to read them. IMPORTANT
(3) Reference Describes reference items. Refer to these as necessary. Reference

(4) Operation procedure The operating procedure is described in sequential numerical steps. -
(5) Screen display Shows a screen on which operations are performed. -
(6) Hint Describes important information. HINT
17
18
Chapter
1
Safety Precautions & Warnings
This chapter describes precautions and warnings to perform the safe installa-
tion, repair, and the maintenance and inspection of this device.
19
1.1 Symbols relating to safety
1 1
1.1.3 Description of graphic
1.1.1 Safety alert symbol
symbols
1.1 Symbols relating to safety
Indicates the off position for the main

power switch of this device.
This is the "safety alert symbol". This symbol alerts
you to matters and/or operation potentially hazardous
to yourself and other people. Read these messages Indicates the on position for the main
and follow the instructions carefully. power switch of this device.
Indicates the power on or standby posi-

tion.
1.1.2 Warning notice (signal
words) Indicates that AC power is being used.
Signal words indicate the degree of potential hazards

in the use of the product. Indicates that hazardous voltage is being
Signal words include the following 3 types, which are used, and caution is required.
used according to risk of damage caused by danger
and the severity of damage.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
It may also be used to indicate a hazardous situation
where only physical damage is likely to occur.
20
1.2 Warning labels/instruction displays
Various warning labels/instruction displays are attached to this device on the locations shown below. Do not remove these labels 1
from this device.
Warning labels are there to make sure that the user recognizes potential hazards when operating this device.
1.2 Warning labels/instruction displays

*If a warning label is too dirty or damaged to read, have a new warning label attached, and redisplay by parts replacement.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• These product labels and specifications may change for improvement without prior notice.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1.2.1 Monitor
O
ORear
1.2.2 This device (during the portable X-ray device operation)
O
OBottom O
OBattery pack
21
1.3 Safety precautions
1 1 all safety precautions thoroughly before using this device.

Read
Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in CAUTION
this section.
• Stop operation immediately when there is any ab-
normal sound, abnormal odor, or smoke coming out

CAUTION from this device. It may cause electric shock, fire,
• Read the "Safety Precautions and Warnings" of the or damage this device if this device is operated with
Operation Manual thoroughly before installation or abnormality.
• Make sure that all the cables are connected correct-
repair service, and understand the precautions on
ly, anything that needs to be fixed is fixed, and there
handling this device.
is no damage.
• Install all the cables so no one will trip.
• Make sure that the ground terminal is grounded.
• Please use dedicated Ethernet cables and hubs
1.3.1 General caution with this device and the peripheral devices.
• Do not allow the user to remove the outer cover of
Be sure to observe following precautions when per- this device.
forming the installation or repair of this device. Also,
perform appropriate and safe operation following the
description on the warning labels affixed to this device. 1.3.2 Caution during
operation
WARNING
• Make sure that the input voltage specification of CAUTION
this device complies with the power supply voltage
supplied from your institution. • Perform any operation that will subject this device
to vibration by first turning the power off and waiting
at least 30 seconds.
• Check the continuity of this system to all devices
CAUTION such as Radiology Information System (RIS) and
HOST before starting the system operation.
• To prevent danger, only a service representative with • Use the grounding straps when handling electronic
official training should remove the cover or touch the parts such as circuit boards. It may damage elec-
internal parts. tronic parts such as circuit boards if you touch them
• Do not perform work or operation not described in when you are electrically charged.
this manual. It may result in burns or electric shock if • Attach one side of the grounding strap to your wrist,
not operated correctly. and the clip on other side to the metallic part of this
• Work with enough working space. device where you can securely ground.
• Turn off the power supply when working. Major ac-
cidents may occur when you disconnect the circuit
boards inside this device or disconnect the connec-
tors and cables with the power supply turned on.
Perform these work operations with the power sup-
ply circuit breaker turned off.
• When you have to work with the power supply on,
such as measuring the voltage, etc., make sure not
to touch the power supply line.
• It may cause electromagnetic interference, so peo-
ple with cardiac pacemakers should not come near Grounding strap
this device.
• It may interfere with this device, so do not use de- • Do not trip on or step on the power cable.
vices that generate electromagnetic waves, such as • When disconnecting cables, disconnect by holding
mobile phones, etc., near this device. them correctly.
• When installed next to a device that does not have
EMC countermeasures, normal operation may be
affected.
22
CAUTION 1.3.5 Precaution when

resuming usage
• Do not disconnect the power plug by pulling on the 1
power cable, because that can break the wire in-
side the power cable, causing overheating or fire.
• Make sure not to lose any fastening screws when CAUTION

removing the covers, etc. Also, make sure to attach • Make sure this device and power cable are not
and tighten all fastening screws when attaching the damaged.
covers, etc. • Make sure that the ground terminal is grounded.
• Do not place any drinks such as juice, etc., or for-
• Make sure that all cables are connected correctly.
eign objects such as clips, pins, etc., on top of this
• Make sure that this device will operate correctly
device. When this device is operated with water or
foreign objects such as metallic pieces, etc., inside and stably.
this device, it may cause fire due to shorting of the
internal circuit.
• To prevent the overheating inside this device, do
not block the air inlet/exhaust outlet.
• It may cause damage so do not put objects on this
1.3.6 Precaution regarding
device or get on top of this device.
disposal
• Be careful not to get injured by part of your body or
clothes getting tangled in the moving parts.
• Parts including glass are used on the protective CAUTION
cover. Be careful not to apply any shocks when
• Please follow the rules and regulations of your rel-
performing maintenance with the protective cover
evant authorities in the disposal of this product, ac-
removed or when discarding the protective cover.
• When cleaning the spring connector of the AeroDR cessories, options, consumables, media and their
Battery Charger or AeroDR UF Cable, be careful packing materials.
not to damage it.
1.3.3 LCD monitor precautions
CAUTION
• If the monitor breaks and the liquid crystal material
leaks out, do not allow contact with your mouth.
If the liquid material gets on your hands, arms, or
clothing, immediately wash the affected area with
soap.
• It is extremely dangerous to continue operation of
the device if the display has broken.
1.3.4 Precaution when tempo-

rarily stopping use
CAUTION
• Organize and bundle into the storage location after
cleaning the accessories and cables.
• Clean this device and storage area so there will be
no problem when using this device next time.
23
24
Chapter
2
Product Overview
This chapter describes the overview of this device.
25
2.1 System configuration
2.1.1 System configuration example

2
A system configuration example is shown below.
X-Ray Device Console

2.1 System configuration
X-Ray Exposure
Electronic Medical information
Records
FTP
DICOM Print
Printer
CS-7
DICOM MWM
DICOM Storage
HIS/RIS
DICOM MPPS
(1) Order Information
(2) Image Information PACS
JPEG (HOST)
(3) Patient Information DICOM PDI
DICOM
Image Data
DICOM G/W
Media
AeroDR
Detector
REGIUS
* This device is intended to be connected to AeroDR Detector or to REGIUS as an input device, and to printer or
PACS as an output device.
* For details on how to use AeroDR Detector and REGIUS, refer to their respective operation manuals.
* 4 AeroDR Detectors can be connected to this device.
* 15 REGIUS series can be connected to this device.
26
2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM
This section describes the typical operation applications and connection examples of AeroDR SYSTEM. Check them
according to the institution before installation.
2
2.2.1 Example of connection in the exposure room

Operation applications
The connection methods and functions for respective operations are described below.
Operation item Type Functions
Stand-alone AeroDR
Can be used in the same manner as the CR cassette.
Detector
Operation of AeroDR By connecting the AeroDR UF Cable, the AeroDR Detector is used exclusively in wall
Wall stand only
Detector stand position. In addition, it also performs the setting of portrait and landscape detection.
By connecting the AeroDR UF Cable, the AeroDR Detector is used exclusively in table
Table only
position. In addition, it also performs the setting of portrait and landscape detection.
AeroDR Detector con- Wired connection Connecting the AeroDR I/F Cable, used for wired connection.
nection mode Wireless connection Used for wireless connection with the AeroDR Access Point.
Synchronizes AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and X-ray device to perform
SRM
exposure from the X-ray device operation panel.
Simply synchronizes AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and X-ray device to
X-ray device connection perform exposure from AeroDR Generator Interface Unit.
mode S-SRM *Not used in Japan.
*Depending on the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit, an ESC board may be
installed instead of an XGIF board.
Aero Sync Imparts exposure from the X-ray diagnostic device in the Aero Sync mode.
27
Connection example by connection type

Typical connection examples of AeroDR SYSTEM are as follows.
O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/SRM
2 Exposure room
AeroDR Detector
X-ray
Tube
X-ray device
AeroDR I/F Cable
XIF/
XGIF
Power Hub ECB
source
AeroDR AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit Interface Unit
Hub
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable
operation panel
Ethernet cable (PoE)
Ethernet cable Ethernet-serial
converter
Serial/hardware connection CS-7
Grounding cable
O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/S-SRM
Exposure room
AeroDR Detector
X-ray Tube
X-ray device
AeroDR I/F Cable
Power
source Hub
AeroDR
Interface Unit
Hub XGIF
Power
ECB
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable operation panel
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
converter
Serial/hardware connection
Grounding cable
CS-7
28
O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/SRM
Exposure room
AeroDR Detector
X-ray Tube
X-ray device
2
AeroDR I/F Cable

AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR
Access Point
XIF/
XGIF
Power Hub
source ECB

Hub
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable
operation panel
converter
Grounding cable CS-7
O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/Aero Sync
Exposure room
AeroDR Detector
X-ray Tube
X-ray device
AeroDR I/F Cable

Access Point
Power Hub
source
AeroDR
Interface Unit
Hub
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable
operation panel
Ethernet cable
29
O
OWall stand only (without portrait and landscape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/SRM
Exposure room AeroDR Detector
X-ray Tube
X-ray device
2
AeroDR UF Cable
AeroDR I/F Cable
XIF/
CIF
XGIF
Power
source Hub ECB

Hub
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable X-ray device
Ethernet cable (PoE) Ethernet-serial
Ethernet cable converter
Grounding cable
O
OCombined use of wall stand (table) and stand-alone AeroDR Detector (without portrait and land-
scape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/SRM
Sub monitor
X-ray Tube
X-ray device
AeroDR UF
Cable
Sub Monitor AeroDR AeroDR

Adaptor Battery Charger Access Point
AeroDR I/F
Cable
XIF/ XIF/
XGIF XGIF
Power Hub
source ECB

Hub
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
Serial/hardware connection converter
CS-7
Grounding cable
30
O
OWall stand only + combined use of table and stand-alone AeroDR Detector (without portrait and
landscape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired or Wireless Connection/SRM
Exposure room
AeroDR Detector
Sub monitor
AeroDR Detector X-ray Tube 2
X-ray device
AeroDR UF
Cable

Sub Monitor AeroDR UF Cable
AeroDR Adaptor AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR
I/F Cable
AeroDR I/F Access Point
Cable
XIF/ XIF/ XIF/

XGIF XGIF XGIF
Power Hub
source ECB

Hub
Power
converter
Grounding cable
O
landscape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired or Wireless Connection/S-SRM
Exposure room
AeroDR Detector
Sub monitor
AeroDR Detector X-ray Tube
X-ray device
AeroDR UF
Cable

AeroDR I/F Adaptor AeroDR
AeroDR Battery Charger
Cable Access Point
AeroDR I/F
Cable
Power Hub
source
AeroDR
Interface Unit
Hub
XGIF
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
ECB X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable
operation panel
Serial/hardware connection converter
CS-7
Grounding cable
31
O
landscape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired or Wireless Connection/Aero Sync
Exposure room
AeroDR Detector
Sub monitor
2 AeroDR Detector X-ray Tube
X-ray device
AeroDR UF
Cable

AeroDR Adaptor AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR
I/F Cable
AeroDR I/F Access Point
Cable
Power Hub
source
AeroDR
Interface Unit
Hub
Power
converter
Grounding cable
O
OWall stand only + combined use of table and stand-alone AeroDR Detector (with portrait and
landscape detection)/AeroDR Detector Wired or Wireless Connection/SRM
Exposure room
AeroDR Detector
AeroDR
UF Cable
Sub monitor AeroDR Detector X-ray Tube
X-ray device
AeroDR AeroDR
Sub Monitor
UF Cable Access Point
Adaptor
AeroDR
I/F Cable AeroDR
I/F Cable
XIF/ XIF/ XIF/

XGIF XGIF XGIF
Power Hub Power Hub
source source ECB
AeroDR AeroDR AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit Interface Unit Interface Unit
Hub
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable
operation panel
converter
Grounding cable
32
2.2.2 Example of connection with the portable X-ray device
2
The connection methods and functions for respective operations are described below.
Operation item Type Functions
Operation of AeroDR Stand-alone AeroDR

Can be used in the same manner as the CR cassette.
Detector Detector
AeroDR Detector con- Used for wireless connection with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit/AeroDR Por-
Wireless connection
nection mode table UF Unit.
AeroDR Portable RF Synchronizes the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and the portable X-ray device to
Unit perform exposure from AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
Portable Unit
AeroDR Portable UF
Uses the portable X-ray device to perform exposure in Aero Sync mode.
Unit
Used for wired connection between the AeroDR Portable RF Unit/AeroDR Por-
Wired connection
Connection mode with table UF Unit and CS-7.
this device Used for wireless connection between the AeroDR Portable RF Unit/AeroDR Por-
Wireless connection
table UF Unit and CS-7.
Simply synchronizes AeroDR Portable RF Unit and portable X-ray diagnostic
S-SRM device to perform exposure using the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
Portable X-ray diagnos- * Not used in Japan.
tic device connection Synchronizes the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and portable X-ray device for im-
SRM
mode parting exposure from the portable X-ray device.
Performs exposure using the portable X-ray diagnostic device in Aero Sync
Aero Sync
mode.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In Japan, the AeroDR Portable Unit Mount Kit is not used other than with certain attachment kits.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
33
Connection example by connection type

Typical connection examples are as follows.
O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Portable RF Unit/
CS-7 Wired connection/S-SRM
2
AeroDR Detector
or
AeroDR Detector registration side (exposure room side hub)
AeroDR Hub AeroDR Detector

I/F Cable
Power
source
Hub AeroDR Battery Charger
AeroDR Interface Unit
Portable X-ray
diagnostic device side
Hub
AeroDR Portable
RF Kit
AeroDR Detector
Access
Power point
CS-7 Power
XGIF
ECB
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable Portable X-ray diagnostic device
Serial/hardware connection AeroDR Portable RF Unit
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• An exposure switch may be available on the AeroDR Portable RF Kit.
• Depending on the AeroDR Portable RF Unit, an ESC board may be installed instead of an XGIF board.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
34
O
CS-7 Wireless connection/S-SRM
AeroDR Detector
or 2

I/F Cable
Power
source
AeroDR Portable
RF Kit
AeroDR Detector
Power Access
point
CS-7 Power
XGIF
ECB
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
35
O
CS-7 Wired connection/SRM
AeroDR Detector
2 or


I/F Cable
Power
source
Portable X-ray
diagnostic device side
Hub
AeroDR Detector
Access
Power point
CS-7 Power
XGIF
ECB
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
36
O
CS-7 Wireless connection/SRM
AeroDR Detector
or 2

I/F Cable
Power
source
AeroDR Detector
Power Access
point
CS-7 Power
XGIF
ECB
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
37
O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Portable UF Unit/
CS-7 Wired connection/Aero Sync
AeroDR Detector
2 or


I/F Cable
Power
source Hub
Portable X-ray diagnostic device side

Hub
AeroDR Detector
Access
Power
point
CS-7
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable
Serial/hardware connection AeroDR Portable UF Unit
38
O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Portable UF Unit/
CS-7 Wireless connection/Aero Sync
AeroDR Detector
or 2
AeroDR Detector registration side

(Hub for exposure room side)

AeroDR I/F Hub AeroDR Detector
Cable
Power Hub
source AeroDR Battery Charger
Access
Power
Point
AeroDR Detector
CS-7
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable AeroDR Portable UF Unit
39
Examples of wired/wireless connection
O
OWhen operating this device with a portable X-ray device and AeroDR Portable RF Unit
Portable X-ray device

Hub
2
Connect with
a wired LAN or the

built-in wireless
LAN of this device
Power Access
source point
Power
source
XGIF
ECB

CS-7
Connect with
built-in Bluetooth
of this device
Wireless LAN
adapter Access point
( )
USB type of the institution
or
card type
Hub
Bluetooth Connect with a wired LAN or the

bar code reader wireless LAN of the wireless LAN
adapter
Power
Ethernet cable
• This device can be connected with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and the access point of the institution via wireless
connection using the built-in wireless LAN of this device.
• When connecting multiple devices using wireless LAN, connect the first device with the built-in wireless LAN of this
device, and connect the second device with the optional wireless LAN adapter.
• This device can also be connected with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and the access point of the institution via
wired LAN.
• This device and the Bluetooth bar code reader can be connected via the built-in Bluetooth of this device.
• The wireless LAN adapter (card type) cannot be used for connection to the PDA.
40
O
OWhen operating this device with a portable X-ray device and AeroDR Portable UF Unit
Portable X-ray device

Hub
Connect with the wireless LAN
of the wireless LAN adapter
Connect with 2
a wired LAN or the
built-in wireless
LAN of this device

PDA
Power Access
source point
Wireless LAN
adapter CS-7
(USB type)
Connect with
built-in Bluetooth
of this device Wireless LAN
adapter Access point
( )
USB type of the institution
or
card type
Hub
Bluetooth Connect with a wired LAN or the

bar code reader wireless LAN of the wireless LAN
adapter
Power
Ethernet cable
• This device can be connected with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit and the access point of the institution via wireless
connection using the built-in wireless LAN of this device.
• When connecting multiple devices using wireless LAN, connect the first device with the built-in wireless LAN of this
device, and connect the second device with the optional wireless LAN adapter.
• This device can also be connected with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit and the access point of the institution via
wired LAN.
• This device cannot be connected with a PDA using the built-in wireless LAN of this device. Prepare the optional
wireless LAN adapter.
• This device and the Bluetooth bar code reader can be connected via the built-in Bluetooth of this device.
• The wireless LAN adapter (card type) cannot be used for connection to the PDA.
41
2.2.3 Connection example of the AeroDR Stitching System
2 The connection methods and functions by operation type are shown below.
Operation item Type Function
Stand-alone AeroDR Detector Used in the same manner as a CR cassette.
Connect the AeroDR UF cable to use the AeroDR Detector for a standing
Wall stand only
Operation of AeroDR patient. Also, set portrait and landscape detection.
Detector Connect the AeroDR UF cable to use the AeroDR Detector for a recumbent
Table only
patient. Also, set portrait and landscape detection.
Stitching Load the AeroDR Detector into the AeroDR Stitching Unit and connect the AeroDR UF cable.
AeroDR Detector Connec- Wired connection Used for a wired connection by connecting the AeroDR I/F cable.
tion mode Wireless connection Used for a wireless connection with the AeroDR Access Point.
Interlock the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and the X-ray device, and con-
X-ray device connection SRM
trol exposure from the operation panel of the X-ray device.
Connection example by type of connection

The connection example that the AeroDR I/F Cable is used for the device and cassette shots is as follows.
O
OWall stand only + combined use of table and stand-alone AeroDR Detector + combined use of Stitch-
ing and AeroDR Detector (IF cable sharing)/AeroDR Detector Wired or Wireless connection/SRM
Exposure room
AeroDR
AeroDR
Detector AeroDR
UF Cable
Stitching Unit
Sub monitor X-ray Tube
X-ray device
AeroDR
UF Cable
AeroDR Stitching X-ray

Power Supply Auto Barrier Unit
Sub monitor Unit
adapter AeroDR
AeroDR
I/F Cable Detector
(common)
AeroDR
Access Point
AeroDR
UF Cable AeroDR Battery Charger
AeroDR
I/F Cable
XIF/ XIF/ XIF/
XGIF XGIF XGIF
Power
source Hub ECB
AeroDR Interface Unit AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit
Hub
Power
Ethernet-serial
Grounding cable
42
O
OWall stand only + combined use of table and stand-alone AeroDR Detector + combined use of Stitch-
ing and AeroDR Detector (proprietary IF cable)/AeroDR Detector Wired or Wireless connection/SRM
Exposure room
AeroDR AeroDR
Detector AeroDR
UF Cable Stitching Unit
Sub monitor X-ray Tube 2
X-ray device
AeroDR
UF Cable

AeroDR Stitching X-ray
Power Supply Auto Barrier Unit
Unit
Sub monitor
AeroDR
adapter AeroDR
Detector
I/F Cable AeroDR
Access Point
AeroDR
UF Cable AeroDR Battery Charger
AeroDR
I/F Cable
XIF/ XIF/ XIF/
XGIF XGIF XGIF
Power Power
source Hub source Hub ECB
AeroDR Interface Unit AeroDR Interface Unit AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit
Hub
Power
Ethernet-serial
Grounding cable
43
2.3 Connection example of REGIUS
Typical connection examples of REGIUS are as follows.

The JM (Job Manager) is required to build the system with this device and REGIUS.
2
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The JM is a database (PostgreSQL) for mediating commands between this device and REGIUS.
• This device registers the "correspondence between the Exam. Tag and the CR cassette" to the JM. When a CR cassette is
inserted into the REGIUS, the REGIUS reads the "correspondence between the Exam. Tag and the CR cassette" from the
JM, and sends the read images to this registered device.
• The JM is built-in in this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2.3.1 1-to-1 connection
This device reads images from 1 REGIUS.

REGIUS
CS-7 (JM built in)
㩷
Hub
Peripheral devices
PACS Printer
(Host)
• Both this device and REGIUS can be connected using the default host name and IP address.
• The JM to be utilized is the one built in this device.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The IP address must be changed in the following cases:
–– Connecting to institution networks
–– Connecting the multiple 1-to-1 connection systems to the same network
• When connecting an existing REGIUS 170 and reading images, the version of REGIUS 170 must be upgraded.
–– SCB_CF software: Ver. 1.0R07 or higher
–– MCB firmware: Ver. 1.00R21 or higher
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
44
2.3.2 n-to-m connection
The n-to-m connection provides the system with multiple REGIUS devices shared by this device and another unit of
this device. All units of this device can read images from any REGIUS device.
2
O
OWhen the total number of this device and REGIUS devices is 8 or less
REGIUS #1
CS-7 #1

Hub
CS-7 #2
REGIUS #6
Peripheral Devices
PACS Printer
(Host)
• This device and another unit of this device and REGIUS devices all require changes of IP addresses.
• The JM to be utilized is the one built in this device or another unit of this device. Both main JM and backup JM can
be configured.
• The association between CR cassette and Exam. Tag is performed using the bar code.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When starting the system, turn on this device with the main JM first. When terminating the system, turn off this device with
the main JM last.
• To mount the JM in this device, select a low-load this device with fewer exposures.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
45
O
OWhen the total number of this device and REGIUS is 9 or more
In this configuration, 1 unit of this device is used as a dedicated JM.
Up to 15 REGIUS devices can be connected (the JM is accessed by 16 devices at a maximum).
REGIUS #1
2 CS-7 #1
REGIUS #2
CS-7 #2
Hub
REGIUS #12
Dedicated to the JM
Peripheral devices REGIUS #13
PACS Printer
(Host)
• This device and another unit of this device and REGIUS devices all require changes of IP addresses.
• Assign this device dedicated to the JM to the main JM. When this device is dedicated to the JM, it cannot be used
as a console.
• This device for the backup JM can be used as a console.
• The association between CR cassette and Exam. Tag is performed using the bar code.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This device dedicated to the JM should be always on.
• Though the backup JM can be used as a console, assign this device which has less load and exposures not to cause the
obstacle in the backup operation.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
46
2.4 Component name
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The illustrations in this chapter may differ from the actual appearance. Also, the actual appearance may be changed without
notice. 2
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2.4 Component name

2.4.1 This device
The part names of this device are shown below.
O
OFront
CD/DVD drive
Power switch
USB terminals
O
ORear
PS/2 keyboard
Power connector terminal
VGA monitor terminal

RS-232C terminal
Connector 2
USB terminals
Expansion slot Ethernet terminal

covers
47
2.4 Component name
O
OInternal
Drive cage
2
2.4 Component name
Power supply device
Latch
2.4.2 Monitor
The part names of the monitor are shown below.
O
OFront
Touch panel
Speakers
VOLUME SIGNAL ENTER
Control buttons Power switch Power lamp
48
2.4 Component name
O
ORear/side
USB terminal
2
Analog input
terminal
2.4 Component name

Stand Attachment holes Power connector
for wall mount arm
49
2.4 Component name
2.4.3 This device (during the portable X-ray device operation)
The part names of this device (during the portable X-ray device operation) are shown below.
2 O
OFront/right side
2.4 Component name
Display
Keyboard
Wireless antenna
(built-in)
Wheel pad
Speaker
External display
terminal
Power switch/ USB terminal

Power lamp
Pen holder
O
OFront/left side
Wireless antenna
(built-in)
Battery pack
Power connector
Ethernet terminal
USB terminals
50
2.5 Login with a service account
2.5.1 Login screen 2.5.2 Login

2
If the auto login function is set to off, the login screen Log in as described below.
is displayed at the time this device starts up.
In this case, log in to this device with a service ac-
2.5 Login with a service account

count. 1 Input user ID and password, then press
[Login].
Login screen
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• User ID: maintenance
• When the auto login function is used, you are auto- • Password: kmmg5678
matically logged in when this device starts up and the
initial screen can be displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The initial screen is displayed.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If logging in with a service account, make sure that
you log off after completing the operation.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
51
2.6 Screen transitions
The method of transitioning between each screen is as shown below. For details for each screen, refer to the given
explanation page.
2 ●Initial screen ●System monitor screen
Press [System]. Meanings of arrows

: Screen transition operations
2.6 Screen transitions
: This action returns to the

previous screen.
Press [Close].
The initial screen displayed is either the This screen carries out operations such as checking
patient registration screen or the list screen. the status of this device and of connected equipment.
Press [Utility].
●[Enter Password] screen
This screen is for entering password at

the time of starting-up the service tools.
Enter “kmmg5678”
and press [OK].
User tool Service tools Intermediate screen

●User tool screen ●Device icon screen ●System monitor screen
Select the Press [Close].

[User Tool] tab.
Some settings and operations can be Select the The device icons of this device and of
carried out on the user tool screen. [Service Tool] tab. peripheral devices are displayed.
Press [Close].
Press the tool
selection Press a
Press [Close]. Press [Close].
button. device icon.
●Setting tool screen ●Sub-menu screen
Press [OK] on
Carrying out various settings Summary information on each device is displayed. the confirmation
and operations Each setting tool is displayed from this screen. screen.
Press a
setting tool
button.
Press [OK] or
[Cancel].
●Intermediate screen
●Setting tool screen
Start-up, shutdown, reboot, configuring,

displaying Windows desktop, and other
actions for this device.
Carrying out various settings and operations
52
2.7 Operating the service tool
2.7.1 Startup of the service

3 Press [Utility].
tool
2
The procedure to start the service tool is as follows.

Turn on the power switch of this device.
• If the auto login function is set to on, it is neces-
sary to enter the password to start the service
tool.
• If you log in this device with the service account
with the auto login function set to off, it is not
necessary to enter the password to start the ser-
vice tool.
• The auto login function can be set on [Login
Setting] under the CS-7 setting screen.
2 Press [System] on the initial screen.
• The [Enter Password] screen is displayed.
• The system monitor screen is displayed.
53
4 Input the password and press [OK].

2.7.2 Exiting from the service
tool
The procedure to exit from the service tool is as fol-
lows.
2
1 Press [Close] on the bottom right.
O
OWhen the device icon screen is displayed
• Password: kmmg5678
O
OWhen the user tool screen is displayed
• The device icon screen of the service tool is dis-

played.
54
2 Press [End]. 3 Press [OK].

• A confirmation screen is displayed.
• The intermediate screen is displayed.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the functions of the intermediate screen, refer to
"2.7.6 Functions of the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
55
4 Press [ShutDown].
2.7.3 Startup of the setting
tool
Perform the settings of the devices with the respective
setting tool screens. The procedure to start the setting
2 tool is as follows.
1 Press the device icon on the device icon

screen.
• The shutdown screen is displayed, and shut-

down processing of this device is performed. Af-
ter a short time, the power will be automatically
turned off.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • The sub-menu screen for the device is dis-

• When turning the power of this device off, always fol- played.
low the above procedure. Do not turn it off using the
power switch. Doing so may result in data loss or
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
damage to the system software.
• For the structures of the device icon screen and the
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
sub-menu screen, refer to "2.8.1 Structure of the de-
vice icon screen" and "2.8.2 Structure of the sub-menu
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
screen".
• To start this device again, press [CS-7]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
56
2 Press [Setting].
2.7.4 Switching to the user
tool
In some settings, the user tool is used. Switch to the
user tool as follows.
2
1 Select the [User Tool] tab on the tool
switching tab.

• The setting tool screen for the device is dis-
played.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• A given setting tool is launched by different device
icons, depending on the setting tool. With this type of
setting tool, multiple device setting items are aggre- • The user tool screen is displayed.
gated on a single screen.
• If you click on the background image when using cer-
tain setting tools, the focus moves to the background.
When this happens, press the [TAB] key on the key-
board while pressing and holding the [ALT] key, and
rearrange the window order.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
57
2.7.5 How to display the inter-

3 Press [End].
mediate screen
The procedure to display the intermediate screen is as
follows.
2
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The intermediate screen can be displayed using the
following steps, only when logging in the service tool

with the service account.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Log in the service tool with a service ac-

count.
2 Press [Close] on the device icon screen.
58
4 Press [OK].
2.7.6 Functions of the inter-
mediate screen
The functions of the intermediate screen are as fol-
lows.
2
Name Functions
[CS-7] Starts this device.
Sets the Wake on LAN, the remote

[Setting]
maintenance, and the language.
[License Import] Displays the license import screen.
[ShutDown] Shuts down this device.
[Reboot] Restarts this device.
[Windows Desktop] Displays the Windows desktop.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the Wake on LAN setting, refer to "4.19.10 Power
on/off linkage settings".
• For remote maintenance settings, refer to "13.4 Set-
ting of the remote maintenance".
• For the language setting, refer to the HINT of "Lan-
guage setting" of "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for
Service Tool/User Tool Screen".
• For importing the license, refer to "4.6 Registration of
license".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The intermediate screen is displayed.
59
2.8 Service tool screen
2.8.1 Structure of the device icon screen

2
This is the screen to be displayed when the service tool is started. The device icons of this device and peripheral
devices are displayed.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Number Name Functions

(1) Tool switching tabs Switches between the service tool and the user tool.
Displays the sub-menu screen.
(2) Device icons
There is an icon for each device configured in the system.
(3) [Close] Returns to the system monitor screen.
60
O
OMaximum number of device icons to be displayed
The maximum number of device icons to be displayed on this device is as follows.
Device icon Maximum number to be displayed License

CS-7 1 Required
RM 1 Not required
2
AeroDR Access Point 1 Required
AeroDR Detector 4 Required
AeroDR I/F Cable 4 Not required

AeroDR Battery Charger 4 Not required
AeroDR UF Cable 4 Not required
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit 1 Not required
AeroDR Stitching Unit 1 Required
JM 1+1* Not required
REGIUS 15 Required
HOST 4+1* Required
Printer 2+1* Required
RIS-IN 1+1* Required
RIS-OUT 1+1* Required
X-RAY 2 Required
EMR(Info.) 1 Required
EMR(Image) 1 Required
RIS Built-IN 1 Required
Media 1 Required
* 1 unit is used for backup.
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon and AeroDR Access Point icon are displayed instead of the AeroDR Portable RF
Unit icon during the AeroDR Portable RF Unit operation.
• The AeroDR Access Point icon is displayed instead of the AeroDR Portable UF Unit icon during the AeroDR Portable UF
Unit operation.
• A license is required for the AeroDR Portable UF/RF Unit operation.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
61
2.8.2 Structure of the sub-menu screen
This screen is displayed when the device icon is pressed. Main information of the device is displayed.
Start the setting tool on this screen.
2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(1) Device icon name Name of the device icon to which the sub-menu screen belongs.
(2) Connection check box Sets either connection or non-connection with this device.
Condition/setting dis- Main information, such as connection status, setting description, version, etc., is displayed.
(3)
play field The items displayed will vary depending on the device icon.
Buttons to display the setting tool screen. They are categorized as follows:
[Settings]: Button related to settings
(4) Setting tool buttons [Analyze]: Button related to analysis
[Adjustment]: Button related to adjustment
The buttons to be displayed will vary depending on the device icon.

(5) [Close] Closes the sub-menu screen.
62
2.9 User tool screen
This screen is displayed with the tool switching tab. Some settings are configured from this screen.
(1)
2
(2)
2.9 User tool screen

(3)
(4)
(5)

(1) Tool switching tabs Switches between the user tool and the service tool.
Tool classification selection Selects the function you wish to execute using the user tool. Toggles between tool classi-
(2)
buttons fication displays.
Tool classification display
(3) Toggles between button displays for each tool classification.
area
(4) Tool selection buttons Starts the tools.
(5) [Close] Returns to the system monitor screen.
63
64
Chapter
3
Preparation for Installation
This chapter describes the items to be prepared for
installation of this device and options.
65
3.1 Preparation of tools
Before the installation work, prepare the following hand

tools and installation tools as needed.
O
OTools
Name Usage
Phillips screw driv-
3 ers (various types)
Prepare as needed.
Used to install an add-on Ethernet

Wristband
board and additional memory.
3.1 Preparation of tools
O
OInstallation tools
Name Usage
Personal computer
Used for maintenance tasks.
for maintenance
Used for installing the drivers of the
CS-7 DRIVER CD touch panel monitor and optional de-
vices.
Used for connecting a personal com-
Hub and Ethernet puter for maintenance.
cables Used to install the AeroDR Portable
UF Unit.
Used for registering the AeroDR
Bar code reader
SYSTEM.
1 mm thick copper
Used for analyzing AeroDR Detector.
plate
Used for calibrating AeroDR Detector
Dosage meter
and REGIUS.
Brightness meter Used for the monitor brightness ad-
connection cable justment.
External CD/DVD Used for the portable X-ray device
drive operation.
66
3.2 Check of the installation environment
Check the environment of items such as the power, X-

ray device, and exposure room.
3.2.2 Check of the installation
location
Check that the installation location of this device meets
3.2.1 Check of the power sup- the following conditions:
ply condition • It is a location that does not get wet from water and
3
floor wax.
Check the institution's power specifications, the po-
• It is a location that is not negatively affected by at-
sitioning of the power socket, the power cable wiring
mospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, ventila-
3.2 Check of the installation environment

route, and other items.
tion, sunlight, dust, salt-air or air containing sulfur.
• A site that is stable, allows sufficient ventilation, does
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • not have strong dark-light contrast, does not emit
• You must check that the earth has been connected. electromagnetic waves, does not vibrate, and is not
• If the power supply voltage is not supplied stably, then affected by shocks.
normal exposure will not be possible due to malfunc- • It is a location where no chemical agent is used or
tion of the internal devices when the voltage drops stored.
more than 10% from the specified voltage. • It is a location where no gas is generated.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • It is a location where there is no nearby noise.
• It is a location where people passing will not trip over
O
OPower specifications of this device any cables by accident.
Item Description • It is a location where the intake and exhaust outlets
Power
are not blocked.
AC 90-264 V (50/60 Hz) • It is a location with a space of more than 150 mm at
requirements
Power both the sides and rear of this device.
46 W
consumption
O
OPower specifications of this device (during
the portable X-ray device operation)
Item Description
Power
AC 100-240 V (50/60 Hz)
requirements
Power
80 W
consumption
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The specifications may differ depending on the deliv-
ery time and the destination.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
67
3.3 Check of the network environment
Check the institution network environment, and make IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

sure that the materials and other items are prepared.
• A
connection with an STP cable of category 5e or better is
recommended, depending on the AeroDR SYSTEM device.
Please prepare a hub that supports STP specifications.
3.3.1 IP address For hub specifications, refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installa-
tion/Service Manual".
3 Check with the institution that it is possible to obtain IP ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
address for all devices to be installed.
The required installation for an IP address is as follows.
• This device HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
* 2 IP addresses are required if using built-in wireless • With AeroDR Portable RF Unit/AeroDR Portable UF
LAN when operating with a portable X-ray device. Unit, AeroDR Detector registration side hub is given
• AeroDR Detector (wired connection/ wireless connection)
as the exposure room hub.
* 2 IP addresses are required for each panel.
• AeroDR Generator Interface Unit ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• AeroDR Access Point
• AeroDR Portable RF Unit O
OHub for portable X-ray device side
* 2 IP addresses are required for each device. Decide the installation location of the hub by confirm-
• AeroDR Portable UF Unit ing the connection point to the portable X-ray device
• AeroDR Stitching Unit and the installation location of this device.
• REGIUS The hub must meet the following specifications.
• Sub Monitor Adaptor
• Add-in Ethernet board Item Specification
• USB wired LAN adapter
• Wireless LAN adapter Management functions Not required
* Because a fixed IP address is used for connec- Ethernet standard 100BASE-T or better
tion with PDA, an IP address does not have to be 4 channels or more (1: this device,
provided. 2: AeroDR Portable RF Unit,
• Installation of peripherals such as a printer and host Number of ports
3: AeroDR Portable RF Unit,
• Maintenance usage 4: AeroDR Detector registration use)
• Remote access usage
Form of connector RJ-45 8 pin
Also, check that remote connection is possible. Auto-Negotiation function availabil-

Functions
ity
Supported Ethernet
STP cable of category 5e or better
cable
3.3.2 Hub Quantity 1
Power source Drive with the USB power supply
O
OHub for exposure room side
(Hub for AeroDR Detector registration side)
Decide the installation location of the hub by confirm-
ing the connection point to the institution network and
the installation location of this device.
The hub must meet the following specifications.
Item Specification
Management functions Not required
Ethernet standard 100BASE-T or better
3 channels or more (1: this device,
Number of ports 2: AeroDR Interface Unit or REGIUS,
3: maintenance use)
Form of connector RJ-45 8 pin
Auto-Negotiation function availabil-
Functions
ity
Supported Ethernet cable Category 5e or better
Quantity 1
68
3.3.3 Ethernet cable
Decide the length of the Ethernet cable connecting

each device based on the wiring route, and check with
the institution. Also, check that the Ethernet cable wir-
ing route does not go through a passageway, and that
it can be safely laid.
The Ethernet cable must meet the following specifica- 3
tions.
Item Specification

Cable length 30 m or less
Category Category 5e or better
Ethernet standard 100BASE-TX or better
Form of connector RJ-45 8-pin
Cable specifications Straight
Quantity Number of the installed devices
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• A connection with an STP cable of category 5e or
better is recommended, depending on the AeroDR
SYSTEM device. Please prepare an Ethernet cable
that supports STP specifications.
For Ethernet cable specifications, refer to "AeroDR
SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
69
70
Chapter
4
and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)
This chapter describes the installation workflow, installation tasks,
and post-installation checks of this device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection).
71
4.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR SYSTEM
(SRM connection)
This section describes the installation procedure based on the connection example (Stand-alone AeroDR Detector/
AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/SRM + AeroDR UF Cable) as follows.
O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/SRM + AeroDR UF Cable
撮影室
X-rayy
X線管球
Tube
Ｘ
X-ray
ID
線装device
4
置
AeroDR I/F Cable
4.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)
Access Point
ID
XIF/
XIF
XGIF
Power
電源
source ハブ
Hub ECB
ECB

ハブ
Hub
Power
AeroDR UF Cable X線操作卓
operation panel
Ethernet cable(PoE)
LAN-シリア
Serial/hardware connection 変換ボック
converter
72
4.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR SYSTEM
(SRM connection)
The installation process for this device and the AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection) is as follows.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there is only 1 exposure room, the task of flow number 17 is unnecessary.
• When there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the tasks from flow number 1 to 16 to set each exposure room, then per-
form the task of flow number 17.
• When the RIS/HOST and AeroDR SYSTEM use the same network segment, refer to "14.5 How to change the network set-
tings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4.3 Check of bundled items The workflow to install AeroDR SYSTEM 4
1
1 5.3 Bundled items confirmation

2 4.4 Check of startup
4.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)
3 4.5 Setting of touch panel 2 5.4 Installation of this device
4 4.6 Registration of license

3 5.5 Startup check
5 4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM
4.8 System setting of this device 4 5.6 Connection and setting of the CS-7
6
7 4.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices 5 5.7 Operation check using the TES
8 4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM

5.8 Confirmation of the connection with the
6 X-ray device (SRM connection check)
9 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device
10 4.12 Restart of this device 5.9 Charging of the AeroDR Detector and
7 confirmation of its wireless status
4.13 Change of network of this device/addition of
11 AeroDR Detector after completing the settings
12 4.14 Analysis of AeroDR Detector 8 5.10 Exposure test and AeroDR Detector analysis
4.15 Deployment to the installation location and 5.11 Placement in the installation locations
13 9
connection to the institution network
14 4.16 Peripheral devices setting
15 4.17 Activation
16 4.18 Confirmation of the version of this device
17 4.19 Roaming environment settings
18 4.20 Optional installation and data migration
19 4.21 Backup of the setting data of this device
20 4.22 Final operation check and delivery 10 5.12 Final operation check and delivery
73
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the installation procedure of AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection), refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4
74
4.3 Check of bundled items
This device and monitor are divided into 2 packages.

After unpacking, confirm all components are included.
O
OPackage of this device
Name of product Quantity Remarks
Main body of this 1
device
PS/2 keyboard 1 Cable length: 1.8 m
USB mouse 1 Cable length: 1.8 m
4
Power cable 1
AC adapter 1 For 3p-2p conversion

Tower stand 1 Stand for a vertical position
Attached documents 1 set
O
OPackage of monitor
Main body of monitor 1 FlexScan T1751
Power cable 1
AC adapter 1 For 3P-2P conversion
Signal cable 1 DVI-D (cable length: 2 m)
1 D-sub (cable length: 1.8 m)
USB cable 1 Series A-Series B (cable
length: 1.8 m)
Stereo mini jack cable 1 Cable length: 2.1 m
Stylus 1 TP2
CD-ROM 1 LCD utility disk, etc.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The components might be different depending on the
delivery time and the destination.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
75
Before the actual connection, make sure that this de- 3 Connect the provided power cables to the
vice starts up properly. power connectors of this device and the
monitor respectively.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Monitor This device (rear)
• When there are multiple units of this device, make a
temporary connection and perform a startup check for
each device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4
4.4.1 Temporary connection

Connect this device, monitor, keyboard, and mouse.
1 Connect this device and the monitor us-

ing the provided signal cable, USB cable,
and stereo mini jack cable. Power cable Power cable
Monitor This device (rear)

4 Plug in the power cables of this device
Sound input and the monitor respectively.
terminal
USB
terminal
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Analog input
terminal • Do not plug in the power cable before the completion of
• The specifications of this device and the monitor might
be different depending on the date of delivery and the
destination.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Connect the keyboard cable to the PS/2

keyboard connector and the mouse cable
to the USB connector of this device re-
spectively.
This device (rear)
Keyboard
Mouse
76
4.4.2 Check of startup
Start up this device and check that the initial screen is

displayed.
1 Turn on the monitor first before turning on

this device.
• Internal system initialization is performed while
the system startup screen is displayed.
• Upon completion of initialization, the initial 4
screen is displayed, and this device is ready for
operation.

The initial screen
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
startup screen. Initialization will be completed a few
minutes after turning on the power.
• A progress bar is displayed on the system startup screen,
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
77
4.5 Setting of touch panel
Make the setting of touch panel to be connected to this 4 Insert the CS-7 DRIVER CD into the
device. CD/DVD drive.
4.5.1 Installation of the driver 5 Close the auto-play screen and perform
for the touch panel [D: \EIZO LCD Utility\Launcher.exe] stored
in the CS-7 DRIVER CD through Explorer.
When using the monitor connected to this device as a
touch panel, install the driver for the touch panel. 6 Select [Touch Panel], and press [Touch
4 Panel Driver (Windows 7/Vista)].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The following description is an example. The operation
might be different depending on the device used. For

details, refer to the operation manual of the device used.
• Install the drivers using the distributed "CS-7 DRIVER
CD". Do not use the install CD supplied with a touch
panel monitor.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Make sure that the monitor and this de-

vice are powered on.
7 Press [Install].
2 Display the intermediate screen.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to dis-
play the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
8 Confirm that this device and the monitor
3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- are connected with USB cable, and press
diate screen. [OK].
• Installation of the driver will start.
78
9 Press [Exit].
4.5.2 Adjusting the position
of the touch panel
Adjust the touch panel coordinates, if it is out of align-
ment.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When you use a monitor not described in "4.5.1 Installa-
tion of the driver for the touch panel", you must calibrate
the touch panel. Select [Custom] in [Touch Panel cali-
bration tool], and set the execution path via [Execution 4
path of touch panel calibration tool ]. For details, refer to
10 When the installation is completed, eject "Monitor Settings" in "CS-7 icon" of "CS-7 Installation/
the CS-7 DRIVER CD from the CD/DVD Service Manual for Service Tool/User Tool Screen".

drive. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
11 If a message prompting to restart is dis- 1 Start the service tool.

played, press [Restart Now].
• This device will restart. 2 Select the [User Tool] tab.
• Restart manually if the screen is not displayed.
12 Display the optional screen and operate

the touch panel through the monitor.
• Adjust the touch panel coordinates in the follow-
ing steps, when it is out of alignment.
• If touch operation can be performed normally,
driver installation and setting are complete.
• The user tool screen is displayed.
79
3 Press [Adjustment] and then press [Touch 5 Press [Yes].

Panel].
• Confirm the touch panel operation, again.
4
• The touch panel adjustment screen is displayed.
4 Following the instructions on the screen,

tap the cross displayed on the screen
with the touch-pen bundled with the touch
panel monitor.
• On the first time tap 16 places, and thereafter

tap 4.
• When the tap operations are completed, a con-
firmation screen is displayed.
80
4.6 Registration of license
Register the license key to this device. 5 Press [Import].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• This device manages all settings and connected
devices under license. Settings cannot be performed
unless the license is imported.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Check that the monitor and this device are 4

on.

2 Insert the media containing the license
key data into the CD/DVD drive.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Press [License Import].
• The file selection screen of Windows is dis-

played.
• The license import screen is displayed.
81
6 Select the media containing the license

key data and press [Open].
4
• The license key will be imported.
7 Press [Regist].
• The license is registered and the license import

screen is closed.
8 Remove the media from the CD/DVD drive.
9 Turn off this device.

• Turn the monitor and this device off before con-
necting this device to AeroDR SYSTEM or RE-
GIUS.
82
4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM
4.7.1 Connection with 4.7.2 Startup of respective

AeroDR SYSTEM devices
Connect this device with the AeroDR SYSTEM. Turn on this device and the AeroDR SYSTEM.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Turn on the monitor, and then this device.

• At this stage, do not connect to the institution network.
• If there are multiple AeroDR Detectors, connect them 2 Turn on the AeroDR SYSTEM.
1 by 1. 4
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Battery remaining of the AeroDR Detector may be
4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM

1 Connect this device with the Ethernet 0%, so always turn on the power switch of the AeroDR
cable. Detector after connecting the AeroDR I/F Cable.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When an optional add-in Ethernet board is installed in
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
this device, connect a hub or a LAN cable to the stan-
• For turning AeroDR SYSTEM power on, refer to
dard port of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Connect the Ethernet cable connected to

the AeroDR Interface Unit to the hub.

this device to the hub.
83
4.8 System setting of this device
Set the system of this device on the CS-7 setting

screen.
1 Start the service tool.
2 Press the CS-7 icon.
• The CS-7 setting screen is displayed.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
the setting screen remains displayed.
• Press [OK] to save the settings and close the screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Set the following items in [Institution In-

formation Setting].
Setting item Settings

[Institution Input the institution name.
Name] Input within 64 characters.
• The sub-menu screen is displayed.
[Institution Input the institution address.
Address] Input within 1,024 characters.
3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. [Telephone
Input the phone number.
Number]
[Department Input the department name.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For [Institution Name], [Institution Address], [Telephone
Number] and [Department Name], the values need to
be re-input because restoring [System] by restoring the
settings does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the license import is finished, the content of
license file will appear in [Institution Name], [Institution
Address], and [Telephone Number].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
84
5 Set the following items in [Device Informa- 6 Set the following items in [Monitor Settings].
tion Setting].
Setting item Settings 4

[Touch panel Select the touch format for the touch
calibration panel monitor as [For multi touch
tool] monitor] or [Custom].

Manufacturer name is displayed.
[Maker Name] Default setting: KONICA MINOLTA IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
This content cannot be changed.
• When you select [Custom], set the execution path with
Model name is displayed.
[Model Name] Default setting: CS-7 [Execution path of touch panel calibration tool].
[Serial Num- Serial number is displayed.
ber] This content cannot be changed.
[Station AE
Input the station AE title.
Title]
[Console ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Input the console name.
name]
Input ID from 1 to 255 to specify this 7 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.
device on the institution network.
[Unique ID] Change is not necessary when only 1
device is installed.
Default setting: 1
Input the exposure room name within
[Exam Room
10 characters.
Name]
Default setting: CS-7 #1
The current version of the application
of this device is displayed.
Default setting: the version name of • The settings are stored, and the screen is closed.
the application installed when manu-
[Version] factured.
When the application is updated or the
version is upgraded, it is automatically
8 Close the sub-menu screen.
updated.
This content cannot be changed. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the other settings of the CS-7 setting screen, refer
to "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
User Tool Screen".
• Do not change the [Unique ID] from "1" here. Change
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
this setting only when multiple exposure rooms are
setup and it is necessary to setup the roaming envi-
ronment. For details, refer to "4.19 Roaming environ-
ment settings".
• For [Station AE Title], the values need to be re-input
because restoring [System] by restoring the settings
does not change those values to the ones of the
backed up settings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
85
4.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices
Turn on the connection to the AeroDR SYSTEM re- 2 Select the connection check box.
lated devices to perform the settings.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Turn on the connection only for the devices to be in-
stalled.
• The connection may be turned on already depending
on the devices. Turn off the connection for the devices
4 that will not be installed if it is turned on.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Press the device icon.

3 Press [Close].
• The AeroDR Access Point icon is used as an

example here to explain the procedure.
• Connection is turned on and display of the device

icon will change.
86
4 Press the icon of the device that will be IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

set using the same procedure, then press • To install multiple AeroDR related devices, turn on the
the connection checkbox of the sub-menu connection of the device icons for the number of the
screen. devices to be installed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• For the AeroDR Detector, set up the connection to this
device on the AeroDR unit setting screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

AeroDR I/F Cable icon
AeroDR Battery Charger icon
AeroDR UF Cable icon
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon
87
4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM
4.10.1 Flow chart for setting up the network
Follow the following flow chart when setting up the network for this device and the AeroDR SYSTEM.
This example describes the setting procedure to configure all AeroDR SYSTEM related devices. There is no need to
set up devices that will not be installed.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 • Setting the network will be made per each exposure room. If there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the same settings
for each exposure room.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
●Device icon screen ●Sub-menu screen
Press the RM icon.

4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting screen
Press [Setting].
●AeroDR unit setting screen
4.10.3 RM setting
4.10.4 Exposure room setting
4.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting
4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration
4.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector communication
4.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting
4.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting
4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting
4.10.11 AeroDR Generator Interface Unit setting
4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting
4.10.13 Saving of settings
88
4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR

2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.
unit setting screen

Display the AeroDR unit setting screen to setup the
AeroDR SYSTEM.
1 Press the RM icon.

• The AeroDR unit setting screen is displayed.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Press [OK] to save the settings and close the screen.
• The name set up in [Exposure Room Name] of [Expo- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
sure Room Setting] will be used as the display name
for the RM icon.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
89
4.10.3 RM setting 4.10.4 Exposure room setting
Set up the RM (Roaming Manager). Set up the sync mode and shutdown coordination with
the exposure room.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The RM is a system to perform management and 1 Set the following items in [Exposure
roaming of the AeroDR Detector. Room Setting].
• The RM manages the correspondence (registration)
between this device and AeroDR Detector and en-
ables the roaming (the change of the exposure room
4
to use the AeroDR Detector). It also manages the cor-
rection data of the respective AeroDR Detectors and
delivers it to this device at the roaming destination.

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
The exposure room name is dis-
played.
1 Set the following items in [RM setting]. [Exposure
Room Name]
The name set in [Exposure Room
Name] in the CS-7 setting screen is
displayed.
Select the sync mode of this device
and the X-ray device of the exposure
[Sync Mode] room.
Select [SRM].
Default setting: SRM
Setting item Settings Select [ON] or [OFF] of shutdown
Select [Client] or [Hybrid] for the RM coordination.
[Mode] operation mode. When [ON] is selected, the termina-
[Shutdown
Default setting: Hybrid tion of this device causes the AeroDR
Coordination]
Detector assigned to the exposure
Change is not required if the default IP
room to shut down.
address of this device is to be used.
Default setting: [OFF]
If the IP address of this device is to be
[IP Address
changed in "4.11 Setting of the IP ad-
of RM hybrid
dress of this device", enter that value.
machine] IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Default setting: 192.168.20.90
Loop-back address (127.0.0.1) cannot • Do not change [Exposure Room Name].
be used.
• Set up [Shutdown Coordination] in accordance with
[IP Address the operation status of the facility. It is necessary to
of RM client Setting is not performed here.
turn on the power of the AeroDR Detector every time it
machine]
is used since it will not link with startup.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not change [Mode] from [Hybrid] here. Change this
setting only when multiple exposure rooms are setup
and it is necessary to setup the roaming environment.
For details, refer to "4.19 Roaming environment set-
tings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
90
4.10.5 AeroDR Access Point

setting
This is a required setting when the AeroDR Detector
is used wireless. Perform the setup of the AeroDR
Access Point first, and then the wireless connection
related setup on this device.
• The setting screen is displayed.
• Pressing an item in the menu tree on the left
1 Press [Moxa] in [Access Point Setting].
side of the screen will display the corresponding
setting item on the right part of the screen.
• When setting each item, press [Submit] on each 4
setting screen to apply the settings.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To enable the settings, step 19 and 20 need to be per-
formed.
• It will be time out and return to Login screen if there is
no input for 5 minutes in the setting screen, and login
will be required again. The contents of settings with
[Submit] pressed is stored even if it has timed out.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3 Press [Network Settings] under [Basic

Settings] and set up the network for the
following items.
• The setting tool will open in the Web browser
and the login screen will be displayed.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When a popup message regarding Acrobat is dis-
played, choose [Not enable]. Setting item Settings
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [IP configura- Select [Static].
tion] Default setting: Static
2 Input the user name and password on the Set according to the institution envi-
login screen, then press [Login]. [IP address] ronment.
• The default user name is "admin", and the pass- Default setting: 192.168.20.241
word is "root". Set according to the institution envi-
[Subnet mask] ronment.
Set according to the institution envi-
[Gateway] ronment.
4 Press [Submit].
91
5 Press [Time Settings] under [Basic Set- 11 Set the frequency band, channel, and
tings] and set the time synchronization for SSID for the following items.
the following items.

Select [A].
Default setting: A
Setting item Settings [RF type]
4 Use only IEEE802.11a in the AeroDR
[Time zone] Select the country where used. Access Point.
[Time server 1] Input the IP address of this device. Set the channel following the results
[Available
of the preliminary survey.
channel list
When the channel is DFS, an asterisk
* indicates
(*) will appear for the channel.
DFS channel]
6 Press [Submit]. Default setting: 36-5.18G
Input the unique SSID within 31 alpha-
numeric characters according to the
7 Press [Operation Mode] under [Wireless [SSID]
institution environment.
Settings] and set the wireless operation Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
mode for the following items. [SSID broad- Select [Enable].
cast] Default setting: Enable
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When installing the AeroDR Access Points in mul-
Setting item Settings tiple exposure rooms, enter a unique [SSID] for each
[Wireless en- Select [Enable]. exposure room regardless of settings of the roaming
able] Default setting: Disable environment.
[Operation Select [AP]. (Example)
mode] Default setting: AP Exposure room 1: KMMG_AeroDR_1
Exposure room 2: KMMG_AeroDR_2
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
8 Press [Submit].
12 Press [Submit].
9 Press [Basic Wireless Settings] of [WLAN]
of [Wireless Settings]. 13 Press [WLAN Security Settings] of [WLAN]
of [Wireless Settings].
10 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen.
92
15 Set the security for the following items. 19 Press the following message that is dis-
played on the upper right portion of the
Web browser window.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Security Select [WPA2].
mode] Default setting: WPA2 • If you changed the settings, save the settings and
Select [Personal]. restart. The modified settings will not be applied if the
[WPA type] system is not restarted.
Default setting: Personal
[Encryption Select [AES]. • When changes have been made to the settings, a 4
method] Default setting: AES message will blink on the upper right portion of the
Input a passphrase with 37 or more screen. To save the setting and activate it, press this

alphanumeric characters. message.
[Passphrase]
Ø Gt4F9
Default setting: 165gf1JSsw9 ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ODu96XztI89u93ftEfrzXwe19
20 Press [Save and Restart].

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• We recommend that the passphrase be used without
changing the default setting. When changing the pass-
phrase, combine alphanumeric characters that are dif-
ficult to guess.
• When installing AeroDR Access Points in multiple
exposure rooms, enter the same passphrase for each • The settings will be saved and the AeroDR Ac-
AeroDR Access Point. cess Point will restart.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Restart is completed when a "beeping" sound
rings after approximately 15 seconds.
16 Press [Submit].
21 Press [Close] on the browser to close the
17 Press [Advanced Wireless Settings] under browser window.
[WLAN] of [Wireless Settings] and set the
radio output for the following items. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the IP address with a different segment from the
IP address of this device is set, the browser window
may not be displayed correctly. However, the set-
tings will be performed normally. Press [Close] on the
browser.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

[Transmis- Select [Full].
sion power] Default setting: Full
Select [Enable].
[WMM]
Default setting: Enable
18 Press [Submit].
93
22 Go back to the AeroDR unit setting screen 4.10.6 AeroDR Detector cor-
and set the following items in [Access
Point Setting]. rection data registration
Register the AeroDR Detector's correction data in this
device.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Information required for network settings, such as IP
address of the AeroDR Detector, is stored in the cor-
Setting item Settings rection data.
Input the AeroDR Access Point serial •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 number or read the bar code.
[Serial
When inputting manually, input it in
Number]
the form of product code (4 digits) 1 Insert the media provided with AeroDR
-serial number (5 digits). Detector to the CD/DVD drive.
Input the AeroDR Access Point name

[Display
Name]
within 10 characters.
Default setting: Wireless A
2 Press [Add] in [Correction Data Setting].
Input the same [IP Address] as the

[IP Address] one in step 3.
Enter the same [SSID] as the one in
[SSID] step 11 within 32 ASCII characters.
Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
Enter the same [Passphrase] as the
one in step 15 within 64 ASCII charac-
[Pass Phrase] ters.
Ø Gt4F9
Default setting: 165gf1JSsw9
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read-
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• The [Browse For Folder] screen is displayed.
94
3 Select the folder indicating the serial num-

4.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR
ber of the AeroDR Detector, and press [OK].
Detector communication
Confirm the communication between this device and
AeroDR Detector.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Do not change the IP address for the AeroDR Detec-
tor here. Change the IP address of AeroDR Detector
in "4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4
1 Turn on the AeroDR Detector with the

correction data registered, and connect

to the AeroDR I/F Cable, AeroDR Battery
Charger, or AeroDR UF Cable.
• (Example) A20H-00001
2 Press [Download] in the [AeroDR Detector
Setting].
• Information of [Wired IP Address], [Wireless IP

Address], [Default Gateway] and [Subnet Mask]
are acquired.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The serial number of AeroDR Detector will be • If the device IDs (serial numbers) of the correction
registered and [Serial Number] of [AeroDR De- data CD used in "4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correc-
tector Setting] will be updated. tion data registration" and the AeroDR Detector do
not match, the "The serial number of the AeroDR De-
tector does not match the serial number of correction
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
data. Please confirm the combination of the AeroDR
• Since the correction data is read from the CD, it may Detector and a CD related to this correction data."
take a certain amount of time to add the correction message is displayed. In this case, download again
data. using the correct correction data CD.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Remove the media provided with the Aero- 3 Set [Display Name].
DR Detector from the CD/DVD drive.
• Enter the AeroDR Detector name within 10 char-

acters.
• Change is not required if the default display
name of the AeroDR Detector is to be used.
95
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable
• [Display Name] is also used as the AeroDR Detector
setting
name in the application bar. Since only the first 3 char-
acters will be displayed in the application bar, assign a Set up the AeroDR I/F Cable.
name that is easy to recognize.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Press [Upload]. • AeroDR Detector to be used is necessary to set up

the AeroDR I/F Cable.
• When there are multiple AeroDR I/F Cables, connect
and set up each cable.
4 ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable is con-

nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit.
2 Confirm that the AeroDR Detector to be

used is powered on.
3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-

DR I/F Cable.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data
registered in "4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
• The setting information is uploaded to the Aero-
registration".
DR Detector.
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device
before this operation, sub-ID of the device previously
connected to may be displayed. When you press
[Download] at the next step, the device sub-ID of the
AeroDR I/F Cable to be set up is obtained.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Press [Download] in [I/F Cable Setting].
• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is dis-

played.
96
5 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used, O

OWhen there are multiple AeroDR I/F Cables
and press [OK].
1 Turn on the connection for the device icon
for the second AeroDR I/F Cable.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to "4.9 Activation of AeroDR
SYSTEM related devices".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Set up the AeroDR I/F Cable with the same

4
procedure as the first AeroDR I/F Cable.

• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR I/F Cable is
automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed
in the [Device Sub ID] of [I/F Cable Setting].
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or
read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
sub-ID by this method.
• For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6 Set the following items in [I/F Cable Set-

ting].

Read the bar code and get the Serial
number of the AeroDR I/F Cable.
[Serial
Number]
the form of product code (4 digits)
-serial number (5 digits).
Input the I/F Cable name within 10
[Display
characters.
Name]
Default setting: IF Cable
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The serial number of the AeroDR I/F Cable is de-
scribed on the tag attached to it.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
97
4.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger

4 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used,
and press [OK].
setting
Set up when using the AeroDR Battery Charger to reg-
ister and charge the AeroDR Detector.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• AeroDR Detector to be used is necessary to set up the
AeroDR Battery Charger for registering. The AeroDR De-
tector is not necessary to set up the AeroDR Battery Char-
4 ger just for charging, so steps 1 - 4 are not necessary.
• When there are multiple AeroDR Battery Chargers for
registering, connect and set up each device.
• Even if the AeroDR Battery Charger is used only for
charging, setting is still necessary for device registration.

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

used is powered on. • The device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Charger
is automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed
in [Device Sub ID] of [AeroDR Battery Charger].
2 Insert the AeroDR Detector into the Aero-
DR Battery Charger.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
registered referencing "4.10.6 AeroDR Detector cor-
rection data registration".
format.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
AeroDR Battery Charger to be set up is obtained.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Set the following items in [AeroDR Battery
Charger].
3 Press [Download] in [AeroDR Battery
Charger].

number of AeroDR Battery Charger.
[Serial
Number] the form of product code (4 digits)
Input the Battery Charger name within
[Display
10 characters.
Name] Default setting: Cradle
Select [For Charging Only] or [For
Registration/Charging] for the Battery
[Type]
Charger type.
Default setting: For Registration/Charging

played.
98
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set up of the dip switch on the AeroDR Battery Char- 4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting
ger is required when [For Charging Only] is selected in
the [Type]. Refer to "Installation of the AeroDR Battery
Set the AeroDR UF Cable.
Charger for charging only" in the "AeroDR SYSTEM
Installation/Service Manual".
• The registration of the AeroDR Detector to a exposure IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
room will not be performed when [For Charging Only]
is selected for [Type] since notification to the RM is not • AeroDR Detector to be used is necessary to set up
performed when the AeroDR Detector is mounted on the AeroDR UF Cable.
the AeroDR Battery Charger. • When there are multiple AeroDR UF Cables, connect
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • and set up each cable.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Serial number of the AeroDR Battery Charger is de- 1 Confirm that the AeroDR UF Cable is con-
scribed on the sticker on side of the main body. nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit via

• When reading the serial number with a bar code read- AeroDR I/F Cable.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
used is powered on.
O
OWhen there are multiple AeroDR Battery
Chargers
1 Turn on the connection for the device icon DR UF Cable.
for the second AeroDR Battery Charger.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data
registration".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Set up the AeroDR Battery Charger with
the same procedure as the first AeroDR
AeroDR UF Cable to be set up is obtained.
Battery Charger. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Press [Download] in [UF Cable Setting].

played.
99
5 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used, 6 Set the following items in [UF Cable Setting].
and press [OK].

[Serial number of AeroDR UF Cable.
Number] When inputting manually, input it in the form of
4 product code (4 digits)-serial number (5 digits).
Input the AeroDR UF Cable name within
[Display
10 characters.
Name]
Default setting: Modality

Select [Wall Stand] or [Bucky Table] for
[Type] the type of AeroDR UF Cables.
Default setting: Wall Stand
When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables, select the
• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR UF Cable is angle information to be set for each of the
automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed [Orienta- AeroDR UF Cable from [0], [90], [180], or [270].
in [Device Sub ID] of [UF Cable Setting]. tion] Default setting: 0
Setting is not required when using only 1
AeroDR UF Cable.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Select the orientation of the image on the
• The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or AeroDR Detector from [Standard] or [Up-
read with a barcode reader. When installing this de- side down] when exposing the AeroDR
Detector in portrait orientation.
Default setting: Standard
not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device [Image Ori-
Select [Standard] when the line of white
sub-ID by this method. entation]
projection of the AeroDR Detector is fac-
• For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup- ing toward up.
plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode Select [Upside down] when the line of
white projection of the AeroDR Detector is
format.
facing toward down.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
Select the insertion direction of the AeroDR
Detector from [Right] or [Left] when exposing
the AeroDR Detector in landscape orientation.
[Insertion Default setting: Left
Opening] Select [Right] when the line of white projection
of the AeroDR Detector is facing toward right.
Select [Left] when the line of white projection of
the AeroDR Detector is facing toward left.
Select the operation status of the AeroDR
UF Cable from [Standard] or [UFC2].
[UFC Type] Default setting: Standard
If using 1 AeroDR UF Cable, select [Standard].
If using 2 AeroDR UF Cables, select [UFC2].
IMPORTANT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When exposing the AeroDR Detector in landscape ori-
entation, it may affect the result of automatic orienta-
tion determination process if [Insertion Opening] is not
setup correctly.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
100
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3 Press [Download] in [UF Cable Setting],

and acquire the device sub ID for the sec-
• The serial number of the AeroDR UF Cable is de-
ond AeroDR UF Cable.
scribed on the tag attached to the cable.
• When using only 1 AeroDR UF Cable, setup [Image
Orientation] and [Insertion Opening] in accordance
with the status of exposure stage to be used, using
following patterns as a reference.
Direction of [Image [Insertion
AeroDR Detector Orientation] Opening]
[Standard] Match with the

setting for us- 4
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ing the AeroDR
Detector in • For the operation, refer to steps 4 - 5 of "4.10.10 Aero-
[Upside landscape ori- DR UF Cable setting".

down] entation ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Match with 4 Set the following items in [UF Cable Set-

the setting [Right] ting] respectively.
for using
the AeroDR
Detector in
portrait ori- [Left]
entation

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Select the type of AeroDR UF Cable

from [Wall Stand] or [Bucky Table].
• For the other setting examples when using only 1 [Type] Default setting: Wall Stand
AeroDR UF Cable, refer to "14.2.1 When using only Select the same type for both first and
one AeroDR UF Cable". second cables.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Select the angle information to be set
for the first and second AeroDR UF
O
OWhen using 2 AeroDR UF Cables Cables from [0], [90], [180], or [270].
[Orientation]
When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables for 1 exposure Default setting: 0
Set to match the status of the expo-
stage, the setting procedure is as follows. sure stage to be used.
Select the orientation of the image on
1 Turn on the connection of the device icon AeroDR Detector from [Standard] or
of the second AeroDR UF Cable. [Upside down] when an exposure is
[Image Orien- performed in the portrait orientation of
tation] AeroDR Detector.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Default setting: Standard
Select the same orientation for both
• For the operation, refer to "4.9 Activation of AeroDR first and second cables.
Select the operation type of AeroDR
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • UF Cable from [Standard] or [UFC2].
2 Connect the second AeroDR UF Cable to Select [UFC2] for both first and sec-
the AeroDR Detector. ond cables.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The setting of [Insertion Opening] is not necessary
when using 2 AeroDR UF Cables.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
101
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.10.11 AeroDR Generator
• Set [Serial Number] and [Display Name] referring to
Interface Unit setting
the operation of the first AeroDR UF Cable.
• When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables, set [Orientation] Set up the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit.
and [Image Orientation] according to the status of ex-
posure stage to be used with reference to the follow-
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ing patterns.
• For the setting of X-ray synchronization, refer to "Set-
AeroDR Detector [Image
[Orientation] ting of X-ray synchronization".
orientation Orientation]
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
First AeroDR UF
4 First Cable
[0]
1 Set the following items in [XG BOX Set-
Second AeroDR
[Standard] ting].
UF Cable
Second [90]
First AeroDR UF
First Cable
[0]
Second Second AeroDR [Standard]
UF Cable
[270]
First First AeroDR UF

Cable Setting item Settings
[0] [Upside Input the AeroDR Generator Interface
Second AeroDR down] [Display
Units name within 10 characters.
UF Cable Name]
Default setting: XG BOX
Second [90]
Input the IP address of the AeroDR
[IP Address] Generator Interface Units.
First First AeroDR UF Default setting: 192.168.20.221
Cable Input the address of the default gate-
[0] [Upside [Default Gate- way.
Second Second AeroDR down] way] Input is not required, when no gate-
UF Cable way exists on the network.
[270]
Input the subnet mask of the selected
[Subnet
device.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Mask]
Default setting: XGIF.255.255.0
Select the number of XIF or XGIF
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [WS] boards used from [Use WS1 Only],
• For other setting patterns when using 2 AeroDR UF [Use WS1/2], or [Use WS1/2/3].
Cables, refer to "14.2.2 When using 2 AeroDR UF Set the delay time from when the
Cables". first stage of the exposure switch is
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [Timer] pressed to start of the exposure.
Select "0" msec for SRM link.
* S-SRM is not used in Japan.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Depending on the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit,
an ESC board may be installed instead of an XGIF
board.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
102
2 Press [Upload]. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• Serial number of the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
is described on the sticker on side of the main body.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Set the following items of [WS Mapping].

WS1, 2, and 3 represent the first,
[Wall Stand] second, and third layer of the XIF or
XGIF boards in the AeroDR Generator
Interface Unit, respectively.
Set up the relationship of which mo-
• Settings will be uploaded to the AeroDR Gen- dality (wall stand/table/DR cassette) is
[Bucky Table]
erator Interface Unit. assigned to each WS.
When using two AeroDR Generator
Interface Units, the second AeroDR
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [DR Cassette] Generator Interface Unit (with only 1
• AeroDR Generator Interface Unit setting changes may XIF or XGIF board) will become [WS4].
take up to a maximum of 30 seconds to take effect.
• When the IP address with a different segment than
this device's IP is set, the "Processing" screen may 5 Set the following items of [Restricted
not disappear although settings are being uploaded to AeroDR Panel sending ConsoleReady].
the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit. After waiting for
30 seconds or more, press [Cancel] then perform ping
from the Windows command prompt and confirm that
there is no response from the IP address before the
change.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Read the serial number of the AeroDR Gen-

erator Interface Unit using the barcode. Setting items Settings
Select whether enable or not for the
exposure control against the AeroDR
Detector connected to the WS that is
setup as DR cassette operation in [WS
Mapping].
Exposure control will not be performed if
[Limitation
[No Control] is selected.
Type]
Only the AeroDR Detector selected in
the list can be exposed on that WS when
[Select WS enable to send] is selected.
The AeroDR Detector selected in the list
• The AeroDR Generator Interface Unit's serial can not be exposed on that WS when
number is displayed in [Serial Number] under [Select WS disable to send] is selected.
[XG BOX Setting]. The names of the registered AeroDR
• When manually entering the serial number, en- [AeroDR Detector Detectors are displayed.
ter the product code (4 digits) - product serial 1~n] Select the AeroDR Detector to be con-
trolled.
number (5 digits).
103
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 2 Press [X-Ray Sync].

• [WS Mapping] and [Restricted AeroDR Panel sending
ConsoleReady] are settings to prevent incorrect ex-
posure by the user by linking the procedure No. (tech-
nique) selected on the operation panel of the X-ray de-
vice to which modality (wall stand/table/cassette) has
the right to expose. However, the signal may not be
able to transmit separately to the XIF or XGIF board
depending on the specification of the X-ray device. In
such a case, the exposure signal will be transmitted
to all XIF or XGIF boards connected regardless of the
4 procedure No. (technique) selected on the operation
panel of the X-ray device, so prevention of incorrect [Tube Position Correction] screen
exposure for each modality will not be possible.
There are some X-ray devices that can select to sepa-
rate or not to separate depending on the procedure

No. (technique), but it is recommended to setup the
prevention of incorrect exposure. When the prevention
of incorrect exposure is not setup due to the facility
environment, perform the installation after explaining
the risk to the manager of the facility.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
O
OSetting of X-ray synchronization
This setting is not necessary if you do not perform X- [Colimation Correction] screen
ray synchronization.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The following steps are for configuring the [X-Ray
Sync 1] setting. To set [X-Ray Sync 2], repeat steps 1
~ 4 after configuring [X-Ray Sync 1].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Select [Conduct Tube position adjustment

and interlock of the collimation] in [XG
• The X-ray synchronization screen is displayed.
BOX Setting].
3 Set the following items in the X-ray syn-
chronization screen.
[Tube Position Correction] screen

Select the size, orientation, and posi-
[Coordination] tion of the X-ray tube position to be
synchronized.
Input the Bit Assign information to be
[Bit]
sent to the X-ray device from 0 to 3F.
[Colimation Correction] screen

Select the size and orientation of the ra-
[Coordination]
diation field aperture to be synchronized.
Input the Bit Assign information to be
[Bit] sent to the X-ray device among "00",
"02", "04", "08", "0F", "10" or "20".
104
Relationship between the Bit Assign information Bit setting LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6
(Bit) setting and LED/signal name on the AeroDR value (PCO-UP) (PCO-LO) (SIZE1) (SIZE2) (SIZE3) (SIZE4)
Generator Interface Unit CIF board
The signals on the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit CIF board
0D ○ ○ ○
are turned on and off by setting the Bit Assign information (Bit) of 0E ○ ○ ○
tube position correction and collimation correction. Once these 0F ○ ○ ○ ○
are set up, the LED corresponding to the signal is lit or goes off.
The relationship between the Bit Assign information
1* ○
(Bit) setting and LED/signal name on the AeroDR Gen- 2* ○
erator Interface Unit CIF board is shown below. 3* ○ ○
• When Bit setting values (01 - 3*) are set, LED 1 - 6 will be lit.
Tube position correction • To light LED 5 - 6, set in combination of "1*", "2*",
"3*" and "*1" - "*F". 4
(Example) Set as follows to light LED "1", "3", and "5" for
1 2 3 4 5 6
direction [Landscape], reading size [8X10],
PCO-UP PCO-LO SIZE1 SIZE2 SIZE3 SIZE4
and reading position [Bottom].

Collimation correction Collimation correction
(vertical Bit) (horizontal Bit)
Collimation correction Bit Assign information (Bit)
setting table
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 Combinations of the set Bit of collimation correction
and LED/signal name to be lit are shown below.
[Vertical Bit]
:LED Bit setting LED7 LED8 LED9 LED10 LED11 LED12
:LED number/signal name value (V1) (V2) (V3) (V4) (V5) (V6)
1
* LED number/signal name are not marked on the board. 00
02 ○
Tube position correction Bit Assign information 04 ○
(Bit) setting table
Combinations of the set Bit of tube position correction
08 ○
and LED/signal name to be lit are shown below. 0F ○
Bit setting LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 10 ○
value (PCO-UP) (PCO-LO) (SIZE1) (SIZE2) (SIZE3) (SIZE4) 20 ○
00 • When Bit setting values (00, 02, 04, 08, 0F, 10, 20)
01 ○ are set, LED 7 - 12 will be lit.
02 ○ [Horizontal Bit]
03 ○ ○ Bit setting LED13 LED14 LED15 LED16 LED17 LED18
04 ○ value (H1) (H2) (H3) (H4) (H5) (H6)
05 ○ ○ 00
06 ○ ○ 02 ○
07 ○ ○ ○ 04 ○
08 ○ 08 ○
09 ○ ○ 0F ○
0A ○ ○ 10 ○
0B ○ ○ ○ 20 ○
0C ○ ○ • When Bit setting values (00, 02, 04, 08, 0F, 10, 20)
are set, LED 13 - 18 will be lit.
105
4 Press [OK].
[Tube Position Correction] screen

Set up the AeroDR Detector after confirming its com-

munications by referencing "4.10.7 Confirmation of
AeroDR Detector communication".
Setting is not required if the default network setting of
the AeroDR is to be used.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Detector's serial number which was ac-
4 quired in "4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data reg-
istration" will be displayed in [Serial Number]. Confirm
[Colimation Correction] screen that the serial number displayed is identical to the se-
rial number on the identification label(sticker) attached

to the AeroDR Detector before setting up.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable or the

AeroDR UF Cable is connected to the
AeroDR Interface Unit.

used is powered on.
• The settings are saved and it takes you back to
the [XG BOX Setting] screen. 3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-
DR I/F Cable or the AeroDR UF Cable.
4 Set the following items of [AeroDR Detec-

tor Setting] according to the institution
environment.

The AeroDR Detector's serial number
[Serial which was acquired in "4.10.6 AeroDR
Number] Detector correction data registration"
will be displayed.
Input the IP address for the wired con-
[Wired IP Ad-
nection of the AeroDR Detector.
dress]
Input the IP address for the wireless
[Wireless IP
connection of the AeroDR Detector.
Address]
Input the default gateway of the Aero-
[Default Gate-
DR Detector.
way]
Input the subnet mask of the AeroDR
[Subnet
Detector.
Mask]
106
5 Press [Upload].
When all settings of AeroDR SYSTEM are completed,

save the settings and close the AeroDR unit setting
screen.
1 Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting

screen.

• The settings will be registered in this device's
RM as local settings.
• The settings are uploaded to the AeroDR Detec-
tor.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The warning message is displayed when the "Pro-
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • cessing" screen is closed by pressing [Cancel] during
• AeroDR Detector setting changes may take up to a an upload, but this does not indicate a problem.
maximum of 30 seconds to take effect. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
this device's IP is set, the "Processing" screen may 2 Close the sub-menu screen.
not disappear although settings are being uploaded to
the AeroDR Detector. After waiting for 30 seconds or
more, press [Cancel] and perform ping from the Win-
dows command prompt and confirm that there is no
response from the IP address before the change.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
107
4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device
Set the IP address of this device on the CS-7 setting

screen.
Setting is not required if the default IP address of this
device is to be used.

4
• The [Network Connections] screen is displayed.

4 Right-click [Local Area Connection] and

press [Properties].
3 Press [Network Setting] on the sub-menu

screen.
• The [Local Area Connection Properties] screen

is displayed.
108
5 Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/ 6 Select [Use the following IP address] and
IPv4)] and press [Properties]. set the following items.

Setting Item Settings
Enter the IP address in accordance
[IP address] with the facility environment.
Enter the subnet mask of the selected
[Subnet
device.
mask]
Enter the default gateway address.
[Default Entry is not necessary if there is no
gateway] gateway on the network.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Enter the same value in [IP address] as the IP address
changed in "4.10.3 RM setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7 Press [OK].
• The [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)

Properties] screen is displayed.
109
8 Press [OK].
4
9 Close the [Network Connections] screen.
110
4.12 Restart of this device
Restart this device to enable the current settings.
1 Close the service tool.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

3 Press [Reboot] on the intermediate
screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Make sure to press [Reboot] in the intermediate
screen before restarting the personal computer.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit and the

AeroDR Detector.
111
4.13 Change of network of this device/addition of AeroDR
Detector after completing the settings
4.13.1 When changing the network setting of this device after

completing the settings
Follow the following procesure to change the network setting of this device after completing the settings of this de-
vice and the AeroDR SYSTEM.
Do not perform this task if network settings of this device are not to be modified.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4
• It is required to change the IP address in [RM Setting] and upload the changed information to the AeroDR Detector before
changing the network setting of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4.13 Change of network of this device/addition of AeroDR Detector after completing the settings
Change the IP address in [RM Setting] to the IP address

1 4.10.3 RM setting
of this device that is changed in step 4 in the flow.
Upload the changed IP address of [RM Setting] to

4.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR the AeroDR Detector.
2
Detector communication Upload to all AeroDR Detectors if multiple AeroDR
Detectors are used.
3 4.10.13 Saving of settings

Save the changes in [RM Setting].
4.11 Setting of the IP address of

4 Change the network setting of this device.
this device
Restart this device and the AeroDR Detectors to which

5 4.12 Restart of this device the IP address of [RM Setting] has been uploaded.
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For detailed procedure for each operation, refer to the respective sections in "Chapter 4 Installation Procedure for This De-
vice and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
112
4.13.2 When adding an AeroDR Detector
Follow the following procesure to perform an additional setup of the AeroDR Detector to add an AeroDR Detector to
be used in the same exposure room.
Do not perform this task if AeroDR Detector is not to be added.
Repeat the same setting process if there are multiple AeroDR Detectors.
Connect the AeroDR Detector to be added to the

1 4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM AeroDR I/F Cable or the AeroDR UF Cable and charge.
Is the network setting

4
NO
of this device changed
from the default?
YES
Perform this if the network setting of this device is
changed from the default in "4.11 Setting of the IP
address of this device".
2 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device Restore the values for the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway to the default
(192.168.20.90/255.255.255.0/0.0.0.0).
Register the correction data for the AeroDR Detector

3 4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration
to be added.
Confirm the communication between the AeroDR

4 4.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector communication Detector to be added and this device.
Does the IP address for the NO

AeroDR Detector need to be
changed?
YES
Perform this when changing the IP address of the
5 4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting AeroDR Detector to be added from the default.
NO
Save the settings of the AeroDR Detector to be
6 4.10.13 Saving of settings added.

of this device restored
to default?
YES Perform this when the network setting of this device is

restored to the default in the flow number 2.
7 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device Change the values of the IP address, subnet mask,
and default gateway of this device to the values
before restoring to the default.
4.12 Restart of this device Restart this device and the AeroDR Detector to be
8
added.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Affix identification labels (stickers) to the exterior of the AeroDR Detectors if multiple AeroDR Detectors are to be used. For
details, refer to "Addition of an AeroDR Detector" in the "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
vice and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
113
4.14 Analysis of AeroDR Detector
4.14.1 Flow chart of AeroDR Detector analysis
Flow of the AeroDR Detector analysis is as following. The process time in the flow chart is a rough estimate.
Roam the Detector to CS-7

with SRM link
Place the AeroDR Detector on

4 the floor, etc., and make the
distance from the X-ray focus
(SID) 2m
Electrical noise analysis FAIL

90 sec
PASS
Expose solid image with gain

calibration, 0.1 mR, 1.0 mR and
3.0 mR
FAIL
Gain calibration (first time)
Unevenness analysis
200 sec 60 sec
FAIL (first time) PASS

calibration, 0.1 mR, 1.0 mR and Defect analysis
3.0 mR 80 sec
PASS
Unevenness analysis FAIL (second time)

60 sec
PASS
Defect analysis FAIL (second time) Backup the complete set of

80 sec data for the analysis result
PASS
Existence of CS-7 with NO

AeroSync link Replace Detector
YES
Roam the Detector to CS-7

with AeroSync link
Execute gain calibration with Perform gain calibration and * If gain calibration has already been
performed, perform offset calibration
CS-7 with AeroSync link offset calibration*
only.
Complete AeroDR Detector

analysis
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When performing gain calibration with an Aero Sync-linked device, check whether the AeroDR Detector subject to the
analysis is Aero Sync-linked or not.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
114
4.14.2 Analysis of AeroDR

4 Press the device icon of AeroDR Detector.
Detector
Performs the analysis of the AeroDR Detector, and
setting and adjustment of exposure conditions.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Fully charge the AeroDR Detector before performing
the analysis of the AeroDR Detector.
• Start the operation after removing the additional filter
for dosage reduction on the X-ray tube, if there is one. 4
• Increase the distance of the X-ray focus (SID) as
much as possible to reduce the effect of the X-ray
intensity distribution.

Also, set the SID that allows the user to perform the
gain calibration of the AeroDR Detector in the same
condition every 3 month.
• When performing an analysis of the AeroDR Detector
after performing the gain calibration of the AeroDR
Detector, make sure not to change the positional re-
lationship of the AeroDR Detector and the X-ray tube,
including the SID.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Confirm that the monitor, this device,

AeroDR SYSTEM, and the X-ray device are
powered on.
2 Prepare for exposure with AeroDR Detector.
• If AeroDR Detector is inserted in the exposure
stage, it should be removed.
• Place the AeroDR Detector at a location that
makes the distance from X-ray focus (SID) 2 m.
(Make it as close to 2 m exceeding 1.5 m if it is
impossible to have 2 m.)
• Confirm that there are no obstacles such as
grids or markers between the X-ray tube and the
AeroDR Detector.
• Make sure that the exposure field exposes the
entire AeroDR Detector.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When multiple AeroDR Detectors are used, the opera-
tion can be performed in any exposure rooms as long
as the above conditions are met.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
115
5 Press [Panel]. 7 Press [Analyze].
4
• [Electrical Noise Analysis] is performed.
8
Confirm that [PASS] is displayed in the

analysis result.
• The AeroDR Detector analysis screen is dis- • Replacement of the AeroDR Detector is neces-
played. sary if [FAIL] is displayed as the analysis result.
Backup the complete set of the data that is
6 Select the AeroDR Detector to analyze. automatically saved in the "C:\Konicaminolta\
Console\Data\Work\ImageAnalyzer\<Panel ID
+ YYYYMMDDHHMMSS>" of this device, and
send it to the analysis department.
9 Set the exposure condition of the gain cal-

ibration described in the following table.
Exposure condition of gain calibration

AeroDR 1417HQ/AeroDR 1717HQ
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID
0.032 3.2
is 2 m
None 80 100
When SID
0.018 1.8
is 1.5 m
AeroDR 1417S
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID
0.05 5.0
is 2 m
None 80 100
When SID
0.028 2.8
is 1.5 m
116
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 12 Check that [Signal Value] is within the

• An additional filter is not used here.
range of the average signal value.
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray
devices.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to the
distance inverse square law.
(Example) When SID is 1.8 m, mAs value is
3.2x(1.8/2.0)2 = 2.6 mAs.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
10 Press [Gain Calibration].

4
• When the average signal value is out of the range,

change the "mAs" of the exposure condition and re-
peat steps 9 to 11.
• Repeat exposures by changing the conditions until the
average signal value becomes within the range.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Since the signal value is approximately proportional to
the dose, calculate and set mAs accordingly.
• The message "Please take the exposure now." will be ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
displayed.
13 Attach an additional filter (1 mm thick
11 Expose with the set exposure condition. copper plate) to the X-ray collimator using
• Expose by aligning the perpendicular direction drafting tape.
of the tube to the portrait orientation of AeroDR
Detector. The line of white projection of the
AeroDR Detector is located at the top.
Place the line of white

projection upward
1.5-2 m
Perpendicular Additional filter Drafting tape

to the tube Portrait orientation (1 mm thick copper plate)
of AeroDR Detector
• When reading the image, the average signal value

is displayed in [Signal Value].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Align the longitudinal direction of the X-ray tube and
AeroDR Detector.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
117
14 Set the exposure condition for 0.1 mR/ 19 Press [1.0mR/9.0μGy] to expose with the
0.9 μGy as described in the following set exposure conditions.
table. • When reading the image, the average signal
value is displayed in [Signal Value].
Exposure condition for 0.1 mR/0.9 μGy
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
20 Check the average signal value. When the
tional voltage current mAs average signal value is out of the range,
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
change the "mAs" of the exposure condi-
When SID is
0.016 1.6 tion and expose again.
2m Cu 1
80 100 • Repeat exposures by changing the conditions
When SID is mm
0.01 1
1.5 m until the average signal value becomes within
4 the range.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
21 Set the exposure condition for 3.0 mR/26
• Make sure to attach an additional filter.
μGy as described in the following table.

devices. Exposure condition for 3.0 mR/26 μGy
• When SID is different, change mAs according to the Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
distance inverse square law. tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • filter [kV] [mA]
When SID is
0.25 50
2m Cu 1
15 Press [0.1mR/0.9μGy]. When SID is mm
80 200
• The message "Expose" will be displayed. 0.14 28
1.5 m
16 Expose with the set exposure condition. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• When reading the image, the average signal
value is displayed in [Signal Value]. • Keep the additional filter attached.
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray devices.
17 Check the average signal value. When the distance inverse square law.
average signal value is out of the range, ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
tion and expose again. 22 Press [3.0mR/26μGy] to expose with the
• Repeat exposures by changing the conditions until the set exposure conditions.
average signal value becomes within the range. • When reading the image, the average signal
18 Set the exposure condition for 1.0 mR/
9.0 μGy as described in the following table. 23 Check the average signal value. When the
average signal value is out of the range,
Exposure condition for 1.0 mR/9.0 μGy change the "mAs" of the exposure condi-
Addi- Tube Tube tion and expose again.
Exposure
time [s] • Repeat exposures by changing the conditions
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID is until the average signal value becomes within
0.08 16 the range.
2m Cu 1
80 200
When SID is mm
0.045 9
1.5 m
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Keep the additional filter attached.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to dis-
tance inverse square law.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
118
24 When the exposures of 4 types images are 26 Press [Close].

completed, press [Exposure completed]. • Check the analysis of the other AeroDR Detec-
tors with the same procedure.
• When the analysis of AeroDR Detector is com-
pleted, remove the additional filter from the col-
limator.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the analysis of the AeroDR Detector is per-
formed under roaming environment, always perform
"4.14.3 Gain calibration of AeroDR Detector" after
performing the analysis. 4
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Analysis result is displayed.
25 Confirm that [PASS] is displayed in the

analysis result.
• Perform the gain calibration following the pro-
cedure in "4.14.3 Gain calibration of AeroDR
Detector" when [FAIL] is displayed as the analy-
sis result for [Unevenness Analysis] or [Defect
Analysis]. Perform steps 3 - 24 again after
performing the gain calibration. Replacement
of the AeroDR Detector is necessary if [FAIL] is
displayed again.
• Backup the complete set of the data that is auto-
matically saved in the "C:\Konicaminolta\Console\
Data\Work\ImageAnalyzer\<Panel ID + YYYYM-
MDDHHMMSS>" of this device and send it to the
analysis department when [FAIL] is displayed as
the analysis result of the [Defect Analysis] even
after performing the gain calibration.
119
4.14.3 Gain calibration of

3 Select the [User Tool] tab.
AeroDR Detector
The gain calibration method for the AeroDR Detector is
as follows.
1 Prepare for performing the gain calibration.

4 (Make it as close to 2 m exceeding 1.5 m if it is

Detector.
• Set the X-ray exposure condition using [Ex-
posure Parameters] of the AeroDR Detector
calibration screen as a reference. When no in-
formation exists in [Exposure Parameters], set
the X-ray exposure condition using the following
table as a reference.
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure • The user tool screen is displayed.
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID
0.032 3.2 4 Press [Adjustment], and press [Calibration].
is 2 m
None 80 100
When SID
0.018 1.8
is 1.5 m
AeroDR 1417S
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID
0.05 5.0
is 2 m
None 80 100
When SID
0.028 2.8
is 1.5 m
• The AeroDR Detector calibration screen is displayed.
120
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 7 Perform X-ray exposure with the specified

• Additional filter is not used.
conditions.
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray • Expose after matching the portrait orientation of
devices. the tube to the portrait orientation of the AeroDR
• When SID is different, change mAs according to the Detector. The line of white projection of the Aero-
distance inverse square law. DR Detector is located at the top.
3.2x(1.8/2.0)2 = 2.6 mAs.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
projection upward
5 Select the AeroDR Detector on which you

want to conduct the gain calibration.
1.5-2 m 4

Perpendicular
to the tube Portrait orientation
of AeroDR Detector
• When the conditions are met, the message

"Please take the exposure now. (2/8)" or "Please
take the exposure now. (Success count:1)" is
displayed.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6 Press [Execute].
AeroDR Detector.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the conditions are not met, a warning message
is displayed. Try exposure again after checking the
exposure conditions, looking for obstacles (eg. grid,
marker), and confirming the size of the exposure field.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• After a moment, the message "Please take the 8 Repeat X-ray exposure as specified.
exposure now. (1/8)" or "Please take the expo- • After the eighth time, the gain calibration is con-
sure now. (Success count:0)" is displayed. cluded. The repeating may occur for more than
9 times. Perform the gain calibration following
the message.
• If the conditions are not met, or if an obstacle (eg.
grid, marker) is in the way, a warning message
will be displayed. Perform the gain calibration
again.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The displayed signal value is almost in propor-
tion to the actual amount of X-rays contacting the
AeroDR Detector. For example, when the signal
value is "8,000", setting the mAs value to 0.75 times
(6,000/8,000) can meet the optimal exposure condi-
tions.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
121
9 Enter the gain calibration conditions to be

4.14.4 Offset calibration of
used for execution in [Exposure Param-
eters]. AeroDR Detector
• Enter the tube voltage, tube current, exposure The procedure to perform the offset calibration of the
time, exposure distance, and remarks. AeroDR Detector is as follows.
4
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• After the gain calibration is completed, comments on
this calibration can be made in [Exposure Param-
eters], if necessary.
• Since the comments are retained until the next cali-
bration, they may be useful when performing the next
gain calibration.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
10 Press [Close].
11 Expose another image with the AeroDR
Detector that shows an error in the analy-
sis results and analyze it.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When performing the analysis of the AeroDR Detector • The user tool screen is displayed.
continuously after the gain calibration of the AeroDR
Detector, be careful not to change the positional rela-
tionship between the AeroDR Detector and the X-ray
3 Press [Adjustment], and press [Calibration].
tube.
Especially when the SID is small, the analysis result of
the AeroDR Detector may turn out [FAIL] if the position
is changed, so be careful.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the operation method, refer to steps 3 - 26 of the
"4.14.2 Analysis of AeroDR Detector".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
12 Confirm that the analysis result is [PASS].

• If [FAIL] is displayed again, troubleshoot the
problem according to the instructions displayed
on the screen.
122

4

want to perform the offset calibration.

5 Press [Execute].
• The progress of the offset calibration is dis-

played on the progress bar at the right of [Ex-
ecute].
123
4.15 Deployment to the installation location and connection
to the institution network
4.15.1 Deployment of Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
respective devices to • For attachment of the add-in Ethernet board, refer to

"12.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board".
the installation locations ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Arrange the various devices at the installation loca-

tions.
4 1 Install this device, AeroDR SYSTEM, and pe-

ripheral devices in the installation location.
4.15 Deployment to the installation location and connection to the institution network
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the installation of AeroDR SYSTEM, refer to
"AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual."
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.15.2 Connecting to
institution network
Connect this device to the institution network.
Do not perform this task if not connecting with institu-
tion network.
1 Connect the Ethernet cable of the institution

network to the hub where this device and
the AeroDR SYSTEM are connected.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When using 2 network systems, AeroDR SYSTEM
should be connected to the hub of the local network.
This device (rear)
Hub (local network side)
Hub (institution network side)
Optional port Standard port

(Add-in Ethernet (built-in Ethernet)
board)
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
124
4.16 Peripheral devices setting
Set the peripheral devices such as a printer, host, RIS, 5 Press [Next].
and X-ray device according to the institution environ-
ment.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For setting method for peripheral devices, refer to
"CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
User Tool Screen" and installation/service manuals for
the peripheral devices. 4
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.16.1 Preparation for setting

the DRYPRO 832
6 Select the language to use and press
When setting the DRYPRO 832, an installation of the [Next].
PrintLink5 (Built In) is required in advance.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.
7 Enter the serial number of the DRYPRO

832 to be connected in [Serial No.:].
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• It is not possible to proceed to the next screen if a se-
rial number other than "1 - 99999" is entered.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
8 Select [BuiltIN] for [Mode:] and press

[Next].
3 Insert the CS-7 DRIVER CD into the CD/

DVD drive.
4 Close the auto-play screen and run [D:\

PrintLink for DRYPRO\V2.00R06\DISK1\
setup.exe] stored in the CS-7 DRIVER CD
through Explorer.
125
9 Press [Install].
4
• Installation will start.
10 Select [Yes, I want to restart my computer

now.] and press [Finish].
11 If a message about restarting is displayed,

press [OK].
• This device will restart.
126
4.17 Activation
Perform the device information registration of each de- 3 Press [Equipment Information].
vice and activation of the authentication. The activation
procedure is different in case of online or offline.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Perform the activation within 60 days after importing
the license.
• Perform the activation again whenever a change is
made in the system structure. 4
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.17 Activation
• The equipment information screen is displayed.
4 Read the barcode for the serial number of

each product comprising the system.
• To manually input, enter the "Product code (4

digits) - Product serial number (4 or 5 digits)".
• For the products to register, refer to following
table.
127
4.17 Activation
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Registration

Product name
method
• To manually input the serial numbers of REGIUS Cas- It is acquired
CS-7 electronic medical
sette and REGIUS Plate, enter the "Product class automatically.
record system connection
code (2 digits) - Size code (1 digit) - Lot code (4-digits) Not used out-
license
- Serial number (3 digits)". side of Japan.
• Equipment registration is not required for the following CS-7 MWM/DETACHED CONNECT
It is acquired
products. CS-7 MPPS/DETACHED
automatically.
–– DP-DVI conversion cable for 21-inch monitor CONNECT
–– Sub monitor It is acquired
–– Magnetic card reader CS-7 RIS built-in connection automatically.
–– Add-in LAN card license Not used out-
–– Multi-bar code reader side of Japan.
–– Bar code reader CS-7 DICOM STORAGE
4 –– PCM multi-bar code reader OUTPUT (MAX4)
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • CS-7 DICOM PRINT (MAX2)
CS-7 MEDIA STORAGE
CS-7 EASY TAG KEY SETTING
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.17 Activation
CS-7 DETAILED TAG KEY SETTING

• It makes a beep when a duplicate serial number is read CS-7 DETAILED IMAGE SETTING
in or digits are incorrect. Perform the reading again. CS-7 DETAILED ANNOTATION
• Depending on the product, the serial number is automati- CS-7 PORTABLE RF
cally acquired during the installation and setting procedures. CS-7 AEROSYNC
• The equipment information screen will convert the CS-7 STITCHING
License
CS-7 MultiStudy
product code to the product name using a dedicated
CS-7 PDA Connection
table when the serial number is entered. Therefore,
CS-7 AeroRemote QC
the product name might not be displayed when a se- It is acquired
CS-7 DATA ANALYSIS
rial number of the product including a product code automatically.
CS-7 SIMPLE CHECK QC
that is not defined in the table is entered. However, the
CS-7 CR Mammography
activation will be performed normally and there will be CS-7 STUDY SHARING
no effect on the operation even for such case.
CS-7 P-XG Connection
• When performing barcode registration, perform the
CS-7 MOTION/LUNG DETECT
setting described in "19.1 Using bar code reader for
CS-7 TUBE/GAUZE EN-
REGIUS to register devices".
HANCEMENT
CS-7 STUDY COMBINE/MOVE
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • CS-7 AUTO IMAGE BACKUP
CS-7 HI-RES MONITOR
Device registration product list CS-7 SPARE PANEL SERVICE
Registration CS-7 SCREENING FUNC
Product name
method CS-7 MEASUREMENT FUNC
It is acquired CS-7 Lite It is acquired
automatically. CS-7 Pro automatically.
CS-7 In Japan, a CS-7 Pro Update Not used out-
pharmaceutical CS-7 Portable side of Japan.
nameplate serial Read from the
number input at model name
CS-7 CS-7 Portable the time of manu-
Sub Monitor Adaptor plate or exter-
hardware facture is loaded
nal box of the
automatically.
product.
17 inch monitor Read from the
model name plate Magnetic card reader Read from the
21 inch monitor or external box of model name plate
the product. or external box of
DP-DVI conversion cable for Option Add-in LAN card
Not used outside the product.
21 inch monitor of Japan. Not used outside of
CS-7 STANDARD SOFTWARE Multi-bar code reader Japan.
CS-7 HQ DETECTOR LI- Read from the
CENSE (MAX4) model name
CS-7 STD DETECTOR LI- Bar code Reader plate or exter-
It is acquired
CENSE (MAX4) nal box of the
automatically.
CS-7 X-RAY GENERATOR product.
CONNECTION
REGIUS MODEL190 Read from the
License CS-7 WIRELESS LAN CON-
REGIUS MODEL210 model name
NECTION
plate or exter-
It is acquired REGIUS MODEL110
CS-7 CR LOW THROUGHPUT nal box of the
automatically. REGIUS
REGIUS MODEL110HQ product.
Not used in
CS-7 CR MED THROUGHPUT REGIUS MOD-
Japan. REGIUS MODEL170 EL110HQ is not
CS-7 CR HI THROUGHPUT It is acquired
REGIUS Cassette Plate used in Japan.
(MAX16) automatically.
128
4.17 Activation
Product name
Registration O
OWhen online
method
AeroDR 1417S
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
AeroDR 1417HQ
• Online activation can be performed with this device
that has the remote maintenance R2 installed. How-
ever, if this device cannot use DNS, open the HOSTS
It is acquired
AeroDR Battery Charger file using Windows Notepad, etc. and add the follow-
automatically.
AeroDR Access Point ing definition under the localhost definition line.
AeroDR I/F Cable –– "219.112.242.220 simsgateway.mi-
supportkonicaminolta.jp"
AeroDR UF Cable
–– The file path for the HOSTS file is "C:\Windows\
AeroDR XG Cable
System32\drivers\etc\hosts". 4
Dummy AeroDR Portable RF It is acquired
AccessPoint automatically.
Dummy AeroDR Portable RF Not used in
4.17 Activation
XG Japan.
AeroDR Dummy AeroDR Portable UF It is acquired
SYSTEM AccessPoint automatically.
AeroDR Power Cable Read from the
model name
AeroDR Collimator Cable Set
plate or exter-
AeroDR S-SRM Kit nal box of the
product.
AeroDR S-SRM Cable
Not used in
AeroDR S-SRM Hand S/W Cable Japan.
It is acquired
AeroDR Stitching Unit
automatically.
AeroDR Stitching Unit Marker
AeroDR Stitching X-ray Auto- Read from the
barrier Unit model name
AeroDR Stitching Mask plate or exter-
nal box of the
AeroDR Stitching Unit Cable
product.
AeroDR Stitching Unit Adjust-
ment Adapter
Position to be added
5 Press [Install Completed]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6 Press [Activation].
• Next procedure is different depending on if it is

online or offline.
→For online • The devices displayed in the equipment infor-
→Go to "When online" mation list will be authenticated.
→For offline
→Go to "When offline"
129
4.17 Activation
O
OWhen offline 8 Select the output destination of the device
registration file and press [OK].
6 Press [Activation (For Offline)].
4
4.17 Activation
• The [Offline Activation] screen is displayed.
7 Press [Select Equipment Info File].

9 Press [Encrypt].
130
4.17 Activation
10 Press [OK]. 15 Select the activation key file and press [Open].
11 Copy the device registration file to the

personal computer connectable to the In-
ternet, and register to SIMS/LMS. 4
12 Copy the activation key file acquired from
4.17 Activation
the SIMS/LMS onto this device.
13 Select the [Register Activation Key] tab.
16 Press [Submit].
14 Press [Import Key].
17 Press [OK].

played.
• The devices displayed in the equipment infor-

mation list will be authenticated.
131
4.18 Confirmation of the version of this device
Confirm the version of CS-7 application installed in this HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

device.
• The version of this device can also be checked at the
bottom right corner of the system startup screen.
1 Display the system monitor screen.
4
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The system status screen is displayed.

• Confirm the version of this device.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Perform the version upgrade if the CS-7 application
installed on this device is not up to date.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
132
4.19 Roaming environment settings
Set the roaming environment when multiple exposure rooms are set. Also perform the setting of the startup linkage
of this device as necessary.
4.19.1 Workflow to set roaming environment
The workflow for setting a roaming environment is as follows.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4
• There are 2 types of RM: RM hybrid machine and RM client machine. This manual defines them respectively as follows.
–– RM hybrid machine: this device where RM is set as a hybrid type

–– RM client machine: this device where RM is set as a client type
• There is one RM hybrid machine in a roaming environment. The others are set as RM client machines.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 4.19.2 Advance preparation Perform on all units of this device.
2 4.19.3 RM client machine settings Perform on all RM client machines.
3 4.19.4 Consolidation of exposure room information Perform on the RM hybrid machine.
4.19.5 Resetting of device information
Was the merge successful?

NG
Perform when there is a duplication of device
ID, sub device ID, and IP address/port of the
OK AeroDR SYSTEM related devices.
4 4.19.6 Start of RM client machines Perform on all RM client machines.
5 4.19.7 Restart of RM hybrid machine Perform on the RM hybrid machine.
6 4.19.8 Restart of RM client machines Perform on all RM client machines.
7 4.19.9 Restart of AeroDR Detector Perform on all AeroDR Detectors.
133
4.19.2 Advance preparation
The advance preparation for setting a roaming envi-

ronment is as follows.
1 Confirm that all units of this device are

connected to the institution network and
are ready for network communications.

4 2 Turn on all units of this device.

4.19.3 RM client machine
settings
Perform the RM client machine settings.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not start the service tool and user tool on the RM
hybrid machine while performing the setting on an RM
client machine.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

powered on.
2 Start up the service tool on the RM client

machine.
134
5 Set [Unique ID] for [Device Information

Setting].
4
• Set a different unique ID (2-8) for each RM client

machine. 9 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set a different ID other than 1, as the unique ID for
each RM client machine. The unique ID for the RM
hybrid machine will be 1.
• Up to 8 units of this device (including the unit of this
device that was set as an RM hybrid machine) can be
set within the same segment.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.
• The settings are stored, and the screen is

closed.
135
10 Set the following items in [RM setting]. 14 Press [OK] in AeroDR unit setting screen.

[Mode] Set as [Client].
[IP Address
Enter the IP address of the RM hybrid
of RM hybrid
machine.
machine]
4 [IP Address
Enter the IP address of the RM client
of RM client
machine.
machine]
11 Connect AeroDR I/F Cable, AeroDR Bat-

tery Charger, or AeroDR UF Cable with the
AeroDR Detector to be roamed.
12 Press [Download] in [AeroDR Detector

Setting].
15 Press [OK].
13 Press [Upload].
• Transfer of roaming information to the RM hy-

brid machine will start.
• The screen will close when the transfer is com-
pleted successfully.
• The modified setting information is uploaded to

the AeroDR Detector.
136
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 4.19.4 Consolidation of exposure

• Depending on the amount of setting information to be
room information
transferred or the network connection environment,
transfer may take about 1 minute. Consolidate the setting of each exposure room (setting
• When transfer fails due to the causes below, an error of each RM client machine) with the RM hybrid ma-
screen will be displayed. Perform steps 14 to 15 again chine.
after eliminating the causes.
Cause
There is a network con-
Corrective actions
1 Confirm that the RM hybrid machine is
nection problem between powered on.
Check the network status
the RM hybrid machine
again.
and an RM client ma-
chine.
2 Start the service tool on the RM hybrid 4
The RM hybrid machine Restart the RM hybrid
machine.
has not started normally. machine.
The service tool or user 3 Press the RM icon.

Exit the service tool or
tool is used on the RM
user tool.
hybrid machine.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
16 Turn off the RM client machine.
137
4 Press [Merge]. 5 Select settings to be consolidated from

the list of [Mergeable Data], and press
[Merge].
• Recognize the RM client machine setting infor-

mation by [RoomID] and [CS-7 Console Device

ID].

• The file merge screen is displayed.
Display panel Display content IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Display a list for setting informa- • If there is duplication in the exposure room information
tion of each RM client machine which is to be integrated, such as in the device IDs,
[Data On Server]
retained with the RM hybrid ma- device sub-IDs, IP addresses, port numbers etc. of the
chine. AeroDR SYSTEM related devices, the duplicated de-
Display a list of setting information
[Mergeable Data] vice information is displayed in the [Error information]
sent from each client machine.
at the bottom section of the screen. Check the content,
delete the relevant device data from [Mergeable Data],
and then reset the device information.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
138
6 Press [OK]. 10 Exit the service tool, and move to the sys-
tem monitor screen.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When moving to the system monitor screen, a screen
prompting to restart is displayed. Do not perform re-
start, and continue the following operation while the
screen is displayed.

• If you mistakenly performed restart, then continue with
the following operation while the initial screen is dis-
played after restart.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The setting of the selected RM client ma-

chine is consolidated.
7 Repeat steps 5 to 6 as many times as the

number of RM client machines.
8 Press [Close].
139
There may be a duplication of the device ID, sub device ID, IP address or port number of the AeroDR SYSTEM re-
lated devices when the merge fails in the "4.19.4 Consolidation of exposure room information".
Change the setting of the device information for the RM hybrid machine or the RM client machines.
O
OChanging the setting of the RM hybrid machine
Change the setting of the device information for the RM hybrid machine in accordance with the following flow.
4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit

4 1 setting screen
Confirm the device ID and IP address of the AeroDR

2 4.10.5 AeroDR Access Point setting

Access Point, and perform if it needs to be changed.

3 Detector communication
Confirm the device ID and sub device ID of the AeroDR

4 4.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting
I/F Cable, and perform if it needs to be changed.

5 4.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting
Battery Charger, and perform if it needs to be changed.

6 4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting
UF Cable, and perform if it needs to be changed.
4.10.11 AeroDR Generator Interface Confirm the device ID and IP address of the AeroDR Gen-
7 Unit setting erator Interface Unit, and perform if it needs to be changed.
Confirm the IP address of the AeroDR Detector, and

8 4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting
perform if it needs to be changed.
10 4.12 Restart of this device
4.19.4 Consolidation of exposure

11 room information
140
O
OChanging the setting of the RM client machines
Change the setting of the device information for the RM client machines in accordance with the following flow.
Start only the RM client machines that could not be

1 4.19.6 Start of RM client machines
merged.

2 setting screen

Access Point, and perform if it needs to be changed. 4


4.10.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting Confirm the device ID and sub device ID of the AeroDR
5
4.10.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting Confirm the device ID and sub device ID of the AeroDR
6
4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting Confirm the device ID and sub device ID of the AeroDR
7
4.10.11 AeroDR Generator Interface Confirm the device ID and IP address of the AeroDR Gen-
8 Unit setting erator Interface Unit, and perform if it needs to be changed.
4.10.12 AeroDR Detector setting Confirm the IP address of the AeroDR Detector, and
9
12 4.19.3 RM client machine settings
4.19.4 Consolidation of exposure

13 room information
141
4.19.6 Start of RM client 4.19.8 Restart of RM client

machines machines
Start all RM client machines. Restart all the RM client machines.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Display the intermediate screen on all the

• Always start RM client machines one by one. RM client machines.
• Make sure that the initial screen is displayed before
starting the next RM client machine. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Starting multiple machines simultaneously will result in • For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to dis-
4 application error. In this case, turn off the power of all play the intermediate screen".
RM client machines, then start the machines one by ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
one again.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
screen.
1 Turn on RM client machines one by one.
4.19.7 Restart of RM hybrid

machine
Restart the RM hybrid machine.
1 Display the intermediate screen on the RM

hybrid machine.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.19.9 Restart of AeroDR
Detector
screen.
Restart all the registered AeroDR Detectors.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the restart method, refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM
Operation Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
142
• The [WOL(Wake ON LAN)Settings] screen is

4.19.10 Power on/off linkage displayed.
settings
When multiple units of this device are installed, they 3 Press [WakeOnLan ON/OFF].
can be started up together. Starting up 1 unit of this
device starts up the other units of this device at the
same time.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Perform the setting on this device that will turn the
power on/off.
4
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• This device to perform the setting can be either RM
hybrid machine or RM server machine. 4 Select [PC1 WakeOn] - [PC8 WakeOn] to
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • designate the number of units of this de-
vice to be started up together.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Press [Setting] on the intermediate

screen.
• Up to 8 CS-7s can be set.
143
5 Enter the MAC address of each unit of this

device to be started up together in [PC1
MAC Address] - [PC8 MAC Address], re-
spectively.
4
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• MAC address can be confirmed by executing [ipconfig
/all] in the Windows command prompt. The value dis-
played in the [Physical Address] in the ipconfig screen
is the MAC address.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6 Press [OK].
144
4.20 Optional installation and data migration
Perform the optional installation and the data migra-

tion.
Do not perform this task if optional installation and data
migration are not to be conducted.
4.20.1 Optional installation
4
1 Set up optional devices to be connected
to this device.

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Depending on the option to be installed, installing
before this may increase efficiency in some cases.
Change the installation procedure according to the op-
tion to be installed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the optional installation, refer to "Chapter 12 Instal-
lation of Options".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.20.2 Data migration
1 Transfer data such as Patient DB, Exam.

Tag, and overlay to this device.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the Exam. Tag and overlay data migration, refer
to "14.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this
device" and "14.4 How to migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to
this device".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
145
4.21 Backup of the setting data of this device
Store the setting data of this device. 3 Press [Backup/Restore], and press [Back-
up].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When multiple units of this device are installed, back
up the setting data for each one.
• Prepare external backup storage media and folders
for each unit of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4
2
Select the [User Tool] tab.
• The backup screen is displayed.
4 Select [Setting].
146
5 Press [Browse].
4
7 Press [Execute].

6 Specify the location to back up and press

[OK]. • A confirmation message is displayed.
8 Press [OK].
• The backup starts.
147
9 Press [OK].
10 When the backup finishes, press [Close].

4
• This returns to the user tool screen.
11 Write files backed up in the save folder to

external memory media, etc.
148
4.22 Final operation check and delivery
Perform the final operation check and delivery.

4.22.2 Delivery
4.22.1 Exposure confirmation Deliver this device to the user.
Confirm that there is no problem with the operation by

1 Give instruction to the operators.
performing the set of exposure operation. • Provide a description of series of exposure ac-
tions.
1 Perform a series of exposures under the • Provide a description of user tool for administra- 4
operating conditions in the institution. tor of this device.

Confirm that there is no problem with the IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
operation of any of the devices and ex- • Editing of Exam. Tag, etc., is performed by the admin-
posed images. istrator of this device; you should however provide op-
erators with a description of the method as needed. Be
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • sure to make the settings for adding AeroDR Detector
size to Exam. Tag when setting AeroDR 1717HQ.
• Always check the operating conditions in the institu-
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
tion.
• Before performing exposures, be sure to obtain per-
mission from institution management personnel. 2 Clean up to complete the installation.
• Take particular care in the following cases. • The installation of this device is now complete.
–– When an order is received from a Radiology
Information System (RIS).
–– When sending images to a server.
• Confirm that there is no abnormality, such as an over-
lap of the density patch, in the diagnostic image.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
149
150
Chapter
5
and AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection)
This chapter describes the installation workflow, installation tasks,
and post-installation checks of this device and AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection).
151
5.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR SYSTEM
(Aero Sync connection)
AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/Aero Sync connection + AeroDR UF Cable) as follows.
O
OStand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/Aero Sync connection +
AeroDR UF Cable
撮影室
Exposure room
AeroDR Detector
X-rayy
X線管球
Tube
Ｘ
X-ray
線装device
置
5 AeroDR
I/F Cable AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR
Access Point
5.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection)
Power
電源ハブ
Hub
source
AeroDR
Interface Unit
ハブ
Hub
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
AeroDR UF Cable X-ray
X線操作卓device
Ethernet cable(PoE) operation panel
Ethernet cable LAN-シリア
Serial/hardware connection 変換ボック
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The Aero Sync mode is only available for the AeroDR 1417HQ with the identification of "1417HQ".
It is not available for the AeroDR 1417S, AeroDR 1717HQ, or AeroDR 1417HQ of which the first four characters of the serial
number are "A45Y".
AeroDR P-11
1417HQ
Identification
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
152
5.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR SYSTEM
The installation operating process for this device and the AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection) is as follows.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there is only 1 exposure room, the task of flow number 17 is unnecessary.
• When there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the tasks from flow number 1 to 16 to set each exposure room, then perform the task of flow number 17.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4.3 Check of bundled items The workflow to install AeroDR SYSTEM
1
1 6.3 Bundled items confirmation
3 4.5 Setting of touch panel

5
2 6.4 Installation of this device
5.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection)
3 6.5 Startup check
5 4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM
4 6.6 Connection and setting of the CS-7

6 4.8 System setting of this device
7 5.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices 6.7 Charging of the AeroDR Detector and
5 confirmation of its wireless status
5.5 Change of network of this device/addition of

11 AeroDR Detector after completing the settings
12 5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector 6 6.8 Exposure test and AeroDR Detector analysis
4.15 Deployment to the installation location and

13 7 6.9 Placement in the installation locations
15 4.17 Activation
20 5.8 Final operation check and delivery 8 6.10 Final operation check and handover
153
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the installation procedure of AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection), refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5
154
Perform the following in advance.

5.3.1 Activation of AeroDR
4.3 Check of bundled items SYSTEM related devices
Turn on the connection to the AeroDR SYSTEM re-
4.4 Check of startup lated devices to perform the settings.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4.6 Registration of license • Turn on the connection only for the devices to be in-
stalled.
4.7 Connection of AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero • The connection may be turned on already depending
Sync connection) on the devices. Turn off the connection for the devices
5
that will not be installed.
4.8 System setting of this device ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5.3 Temporary connection and startup of the device

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.3 Check of bundled items" first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Access Point icon is used as an

example here to explain the procedure.
155
2 Select the connection check box. 4 Press the icon of the device that will be
set using the same procedure, then press
the connection checkbox of the sub-menu
screen.
5
3 Press [Close].
AeroDR UF Cable icon

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
icon will change.
• To install multiple AeroDR related devices, turn on the
connection of the device icons for the number of the
devices to be installed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
device on the AeroDR unit setting screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
156
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Setting the network will be made with respect to each exposure room. If there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the same
settings for each exposure room.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5
OODevice icon screen OOSub-menu screen

Press the RM icon.
Press [Setting].
OOAeroDR unit setting screen
5.4.3 RM setting
5.4.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting
157

unit setting screen

AeroDR SYSTEM.
5
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The name set up in [Exposure Room Name] of [Expo- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
sure Room Setting] will be used as the display name
for the RM icon.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
158
Set up the RM (Roaming Manager). Set up the sync mode and shutdown coordination with
the exposure room.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The RM is a system to perform management and 1 Set the following items in [Exposure
roaming of the AeroDR Detector. Room Setting].
• The RM manages the correspondence (registration)
between this device and AeroDR Detector and en-
ables the roaming (the change of the exposure room
to use the AeroDR Detector). It also manages the cor-
delivers it to this device at the roaming destination. Setting item Settings
5
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • The exposure room name is dis-
played.
[Exposure
1 Set the following items in [RM setting]. Room Name]
The name set in [Exposure Room

displayed.
Select the sync mode of this device
and the X-ray device of the exposure
[Sync Mode] room.
Select [XARM].
Default setting: XARM
Setting item Settings Select existence of shutdown coordi-

nation.
Select [Client] or [Hybrid] for the RM When [ON] is selected, the termina-
[Mode] operation mode. [Shutdown
tion of this device causes the AeroDR
Default setting: Hybrid Coordination]
Detector assigned to the exposure
Change is not required if the default IP room to shut down.
address of this device is to be used. Default setting: [OFF]
[IP Address
of RM hybrid
dress of this device", enter that value. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
machine]
Loop-back address (127.0.0.1) cannot • Do not change [Exposure Room Name].
be used. • Set up [Shutdown Coordination] in accordance with
[IP Address the operation status of the facility. It is necessary to
of RM client Setting is not performed here. turn on the power of the AeroDR Detector every time it
machine] is used since it will not link with startup.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not change [Mode] from [Hybrid] here. Change this
setting only when multiple exposure rooms are setup
and it is necessary to setup the roaming environment.
For details, refer to "5.7 Roaming environment set-
tings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
159

setting
This is a required setting when the AeroDR Detector
is used wireless. Perform the setup of the AeroDR
Access Point first, and then the wireless connection
related setup on this device.
• When setting each item, press [Submit] on each
5 IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
formed.
• It will be time out and return to Login screen if there is

no input for 5 minutes in the setting screen, and login
will be required again. The contents of settings with
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

following items.

and the login screen will be displayed.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
played, choose [Not enable].
2 Input the user name and password on the

[IP address]
ronment.
login screen, then press [Login]. Default setting: 192.168.20.241
• The default user name is "admin", and the pass- Set according to the institution envi-
word is "root". [Subnet mask] ronment.
[Gateway] ronment.
4 Press [Submit].
160
5 Press [Time Settings] under [Basic Set- 11 Set the frequency band, channel, and
tings] and set the time synchronization for SSID for the following items.

Select [A].
Default setting: A
Use only IEEE802.11a in the AeroDR
[Available
channel list
of the preliminary survey. 5
* indicates
6 Press [Submit]. DFS channel]
(*) will appear for the channel.
Default setting: :36-5.18G

7 Press [Operation Mode] under [Wireless
[SSID]
Settings] and set the wireless operation institution environment.
mode for the following items. Default setting: KMMG_AeroDR_1
[SSID broad- Select [Enable].
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Setting item Settings • When installing the AeroDR Access Points in mul-
[Wireless en- Select [Enable]. tiple exposure rooms, enter a unique [SSID] for each
able] Default setting: Disable exposure room regardless of settings of the roaming
[Operation Select [AP]. environment.
mode] Default setting: AP (Example)
Exposure room 1: KMMG_AeroDR_1
8 Press [Submit]. Exposure room 2: KMMG_AeroDR_2

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

of [Wireless Settings]. 12 Press [Submit].
13 Press [WLAN Security Settings] of [WLAN]
10 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen. of [Wireless Settings].
161
15 Set the security for the following items. 19 Press the following message that is dis-
Web browser window.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Encryption Select [AES]. • When changes have been made to the settings, a
5 alphanumeric characters. message.
[Passphrase]
Ø Gt4F9

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
ficult to guess.
• When installing AeroDR Access Points in multiple ex-
posure rooms, enter the same [Passphrase] for each • The settings will be saved and the AeroDR Ac-
AeroDR Access Point. cess Point will restart.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Restart is completed when a "beeping" sound
16 Press [Submit].
radio output for the following items. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
may not be displayed correctly. However, the set-
browser.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Select [Enable].
[WMM]
18 Press [Submit].
162
device.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Input the AeroDR Access Point serial ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
number or read the bar code.
[Serial
Number]
the form of product code (4 digits) 1 Insert the media provided with AeroDR
-serial number (5 digits). Detector to the CD/DVD drive. 5
Input the AeroDR Access Point name
[Display
Name]
within 10 characters.
2 Press [Add] in [Correction Data Setting].

[Pass Phrase] ters.
Ø Gt4F9
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
163

AeroDR Detector.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5 correction data registered, and connect
to the AeroDR I/F Cable, AeroDR Battery
Charger, or AeroDR UF Cable.
Setting].

are acquired.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
registered and [Serial Number] of [AeroDR De- data CD used in "5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correc-
tector Setting] will be updated. tion data registration" and the AeroDR Detector do
not match, the "The serial number of the AeroDR De-
tector does not match the serial number of correction
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
data. Please confirm the combination of the AeroDR
• Since the correction data is read from the CD, it may Detector and a CD related to this correction data."
take a certain amount of time to add the correction message is displayed. In this case, download again
data. using the correct correction data CD.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Remove the media provided with the Aero- 3 Set [Display Name].
DR Detector from the CD/DVD drive.

acters.
164
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
setting
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit. 5

used is powered on.

DR I/F Cable.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
registration".
DR Detector.
before this operation, the device sub-ID may be dis-
played. When you press [Download] at the next step,
the device sub-ID of the AeroDR I/F Cable to be set
up is obtained.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

played.
165

and press [OK].
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

5

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6 Set the following items in [I/F Cable Set-

ting].

[Serial
Number]
[Display
characters.
Name]
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
166

and press [OK].
setting
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
AeroDR Battery Charger for registering. The AeroDR De-
tector is not necessary to set up the AeroDR Battery Char-
ger just for charging, so steps 1 - 4 are not necessary.
• Even if the AeroDR Battery Charger is used only for 5
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

used is powered on. • The device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Charger
is automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed
in [Device Sub ID] of [AeroDR Battery Charger].
DR Battery Charger.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
registered referencing "5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correc- not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
tion data registration". sub-ID by this method.
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device • For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
before this operation, the device sub-ID may be dis- plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
played. When you press [Download] at the next step, format.
the device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Charger to ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
be set up is obtained.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Charger].
Charger].

[Serial
[Display
10 characters.
[Type]
Charger type.

played.
167
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set up of the dip switch on the AeroDR Battery Char- 5.4.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting
ger is required when [For Charging Only] is selected in
the [Type]. Refer to "Installation of the AeroDR Battery
Set the AeroDR UF Cable.
Charger for charging only" in the "AeroDR SYSTEM
• The registration of the AeroDR Detector to a exposure IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
room will not be performed when [For Charging Only]
is selected for [Type] since notification to the RM is not • AeroDR Detector to be used is necessary to set up
performed when the AeroDR Detector is mounted on the AeroDR UF Cable.
the AeroDR Battery Charger. • When there are multiple AeroDR UF Cables, connect
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • and set up each cable.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Serial number of the AeroDR Battery Charger is de- 1 Confirm that the AeroDR UF Cable is con-
5 scribed on the sticker on side of the main body. nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit via
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read- AeroDR I/F Cable.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
used is powered on.

O
Chargers
1 Turn on the connection for the device icon DR UF Cable.
for the second AeroDR Battery Charger.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data
registration".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
before this operation, the device sub-ID may be dis-
played. When you press [Download] at the next step,
2 Set up the AeroDR Battery Charger with
the device sub-ID of the AeroDR UF Cable to be set
up is obtained.
Battery Charger. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Press [Download] in [UF Cable Setting].

played.
168
5 Select the AeroDR Detector to be used, 6 Set the following items in [UF Cable Setting].
and press [OK].

[Serial number of AeroDR UF Cable.
Number] When inputting manually, input it in the form of
product code (4 digits)-serial number (5 digits).
Input the AeroDR UF Cable name within
[Display
10 characters.
Name] 5
Default setting: Modality
Select [Wall Stand] or [Bucky Table] for
[Type] the type of AeroDR UF Cables.

Default setting: Wall Stand
When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables, select the
• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR UF Cable is angle information to be set for each of the
automatically retrieved, and it will be displayed [Orienta- AeroDR UF Cable from [0], [90], [180], or [270].
in [Device Sub ID] of [UF Cable Setting]. tion] Default setting: 0
Setting is not required when using only 1
AeroDR UF Cable.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Select the orientation of the image on the
• The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or AeroDR Detector from [Standard] or [Up-
read with a barcode reader. When installing this de- side down] when exposing the AeroDR
Detector in portrait orientation.
not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device [Image Ori-
Select [Standard] when the line of white
sub-ID by this method. entation]
projection of the AeroDR Detector is fac-
• For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup- ing toward up.
plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode Select [Upside down] when the line of
white projection of the AeroDR Detector is
format.
facing toward down.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Select the insertion direction of the AeroDR
Detector from [Right] or [Left] when exposing
the AeroDR Detector in landscape orientation.
[Insertion Default setting: Left
Opening] Select [Right] when the line of white projection
of the AeroDR Detector is facing toward right.
Select [Left] when the line of white projection of
the AeroDR Detector is facing toward left.
Select the operation status of the AeroDR
UF Cable from [Standard] or [UFC2].
If using 1 AeroDR UF Cable, select [Standard].
If using 2 AeroDR UF Cables, select [UFC2].
IMPORTANT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When exposing the AeroDR Detector in landscape ori-
entation, it may affect the result of automatic orienta-
tion determination process if [Insertion Opening] is not
setup correctly.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
169
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3 Press [Download] in [UF Cable Setting],

and acquire the device sub ID for the sec-
• The serial number of the AeroDR UF Cable is de-
ond AeroDR UF Cable.
scribed on the tag attached to the cable.
• When using only 1 AeroDR UF Cable, setup [Image
Orientation] and [Insertion Opening] in accordance
with the status of exposure stage to be used, using
following patterns as a reference.
Direction of [Image [Insertion
AeroDR Detector Orientation] Opening]
[Standard] Match with the

setting for us- Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ing the AeroDR
Detector in • For the operation, refer to steps 4 - 5 of "5.4.10 Aero-
5 [Upside landscape ori- DR UF Cable setting".
down] entation ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Set the following items in [UF Cable Set-

Match with
the setting [Right] ting] respectively.
for using
the AeroDR
Detector in
portrait ori- [Left]
entation

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Select the type of AeroDR UF Cable

from [Wall Stand] or [Bucky Table].
• For the other setting examples when using only 1 [Type] Default setting: Wall Stand
AeroDR UF Cable, refer to "14.2.1 When using only Select the same type for both first and
one AeroDR UF Cable". second cables.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Select the angle information to be set
for the first and second AeroDR UF
O
OWhen using 2 AeroDR UF Cables Cables from [0], [90], [180], or [270].
[Orientation]
Default setting: 0
When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables for 1 exposure
Set to match the status of the expo-
stage, the setting is as follows. sure stage to be used.
Select the orientation of the image on
1 Turn on the connection of the device icon AeroDR Detector from [Standard] or
[Upside down] when an exposure is
of the second AeroDR UF Cable.
[Image Orien- performed in the portrait orientation of
tation] AeroDR Detector.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Default setting: Standard
Select the same orientation for both
• For the operation, refer to "5.3 Activation of AeroDR first and second cables.
Select the operation type of AeroDR
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • UF Cable from [Standard] or [UFC2].
2 Connect the second AeroDR UF Cable to Select [UFC2] for both first and sec-
ond cables.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The setting of [Insertion Opening] is not necessary
when using 2 AeroDR UF Cables.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
170
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set [Serial Number] and [Display Name] referring to 5.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting
the operation of the first AeroDR UF Cable.
• When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables, set [Orientation] Set up the AeroDR Detector after confirming its com-
and [Image Orientation] according to the status of ex- munications by referencing "5.4.7 Confirmation of
posure stage to be used with reference to the follow- AeroDR Detector communication".
ing patterns. Setting is not required if the default network setting of
AeroDR Detector [Image
[Orientation]
orientation Orientation]
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
First AeroDR UF
First Cable • The AeroDR Detector's serial number which was ac-
[0] quired in "5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data reg-
[Standard]
Second AeroDR istration" will be displayed in [Serial Number]. Confirm
UF Cable that the serial number displayed is identical to the se-
Second [90] 5
rial number on the identification label(sticker) attached
First AeroDR UF
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
First Cable

[0]
Second Second AeroDR [Standard]
UF Cable
1 Confirm that the AeroDR I/F Cable or the
[270] AeroDR UF Cable is connected to the
Cable
[0] [Upside
Second AeroDR down] used is powered on.
UF Cable
Second [90]
DR I/F Cable or the AeroDR UF Cable.
Cable
Second
[0] [Upside 4 Set the following items of [AeroDR Detec-
Second AeroDR down] tor Setting] according to the institution
UF Cable
[270]
environment.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For other setting patterns when using 2 AeroDR UF
Cables, refer to "14.2.2 When using 2 AeroDR UF
Cables".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
The AeroDR Detector's serial number
will be displayed.
[Wired IP Ad-
dress]
[Wireless IP
Address]
[Default Gate-
DR Detector.
way]
[Subnet
Detector.
Mask]
171
5 Press [Upload].

screen.

screen.

tor.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • cessing" screen is closed by pressing [Cancel] during
• AeroDR Detector setting changes may take up to a an upload, but this does not indicate a problem.
maximum of 30 seconds to take effect. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
this device's IP is set, the "Processing" screen may 2 Close the sub-menu screen.
not disappear although settings are being uploaded to
the AeroDR Detector. After waiting for 30 seconds or
more, press [Cancel] and perform ping from the Win-
dows command prompt and confirm that there is no
response from the IP address before the change.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4.11 Setting of the IP address of this
device
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device"
first.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
To next page
172
5.5 Change of network of this device/addition of AeroDR De-
tector after completing the settings
5.5.1 When changing the network setting of this device after

completing the settings
Follow the following procesure to change the network setting of this device after completing the settings of this de-
vice and the AeroDR SYSTEM.
Do not perform this task if network settings of this device are not to be modified.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• It is required to change the IP address in [RM Setting] and upload the changed information to the AeroDR Detector before
changing the network setting of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5
Change the IP address in [RM Setting] to the IP address
1 5.4.3 RM setting
of this device that is changed in step 4 in the flow.
Upload the changed IP address of [RM Setting] to
5.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR the AeroDR Detector.
2
Detector communication Upload to all AeroDR Detectors if multiple AeroDR
Detectors are used.

Save the changes in [RM Setting].
4.11 Setting of the IP address of

4 Change the network setting of this device.
this device
Restart this device and the AeroDR Detectors to which

5 4.12 Restart of this device the IP address of [RM Setting] has been uploaded.
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
vice and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)" and "Chapter 5 Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM
(Aero Sync connection)".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
173
5.5.2 When adding an AeroDR Detector
Follow the following procesure to perform an additional setup of the AeroDR Detector to add an AeroDR Detector to
be used in the same exposure room.
Do not perform this task if AeroDR Detector is not to be added.
Repeat the same setting process if there are multiple AeroDR Detectors.
Connect the AeroDR Detector to be added to the

1 4.7 Connection with AeroDR SYSTEM AeroDR I/F Cable or the AeroDR UF Cable and charge.
Is the network setting NO

of this device changed
from the default?
5 Perform this if the network setting of this device is

YES
changed from the default in "4.11 Setting of the IP
address of this device".
2 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device Restore the values for the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway to the default

(192.168.20.90/255.255.255.0/0.0.0.0).
Register the correction data for the AeroDR Detector

3 5.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registration
to be added.
Confirm the communication between the AeroDR

4 5.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector communication Detector to be added and this device.
Does the IP address for the NO

AeroDR Detector need to be
changed?
YES
Perform this when changing the IP address of the
5 5.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting AeroDR Detector to be added from the default.
NO
Save the settings of the AeroDR Detector to be
6 5.4.12 Saving of settings added.

of this device restored
to default?
YES Perform this when the network setting of this device is

restored to the default in the flow number 2.
7 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device Change the values of the IP address, subnet mask,
and default gateway of this device to the values
before restoring to the default.
4.12 Restart of this device Restart this device and the AeroDR Detector to be
8
added.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Affix identification labels (stickers) to the exterior of the AeroDR Detectors if multiple AeroDR Detectors are to be used. For
details, refer to "Addition of an AeroDR Detector" in the "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For detailed procedure for each operation, refer to the respective sections in "Chapter 4 Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR
SYSTEM (SRM connection)" and "Chapter 5 Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (Aero Sync connection)".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
174
5.6.1 Flow chart of AeroDR Detector analysis
Flow of the AeroDR Detector analysis is as following. The process time in the flow chart is a rough estimate.
Roam the AeroDR Detector to

the device with AeroDR link

the floor, etc., and make the
(SID) 2m
Electrical noise analysis FAIL 5

90 sec
PASS

3.0 mR
FAIL
Unevenness analysis
200 sec 60 sec
FAIL (first time) PASS

3.0 mR 80 sec
PASS
Unevenness analysis FAIL (second time)

60 sec
PASS
Defect analysis FAIL (second time) Backup the complete set of

PASS
Existence of the device NO

with SRM or S-SRM link Replace Detector
YES

the device with SRM or S-SRM
sync
Execute of gain calibration and

Perform gain calibration and
offset calibration with the device
offset calibration
with SRM or S-SRM sync

analysis
175
5.6.2 Analysis of AeroDR

Detector
Performs the analysis of the AeroDR Detector, and
setting and adjustment of exposure conditions.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Fully charge the AeroDR Detector before performing
the analysis of the AeroDR Detector.
• Start the operation after removing the additional filter
for dosage reduction on the X-ray tube, if there is one.
• Increase the distance of the X-ray focus (SID) as
much as possible to reduce the effect of the X-ray
5 intensity distribution.
Also, set the SID that allows the user to perform the
gain calibration of the AeroDR Detector in the same
condition every 3 month.
• When performing an analysis of the AeroDR Detector

after performing the gain calibration of the AeroDR
Detector, make sure not to change the positional re-
lationship of the AeroDR Detector and the X-ray tube,
including the SID.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Confirm that the monitor, this device,

AeroDR SYSTEM, and the X-ray device are
powered on.
2 Prepare for exposure with AeroDR Detector.
AeroDR Detector.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When multiple AeroDR Detectors are used, the opera-
tion can be performed in any exposure rooms as long
as the above conditions are met.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
176
5 Press [Panel]. 7 Press [Analyze].
• [Electrical Noise Analysis] is performed.
8 Confirm that [PASS] is displayed in the 5

analysis result.

• The AeroDR Detector analysis screen is dis- • Replacement of the AeroDR Detector is neces-
played. sary if [FAIL] is displayed as the analysis result.
Backup the complete set of the data that is
6 Select the AeroDR Detector to analyze. automatically saved in the "C:\Konicaminolta\
Console\Data\Work\ImageAnalyzer\<Panel ID
+ YYYYMMDDHHMMSS>" of this device, and
send it to the analysis department.
9 Set the exposure condition of the gain cal-

ibration described in the following table.

Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID
0.032 3.2
is 2 m
None 80 100
When SID
0.018 1.8
is 1.5 m
177
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 12 Check that [Signal Value] is within the

• An additional filter is not used here.
range of the average signal value.
devices.
distance inverse square law.
3.2x(1.8/2.0)2 = 2.6 mAs.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
10 Press [Gain Calibration].
• When the average signal value is out of the range,

5 change the "mAs" of the exposure condition and re-
peat steps 9 to 11.
• Repeat exposures by changing the conditions until the
average signal value becomes within the range.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Since the signal value is approximately proportional to
the dose, calculate and set mAs accordingly.
• The message "Please take the exposure now." will be ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
displayed.
13 Attach an additional filter (1 mm thick

11 Expose with the set exposure condition. copper plate) to the X-ray collimator using
• Expose by aligning the perpendicular direction drafting tape.
of the tube to the portrait orientation of AeroDR
Detector. The line of white projection of the
AeroDR Detector is located at the top.

projection upward
1.5-2 m
Perpendicular Additional filter Drafting tape

to the tube Portrait orientation (1 mm thick copper plate)
of AeroDR Detector
• When reading the image, the average signal value

is displayed in [Signal Value].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
AeroDR Detector.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
178
14 Set the exposure condition for 0.1 mR/ 19 Press [1.0mR/9.0μGy] to expose with the
0.9 μGy as described in the following set exposure conditions.
table. • When reading the image, the average signal
Exposure condition for 0.1 mR/0.9 μGy
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
20 Check the average signal value. When the
tional voltage current mAs average signal value is out of the range,
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID is
0.016 1.6 tion and expose again.
2m Cu 1
80 100 • Repeat exposures by changing the conditions
When SID is mm
0.01 1
1.5 m until the average signal value becomes within
the range.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
21 Set the exposure condition for 3.0 mR/26
• Make sure to attach an additional filter. μGy as described in the following table. 5
devices. Exposure condition for 3.0 mR/26 μGy

Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
distance inverse square law. tional voltage current mAs
time [s]
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • filter [kV] [mA]
When SID is
0.25 50
2m Cu 1
15 Press [0.1mR/0.9μGy]. When SID is mm
80 200
• The message "Expose" will be displayed. 0.14 28
1.5 m
16 Expose with the set exposure condition. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• When reading the image, the average signal
value is displayed in [Signal Value]. • Keep the additional filter attached.
17 Check the average signal value. When the distance inverse square law.
average signal value is out of the range, ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
tion and expose again. 22 Press [3.0mR/26μGy] to expose with the
• Repeat exposures by changing the conditions until the set exposure conditions.
average signal value becomes within the range. • When reading the image, the average signal
18 Set the exposure condition for 1.0 mR/
9.0 μGy as described in the following table. 23 Check the average signal value. When the
average signal value is out of the range,
Exposure condition for 1.0 mR/9.0 μGy change the "mAs" of the exposure condi-
Addi- Tube Tube tion and expose again.
Exposure
time [s] • Repeat exposures by changing the conditions
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID is until the average signal value becomes within
0.08 16 the range.
2m Cu 1
80 200
When SID is mm
0.045 9
1.5 m
IMPORTANT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• Keep the additional filter attached.
• When SID is different, change mAs according to dis-
tance inverse square law.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
179
24 When the exposures of 4 types images are 26 Press [Close].

completed, press [Exposure completed]. • Check the analysis of the other AeroDR Detec-
tors with the same procedure.
• When the analysis of AeroDR Detector is com-
pleted, remove the additional filter from the col-
limator.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the analysis of the AeroDR Detector is per-
formed under roaming environment, always perform
"5.6.3 Gain calibration of AeroDR Detector" after
performing the analysis.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5
• Analysis result is displayed.
25 Confirm that [PASS] is displayed in the

analysis result.
• Perform the gain calibration following the pro-
cedure in "5.6.3 Gain calibration of AeroDR
Detector" when [FAIL] is displayed as the analy-
sis result for [Unevenness Analysis] or [Defect
Analysis]. Perform steps 3 - 24 again after
performing the gain calibration. Replacement
of the AeroDR Detector is necessary if [FAIL] is
displayed again.
• Backup the complete set of the data that is auto-
matically saved in the "C:\Konicaminolta\Console\
Data\Work\ImageAnalyzer\<Panel ID + YYYYM-
MDDHHMMSS>" of this device and send it to the
analysis department when [FAIL] is displayed as
the analysis result of the [Defect Analysis] even
after performing the gain calibration.
180
5.6.3 Gain calibration of

AeroDR Detector
The gain calibration method for the AeroDR Detector is
as follows.
1 Prepare for performing the gain calibration.

makes the distance from X-ray focus (SID) 2 m. • The user tool screen is displayed.
4 Press [Adjustment], and press [Calibration].
grids or markers between the X-ray tube and the 5
Detector.

• Set the X-ray exposure condition using [Ex-
posure Parameters] of the AeroDR Detector
calibration screen as a reference. When no in-
formation exists in [Exposure Parameters], set
the X-ray exposure condition using the following
table as a reference.
Addi- Tube Tube
Exposure
time [s]
filter [kV] [mA]
When SID
0.032 3.2
is 2 m
None 80 100
When SID
0.018 1.8
is 1.5 m
181
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 7 Perform X-ray exposure with the specified

• Additional filter is not used.
conditions.
• Appropriate condition is different for respective X-ray • Expose after matching the portrait orientation of
devices. the tube to the portrait orientation of the AeroDR
• When SID is different, change mAs according to the Detector. The line of white projection of the Aero-
distance inverse square law. DR Detector is located at the top.
3.2x(1.8/2.0)2 = 2.6 mAs.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
projection upward

want to conduct the gain calibration.
1.5-2 m
5
Perpendicular
to the tube Portrait orientation
of AeroDR Detector
• When the conditions are met, the message

"Please take the exposure now. (2/8)" or "Please
take the exposure now. (Success count:1)" is
displayed.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6 Press [Execute].
AeroDR Detector.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the conditions are not met, a warning message
is displayed. Try exposure again after checking the
exposure conditions, looking for obstacles (eg. grid,
marker), and confirming the size of the exposure field.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• After a moment, the message "Please take the 8 Repeat X-ray exposure as specified.
exposure now. (1/8)" or "Please take the expo- • After the eighth time, the gain calibration is con-
sure now. (Success count:0)" is displayed. cluded. The repeating may occur for more than
9 times. Perform the gain calibration following
the message.
• If the conditions are not met, or if an obstacle (eg.
grid, marker) is in the way, a warning message
will be displayed. Perform the gain calibration
again.
HINT ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The displayed signal value is almost in propor-
tion to the actual amount of X-rays contacting the
AeroDR Detector. For example, when the signal
value is "8,000", setting the mAs value to 0.75 times
(6,000/8,000) can meet the optimal exposure condi-
tions.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
182
9 Enter the gain calibration conditions to be

used for execution in [Exposure Param-
eters].
• Enter the tube voltage, tube current, exposure 4.15 Deployment to the installation
time, exposure distance, and remarks. locations and connection to the
institution network
4.17 Activation
4.18 Confirmation of the version of this

device
5
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.15 Deployment to the installation location

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • and connection to the institution network" first.
• After the gain calibration is completed, comments on ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
this calibration can be made in [Exposure Param-
eters], if necessary.
• Since the comments are retained until the next cali-
bration, they may be useful when performing the next
gain calibration. To next page
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
10 Press [Close].
11 Expose another image with the AeroDR
Detector that shows an error in the analy-
sis results and analyze it.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When performing the analysis of the AeroDR Detector
continuously after the gain calibration of the AeroDR
Detector, be careful not to change the positional rela-
tionship between the AeroDR Detector and the X-ray
tube.
Especially when the SID is small, the analysis result of
the AeroDR Detector may turn out [FAIL] if the position
is changed, so be careful.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the operation method, refer to steps 3 - 26 of the
"5.6.2 Analysis of AeroDR Detector".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
12 Confirm that the analysis result is [PASS].

• If [FAIL] is displayed again, troubleshoot the
problem according to the instructions displayed
on the screen.
183
Set the roaming environment when multiple exposure rooms are set. Also perform the setting of the startup linkage
of this device as necessary.
5.7.1 Workflow to set roaming environment
The workflow for setting a roaming environment is as follows.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• There are 2 types of RM: RM hybrid machine and RM client machine. This manual defines them respectively as follows.
–– RM hybrid machine: this device where RM is set as a hybrid type
5 –– RM client machine: this device where RM is set as a client type
• There is one RM hybrid machine in a roaming environment. The others are set as RM client machines.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 5.7.2 Advance preparation Perform on all units of this device.
2 5.7.3 RM client machine settings Perform on all RM client machines.
3 5.7.4 Consolidation of exposure room information Perform on the RM hybrid machine.
Was the merge successful?

NG
Perform when there is a duplication of device
ID, sub device ID, and IP address/port of the
OK AeroDR SYSTEM related devices.
4 5.7.6 Start of RM client machines Perform on all RM client machines.
5 5.7.7 Restart of RM hybrid machine Perform on the RM hybrid machine.
6 5.7.8 Restart of RM client machines Perform on all RM client machines.
7 5.7.9 Restart of AeroDR Detector Perform on all AeroDR Detectors.
184
5.7.2 Advance preparation
The advance preparation for setting a roaming envi-

ronment is as follows.

connected to the institution network and
are ready for network communications.

2 Turn on all units of this device.

5.7.3 RM client machine
5
settings
Perform the RM client machine settings.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not start the service tool and user tool on the RM
hybrid machine while performing the setting on an RM
client machine.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

powered on.
2 Start up the service tool on the RM client

machine.
185
5 Set [Unique ID] for [Device Information

Setting].
5 • Set a different unique ID (2-8) for each RM client

machine. 9 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set a different ID other than 1, as the unique ID for
each RM client machine. The unique ID for the RM
hybrid machine will be 1.
• Up to 8 units of this device (including the unit of this
device that was set as an RM hybrid machine) can be
set within the same segment.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

closed.
186
10 Set the following items in [RM setting]. 14 Press [OK] in AeroDR unit setting screen.

[Mode] Set as [Client].
[IP Address
Enter the IP address of the RM hybrid
of RM hybrid
machine.
machine]
[IP Address
Enter the IP address of the RM client
of RM client
machine.
machine]
5
11 Connect AeroDR I/F Cable, AeroDR Bat-
tery Charger, or AeroDR UF Cable with the

AeroDR Detector to be roamed.
12 Press [Download] in [AeroDR Detector

Setting].
15 Press [OK].
13 Press [Upload].
• Transfer of roaming information to the RM hy-

brid machine will start.
• The screen will close when the transfer is com-
pleted successfully.
• The modified setting information is uploaded to

187
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 5.7.4 Consolidation of exposure

• Depending on the amount of setting information to be
room information
transferred or the network connection environment,
transfer may take about 1 minute. Consolidate the setting of each exposure room (setting
• When transfer fails due to the causes below, an error of each RM client machine) with the RM hybrid ma-
screen will be displayed. Perform steps 14 to 15 again chine.
after eliminating the causes.
Cause
There is a network con-
Corrective actions
1 Confirm that the RM hybrid machine is
nection problem between powered on.
Check the network status
the RM hybrid machine
again.
and an RM client ma-
chine.
2 Start the service tool on the RM hybrid
The RM hybrid machine Restart the RM hybrid
machine.
has not started normally. machine.
5 The service tool or user
Exit the service tool or 3 Press the RM icon.
tool is used on the RM
user tool.
hybrid machine.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
16 Turn off the RM client machine.
188
4 Press [Merge]. 5 Select settings to be consolidated from

the list of [Mergeable Data], and press
[Merge].
• Recognize the RM client machine setting infor- 5

mation by [RoomID] and [CS-7 Console Device
ID].

• The file merge screen is displayed.
Display panel Display content IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Display a list for setting informa- • If there is duplication in the exposure room information
tion of each RM client machine which is to be integrated, such as in the device IDs,
[Data On Server]
retained with the RM hybrid ma- device sub-IDs, IP addresses, port numbers etc. of the
chine. AeroDR SYSTEM related devices, the duplicated de-
Display a list of setting information
[Mergeable Data] vice information is displayed in the [Error information]
sent from each client machine.
at the bottom section of the screen. Check the content,
delete the relevant device data from [Mergeable Data],
and then reset the device information.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
189
6 Press [OK]. 10 Exit the service tool, and move to the sys-
tem monitor screen.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When moving to the system monitor screen, a screen
prompting to restart is displayed. Do not perform re-
start, and continue the following operation while the
5
• If you mistakenly performed restart, then continue with
the following operation while the initial screen is dis-
played after restart.

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The setting of the selected RM client ma-

chine is consolidated.
7 Repeat steps 5 to 6 as many times as the

number of RM client machines.
8 Press [Close].
190
There may be a duplication of the device ID, sub device ID, IP address or port number of the AeroDR SYSTEM re-
lated devices when the merge fails in the "5.7.4 Consolidation of exposure room information".
Change the setting of the device information for the RM hybrid machine or the RM client machines.
O
OChanging the setting of the RM hybrid machine
Change the setting of the device information for the RM hybrid machine in accordance with the following flow.

1 setting screen

5

5.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector
3 communication

4 5.4.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting

5 5.4.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting

6 5.4.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting
Confirm the IP address of the AeroDR Detector, and

7 5.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting
5.7.4 Consolidation of exposure room

10 information
191
O
OChanging the setting of the RM client machines
Change the setting of the device information for the RM client machines in accordance with the following flow.
Start only the RM client machines that could not be

1 5.7.6 Start of RM client machines
merged.

2 setting screen


5
5.4.8 AeroDR I/F Cable setting Confirm the device ID and sub device ID of the AeroDR
5
5.4.9 AeroDR Battery Charger setting Confirm the device ID and sub device ID of the AeroDR
6
5.4.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting Confirm the device ID and sub device ID of the AeroDR
7
5.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting Confirm the IP address of the AeroDR Detector, and
8
11 5.7.3 RM client machine settings
5.7.4 Consolidation of exposure room

12 information
192
5.7.6 Start of RM client 5.7.8 Restart of RM client

machines machines
Start all RM client machines. Restart all the RM client machines.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Display the intermediate screen on all the

• Always start RM client machines one by one. RM client machines.
• Make sure that the initial screen is displayed before
starting the next RM client machine. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Starting multiple machines simultaneously will result in • For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to dis-
application error. In this case, turn off the power of all play the intermediate screen".
RM client machines, then start the machines one by ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
one again.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Press [Reboot] on the intermediate 5
screen.
1 Turn on RM client machines one by one.

5.7.7 Restart of RM hybrid
machine
Restart the RM hybrid machine.
1 Display the intermediate screen on the RM

hybrid machine.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5.7.9 Restart of AeroDR
Detector
screen.
Restart all the registered AeroDR Detectors.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the restart method, refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM
Operation Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
193
displayed.
5.7.10 Power on/off linkage
settings 3 Press [WakeOnLan ON/OFF].
When multiple units of this device are installed, they
can be started up together. Starting up 1 unit of this
device starts up the other units of this device at the
same time.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Perform the setting on this device that will turn the
power on/off.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5
• This device to perform the setting can be either RM 4 Select [PC1 WakeOn] - [PC8 WakeOn] to
hybrid machine or RM server machine. designate the number of units of this de-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • vice to be started up together.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

screen.
• Up to 8 CS-7s can be set.
• The [WOL(Wake ON LAN)Setting] screen is
194
5 Enter the MAC address of each unit of this

device to be started up together in [PC1 4.20 Optional installation and data
MAC Address] - [PC8 MAC Address], re- migration
spectively.
4.21 Backup of the setting data of this
device
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.20 Optional installation and data migration"
first.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • To next page

• MAC address can be confirmed by executing [ipconfig
/all] in the Windows command prompt. The value dis-
played in the [Physical Address] in the ipconfig screen
is the MAC address.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6 Press [OK].
195

5.8.2 Delivery

tions.
1 Perform a series of exposures under the • Provide a description of user tool for administra-
5 2 Confirm that there is no problem with the IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

posed images. istrator of this device; you should however provide op-
5.8 Final operation check and handover
erators with a description of the method as needed. Be

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • sure to make the settings for adding AeroDR Detector
size to Exam. Tag when setting AeroDR 1717HQ.
• When using this device in Aero Sync mode, explain
tion.
the relationship between the exposure condition range
and the X-ray sensitivity based on the result of the
mission from institution management personnel.
Aero Sync signal acquisition. And if it is requested ac-
• Take particular care in the following cases.
cording to the user's case of usage, modify the X-ray
detection level and Aero Sync button setting.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Confirm that there is no abnormality, such as an over-
lap of the density patch, in the diagnostic image. 2 Clean up to complete the installation.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • The installation of this device is now complete.
196
Chapter
6
Installation Procedure for
This Device and REGIUS
This chapter describes the installation workflow, pre-installation checks,
installation tasks, and post installation checks of this device and REGIUS.
197
6.1 The workflow to install this device and REGIUS
Installation operation flow of this device and REGIUS is as follows.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there are multiple units of this device (multiple exposure rooms), configure the units in the following order: Main unit
with the JM built in → backup unit with the JM built in → others. In this case, perform the operations for flow No. 17 on all
units of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 4.3 Check of bundled items
3 4.5 Setting of touch panel
6 5 6.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices

6.1 The workflow to install this device and REGIUS
7 6.4 Activation of REGIUS icon
8 6.5 REGIUS setting
6.6 Check and setting ad- 6.7 Check and setting ad-
11 justments of REGIUS justments of REGIUS
110/110HQ images 170/190/210 images
12 6.8 Connection of this device and REGIUS to the institution network
14 4.17 Activation
16 6.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS
17 6.10 REGIUS common environment setting
20 4.22 Final operation check and delivery
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation of the sections enclosed with the dotted line in above flow, refer to the respective sections of "Chapter 4
Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
198
6.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices
Perform the following beforehand.

6.2.2 Startup of devices
Turn on this device and REGIUS.
4.5 Setting of touch panel 1 Turn on the monitor, and then this device.
4.6 Registration of license 2 Turn on the power breaker of REGIUS.
3 Press the operation switch of REGIUS to

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • turn on the power.
• Refer to "4.3 Check of bundled items" first. • The initialization process will start. When com-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • pleted, "READY" is displayed in the message
display area.
6

6.2.1 Temporary connections
of devices
Temporarily connect this device and REGIUS.
1 Connect this device and REGIUS by

means of a hub or an Ethernet cable.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Be sure to perform settings of REGIUS on a 1-to-1 basis.
• When an optional add-in Ethernet board is installed in
this device, connect a hub or an Ethernet cable to the
standard port of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
199

screen.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6 • When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
formation Setting].

• The sub-menu screen is displayed. [Institution Input the institution address.

Number]

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
backed up settings.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
200
5 Set the following items in [Device Informa- 6 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.
tion Setting].
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Manufacturer name is displayed. User Tool Screen".
[Maker Name] Default setting: KONICA MINOLTA
This content cannot be changed. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6
[Model Name] Default setting: CS-7

[Station AE
Title]
[Console
name]
Input "1-255" as ID to specify this
[Unique ID] Change is not necessary if only 1 unit
of this device is installed.
Default setting: 1
[Exam Room
10 characters.
Name]
Default setting: CS-7#1
Default setting: the version name of
[Version] factured.
updated.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When installing multiple units of this device, enter a
different [Unique ID] for each one starting from 1.
backed up settings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
201
6.4 Activation of REGIUS icon
Turn on the connection to the target REGIUS to enable 3 Press [Close].

the configuration.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Icons for the number of purchased licenses are dis-
played. Turn on only the connection to the REGIUS to
be installed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Press the REGIUS icon.
6
• Connection is turned on and display of the RE-

GIUS icon will change.
4 Exit the service tool.
5 Restart this device.
2 Select the connection check box.
202
6.5 REGIUS setting
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

• When there are multiple units of this device (mul-
tiple exposure rooms), configure the units in
the following order: Main unit with the JM built
in → backup unit with the JM built in → others.
"6.5.4 REGIUS setting" should be performed only us-
ing the first of this device (main JM built-in).
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6.5.1 Displaying the CR unit

setting screen
Display the CR unit setting screen to set up REGIUS.
6
2 Press the JM icon on the service tool
6.5 REGIUS setting

screen.
• The CR unit setting screen is displayed.

• Next, set the items from the top of the screen in
order.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but the
setting screen remains displayed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
203
6.5 REGIUS setting
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6.5.2 Basic settings of REGIUS • [BarCodeRegistration] is the method to register the
correspondence of the CR cassette and the Exam.
Set the [Cassette Barcode Registration Method], the Tag using the barcode on the CR cassette. The use of
[Console HostName] and the [Console IP Address]. this registration method enables this device to receive
images from multiple REGIUS.
1 Set the following items in [Basic Settings]. • [AppointmentReadingTurn] is the method to register
the correspondence of the CR cassette and the Exam.
Tag when the CR cassette is loaded to the REGIUS.
This method can be selected only when this device
and REGIUS are connected as 1 to 1 and images are
received.
• [Console IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Default
Gateway] will be blank when the add-in Ethernet board
is used. Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default
Setting item Settings gateway of the REGIUS connection on the console.
Select the cassette barcode registra- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Cassette tion method.
6 Barcode Select from [BarCodeRegistration]
Registration and [AppointmentReadingTurn].
Method] Default setting: AppointmentReading-
Turn
6.5 REGIUS setting
Input a console name (c_name) to

[Console
distinguish this device.
HostName]
Default setting: CS1-0001
Input IP address of this device to be
registered in REGIUS.
[Console IP Default setting: 192.168.20.90
Address] The set IP address is for registration
in REGIUS. The IP address of this
device is not changed.
Input subnet mask of this device to be
registered in REGIUS.
[Subnet Default setting: 255.255.255.0
Mask] The set subnet mask is for registration
in REGIUS. The subnet mask of this
device is not changed.
Input default gateway of this device to
be registered in REGIUS.
Default setting: None
[Default
The set default gateway is for registra-
Gateway]
tion in REGIUS. The default gateway
of this device is not changed.
The default gateway can be omitted.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• In case of an n-to-m connection system, [BarCode
Registration] must be selected for [Cassette Barcode
Registration Method].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
204
6.5 REGIUS setting
2 Set up the backup JM with [JM Settings]

6.5.3 JM setting as necessary.
Set JM (Job Manager).
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• JM is a PostgreSQL to mediate commands between
this device and REGIUS.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Set the main JM in [Job Manager Set-

tings].

Select when you are using a backup
[Device
JM.
Registration] 6
Default setting: OFF
Select to internally install the backup
JM in this device.
[Built-In]
6.5 REGIUS setting

This cannot be selected if the main JM
is internally installed.
Select to link shut down of the backup
JM to that of this device.
[Remote
Shutdown]
Setting item Settings If the backup JM is internally installed
then this setting is fixed at "ON".
Select to internally install the main JM
[Built-In] in this device. Input the IP address of this device in
Default setting: ON which the backup JM is installed, if the
backup JM is not internally installed.
Select to link shut down of the main [IP Address] Default setting: 127.0.0.1
JM to that of this device. If the backup JM is internally in-
[Remote
Default setting: ON stalled, then the IP address is fixed at
Shutdown]
If the main JM is internally installed "127.0.0.1".
then this setting is fixed at "ON".
Displays the backup JM host name.
Input the IP address of this device in [Backup JM
Default setting: JM1-0002
which the main JM is installed, if the Host Name]
Cannot be changed.
main JM is not internally installed.
[IP Address] Default setting: 127.0.0.1 Select when a JM built in of CS-3/5 is
If the main JM is internally installed [Use CS-3 JM] being used in the backup JM.
then the IP address is fixed at Default setting: OFF
"127.0.0.1".
Displays the main JM host name.
[Main JM
Default setting: JM1-0001
Host Name]
Cannot be changed.
Select when a JM built in of CS-3/5 is
[Use CS-3 JM] being used in the main JM.
205
6.5 REGIUS setting
3 Set the port number in [CS-X Communica-

tion Setting] as required. 6.5.4 REGIUS setting
Set up REGIUS.
1 Set up [Reader IP Address] in [CR Cas-

sette Reader Settings].
Sets the port number to be used for
[Port Num- communicating changes in JM be-
ber] tween the consoles.
Default setting: 313133
• Input the IP address of REGIUS to be set up.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the CS-3/5 and this device are used in a mixed 2 Press [Download].
environment, always set the port numbers of [System
6 Info.] → [CS-X Network] → [Communication Setting]
to be the same using the CS-3/5 service tool.
• When CS-3/5 and this device are used on the same
network without a mixed environment, set the port
6.5 REGIUS setting
numbers of [System Info.] → [CS-x Network] → [Com-

munication Setting] using the CS-3/5 service tool so • Information of the REGIUS is acquired and dis-
that it uses a different port number from this port num- played in [CR Cassette Reader Settings].
ber.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Confirm the acquired contents and set the
following items in [CR Cassette Reader
Settings] as necessary.

Select the type of REGIUS among
[REGIUS110], [REGIUS110HQ],
[Reader Type]
[REGIUS170/190], and [REGIUS210].
Default setting: REGIUS210
Input a REGIUS host name (r_name)
[Reader Host
to identify REGIUS.
Name]
Default setting: r170_0001
[Reader IP Ad- Input IP address of REGIUS.
dress] Default setting: 192.168.20.170
Input the REGIUS name to display on
[Reader the system monitor and device icon
Name] screen.
Select the REGIUS with startup and
shutdown synchronized to this device.
[Power Con-
trol]
After registration, the saved status is
displayed on the JM.
206
6.5 REGIUS setting
Setting item Settings O

OWhen there are multiple REGIUS devices (n-
Select the REGIUS with error notifica-
to-m connection)
tion synchronized to this device.
[Error Notice] Default setting: OFF 1 Remove the REGIUS configured from the
hub, then connect another REGIUS to be
configured.
Setting this item to [ON] enables recep-
tion of images resent from REGIUS.
Default setting: Differs depending on 2 Turn on the power breaker of REGIUS.
[Reader Type].
[REGIUS 110]: ON (can
[Image Retry]
be changed) 3 Press the operation switch of REGIUS to
[REGIUS 110HQ]: ON turn on the power.
(cannot be changed) • Initialization process will start. When completed,
[REGIUS 170/190]: OFF
(cannot be changed)
"READY" is displayed in the message display
[REGIUS 210]: ON area.
(cannot be changed)
4 Set the IP address of REGIUS to be addi-
tionally set, and press [Download]. 6
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The default setting to re-transfer images for REGIUS
110 varies depending on the version.
6.5 REGIUS setting

–– Earlier than Ver.1.10: OFF
–– Ver.1.10 or later: ON
• Press [Hosts] to display the edit screen for Hosts files
downloaded from REGIUS.
5 Perform the same operation as the first

REGIUS.
–– Press [New] to add a new combination of host name

and IP address.
–– Press [Edit] to modify the registered Hosts files.
–– Press [Delete] to delete a registered Hosts file. To
close the Hosts file edit screen, press [X] on the top
right of the screen.
• [Basic Settings], [Job Manager Settings], and [CR
Cassette Reader Settings] of REGIUS set on the CR
unit setting screen are added automatically when up-
loading to REGIUS.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Press [Upload] for the set REGIUS.
• Restart REGIUS.
207
6.5 REGIUS setting
When all settings of REGIUS are completed, save the

settings and close the CR unit setting screen.
1 Press [OK] on the CR unit setting screen.
6
6.5 REGIUS setting
4.11 Setting of the IP address of this de-

vice
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
first.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
To next page
208
6.6 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 110/110HQ images
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• When there are multiple units of this device (multiple • Use the largest size CR cassette on site for testing.
exposure rooms), confirm REGIUS images and adjust ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
settings using only the main unit with the JM built in.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 4 Insert a CR cassette into REGIUS
110/110HQ.
• The images read from the CR cassette are dis-
6.6.1 Check of the image qual- played on the monitor.
ity of REGIUS 110/110HQ
Check the image quality and adjust the settings of RE- 5 Finish the exposure.
GIUS 110/110HQ.
1 Confirm that the monitor, this device, and
the REGIUS 110/110HQ are powered on. 7 Press the device icon of the REGIUS
6
110/110HQ to check the images.
2 For bar code registration, read the CR
cassette bar code with a bar code reader.

• For bar code registration, the CR cassette bar
code is displayed on the order.
• For reading order specification, press order to
display [#1].
3 Expose to get a solid image with a test CR

cassette.
• Expose in the following conditions.
- Voltage: 80 kV (fixed)
- mAs value: 10 mAs
- Distance between plate and tube: approx. 2 m
• Expose while aligning the perpendicular direc-
tion of the tube to the vertical direction of the
CR cassette. The blue line of the CR cassette
comes below.
2m
Perpendicular • The sub-menu screen is displayed.

to the tube Vertical direction
Put blue line of the CR cassette
downward
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
AeroDR Detector.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
209
8 Press [Image]. 10 Select [IMG File (*.IMG)] in [Files of type].
11 Open the folder named after the date of

exposure in the [C:KonicaMinolta\Con-
sole\Data\Image] folder, select the latest
file in the folder, and press [Open].
6
• The file with the largest number is the latest.
• The image analysis screen is displayed.
9 Press [File] and select [Open].
• The solid image read by REGIUS is displayed.
210
12 Press [Display] and select [Density/con- 16 Enclose the entire image with a yellow
trast]. cross cursor.
• The contrast screen is displayed.
13 Press [Analysis] and select [Horizontal

Profile].

• The horizontal profile screen is displayed.
14 Adjust the slider on the contrast screen

so that the difference between [Black] and
[White] is about 400.
• The horizontal profile within the range enclosed

with a cross cursor is displayed on the horizon-
tal profile screen.
17 Confirm that the horizontal profile is al-

most horizontal.
15 Adjust the [Center] slider to the position • If an image is not corrected properly, the hori-
where the unevenness of the image can zontal profile forms the shape of an arch.
be observed most clearly. Example: without proper correction
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When a large inclination and undulation in the hori-
zontal profile is observed, errors may have occurred in
REGIUS. For a solution, refer to REGIUS Installation/
Service Manual.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
211
18 Press [File] and select [Exit]. 6.6.2 Check of the pixel count
and the reading start posi-
tion of REGIUS 110/110HQ
Check the pixel count and the reading start position of
REGIUS 110/110HQ.
1 Read the CR cassette used for exposing a

solid image with REGIUS 110/110HQ.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 1-5 of "6.6.1 Check of
the image quality of REGIUS 110/110HQ".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6
• Check the read images of the other connected 3 Press the device icon for REGIUS
REGIUS with the same procedure. 110/110HQ, which checks the image, and
display the image analysis screen.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
the image quality of REGIUS 110/110HQ".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
212
5 Select [IMG File (*.IMG)] in [Files of type]. 7 Select [Display] - [Display Size] - [1/1 Im-
age].
8 Read the X coordinates on the right and

6 Open the folder named after the date of left edges and the Y coordinates on the
exposure in the [C:KonicaMinolta\Con- upper and lower edges of the plate.
sole\Data\Image] folder, select the image
read in step 1, and press [Open].

• The pixel count (the size of the fluorescent me-

dium) in the horizontal (main scanning) direction
of the image is measured.
9 Confirm that the pixel count read is within

the allowable range.
Horizontal direction Vertical direction
14" x 17" 2022 + 10 pixels 2460 + 12 pixels
14" x 14" 2022 + 10 pixels 2022 + 10 pixels
10 Select [Display] - [Display Size] - [1/1 Im-

age].
213
11 Read the margins of the plate on the H_sync 13 Press [File] and select [Exit].
side (the left side of the image) and the top.
6

Allowable range
H_sync side
33 ± 10 pixels
(left side of image)
Top margin 33 ± 10 pixels
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the pixel count is beyond the allowable range,
adjust the image size and position according to the
steps in "6.6.3 Adjustment of the settings of the image
size and position of REGIUS 110/110HQ".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
214
6.6.3 Adjustment of the settings

4 Correct the setting values for [H-Magnifi-
cation] and [V-Magnification] of [PLL (Im-
of the image size and posi- age size)].
tion of REGIUS 110/110HQ
When the pixel count exceeds the permissible range,
adjust the image size and position using "6.6.2 Check
of the pixel count and the reading start position of RE-
GIUS 110/110HQ".
2 Press the device icon of the REGIUS

110/110HQ to adjust the settings of im-
ages. Measured pixel count Settings of H-Magnification
Put within the range by
More than 2022 ± 10 pixels
decreasing
3 Press [Device].
Put within the range by
Less than 2022 ± 10 pixels 6
increasing
Measured pixel count Settings of V-Magnification

More than 2460 ± 12 pixels Put within the range by
(2022 ± 10 for 14" x 14") decreasing
Less than 2460 ± 12 pixels Put within the range by
(2022 ± 10 for 14" x 14") increasing
• Rough estimation: By adding 20 to the horizon-

tal direction and 2 to the vertical direction, the
size of the fluorescent medium becomes 1 pixel
larger.
5 Input the shift pixel count to be shifted in

[H-Shift] of [Image Position].
• The device parameter settings screen is dis-

• A positive number causes a right shift; a nega-
played.
tive number causes a left shift.
215
6 Input the shift pixel count to be shifted in 8 Press [Exit].

[V-Shift] of [Image Position].
• A positive number causes an upward shift; a IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

negative number causes a downward shift. • About Jitter Offset and Jitter Correction
The Jitter Offset and Jitter Correction have the factory
7 Press [Send]. setting values; they are different in each optical unit.
When the replacement of optical units is conducted at
6
sites such as hospitals, set the Jitter Offset and Jitter
Correction attached to the optical units.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The corrected values are sent to REGIUS

110/110HQ.
216
6.7 Check and setting adjustments of REGIUS 170/190/210 images
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 6.7.2 Check of the pixel count

• When there are multiple units of this device (multiple
exposure rooms), confirm REGIUS images and adjust
settings using only the main unit with the JM built in.
tion of REGIUS 170/190/210
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Check the pixel count and the reading start position of
REGIUS 170/190/210.
6.7.1 Check of the image quality
of REGIUS 170/190/210 1 Read the CR cassette used for exposing a
solid image with REGIUS 170/190/210.
Check the image quality and adjust the settings of RE-
GIUS 170/190/210.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • the image quality of REGIUS 110/110HQ".
• For the operation, refer to "6.6.1 Check of the image ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6
quality of REGIUS 110/110HQ".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 2 Start the service tool.

170/190/210 to check the images.
217
4 Press [Image]. 6 Select [IMG File (*.IMG)] in [Files of type].
7 Open the folder named after the date of

exposure in the [C:KonicaMinolta\Con-
sole\Data\Image] folder, select the image
read in step 1, and press [Open].
6
• The image analysis screen is displayed.
218
8 Select [Display] - [Display Size] - [1/1 Im- 12 Confirm that the margins of the plate are
age]. within the allowable range in the H_sync
side (the left side of an image).
9 Read the X coordinates on the right and

left edges and the Y coordinates on the
upper and lower edges of the plate.

• Check that the margins are 60-70 pixels.
13 Press [File] and select [Exit].
• The pixel count (the size of the fluorescent me-

dium) in the horizontal (main scanning) direction
of the image is measured.

• Check that pixel count is 4041-4056.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the pixel count is beyond the allowable range,
adjust the PLL value and the reading start position
according to the procedure in "6.7.3 Adjustment of
PLL value and the reading start position of REGIUS
170/190/210".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
11 Select [Display] - [Display Size] - [1/1 Im-

age].
219
6.7.3 Adjustment of PLL value

4 Correct the setting of [General (velocity
1.5x)] for "PLL".
tion of REGIUS 170/190/210
When the pixel count exceeds the permissible range
in "6.7.2 Check of the pixel count and the reading
start position of REGIUS 170/190/210", adjust the PLL
value and the reading start position.

170/190/210 to adjust the settings of im- Measured pixel count PLL value setting
ages. More than 4056 pixels Decrease

Less than 4041 pixels Increase
3 Press [Device]. • The relation between the pixel count in the gen-
6 eral high-definition (87.5 μm) and the PLL value
is 1 pixel = PLL value x 1.3 (approximately).
5 Input the direction and distance to be

shifted in [Sign] and [Pixels (High)] of
[Reader Start Point].
• [Sign] + : M oves in the direction away from

H_sync.
[Sign] - : Moves in the direction toward H_sync.
• [Pixels (High)] :
Input the value of the pixel count to be
shifted.
• The device parameter settings screen is dis-

played.
220
6 Press [Send].
• The corrected values are sent to REGIUS

170/190/210.
7 Press [Exit].
221
6.8 Connection of this device and REGIUS to the institution network
Install this device (in which settings have been IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

completed), REGIUS, and peripheral devices in
• When a network of two systems is used, connect the
the installation location and connect them to the
REGIUS and the unit of this device with the JM built in
institution's network hub.
to the local network hub.
1 Install this device, REGIUS, and peripheral Dedicated JM unit connection example
For 1 system
devices in the installation site. JM-only
CS-7 #1 CS-7 #2 CS-7
Printer
2 Connect this device to the institution's
network hub with an Ethernet cable.
Institution network
RIS/IDS
This device (rear) Host
REGIUS REGIUS REGIUS
For 2 systems
6.8 Connection of this device and REGIUS to the institution network
Hub (local network side) JM-only

CS-7 #1 CS-7 #2 CS-7
Printer

Local
network
Host

(add-in Ethernet board) (built-in Ethernet) Institution network
RIS/IDS
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3 Connect REGIUS and the optional items
to the institution's network hub with an
Ethernet cables.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to install an additional Ethernet board, refer to
"12.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board". 4.17 Activation
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 If there is a unit of this device used as a
dedicated JM, connect it to the institu-
tion's network hub using an Ethernet Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
cable.
• Refer to "4.16 Peripheral devices setting" first.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
To next page
222
6.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS
Store the setting data of REGIUS on this device. 3 Press [PCB].

whose setting data you should back up.

• The REGIUS PCB screen is displayed.
4 Press [Create Reader PCB Data backup

on CS Side].
• The setting data is sent from REGIUS to this de-

vice.
223
5 Press [Exit].
• Make a backup of setting data for all REGIUS

devices with same procedure.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• It is not possible to press [Restore] - [Save the Reader
PCB data backed up at the CS side to Reader] when
this device has not backed up the setting data.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6
224
6.10 REGIUS common environment setting
When multiple units of this device are installed, the 5 Press the JM icon on the service tool
settings configured in "6.5 REGIUS setting" on the 1st screen.
unit of this device are shared between all units of this
device.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6
screen.

225
6 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. 8 Press [Download] on all the REGIUS.
• Information of the REGIUS is acquired and dis-

played on [CR Cassette Reader Settings].
9 Confirm the following items in all the

REGIUS.
6 • Enter any items that have not been set.

Select the type of REGIUS among
[REGIUS 110], [REGIUS 110HQ],

[Reader Type] [REGIUS 170/190], and [REGIUS
210].
Default setting: REGIUS 210
Input the REGIUS name to display on
[Reader Host the system monitor and device icon
Name] screen.
Select the REGIUS with startup and
shutdown synchronized to this device.
[Power Con-
trol]
Select the REGIUS with error notifica-
• The CR unit setting screen is displayed.
tion synchronized to this device.
[Error Notice] Default setting: OFF
7 Confirm [Reader IP Address] of all the After registration, the saved status is
REGIUS in [CR Cassette Reader Set-
tings]. Setting this item to [ON] enables
reception of images resent from
REGIUS.
Default setting: Differs depending on
[Reader Type].
[REGIUS 110]: ON (can
[Image Retry] be changed)
[REGIUS 110HQ]: ON
• Enter the IP address if it has not been set. (cannot be changed)
[REGIUS 170/190]: OFF
(cannot be changed)
[REGIUS 210]: ON (can-
not be changed)
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The default setting to re-transfer images for REGIUS
110 varies depending on the version.
–– Earlier than Ver.1.10: OFF
–– Ver.1.10 or later: ON
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
226
10 Press [Upload] in all the REGIUS.
11 Press [OK] on the CR unit setting screen.
• Restart the REGIUS.

4.20 Optional installation and data
migration

device
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • •
• Refer to "4.20 Optional installation and data migration"
first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • •
227
228
Chapter
7
The Mixed Installation Procedure
for This Device, AeroDR
SYSTEM and REGIUS
This chapter describes the workflow, pre-installation checks, installation tasks, and post-installation
checks for mixed installation of this device, the AeroDR SYSTEM, and REGIUS.
229
7.1 The workflow to install this device, AeroDR SYSTEM and REGIUS
Installation operation flow of this device, the AeroDR SYSTEM and the REGIUS is as follows.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there is only 1 unit of this device (1 exposure room), the operations for flow Nos. 19 to 20 do not need to be per-
formed.
• The following are precautionary items for when there are multiple units of this device (multiple exposure rooms).
– Install this device in the following order: main JM built-in this device→backup JM built-in this device→others.
– Repeat the tasks from flow number 1 to 18 to set each unit of this device, and then perform the tasks from flow number 19
to 20.
– "6.5 REGIUS setting" for flow No. 9 should be performed using the 1st unit of this device only. The settings can be
imported for the 2nd and subsequent units of this device in "6.10 REGIUS common environment setting" for flow No. 20.
– Flow No. 14 should be performed using the 1st unit of this device only. It is not necessary to confirm REGIUS images and
adjust settings with the 2nd and subsequent units of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 4.3 Check of bundled items
7
3
5 7.2 Temporary connections and startup of devices
7 7.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices and REGIUS icon
9 6.5 REGIUS setting
12 4.14 Analysis of AeroDR Detector
13 7.4 Connection of this device, AeroDR SYSTEM, and REGIUS to the institution network
6.6 Check and setting 6.7 Check and setting

14 adjustments of REGIUS adjustments of REGIUS
110/110HQ images 170/190/210 images
230
16 4.17 Activation
18 6.9 Backup of the setting data of REGIUS
20 6.10 REGIUS common environment setting
23 4.22 Final operation check and delivery 7
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operations of the sections enclosed with the dotted line in above flow, refer to the respective sections of the
"Chapter 4 Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)" or "Chapter 6 Installation
Procedure for This Device and REGIUS".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
231
Perform the following beforehand.

7.2.2 Startup of devices
Turn on this device, the AeroDR SYSTEM, and the
REGIUS.

1 Turn on the monitor, and then this device.
2 Turn on the AeroDR SYSTEM.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.3 Check of bundled items" first. 3 Turn on the power breaker of REGIUS.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Press the operation switch of REGIUS to

turn on the power.
• The initialization process will start. When completed,
7
"READY" is displayed in the message display area.
7.2.1 Temporary connections

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
of devices
• Charges of the AeroDR Detector may be 0%, so
Make temporary connections of this device, the always turn on the power switch of the AeroDR
AeroDR SYSTEM and the REGIUS. Detector after connecting the AeroDR I/F Cable.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Connect this device and the hub to which

AeroDR SYSTEM is connected using an
Ethernet cable.

2 Connect the REGIUS and the hub to which
AeroDR SYSTEM is connected using an
Ethernet cable.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.8 System setting of this device".
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If there are multiple AeroDR Detectors, connect them
1 by 1.
• Be sure to perform settings of REGIUS on 1-to-1
basis. To next page
• When an optional add-in Ethernet board is installed
in this device, connect a hub or a LAN cable to the
standard port of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
232
7.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices and REGIUS icon
Turn on the connection to the AeroDR SYSTEM related devices and the target REGIUS to perform the settings.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Turn on the connection only for the devices to be installed.
• The connection may be turned on already depending on the devices. Turn off the connection for the devices that will not be
installed if they are turned on.
• Icons for the number of purchased licenses are displayed. Turn on only the connection to the REGIUS to be installed.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices, refer to "4.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices".
• For the activation of REGIUS icon, refer to "6.4 Activation of REGIUS icon".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7.3 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices and REGIUS icon

6.5 REGIUS setting
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.10 Setting of AeroDR SYSTEM" and "6.5 REGIUS setting" first.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
To next page
233
7.4 Connection of this device, AeroDR SYSTEM, and
REGIUS to the institution network
After completing the settings, install this device, the 5 If there is a unit of this device used as a
AeroDR SYSTEM, REGIUS, and peripheral devices dedicated JM, connect it to the institution's
in the installation location and connect them to the
institution's network hub. network hub using an Ethernet cable.
1 Install this device, AeroDR SYSTEM, IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

REGIUS, and peripheral devices in the • When a network of two systems is used, connect the
installation location. REGIUS and the unit of this device with the JM built in
to the local network hub.
2 Connect this device to the network hub of
Dedicated JM unit connection example
the institution with an Ethernet cable. For 1 system
JM-only
CS-7 #1 CS-7 #2 CS-7
This device (rear)
Printer
Institution network
RIS/IDS
Host
7 Hub (local network side)
7.4 Connection of this device, AeroDR SYSTEM, and REGIUS to the institution network

For 2 systems
JM-only
CS-7 #1 CS-7 #2 CS-7
Printer

Local
(Add-in Ethernet (built-in Ethernet) network
board) Host
3 Connect AeroDR SYSTEM to the network

hub of the institution with an Ethernet cable.
Institution network
RIS/IDS
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When using 2 network systems, AeroDR SYSTEM
should be connected to the hub of the local network.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to install an additional Ethernet board, refer to
"12.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Connect REGIUS and the optional items

to the institution’s network hub using an
Ethernet cable.
234
6.6 Check and setting adjustments of

REGIUS 110/110HQ images
or
6.7 Check and setting adjustments of
REGIUS 170/190/210 images
4.17 Activation

device

7
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "6.6 Check and setting adjustments of REGI-
US 110/110HQ images" and "4.16 Peripheral devices
setting" first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
235
236
Chapter
8
This chapter describes the installation of this device and AeroDR Potable RF Unit (S-SRM connection).
* Not used in Japan.
237
AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Portable RF Unit/CS-7 Wired connection/S-SRM) as follows.
O
O Stand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Portable RF Unit/
CS-7 Wired Connection/S-SRM
AeroDR Detector registration side(exposure room side hub)
AeroDR Hub
I/F Cable
Power Hub
8
8.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR Portable RF Unit

Hub
AeroDR Portable
RF Kit
AeroDR Detector
Access
Power
point
CS-7 Power
XGIF
ECB
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable
Portable X-ray diagnostic device
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To connect this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit using wireless connection, connect them using wired connection
first, and then modify the setting to wireless connection referring to "13.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this device".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
238
8.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR Portable RF Unit
(S-SRM connection)
The installation operating process for this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit (S-SRM connection) is as follows.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the AeroDR Portable RF Unit (S-SRM connection) is used at 1 place (exposure room, patient's room, etc.) for exposure,
flow number 18 is not necessary.
• If there are multiple units of this device, repeat the tasks from flow number 1 to 17 to set each exposure room, then perform
the tasks of flow number 18 to 22.
• For the operations of the sections enclosed with the dotted line in following flow, refer to the respective sections of "Chapter
4 Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)". Exchange the terms as following at that
time.
–– "this device" → "this device for portable"
–– "AeroDR Generator Interface Unit" → "AeroDR Portable RF Unit"
–– "AeroDR Access Point"→ "AeroDR Access Point built-in in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit"
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the installation procedure of AeroDR Portable RF Unit (S-SRM connection), refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Ser-
vice Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
8
239
The workflow to install AeroDR Portable

RF Unit (S-SRM connection)
1 8.3 Check of bundled items 1 7.3 Installation of respective devices
2 8.4 Check of startup 2 7.4 Temporary connection and startup checks
3 8.5 Hardware setting of this device

5 Portable RF Unit
6 8.7 System setting of this device 3 7.5 Setting up the CS-7
7 8.8 Setting of user tool
8.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM

8 related devices

10 device
8
7.6 Charging of the AeroDR Detector and
4
11 4.12 Restart of this device confirmation of its wireless status
12 8.11 Delay time setting 5 7.7 Delay time setting
7.8 Exposure test and AeroDR Detector

13 8.12 Analysis of AeroDR Detector 6 analysis
8.13 Deployment to the installation loca-

14 tions and connection to the institu- 7 7.9 Placement in the installation locations
tion network
15 4.16 Peripheral devices setting 7.10 Installation in Portable X-ray

8 diagnostic device
16 4.17 Activation
7.16 Connection of the Ethernet cable
4.18 Confirmation of the version of this 9 and the power cables
17 device
19 8.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point
21 8.15 Network configuration for each area

22 device
240

Main body of this 1
device
Power cable 1
AC adapter 1
Battery pack 1
Digitizer pen 1
Cable for pen 1
Dedicated cloth 1
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
241

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Start up this device and check that the initial screen is
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Turn on this device.
the system start up screen is displayed.
accessories • Upon completion of initialization, the initial
Attach the accessories to this device. screen is displayed, and this device is ready for
operation.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • The initial screen

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
O
8 1 Attach the pen to this device with the pen

cable.
O

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
2 Hold the battery pack so the connector is
Connector
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

packs.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
242
8.5 Hardware setting of this device
8.5.1 Attachment of external

4 Connect this device and the external CD/
DVD drive with a USB cable.
CD/DVD drive • Driver is automatically installed.
A CD/DVD drive is required for setting or update dur-

ing the portable X-ray device operation. If a CD/DVD 5 Restart this device.
drive is not equipped on this device, attach an external
CD/DVD drive to this device with following procedure.
Recommended parts and conditions for of the touch panel
the external CD/DVD drive
Item Conditions Adjust the touch panel coordinates, if it is out of align-
OS Windows 7 compliant ment.
Language Support for the installed OS
USB USB2.0
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Drive The CD-ROM can be read.
Reading speed 16 speed or higher • For the Adjusting the position of the touch panel, refer
to "4.5.2 Adjusting the position of the touch panel".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• BUFFALO DVSM-PN58U2V is used as an example
here. The operation might be different depending on
the device used. For details, refer to the operation 8
manual of the device used.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

1 Make sure that this device is powered on.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.6 Registration of license".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
To next page
diate screen.
243
8.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR Portable RF Unit
8.6.1 Temporary connections of 8.6.2 Startup of respective

AeroDR Portable RF Unit devices
Make temporary connections of this device, AeroDR Turn on this device, the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and
Portable RF Unit and all peripheral devices. all peripheral devices.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Turn on this device.

• If there are multiple AeroDR Detectors, connect them 2 Turn on the AeroDR Portable RF Unit and
1 by 1. all peripheral devices.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Connect the USB cable of the hub for por-
• Charges of the AeroDR Detector may be 0%, so al-
table X-ray device side to this device.
ways turn on the power switch of the AeroDR Detector
after charging.
2 Connect the Ethernet cable to be connect- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ed to the hub for portable X-ray device
side to this device.
8 3 Connect the Ethernet cable connected to

this device to the hub for the portable X-
ray device side.
8.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR Portable RF Unit
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the temporary connections of devices, refer to
"AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Connect the Ethernet cables (2 cables)

connected to the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
to the hub for the portable X-ray device.
5 Connect the Ethernet cable to be connect-

ed to the hub for the portable X-ray device
side to the hub for the AeroDR Detector
registration side.

the hub for the AeroDR Detector registra-
tion side to the hub for the portable X-ray
device side.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When an optional USB wired LAN adapter is installed
in this device, connect a hub or an Ethernet cable to
the standard port of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
244

screen.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

formation Setting].
8

• The sub-menu screen is displayed. [Institution Input the institution address.

Number]

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
backed up settings.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
245
5 Set the following items in [Device Informa- 6 Set the following item of [S-SRM X-ray Ex-
tion Setting]. posure sync setting].

Select the setting from among [CR
[S-SRM X-ray mode], [DR mode] and [Manual mode]
Exposure in [S-SRM X-ray Exposure sync
sync mode] mode].
Default setting: [CR mode]
[Display the
message that Select this if the message indicating
Setting item Settings the X-ray device is not synchronized
X-ray device is
appears while selecting the CR expo-
Manufacturer name is displayed. non-interlock
sure conditions in [Manual mode].
[Maker Name] Default setting: KONICA MINOLTA mode when
This item cannot be selected in [CR
This content cannot be changed. CR Exam is mode] or [DR mode].
selected]
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
ber] This content cannot be changed. • To set the [S-SRM X-ray Exposure sync mode] setting
[Station AE to [CR mode] or [DR mode], leave No. 3 of the ECB
8 Input the station AE title.
Title] board dip switch "SW2" of the AeroDR Generator In-
[Console terface Unit off.
name] • To set the [S-SRM X-ray Exposure sync mode] setting
Input "1-255" as ID to specify this to [Manual mode], switch on No. 3 of the ECB board
device on the institution network. dip switch "SW2" of the AeroDR Generator Interface
[Unique ID] Change is not necessary if only 1 unit
Unit.
of this device is installed.
Default setting: 1 ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Exam Room
Name]
10 characters. 7 Select [Enable Portable Mode] in [Portable
Default setting: CS-7 #1 Setting].
[Version] factured.
updated.
8 Set the following item in [Monitor Set-
tings].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
ment settings". Setting item Settings
• For [Station AE Title], the values need to be re-input Select [Panasonic.CF-C1] or
because restoring [System] by restoring the settings [Monitor] [ADVANTECH.FPM-5171].
does not change those values to the ones of the Default setting: EIZO.FlexScanT1751
backed up settings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If using a 17" monitor using AeroDR Portable CS7 17D
Mount Kit G1, etc., select [ADVANTECH.FPM-5171].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
246

closed.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
User Tool Screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
247
8.8 Setting of user tool
Perform necessary settings for the portable X-ray de-

vice operation on the user tool screen.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Setting is unnecessary unless directed by the user.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The screen setting tool screen is displayed.
3 Set the following item in [Focus move].
8
[Focus Naviga-
Select [Do Not Navigate].
tion Event]
4 Set the following item in [Control Panel].
2 Press [Setting], and press [Screen Set-

ting].
[Defaults
display panel
Select [QUICK].
on selecting
exposed image]
248
5 Press [OK] on the screen setting tool

screen.

closed.
249
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
stalled.
that will not be installed if it is turned on.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Press [Close].
8
• At this point, icon of the AeroDR Access Point

built-in in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit will be
explained as an example.

icon will change.
250
4 Press the icon of the device that will be set us-

ing the same procedure, then press the con-
nection checkbox of the sub-menu screen.

AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To install multiple AeroDR related devices, turn on the
connection of the device icons for the number of the
devices to be installed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
device through the AeroDR unit setting screen.
• AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon is displayed in-
stead of the AeroDR Portable RF Unit icon during the
AeroDR portable RF Unit operation.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
251
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Setting the network should be made with respect to each exposure room. If there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the
same settings for each exposure room.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Press the RM icon.

8
Press [Setting].
8.10.3 RM setting
8.10.10 AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting
252

unit setting screen

AeroDR SYSTEM.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The displayed name for the RM icon is that set in [Ex- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
posure Room Name] in [Exposure Room Setting].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
253
Set up the RM (Roaming Manager). Set up the shot related method and stop coordination
with the exposure room.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• RM is a system to perform management and roaming 1 Set the following items in [Exposure
of the AeroDR Detector. Room Setting].
• RM manages the correspondence (registration) be-
tween this device and AeroDR Detectors and enables
the roaming (change of the exposure room where the
AeroDR Detector is used). It also manages the cor-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
The exposure room name is displayed.
[Exposure The name set in the [Exposure Room
1 Set the following items in [RM setting]. Room Name] Name] in the CS-7 setting screen is
displayed.
Select [SRM].
[Sync Mode]
Select existence of stop coordination.
When [ON] is selected, the termina-
[Shutdown tion of this device causes the AeroDR
8 Coordination] Detector assigned to the exposure
Setting item Settings room to shut down.
Select [Client] or [Hybrid] for the RM Default setting: [OFF]
[Mode] operation mode.
Default setting: Hybrid

Change is not required if the default IP IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
address of this device is to be used. • Do not change [Exposure Room Name].
[IP Address • Select [SRM] as [Sync Mode], because S-SRM set-
of RM hybrid tings are made on the ECB board in the AeroDR Por-
machine] table RF Unit.
Loop-back address (127.0.0.1) cannot • Set up [Shutdown Coordination] in accordance with
be used. the operation status of the facility. It is necessary to
[IP Address turn on the power of the AeroDR Detector every time it
of RM client Setting is not performed here. is used since it will not link with startup.
machine] ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not change [Hybrid] for the [Mode] setting here.
Change this setting only when multiple exposure
rooms are setup and it is necessary to setup the roam-
ing environment. For details, refer to "4.19 Roaming
environment settings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
254

setting
Set this device and the access point built-in in the
AeroDR Portable RF Unit. Perform the setup of the ac-
cess point built-in in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit first,
and then the wireless connection related setup on this
device. • The setting screen is displayed.
setting items on the right part of the screen.
• After setting each item, press [Submit] on each
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To enable the settings, steps 19 and 20 need to be
performed.
• It will be timed out and return to Login screen if there
is no input for 5 minutes in the setting screen, and
login will be required again. The contents of settings
for which [Submit] is pressed are stored even if it has
timed out.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
8


following items.
• The setting tool will open in a Web browser and
the login screen will be displayed.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The default user name is "admin", and the pass-
[Gateway] ronment.
4 Press [Submit].
255
5 Press [Time Settings] under [Basic Set- 11 Set the radio frequency band, channel,
tings] and set the time synchronization and SSID with the following items.
with the following items.

Select [A].
Default setting: A
Use only IEEE802.11a for the AeroDR
[Available
channel list
* indicates
(*) will be displayed with the channel.
DFS channel]
6 Press [Submit]. Default setting: :36-5.18G
mode with the following items. [SSID broad- Select [Enable].
8
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When installing multiple AeroDR Portable RF Units,
Setting item Settings enter a unique [SSID] for each AeroDR Portable RF
[Wireless en- Select [Enable]. Unit to be installed regardless of settings of the roam-
able] Default setting: Disable ing environment.
mode] Default setting: AP AeroDR Portable RF Unit 1: KMMG_AeroDR_1
AeroDR Portable RF Unit 2: KMMG_AeroDR_2
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
8 Press [Submit].
12 Press [Submit].
256
15 Set the security with the following items. 19 Press the following message that is dis-
Web browser window.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Passphrase]
Ø Gt
4F9ODu96XztI89u93ftEfrzXwe19

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
ficult to guess.
• When installing multiple AeroDR Portable RF Units, 8
enter the same passphrase for each AeroDR Access • The settings will be saved and the AeroDR Ac-
Point. cess Point will restart.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Restart is completed when a beeping sound

16 Press [Submit].
radio output with the following items. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
may not be correctly displayed. However, the set-
browser.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Select [Enable].
[WMM]
18 Press [Submit].
257
device.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Enter the AeroDR Portable RF Unit's ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
internal AeroDR access point serial
number.
[Serial - Japan: product code (4 digits: A6F9) 1 Insert the media provided with AeroDR
Number] — product serial number (5 digits) Detector to the CD/DVD drive.
- Other countries: product code (4 dig-
its: A5DW) — product serial number
(5 digits) 2 Press [Add] of [Correction Data Setting].
Enter the name of the AeroDR Access
[Display Point in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
Name] using 10 characters or less.
8

[Pass Phrase] ters.
Ø Gt
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The serial number of the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is
affixed to the main body of the AeroDR Portable RF
Unit.
• Enter the following product code.
–– Japan: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable RF
Access Point's "A6F9".
–– Other countries: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable
RF Access Point's "A5DW". • The [Browse For Folder] screen is displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
258

AeroDR Detector.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

to either the AeroDR I/F Cable or AeroDR
Battery Charger.
Setting].

are acquired.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
registered and [Serial Number] of [AeroDR De- data CD used in "8.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction
tector Setting] will be updated. data registration" and the AeroDR Detector do not
match, the "The serial number of the AeroDR Detector
4 Remove the media provided with the does not match the serial number of correction data.
Please confirm the combination of the AeroDR Detec-
AeroDR Detector from the CD/DVD drive.
tor and a CD related to this correction data." message
is displayed. In this case, download information again
using the correct correction data CD.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3 Set [Display Name].

acters.
259
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
setting
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •


used is powered on.

DR I/F Cable.
8 IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
registration".
DR Detector.
before this operation, the sub-ID of that device may
be displayed. When you press [Download] at the next
step, the device sub-ID of the AeroDR I/F Cable to be
set up is obtained.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Detector selection screen is displayed.
260

and press [OK].
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •


HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
8

format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6 Set the following items in [I/F Cable Setting].

Read the bar code and get the serial
[Serial
Number]
[Display
characters.
Name]
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
261

and press [OK].
setting
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
AeroDR Battery Charger for registering. The AeroDR
Detector is not necessary to set up the AeroDR Bat-
tery Charger just for charging, so steps 1 - 4 are not
necessary.
• If there are multiple AeroDR Battery Chargers for reg-
istering, connect and set up each device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Confirm that the AeroDR Detector to be • The device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Char-
used is powered on. ger is automatically retrieved, and it will be dis-
played in the [Device Sub ID] of [AeroDR Bat-
tery Charger].
8 DR Battery Charger.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • The device sub-ID can be either entered manually or

registered in "8.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
registration". sub-ID by this method.
• If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device • For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
before this operation, the sub-ID of that device may plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
format.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
step, the device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Charger
to be set up is obtained.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Charger].
Charger].

[Serial
[Display
10 characters.
[Type]
Charger type.

played.
262
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 8.10.10 AeroDR Portable RF

• Set up of the dip switch on the AeroDR Battery Char-
ger is required when [For Charging Only] is selected
Unit setting
in [Type]. Refer to "Installation of the AeroDR Battery
Charger for charging only" in "AeroDR SYSTEM In-
Set up the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
stallation/Service Manual".
• If [For Charging Only] is selected as [Type], the Aero-
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DR Detector is not registered to an exposure room,
because no notification is sent to the RM when the • The setting for the AeroDR Portable RF Unit should be
AeroDR Detector is mounted on the AeroDR Battery performed in the setting screen of the AeroDR Gen-
Charger. erator Interface Unit.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Set the following items in [XG BOX Set-

• The serial number of the AeroDR Battery Charger is ting].
described on the sticker on side of the main body.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
O
Chargers

8
for the second AeroDR Battery Charger. Setting item Settings
Input the AeroDR Portable RF Units
[Display
name within 10 characters.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Name]

Default setting: XG Box
SYSTEM related devices". [IP Address] Portable RF Units.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Default setting: 192.168.20.221
Input the address of the default gate-
2 Set up the AeroDR Battery Charger with [Default Gate- way.
way] Input is not required when no gateway
exists on the network.
Battery Charger.
[Subnet
device.
Mask]
[WS] Select [Use WS1 Only].
The measured average value of delay

time from the time when the first stage
of the exposure switch is pressed to
the start of exposure, measured in
[Timer]
"8.11.1 Prep-Delay time measure-
ment", is displayed.
It is also possible to change the delay
time by manual input.
263

Unit.
–– Japan: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable RF XG's
"A6FC".
RF XG's "A5DX".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Settings will be uploaded to the AeroDR Por- [Wall Stand] Setting is not performed.
table RF Unit. [Bucky Table] Setting is not performed.
[DR Cassette] Assign DR cassette to the WS1.
8 IMPORTANT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting changes may take 5 Set the following items of [Restricted
up to a maximum of 30 seconds to take effect.
AeroDR Panel sending ConsoleReady].
• When the IP address with a different segment from

the IP address of this device is set, the "Processing"
screen may not disappear, although settings are be-
ing uploaded to the AeroDR Portable RF Unit. After
waiting for 30 seconds or more, press [Cancel] then
perform ping from the Windows command prompt and
confirm that there is no response from the IP address
before the change.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Setting items Settings
Set up the existence of the exposure
3 Input the serial number of the AeroDR control against the AeroDR Detector
Portable RF Unit (AeroDR Generator Inter- connected to the WS that is setup
as DR cassette operation in [WS
face Unit part). Mapping].
Exposure control will not be performed
if [No Control] is selected.
[Limitation
Type]
the list can be used for exposure on
that WS when [Select WS enable to
send] is selected.
The AeroDR Detector selected in the
list can not be used for exposure on
that WS when [Select WS disable to
send] is selected.
The names of the registered AeroDR
• Enter the product code (4 digits) and product
[AeroDR Detector Detectors are displayed.
serial number (5 digits). 1~n] Select the AeroDR Detector to be con-
–– Product code for Japan: A6FC trolled.
–– Product code for other countries: A5DX
264

8.10.11 AeroDR Detector setting The AeroDR Detector's serial number
Set up the AeroDR Detector with communication con-
will be displayed.
firmed in "8.10.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector
communication". [Wired IP Ad-
Setting is not required if the default network setting of dress]
[Wireless IP
Address]
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Detector's serial number which was ac- [Default Gate-
DR Detector.
quired in "8.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data reg- way]
istration" will be displayed in [Serial Number]. Confirm
that the serial number displayed is identical to the se- [Subnet
Detector.
rial number on the identification label(sticker) attached Mask]
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Press [Upload].
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If connected to AeroDR Battery Charger only, replace
the word "AeroDR I/F Cable" with "AeroDR Battery
Charger" as you read.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
8

used is powered on.

DR I/F Cable.

environment.
tor.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• AeroDR Detector setting changes may take up to a
maximum of 30 seconds to take effect.
ing uploaded to the AeroDR Detector. After waiting for
30 seconds or more, press [Cancel] and perform ping
change.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
265

screen.

screen.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
cessing" screen is closed by pressing [Cancel] during
an upload, but this does not indicate a problem.
8 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •


device
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
first.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
To next page
266
8.11 Delay time setting
The method of Prep-Delay time setting is as follows. 3 Press [Delay Measurement] on the sub-
menu screen.
8.11.1 Prep-Delay time
measurement
Measure the delay time (Prep-Delay time) from press-
ing the first stage of the exposure switch until the start
of exposure.
1 Connect the X-ray sensor connection jig to

the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the connection of the X-ray sensor connection jig,
refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manu-
al".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Press the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon.

8

• The delay time measurement screen is dis-
played.
4 Set the portable X-ray device to non-inter-

lock.
5 Set the exposure condition of the portable

X-ray device to a voltage of 80 kVp and a
mAs value near 50mAs.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To enable a longer exposure time and make it easier
to check with the LED light on the jig, using a high
mAs value as a standard condition is recommended. It
does not present a problem if, due to conditions on the
portable X-ray device, measurements are performed
using a lower mAs value than the recommended
value.
• Since the tube current cannot be set separately for the
• The sub-menu screen is displayed. portable X-ray device, the mAs value is used as an
exposure condition.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
267
6 Press [Start] in [Prep-Delay Time Measure- 9 Press [End].

ment].
• Displays the first, second and third measure-

• The message "Prep-Delay Time is measuring. ment values and the first through third measure-
Please Press ExposureSW1●SW2 Simultane- ment averages.
8 ously and Expose. After the Exposure is re-
peated 3 times please press [End] button" is 10 Confirm the first through the third mea-
displayed. surement averages.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• If an error message is displayed when [Start] or • Confirm that there are no substantial differences in
[End] are pressed, check that the connection with the the measured values from first to third measurements.
AeroDR Portable RF Unit was made. Perform steps 6 through 9 again if the differences are
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • substantially large.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7 Press the first stage and second stage of
the exposure switch at the same time to 11 Press [Save].
perform the first exposure.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Release the exposure switch after the exposure sound
disappears.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
8 Repeat step 7 twice for a total exposure of

three times.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Wait for the rotor of the portable X-ray device to stop,
and then perform the next exposure.
• If exposure could not be completed, press [Cancel]
and restart from step 6.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• A confirmation message is displayed.
268
12 Press [Yes].
• Saves the measured delay time and displays it

in units of 0.1 sec on a [Timer] of [XG BOX Set-
ting] in the AeroDR unit setting screen. If you
want to manually change the delay time, do so
using the [Timer] of [XG BOX Setting] in the
AeroDR unit setting screen.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the changing of the delay time, refer to "8.10.10
AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
13 Press [Close].

• Remove the X-ray sensor connection jig from
the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
269
Perform the AeroDR Detector analysis.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Analyze the AeroDR Detector with the portable X-ray device during the portable X-ray device operation.
• When using both an X-ray device in a general exposure room and the portable X-ray device, analyze AeroDR Detector with
the X-ray device in the general exposure room with SRM or S-SRM link.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the analysis method of AeroDR Detector, refer to "4.14 Analysis of AeroDR Detector".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •


(SID) to 2m

90 sec
PASS
8 Expose solid image with gain

3.0 mR
FAIL
Unevenness analysis
200 sec 60 sec
FAIL(first time) PASS

3.0 mR 80 sec
PASS
Unevenness analysis FAIL(second time)

60 sec
PASS
Defect analysis FAIL(second time) Backup the complete set of

PASS
Existence of CS-7 NO
with Aero Sync link Replace AeroDR Detector
YES
Roam AeroDR Detector to CS-7

with Aero Sync link
Execute gain calibration with Perform gain calibration and * If gain calibration has already been
performed, perform offset calibration
CS-7 with Aero Sync link offset calibration*
only.

analysis
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When performing gain calibration with an Aero Sync-linked this device, check whether the AeroDR Detector subject to the
analysis is Aero Sync-linked or not.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
270
8.13 Deployment to the installation locations and
8.13.1 Deployment of
respective devices to
the installation locations
Install the respective devices in the installation loca-
tion.
1 Install this device, AeroDR Portable RF

Unit, and peripheral devices in the instal-
lation location.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the deployment of the AeroDR Portable RF Unit,
al".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
8.13.2 Connection to the

institution network 8
Connect this device and the institution network.
8.13 Deployment to the installation locations and connection to the

tion network.
institution network
Connect the Ethernet cable of the institu-
tion network to the hub that is connected
to this device and the AeroDR Portable RF
Unit.
4.17 Activation
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
To next page
271
8.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access Point
Set this device and the channel of the AeroDR Access

Point built in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
This operation is not required when channel switching
of the AeroDR Access Point is not performed.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The channel for the AeroDR Access Point can be set
either automatically or manually.
–– In the automatic setting of the AeroDR Access Point,
the system automatically surveys the signal in the
location where automatic selection can be executed
and selects an appropriate channel based on the • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
results to set the AeroDR Access Point accordingly.
When the system is operated in location where the
signal environment may change, an appropriate
3 Press [Channel Setting] in the sub-menu
screen.
channel can be selected in response to any change.
–– In the manual setting of the AeroDR Access Point,
the channels to be used are registered in advance,
and a channel is selected to set the AeroDR Access
Point during operation.
This method is used when the channel to be used in
8
the operating location is fixed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

auto setting
2 Press the AeroDR Access Point icon.
• The AP Channel setting tool screen is displayed.
272
4 Press the [Auto Channel] tab. Select the channel to use. A check-
mark is added to the selected channel.
[Channel List] (*) is displayed in [DFS].
* When a preset is selected, chan-
nels other than DFS channels are all
selected in the displayed list.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• In the channels of [Channel List], the code on the left
side of the hyphen indicates the channel and the code
on the right side of the hyphen indicates the frequency.
Example: In 36-5.18G, 36 is the channel and 5.18G is
the frequency.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6 Press [Save].
• The Auto Channel setting screen is displayed. 8
5 Set the following items.

Select a network of this device to survey • A confirmation message is displayed.
the signal. When there are several options,
[Survey Net- follow "13.3.1 Setting of the IP address
work Interface] of the built-in wireless LAN" to check the 7 Press [OK].
name of the built-in wireless network and
select it.
Select a connection mode of this de-
vice and the AeroDR Access Point in
accordance with operating state.
[Wired]: This device and the AeroDR
[Connection
Access Point are connected by a
Mode]
wired connection
[Wireless]: This device and the
AeroDR Access Point are connected by
a wireless connection
Select a country name for the oper-
ating location. The channel presets
[Country]
usable in the selected country are dis-
played in the [Channel List].
273
8 Press [Close].
manual setting
9 Confirm the [Auto CH] icon is displayed

on the system monitor screen - [Portable]
screen.
8

screen.
274
• The AP Channel setting tool screen is displayed. • A new Manual Channel setting screen is dis-
played.
4 Press the [ManualChannel] tab.
Setting item Settings 8

Management number of the Access
[Setting No.] Point information is displayed.

[Access Point Input the Access Point information
Name] name.
Select the channel information set to
the AeroDR Access Point.
• TRUE: Channel information that is set
[Enabled]
• FALSE: Channel information that is
not set
Default setting: [FALSE]
• The Manual Channel setting screen is displayed. Select the location to set Access Point
information.
[Location] Select from [Ward], [Floor], [X-Ray
5 Press [New]. room], or [Others].
Default setting: [Ward]
Select the serial number of the AeroDR
[AP S/N]
Access Point.
Select the radio frequency band of the
[Radio
Access Point information. Currently,
frequency
only [IEEE802.11a] can be selected.
band]
Default setting: [IEEE802.11a]
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If there are multiple Access Point information items,
make sure to select [TRUE] for the Access Point in-
formation that is the same as the channel set to the
AeroDR Access Point. Once [TRUE] is selected for
one, all other channel information items are changed
to [FALSE].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
275
7 Select a channel you want to use from 9 Press [OK].

[Item], and press [>] to move the channel
to [Selected Item].
• When multiple channels are moved to [Selected

Item], the channel on the top of the list is prior to
others. To change the priority, select the channel
you want to change and press [Up] or [Down] to
change the list order.
• The set AeroDR Access Point information is dis-

played.
8
10 Press [Close].
8 Press [Regist].
276
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
8.14.3 Addition of the AeroDR
• Each item that is set will be displayed on the system
Access Point information
monitor screen - [Portable] screen.
Add the AeroDR Access Point information to be con-
nected with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
(a)
1 Display the AP Channel setting tool

(c) screen.
(b)
(d)
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 1-3 of "8.14.2 AeroDR
(a) The AeroDR Access Point where [TRUE] is se- Access Point manual setting".
lected in [Enabled] is displayed. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(b) The AeroDR Access Point where [FALSE] is se-
lected in [Enabled] is displayed. 2 Press the [ManualChannel] tab.
(c) The location where the AeroDR Access Point select-
ed in [Type] is installed is displayed with an icon.
(d) The AeroDR Access Point name entered in [Ac-
cess Point Name] is displayed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •

• The Manual Channel setting screen is displayed.
277
3 Press [New].
8.14.4 Change of the AeroDR
Change the AeroDR Access Point information to be
connected with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.

screen.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Access Point manual setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• A new Manual Channel setting screen is dis-

played.
8
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Even in cases where there is AeroDR Access Point in-

formation whose settings have not been saved, if [New]
is pressed, contents in the process of setting will be
cleared, and the default settings are restored. Perform
the operation after saving the information setting that
is not saved.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Set the AeroDR Access Point.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 5-10 of "8.14.2 Aero-
DR Access Point manual setting".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Select the AeroDR Access Point whose
information you want to change.
278
6 Press [OK].
• The setting is displayed on [Selected Access

Point].
4 Input or select the items to be changed.
• The setting will be changed.
5 Press [Regist]. 7 Press [Close].

8
• A message screen to confirm overwriting is dis-

played.
279
8.14.5 Deletion of the AeroDR

4 Press [Delete].

Delete the AeroDR Access Point information to be con-
nected with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.

screen.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Access Point manual setting".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• A message screen to confirm deleting is dis-

played.
8
5 Press [OK].
3 Select the AeroDR Access Point that is to

be deleted.
• The AeroDR access point information is deleted.
280
6 Press [Close].
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The [Setting No] of the deleted AeroDR access point
will be vacant.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

migration
8
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.20 Optional installation and data migra-

tion".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
To next page
281
8.15 Network configuration for each area
• When the network segment of the institution differs by individual floor, the area-specific networks can be set by fol-
lowing procedures.
Set the network settings of the network adapter to connect to the institution network, and the IP address of the con-
nected device (RIS/HOST).
• Set the area-specific network settings by the static IP address.
• The network adapter can be set for both wired/wireless.
• When the network segment of the institution is not divided, area-specific network switching is not required and this
operation is not needed.
Setting example for wireless connection
Institution
Access point (3) CS-7 area setting (3)
• Segment: 192.168.23.xxx • IP address: 192.168.23.90
Institution • SSID: AP3 • AE title: KM_CS7_U0003
3rd floor • SSID: AP3
• Other party's device (RIS/HOST)
- IP address: Other party's IP address on same segment
- AE title: Other party's AE title on same segment
RIS/HOST
Move to a different floor

Change CS-7 area
8
CS-7 area setting (2)
Access point (2) • IP address: 192.168.22.90
• Segment: 192.168.22.xxx • AE title: KM_CS7_U0002
Institution • SSID: AP2 • SSID: AP2
2nd floor • Other party's device (RIS/HOST)

RIS/HOST

Change CS-7 area

1st floor • Other party's device (RIS/HOST)
RIS/HOST
* There is no SSID setting for the CS-7 area setting when connecting via a wired connection.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This function can only be set when [Portable Setting] of the CS-7 setting screen is enabled.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
282
8.15.1 Creating a new area
4 Press [Add] of [Area setting].
8
• The area name can now be entered.
5 Enter an area name of 10 characters or

less.
• A new area is created.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To create multiple areas, repeat steps 4 and 5.
• To change the area name, press [Edit] or right click on
the area name to switch to a state in which the area
name can be changed and change the name.
• When multiple areas are used, the display order of the
areas can be changed using [Up]/[Down].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
283
8.15.2 Network configuration

3 Set the following items in [Unit].
for each area
1 Press [Setting] for the network adaptor to

be set.

The device to be configured is dis-
[Unit]
played.
Select to switch the network configu-
ration of the device to the configura-
tion shown here when the area is
changed.
Do not use the same device as the
• The setting screen is displayed. [switching
switching target for multiple network
target]
adaptors.
Do not set a device whose RIS ser-
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
vice class is [Detached] to a switching
• Give the network adapter an easy-to-recognize name target.
so that you can easily select the adapter to be config- The default setting is [OFF].
ured. Enter the IP address of this device.
• You can modify the name of network adapters on the [IP address] Can only be set in devices for which
8 control panel of Windows. [switching target] is [ON].
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Enter the AE title for this device.
Enter the item with 16 or less charac-
[AE title] ters.
2 Set the following items in [CS-7]. Can only be set in devices for which
[switching target] is [ON].
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The procedure for copying already-configured network
settings from an area into another area is as follows.
(1) Press [Copy] on the setting screen for the original
area.

[IP address] Enter the IP address of this device.
[Subnet (1)
Enter the subnet mask of this device.
mask]
Enter the default gateway address of
[Default gate- this device.
way] If there is no gateway on the network,
enter "0.0.0.0".
Enter the AE title of this device. (2) Select the copy destination area in the [Network
[AE title] Enter the item with 16 or less charac- configuration for each area] dialog.
ters.
(3) Press [Copy].
Enter the SSID of the wireless LAN
access point.
[SSID] Enter 32 or less characters.
* [SSID] is displayed only when the (2)
wireless LAN adapter is used.
(3)
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
284
4 Press [OK]. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• Pressing [Cancel] discards the entered content and
returns to the CS-7 setting screen.
• On completing the settings, [Network configuration
switching] of the configured network adaptor changes
from [Not configured] to [Configured].
• The setting state of the network adaptor and the set-

ting screen display button change according to the
state as follows.
Setting screen
display button
Setting state
Setting screen display button

[Setting]: Displays the setting screen. Displayed when
• The configuration is stored and the CS-7 setting the setting state is [Not configured] or [Configured in-
screen is displayed. completely].
• After selecting another area, set the network con- [Unsetting]: Temporarily deletes the completed net-
figuration for each area by repeating steps 1 to 4. working settings. Displayed when the setting state is
[Configured]. 8
Setting state
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
[Not configured]: Displayed when no applicable network
• You should be aware that all the settings are cleared if

adapters have been set for the area-specific network.
you press [Clear]. [Configured]: Displayed when the applicable network
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • adapters have been set correctly for the area-specific
network. Switching the area also switches the appli-
cable network adapter settings.
[Configured incompletely]: Displayed when the area-
specific network settings are being edited. The appli-
cable network adapter settings are not applied when
the area is switched.
• Pressing [Unsetting] will result in the settings being
[Configured incompletely], and the button will change
to [Setting]. Pressing the [Setting] button again will
display the setting screen, and allow the settings to be
edited.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• The settings are stored and the screen is closed.
285
8.15.3 Initial area selection 8.15.4 Other settings
1 Restart this device. Deletion of the area for which settings have
been configured
2 Confirm that the device is connected to • To delete a configured area, select the area to be
the network. deleted in [Area setting] and press [Delete].
• You can connect the device to any network that
is set on the area selection screen.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When wired connection is used in the area where the
device is used, connect it with a hub.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Change of the configured settings for the

3 Press [>>] on the initial screen of this de-
area-specific network
vice, then press the area selection button
for which [AreaNotSet] is displayed. • To change the configured area-specific network
settings, press [Unsetting] for the network adaptor
that is to be changed. The [Configured] display will
change to [Configured incompletely], and [Unsetting]
8
will change to [Setting]. Press [Setting] and change
the settings.
4 Press the button of the area that is now

connected.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.21 Backup of the setting data of this de-
vice".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5 Confirm that the name of the selected area

is displayed on the area selection button. To next page
286

8.16.2 Delivery

tions.
1 Perform a series of exposures under the • Provide a description of User tool for administra-
2 Confirm that there is no problem with the IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

posed images. istrator of this device; you should however provide
operators with a description of the method as needed.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • When it is required to change the wireless channel,
describe the location to change the wireless.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
tion.
mission from institution management personnel. 2 Clean up to complete the installation. 8
• Take particular care in the following cases. • The installation of this device is now completed.

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
287
288
Chapter
9
Device and AeroDR Portable
RF Unit (SRM connection)
This chapter describes the installation of this device and AeroDR Potable RF Unit (SRM connection).
289
9.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR Portable RF
Unit (SRM connection)
AeroDR Detector wireless connection/AeroDR Portable RF Unit/CS-7 Wired connection/SRM) as follows.
O
O Stand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Portable RF Unit/
CS-7 Wired Connection/SRM
AeroDR Detector registration side(exposure room side hub)
AeroDR Hub
I/F Cable
Power Hub

9 Hub
9.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR Portable RF Unit
(SRM connection)
AeroDR Detector
Access
Power point
CS-7 Power
XGIF
ECB
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable
Portable X-ray diagnostic device
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To connect this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit using wireless connection, connect them using wired connection
first, and then modify the setting to wireless connection referring to "13.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this device".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
290
(SRM connection)
The installation operating process for this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit (SRM connection) is as follows.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is used at 1 place (exposure room, patient's room, etc.) for exposure, flow number 18 is not
necessary.
the tasks of flow number 18 to 22.
• For the operation enclosed with the dotted line in the following flow chart, refer to the respective sections in the "Chapter 4
Installation Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)" and "Chapter 8 Installation Procedure for
This Device and AeroDR Portable RF Unit (S-SRM connection)" Exchange the terms as following at that time.
–– "AeroDR Generator Interface Unit" → "AeroDR Portable RF Unit"
–– "AeroDR Access Point"→ "AeroDR Access Point built-in in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit"
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the installation procedure of AeroDR Portable RF Unit (SRM connection), refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service
Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(SRM connection)
291
9.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR Portable RF Unit (SRM connection)
The workflow to install AeroDR Portable

RF Unit (SRM connection)

5 Portable RF Unit
3 6.5 Setting up the CS-7

7 8.8 Setting of user tool
8.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM re-

8 lated devices

4
11 4.12 Restart of this device confirmation of its wireless status
9
8.13 Deployment to the installation loca-

13 tions and connection to the institution 6 6.9 Placement in the installation locations
(SRM connection)
network
14 4.16 Peripheral devices setting 6.10 Installation in Portable X-ray

7 diagnostic device
15 4.17 Activation
6.16 Connection of the Ethernet cable
4.18 Confirmation of the version of this 8 and the power cables
16 device

21 device
292
Perform the following in advance.

Portable RF Unit • The sub-menu screen is displayed.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "8.3 Check of bundled items" first.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
9.3.1 System setting for this

device 9

screen.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
293
4 Set the following items in [Institution In- 5 Set the following items in [Device Informa-
formation Setting]. tion Setting].

[Telephone Setting item Settings
Number]
Manufacturer name is displayed.
[Department Input the department name. [Maker Name] Default setting: KONICA MINOLTA
Name] Input within 64 characters. This content cannot be changed.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • This content cannot be changed.
• For [Institution Name], [Institution Address], [Telephone [Serial Num- Serial number is displayed.
Number] and [Department Name], the values need to ber] This content cannot be changed.
be re-input because restoring [System] by restoring the [Station AE
settings does not change those values to the ones of the Title]
backed up settings. [Console
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • name]
9 Input "1-255" as ID to specify this
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [Unique ID] Change is not necessary if only 1 unit
• When the license import is finished, the content of of this device is installed.
Default setting: 1
Address], and [Telephone Number]. [Exam Room
10 characters.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Name]
[Version] factured.
updated.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ment settings".
backed up settings.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
294
6 Select [Enable Portable Mode] in [Portable

Setting]. 8.8 Setting of user tool
8.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM related

devices
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7 Set the following item in [Monitor Set- • Refer to "8.8 Setting of user tool" first.
tings]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
To next page

Select [Panasonic.CF-C1] or
[Monitor] [ADVANTECH.FPM-5171].
Default setting: EIZO.FlexScanT1751
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If using a 17" monitor using AeroDR Portable CS7 17D
Mount Kit G1, etc., select [ADVANTECH.FPM-5171].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
8 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen. 9

closed.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
User Tool Screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
295
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Setting the network should be made with respect to each exposure room. If there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the
same settings for each exposure room.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Press the RM icon.

Press [Setting].
9
9.4.3 RM setting
9.4.10 AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting
296

unit setting screen

AeroDR SYSTEM.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
297
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
tween this device and AeroDR Detectors and enables
the roaming (change of the exposure room where the
AeroDR Detector is used). It also manages the cor-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
The exposure room name is displayed.
[Exposure The name set in the [Exam Room
1 Set the following items in [RM setting]. Room Name] Name] in the CS-7 setting screen is
displayed.
Select [SRM].
[Sync Mode]
Coordination] Detector assigned to the exposure
Setting item Settings room to shut down.
Select [Client] or [Hybrid] for the RM Default setting: [OFF]
[Mode] operation mode.
9
Change is not required if the default IP IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
address of this device is to be used. • Do not change [Exposure Room Name].

[IP Address • Set up [Shutdown Coordination] in accordance with
of RM hybrid the operation status of the facility. It is necessary to
machine] turn on the power of the AeroDR Detector every time it
Loop-back address (127.0.0.1) cannot is used since it will not link with startup.
be used. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[IP Address
machine]
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
298

setting
Set this device and the access point built-in in the
AeroDR Portable RF Unit. Perform the setup of the ac-
cess point built-in in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit first,
and then the wireless connection related setup on this
device. • The setting screen is displayed.
setting items on the right part of the screen.
• After setting each item, press [Submit] on each
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To enable the settings, steps 19 and 20 need to be
performed.
is no input for 5 minutes in the setting screen, and
login will be required again. The contents of settings
for which [Submit] is pressed are stored even if it has
timed out.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Settings] and set up the network for the 9
following items.
• The setting tool will open in a Web browser and
the login screen will be displayed.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The default user name is "admin", and the pass-
[Gateway] ronment.
4 Press [Submit].
299
tings] and set the time synchronization and SSID with the following items.
with the following items.

Select [A].
Default setting: A
Use only IEEE802.11a for the AeroDR
[Available
channel list
* indicates
(*) will be displayed with the channel.
DFS channel]
6 Press [Submit]. Default setting: :36-5.18G
mode with the following items. [SSID broad- Select [Enable].
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
9 • When installing multiple AeroDR Portable RF Units,

Setting item Settings enter a unique [SSID] for each AeroDR Portable RF
[Wireless en- Select [Enable]. Unit to be installed regardless of settings of the roam-
able] Default setting: Disable ing environment.

mode] Default setting: AP AeroDR Portable RF Unit 1: KMMG_AeroDR_1
AeroDR Portable RF Unit 2: KMMG_AeroDR_2
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
8 Press [Submit].
12 Press [Submit].
300
Web browser window.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Passphrase]
Ø Gt

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
ficult to guess.
• When installing multiple AeroDR Portable RF Units,
9
16 Press [Submit].

radio output with the following items. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
browser.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Select [Enable].
[WMM]
18 Press [Submit].
301
device.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Enter the AeroDR Portable RF Unit's ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
internal AeroDR access point serial
number.
[Serial - Japan: product code (4 digits: A6F9) 1 Insert the media provided with AeroDR
Number] — product serial number (5 digits) Detector to the CD/DVD drive.
- Other countries: product code (4 dig-
its: A5DW) — product serial number
(5 digits) 2 Press [Add] of [Correction Data Setting].
[Display Point in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
Name] using 10 characters or less.
9
[Pass Phrase] ters.
Ø Gt

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Unit.
–– Japan: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable RF
Access Point's "A6F9".
RF Access Point's "A5DW". • The [Browse For Folder] screen is displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
302

AeroDR Detector.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Turn on the AeroDR Detector with the correc-

tion data registered, and connect to either the
AeroDR I/F Cable or AeroDR Battery Charger.
• (Example) A20H-00001 2 Press [Download] in the [AeroDR Detector

Setting].
9
are acquired.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the device IDs (serial numbers) of the correction
• The serial number of AeroDR Detector will be data CD used in "9.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction
registered and [Serial Number] of [AeroDR De- data registration" and the AeroDR Detector do not
tector Setting] will be updated. match, the "The serial number of the AeroDR Detector
does not match the serial number of correction data.
4 Remove the media provided with the Please confirm the combination of the AeroDR Detec-
AeroDR Detector from the CD/DVD drive. tor and a CD related to this correction data." message
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

acters.
303
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
setting
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •


used is powered on.

DR I/F Cable.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
9 registration".
DR Detector.

set up is obtained.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
304

and press [OK].
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •


HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
9

format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

[Serial
Number]
[Display
characters.
Name]
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
305

and press [OK].
setting
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
necessary.
• If there are multiple AeroDR Battery Chargers for reg-
istering, connect and set up each device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
tery Charger].
DR Battery Charger.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
9 • Connect the AeroDR Detector with correction data read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
registered in "9.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
registration". not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device

before this operation, the sub-ID of that device may • For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
be displayed. When you press [Download] at the next plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
step, the device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Charger format.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Press [Download] in [AeroDR Battery Charger].
Charger].

[Serial
[Display
10 characters.
[Type]
Charger type.

played.
306
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 9.4.10 AeroDR Portable RF

• Set up of the dip switch on the AeroDR Battery Char-
Unit setting
in [Type]. Refer to "Installation of the AeroDR Battery
Charger for charging only" in "AeroDR SYSTEM In-
Set up the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
stallation/Service Manual".
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DR Detector is not registered to an exposure room,
because no notification is sent to the RM when the • The setting for the AeroDR Portable RF Unit should be
AeroDR Detector is mounted on the AeroDR Battery performed in the setting screen of the AeroDR Gen-
Charger. erator Interface Unit.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Set the following items in [XG BOX Set-

• Serial number of the AeroDR Battery Charger is de- ting].
scribed on the sticker on side of the main body.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
O
O When there are multiple AeroDR Battery
Chargers

for the second AeroDR Battery Charger. Setting item Settings
Input the AeroDR Portable RF Units
[Display
name within 10 characters.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Name] 9
Default setting: XG Box
• For the operation, refer to "8.9 Activation of AeroDR Input the IP address of the AeroDR
SYSTEM related devices". [IP Address] Portable RF Units.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Default setting: 192.168.20.221

Input the address of the default gate-
2 Set up the AeroDR Battery Charger with [Default Gate- way.
way] Input is not required when no gateway
the same procedure as the first AeroDR exists on the network.
Battery Charger.
[Subnet
device.
Mask]
[WS] Select [Use WS1 Only].
307

Unit.
–– Japan: Enter the dummy AeroDR Portable RF XG's
"A6FC".
RF XG's "A5DX".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Settings will be uploaded to the AeroDR Por- [Wall Stand] Setting is not performed.
table RF Unit. [Bucky Table] Setting is not performed.
[DR Cassette] Assign DR cassette to the WS1.
IMPORTANT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting changes may take 5 Set the following items of [Restricted
up to a maximum of 30 seconds to take effect. AeroDR Panel sending ConsoleReady].
9 • When the IP address with a different segment from
screen may not disappear although settings are be-
ing uploaded to the AeroDR Portable RF Unit. After
waiting for 30 seconds or more, press [Cancel] then

perform ping from the Windows command prompt and
confirm that there is no response from the IP address
before the change.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Setting items Settings
Set up the existence of the exposure
3 Input the serial number of the AeroDR control against the AeroDR Detector
connected to the WS that is setup
Portable RF Unit (AeroDR Generator Inter-
as DR cassette operation in [WS
face Unit part). Mapping].
Exposure control will not be performed
if [No Control] is selected.
[Limitation
Type]
the list can be used for exposure on
that WS when [Select WS enable to
send] is selected.
The AeroDR Detector selected in the
list can not be used for exposure on
that WS when [Select WS disable to
send] is selected.
The names of the registered AeroDR
• Enter the product code (4 digits) and product [AeroDR Detector Detectors are displayed.
serial number (5 digits). 1~n] Select the AeroDR Detector to be con-
–– Product code for Japan: A6FC trolled.
–– Product code for other countries: A5DX
308

9.4.11 AeroDR Detector setting The AeroDR Detector's serial number
Set up the AeroDR Detector with communication con- Number] Detector correction data registration"
firmed in "9.4.7 Confirmation of AeroDR Detector com- will be displayed.
munication". [Wired IP Ad-
Setting is not required if the default network setting of nection of the AeroDR Detector.
dress]
[Wireless IP
Address]
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Default setting: 192.168.20.211
• The AeroDR Detector's serial number which was ac- Input the default gateway of the Aero-
[Default Gate-
quired in "9.4.6 AeroDR Detector correction data reg- DR Detector.
way]
istration" will be displayed in [Serial Number]. Confirm Default setting: 0.0.0.0
that the serial number displayed is identical to the se- Input the subnet mask of the AeroDR
[Subnet
rial number on the identification label(sticker) attached Detector.
Mask]
to the AeroDR Detector before setting up. Default setting: 255.255.255.0
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Press [Upload].
• If connected to AeroDR Battery Charger only, replace

Charger" as you read.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

9
used is powered on.

DR I/F Cable.

environment.
tor.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
change.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
309
9.4.12 Saving of settings 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this

device
screen.
screen. 8.13 Deployment to the installation
locations and connection to the
institution network
4.17 Activation

• The settings will be registered in this device's device
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The warning message is displayed when the "Pro- 8.14 Channel setting of AeroDR Access
cessing" screen is closed by pressing [Cancel] during Point
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 4.20 Optional installation and data
migration
9

device
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
first.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
310
Chapter
10
Device and AeroDR Portable UF Unit
This chapter describes the installation of this device and AeroDR Potable UF Unit.
311
10.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR Por-
table UF Unit
AeroDR Detector Wireless connection/AeroDR Portable UF Unit/CS-7 wireless connection/Aero Sync) as follows.
O
O Stand-alone AeroDR Detector/AeroDR Detector Wireless Connection/AeroDR Portable UF Unit/
CS-7 Wireless Connection/Aero Sync
AeroDR Hub
I/F Cable
Power
source
Access
Power
point
10 AeroDR Detector
CS-7
10.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR Portable UF Unit
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
Ethernet cable AeroDR Portable UF Unit
312
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• At installation, create a wired connection between the AeroDR Detector registration side hub and the AeroDR Portable UF
Unit.
• The AeroDR Portable UF Unit performs exposures in Aero Sync mode.
• The Aero Sync mode is only available for the AeroDR 1417HQ with the indication of "1417HQ".
It is not available for the AeroDR 1417S, AeroDR 1717HQ, or AeroDR 1417HQ of which the first four characters of the serial
number are "A45Y".
AeroDR P-11
1417HQ
Identification
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When installing the AeroDR Portable UF Unit, temporarily connect the AeroDR Portable UF Unit and the AeroDR Detector
registration side hub with the Ethernet cable.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
10
313
10.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR Portable UF Unit
The installation operating process for this device and the AeroDR Portable UF Unit is as follows.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If an AeroDR Portable UF Unit is used at 1 place (exposure room, patient's room, etc.) for exposure, flow number 19 is not
necessary.
the task of flow number 19 to 23.
• For the operation of the section enclosed with the dotted line in following flow, refer to each section of the "Chapter 4 Installa-
tion Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)". Exchange the terms as following at that time.
–– "AeroDR Access Point"→ "AeroDR Access Point built-in in the AeroDR Portable UF Unit"
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the installation procedure of AeroDR Portable UF Unit, refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
10
314
The workflow to install AeroDR Portable UF Unit

5 10.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR Portable UF Unit
6 10.7 System setting of this device 3 9.5 Setting up the CS-7
7 10.8 Setting of user tool 4 9.6 Removing the AeroDR Portable UF Unit
10.9 Activation of AeroDR SYSTEM

8 related devices

11
10.11 Setting of the wireless LAN with 5 confirmation of its wireless status
the AeroDR Portable UF Unit
12 10.12 Removal of temporarily connected Ethernet cable
10
10.14 Deployment to the installation
9.9 Placement of respective devices in
15 locations and connection to the 7 the installation locations
institution network
16 4.16 Peripheral devices setting 9.10 Installation of the AeroDR Portable

8 Unit Mount Kit
17 4.17 Activation
315

Main body of this 1
device
Power cable 1
AC adapter 1
Battery pack 1
Digitizer pen 1
Cable for pen 1
Dedicated cloth 1
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
10
316

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Start up this device and check that the initial screen is
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Turn on this device.
the system startup screen is displayed.
accessories
• Upon completion of initialization, the initial
Attach the accessories of this device. screen is displayed, and this device is ready for
operation.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • The initial screen

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
O
1 Attach the pen to this device with the pen

cable.
O

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10
2 Hold the battery pack so the connector is • The software version is displayed on the system

Connector
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

packs.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
317
10.5.1 Attachment of external

4 Connect this device and the external CD/
DVD drive with a USB cable.
CD/DVD drive • Driver is automatically installed.
A CD/DVD drive is required for setting or update dur-

ing the portable X-ray device operation. If a CD/DVD 5 Restart this device.
drive is not equipped on this device, attach an external
CD/DVD drive to this device with following procedure.
Recommended parts and conditions for of the touch panel
the external CD/DVD drive
Adjust the touch panel coordinates, if it is out of align-
Item Conditions ment.
OS Windows 7 compliant
USB USB2.0 Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Drive The CD-ROM can be read. • For the Adjusting the position of the touch panel, refer
Reading speed 16 speed or higher to "4.5.2 Adjusting the position of the touch panel".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• BUFFALO DVSM-PN58U2V is used as an example
here. The operation might be different depending on
the device used. For details, refer to the operation
manual of the device used.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 4.6 Registration of license

10 Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Display the intermediate screen. • Refer to "4.6 Registration of license".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
To next page

diate screen.
318
10.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR Portable UF Unit
10.6.1 Temporary connections of 10.6.2 Startup of respective

AeroDR Portable UF Unit devices
Make temporary connections of this device, AeroDR Turn on this device, the AeroDR Portable UF Unit and
Portable UF Unit and all peripheral devices. all peripheral devices.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Turn on this device.

• If there are multiple AeroDR Detectors, connect them 2 Turn on the AeroDR Portable UF Unit and
1 by 1. all peripheral devices.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Connect the respective Ethernet cables
• Charges of the AeroDR Detector may be 0%, so al-
connected to the AeroDR Interface Unit,
ways turn on the power switch of the AeroDR Detector
AeroDR Battery Charger and AeroDR Por- after charging.
table UF Unit to the hub for the AeroDR ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Detector registration side.
2 Connect the Ethernet cable to be con-

nected to the hub for the AeroDR Detector
registration side to this device.

this device to the hub for the AeroDR De-
tector registration side.
10
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
10.6 Temporary connections of AeroDR Portable UF Unit

• When an optional USB wired LAN adapter is installed
in this device, connect a hub or an Ethernet cable to
the standard port of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the temporary connections of devices, refer to
"AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
319

screen.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

formation Setting].
10


• The sub-menu screen is displayed. Name] Input within 64 characters.
[Telephone
Number]
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
backed up settings.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
320
5 Set the following items in [Device Informa- 6 Select [Enable Portable Mode] in [Portable
tion Setting]. Setting].
7 Set the following item in [Monitor Settings].

Manufacturer name is displayed. Setting item Settings
[Maker Name] Default setting: KONICA MINOLTA Select [Panasonic.CF-C1].
This content cannot be changed. [Monitor]
Default setting: EIZO.FlexScanT1751
This content cannot be changed. 8 Press [OK] on the CS-7 setting screen.
[Station AE
Title]
[Console
name]
Input "1-255" as ID to specify this
[Unique ID] Change is not necessary when only 1
device is installed. • The settings are stored, and the screen is
Default setting: 1
10
closed.
[Exam Room
10 characters.
Name] 9 Close the sub-menu screen.

of this device is displayed. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
the application installed when manu- • For the other settings of the CS-7 setting screen, refer
[Version] factured. to "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
When the application is updated or the User Tool Screen".
version is upgraded, it is automatically ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
updated.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
ment settings".
backed up settings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
321
Perform necessary settings during the portable X-ray

device operation on the user tool screen.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Setting is unnecessary unless directed by the user.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Set the following items in [Focus move].

[Focus Naviga-
Select [Do Not Navigate].
tion Event]
4 Set the following items in [Control Panel].

10
2 Press [Setting], and press [Screen Set-

ting].
[Defaults
display panel
Select [QUICK].
on selecting
exposed image]
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• I f performing Aero Sync exposure, [Aero Sync] auto-
matically appears on the control panel before reading
images.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
322
5 Press [OK] on the screen setting tool

screen.

closed.
10
323
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
stalled.
that will not be installed if it is turned on.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Press [Close].
• At this point, icon of the AeroDR Access Point

built-in in the AeroDR Portable UF Unit will be
explained as an example.
10

icon will change.
324
4 Press the icon of the device that will be set us-

ing the same procedure, then press the con-
nection checkbox of the sub-menu screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 10
• To install multiple AeroDR SYSTEM related devices,
turn on the connection of the device icons for the num-

ber of the devices to be installed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
device through the AeroDR unit setting screen.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
325
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Setting the network will be made with respect to each exposure room. If there are multiple exposure rooms, repeat the same
settings for each exposure room.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Press the RM icon.

Press [Setting].
10 10.10.3 RM setting

326

unit setting screen
AeroDR SYSTEM.
10

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The sub-menu screen is displayed. • When [Apply] is pressed, the settings are stored but
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
327
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
tween this device and AeroDR Detector and enables
the roaming (the change of the exposure room to use
the AeroDR Detector). It also manages the correction
data of the respective AeroDR Detectors and delivers
it to this device at the roaming destination. Setting item Settings
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
The exposure room name is dis-
played.
1 Set the following items in [RM setting]. [Exposure
Room Name]
The name set in the [Exposure Room
displayed.
Select [XARM].
[Sync Mode]
Setting item Settings Coordination] Detector assigned to the exposure
Select [Client] or [Hybrid] for the RM room to shut down.
[Mode] operation mode. Default setting: [OFF]
Change is not required if the default IP
address of this device is to be used. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
10 If the IP address of this device is to be • Do not change [Exposure Room Name].
[IP Address • Set up [Shutdown Coordination] in accordance with
of RM hybrid the operation status of the facility. It is necessary to
machine] turn on the power of the AeroDR Detector every time it

Loop-back address (127.0.0.1) cannot
be used. is used since it will not link with startup.
*The IP address of the wired LAN ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
adapter built into this device.
[IP Address
machine]
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
328

setting
Set this device and the access point built-in the Aero-
DR Portable UF Unit. Perform the setup of the access
point built-in the AeroDR Portable UF Unit first, and
then the wireless connection related setup on this de-
vice. • The setting screen is displayed.
• When setting each item, press [Submit] on each
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
formed.
is no input for 5 minutes in the setting screen, and log-
in will be required again. The contents of settings with
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

following items.

and the login screen will be displayed. 10
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• When a popup message regarding Acrobat is dis- Setting item Settings
played, choose [Not enable]. [IP configura- Select [Static].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • tion] Default setting: Static
2 Input the user name and password on the [IP address] ronment.
login screen, then press [Login].
• The default user name is "admin", and the pass- Set according to the institution envi-
word is "root".
[Gateway] ronment.
4 Press [Submit].
329
tings] and set the time synchronization for and SSID for the following items.

Select [A].
Default setting: A
Use only IEEE802.11a in the AeroDR
Input the IP address of this device. Set the channel following the results
[Available
[Time server 1] *The IP address of the wired LAN of the preliminary survey.
Channel List
adapter built into this device. When the channel is DFS, an asterisk
* indicates
(*) is displayed with the channel.
DFS channel]
Default setting: 36-5.18G
6 Press [Submit]. numeric characters according to the
[SSID]
7 Press [Operation Mode] under [Wireless [SSID broad- Select [Enable].
Settings] and set the wireless operation cast] Default setting: Enable
mode for the following items.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When installing the AeroDR Access Points in multiple
AeroDR Portable UF Units, enter a unique [SSID] for
each AeroDR Portable UF Unit to be installed regard-
less of settings of the roaming environment.
10 [Wireless en- Select [Enable]. (Example)
able] Default setting: Disable
AeroDR Portable UF Unit 1: KMMG_AeroDR_1
[Operation Select [AP].
AeroDR Portable UF Unit 2: KMMG_AeroDR_2
mode] Default setting: AP

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
8 Press [Submit]. 12 Press [Submit].
9 Press [Basic Wireless Settings] of [WLAN] 13 Press [WLAN Security Settings] of [WLAN]
of [Wireless Settings]. of [Wireless Settings].
10 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen. 14 Press [Edit] in the displayed screen.
330
Web browser window.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[Passphrase]
Ø Gt

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
ficult to guess.
• When installing multiple AeroDR Portable UF Units,
16 Press [Submit].
21 Press [Close] on the browser to close the 10
radio output with the following items.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
browser.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Select [Enable].
[WMM]
18 Press [Submit].
331
device.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Enter the serial number of the AeroDR ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Access Point on the inside of the
[Serial
AeroDR Portable UF Unit. Enter the
Number]
product code (4 digits: A5DY) - serial 1 Insert the media provided with AeroDR
number (5 digits). Detector to the CD/DVD drive.
[Display
Point on the inside of the AeroDR
Portable UF Unit using 10 characters
2 Press [Add] of [Correction Data Setting].
Name]
or less.
[Pass Phrase] ters.
Ø Gt
10
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The serial number of the AeroDR Portable UF Unit is

affixed to the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.
• Enter "A5DY" of the Dummy AeroDR Portable UF
Access Point for the product code.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
332

AeroDR Detector.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

to either the AeroDR I/F Cable or AeroDR
Battery Charger.
Setting].

Address], [Default Gateway] and [Subnet Mask] 10
are acquired.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

registered and [Serial Number] of [AeroDR De- data CD used in "10.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction
tector Setting] will be updated. data registration" and the AeroDR Detector do not
match, the "The serial number of the AeroDR Detector
4 Remove the media provided with the does not match the serial number of correction data.
Please confirm the combination of the AeroDR Detec-
AeroDR Detector from the CD/DVD drive.
tor and a CD related to this correction data." message
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

acters.
333
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
setting
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •


used is powered on.

DR I/F Cable.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
registered in "10.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction
data registration".
DR Detector.
10 be displayed. When you press [Download] at the next
set up is obtained.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
334

and press [OK].
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •


HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode 10
format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •


[Serial
Number]
[Display
characters.
Name]
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
335

and press [OK].
setting
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
necessary.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
tery Charger].
DR Battery Charger.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Insert the AeroDR Detector with correction data regis- read with a barcode reader. When installing this de-
tered referencing the "10.10.6 AeroDR Detector cor- vice in an environment where the device sub-ID can-
rection data registration". not be obtained from AeroDR Detector, set the device
10 • If the AeroDR Detector was connected to other device
before this operation, the sub-ID of that device may • For the device sub-ID and barcode, see the list sup-
be displayed. When you press [Download] at the next plied with the device. Use CODE39 as the barcode
format.
step, the device sub-ID of the AeroDR Battery Charger

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Press [Download] in [AeroDR Battery Charger].
Charger].

[Serial
[Display
10 characters.
Name] Default setting: Battery Charger
[Type]
Charger type.

played.
336
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set up of the dip switch on the AeroDR Battery Char- 10.10.10 AeroDR Detector setting
in the [Type]. Refer to the "Installation of the AeroDR Set up the AeroDR Detector with communication con-
Battery Charger for charging only" in the "AeroDR firmed referencing the "10.10.7 Confirmation of Aero-
SYSTEM Installation/Service Manual".
DR Detector communication".
Setting is not required if the default network setting of
DR Detector is not registered with an exposure room,
because no notification is sent to the RM when the
AeroDR Detector is mounted on the AeroDR Battery
Charger. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Detector's serial number which was ac-
quired in "10.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • registration" will be displayed in [Serial Number].
• Serial number of the AeroDR Battery Charger is de- Confirm that the serial number displayed is identical
scribed on the sticker on side of the main body. to the serial number on the identification label(sticker)
• When reading the serial number with a bar code read- attached to the AeroDR Detector before setting up.
er, use CODE39 for the bar code format. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
O
OWhen there are multiple AeroDR Battery HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Chargers • If connected to AeroDR Battery Charger only, replace
1 Turn on the connection for the device icon Charger" as you read.
for the second AeroDR Battery Charger. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • nected to the AeroDR Interface Unit.
SYSTEM related devices". 2 Confirm that the AeroDR Detector to be
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • used is powered on. 10
2 Set up the AeroDR Battery Charger with 3 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the Aero-
the same procedure as the first AeroDR DR I/F Cable.

Battery Charger.
environment.
337

The AeroDR Detector's serial num- 10.10.11 Saving of settings
[Serial ber which was acquired in "10.10.6
Number] AeroDR Detector correction data
registration" will be displayed.
[Wired IP Ad- screen.
dress]
[Wireless IP
screen.
Address]
[Default Gate-
DR Detector.
way]
[Subnet
Detector.
Mask]
• The settings is registered in this device's RM as

5 Press [Upload]. local settings.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
cessing" screen is closed by pressing [Cancel] during
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
10

device
• The settings are uploaded to the AeroDR Detector. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device".
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the IP address set for a segment is different
from the IP address of this device, the "Processing"
To next page
change.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
338
10.11 Setting of the wireless LAN with the AeroDR Por-
table UF Unit
Connect this device and the AeroDR Portable UF Unit

via the built-in wireless LAN.
10.11.1 Setting of the IP address

of the built-in wireless LAN
The setting method of the IP address of the built-in
wireless LAN is as follows.

3 Right-click [Wireless Network Connection]

and press [Properties].
10
10.11 Setting of the wireless LAN with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit

screen.
• The [Wireless Network Connection Properties]

339
4 Press [Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/ 6 Select [Use the following IP address] and
IPv6)] to release the selection. set the following items.
5 Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/

IPv4)] and press [Properties].
[IP address] with the facility environment.
Enter the subnet mask of the selected
[Subnet
device.
mask]
[Default Entry is not necessary if there is no
gateway] gateway on the network.
10 7 Press [OK].

340
8 Press [OK].
10.11.2 Network setting of the
built-in wireless LAN
The network setting of the built-in wireless LAN is as
follows.
1 Press [Access Point] on the sub-menu

screen.
2 Press [Add].
10
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If there are 2 wireless network adapters, press [Change
adapter] and select the network adapter to be set.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
341
3 Press [Manually create a network profile]. 5 Press [Next].

6 Press [Close].
Setting item Setting detail

Enter the SSID of the access point to
connect.
• For connection with the AeroDR
[Network name] Portable UF Unit, enter the [SSID]
set in "10.10.5 AeroDR Access Point
10 setting".
Example: KMMG_AeroDR_1
Select the type of the security for the
access point to connect.
[Security type]
• For AeroDR Portable UF Unit, select
[WPA2-Personal].
Select the type of the encryption for the
[Encryption access point to connect.
• Set network adapter is displayed in the manage-
type] • For AeroDR Portable UF Unit, select
[AES]. ment screen of the wireless network.
Enter the security key for the SSID of
the access point to connect.
• For the AeroDR Portable UF Unit,
[Security Key] enter the [Passphrase] set in "10.10.5
AeroDR Access Point setting".
Example: 165gf1JSsw9 Ø Gt4F9ODu96Xz
tI89u93ftEfrzXwe19
[Start this con-
nection auto- Select this.
matically]
[Connect even
if the network is Do not select this.
not broadcasting]
342
7 Close the wireless network management

screen.
10
343
10.12 Removal of temporarily connected Ethernet cable
1 Remove the Ethernet cable connected to

the AeroDR Portable UF Unit from the hub
for the AeroDR Detector registration side.
2 Remove the Ethernet cable connected to

the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.
3 Attach the Cable Cover to the AeroDR

Portable UF Unit.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.12 Restart of this device".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
To next page
10
10.12 Removal of temporarily connected Ethernet cable
344
Flow chart of the AerDR Detector analysis is as follows. The process time in the flow chart is a rough estimate.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Analyze the AeroDR Detector with the portable X-ray device during the portable X-ray device operation.
• When using both X-ray device in the general exposure room and the portable X-ray device, analyze the AeroDR Detector
with the X-ray device in the general exposure room with Aero Sync mode.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the analysis method of AeroDR Detector, refer to "5.6 Analysis of AeroDR Detector".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

the device with Aero Sync

(SID) to 2m

90 sec
PASS

3.0 mR
FAIL
Unevenness analysis
200 sec 60 sec
PASS
10
FAIL(first time)

3.0 mR 80 sec

PASS
Unevenness analysis FAIL(second time)

60 sec
PASS
Defect analysis FAIL(second time) Backup the complete set of

PASS
Existence of CS-7 with NO

SRM/S-SRM link Replace AeroDR Detector
YES

sync
Execute gain calibration and

Perform gain calibration and
offset calibration with the device
offset calibration
with SRM or S-SRM sync

analysis
345
10.14 Deployment to the installation locations and con-
nection to the institution network
10.14.1 Deployment of
respective devices to
the installation locations
Install the respective devices in the installation loca-
tion.
1 Install this device, AeroDR Portable UF

Unit, and peripheral devices in the instal-
lation location.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the deployment of the AeroDR Portable UF Unit,
al".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
10.14.2 Connection to the

institution network
Connect this device and the institution network.
tion network.
10
1 Connect the Ethernet cable of the institu-
tion network to the hub that is connected
to this device and the AeroDR Portable UF
Unit.
10.14 Deployment to the installation locations and connection to the
institution network
4.17 Activation

device
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
To next page
346
Set this device and the channel of the AeroDR Access

Point built in the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.
This operation is not required when channel switching
of the AeroDR Access Point is not performed.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The channel for the AeroDR Access Point can be set
either automatically or manually.
–– In the automatic setting of the AeroDR Access
Point, the system automatically surveys the signal
in the location where automatic selection can be
executed and selects an appropriate channel based • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
on the results to set the AeroDR Access Point ac-
cordingly.
When the system is operated in location where the
screen.
signal environment may change, an appropriate
channel can be selected in response to any change.
–– In the manual setting of the AeroDR Access Point,
the channels to be used are registered in advance,
and a channel is selected to set the AeroDR Access
Point during operation.
This method is used when the channel to be used in
the operating location is fixed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

auto setting 10

Start the service tool.
• The AP Channel setting tool screen is displayed.
347
4 Press the [Auto Channel] tab. Setting item Settings

Select the channel to use. A check-
mark is added to the selected channel.
[Channel List] (*) is displayed in [DFS].
* When a preset is selected, chan-
nels other than DFS channels are all
selected in the displayed list.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• In the channels of [Channel List], the code on the left
side of the hyphen indicates the channel and the code
on the right side of the hyphen indicates the frequency.
Example: In 36-5.18G, 36 is the channel and 5.18G is
the frequency.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6 Press [Save].
• The Auto Channel setting screen is displayed.
10

Select a network of this device to survey
the signal. When there are several options,
[Survey Net- follow "10.11.1 Setting of the IP address
work Interface] of the built-in wireless LAN" to check the
name of the built-in wireless network and 7 Press [OK].
select it.
Select a connection mode of this de-
vice and the AeroDR Access Point in
accordance with operating state.
[Wired]: This device and the AeroDR
[Connection
Access Point are connected by a
Mode]
wired connection
[Wireless]: This device and the
AeroDR Access Point are connected by
a wireless connection
Select a country name for the oper-
ating location. The channel presets
[Country]
usable in the selected country are dis-
played in the [Channel List].
348
8 Press [Close].
manual setting
9 Confirm the [Auto CH] icon is displayed

on the system monitor screen - [Portable]
screen.
10


screen.
349
• The AP Channel setting tool screen is displayed. • A new Manual Channel setting screen is dis-
played.

Management number of the Access
[Setting No.] Point information is displayed.
[Access Point Input the Access Point information
Name] name.
Select the channel information set to
10 the AeroDR Access Point.
• TRUE: Channel information that is set
[Enabled]
• FALSE: Channel information that is
not set
Default setting: [FALSE]

• The Manual Channel setting screen is displayed. Select the location to set Access Point
information.
[Location] Select from [Ward], [Floor], [X-Ray
5 Press [New]. room], or [Others].
Default setting: [Ward]
Select the serial number of the AeroDR
[AP S/N]
Access Point.
Select the radio frequency band of the
[Radio
Access Point information. Currently,
frequency
only [IEEE802.11a] can be selected.
band]
Default setting: [IEEE802.11a]
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If there are multiple Access Point information items,
make sure to select [TRUE] for the Access Point in-
formation that is the same as the channel set to the
AeroDR Access Point. Once [TRUE] is selected for
one, all other channel information items are changed
to [FALSE].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
350
7 Select a channel you want to use from 9 Press [OK].

[Item], and press [>] to move the channel
to [Selected Item].
• When multiple channels are moved to [Selected

Item], the channel on the top of the list is prior to
others. To change the priority, select the channel
you want to change and press [Up] or [Down] to
change the list order.
• The set AeroDR Access Point information is dis-

played.
10 Press [Close].
8 Press [Regist].
10
351
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
10.15.3 Addition of the AeroDR
• Each item that is set will be displayed on the system
monitor screen - [Portable] screen.
Add the AeroDR Access Point information to be con-
nected with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.
(1)

(3) screen.
(2)
(4)
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(1) The AeroDR Access Point where [TRUE] is se- DR Access Point manual setting".
lected in [Enabled] is displayed. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(2) The AeroDR Access Point where [FALSE] is se-
lected in [Enabled] is displayed. 2 Press the [ManualChannel] tab.
(3) The location where the AeroDR Access Point select-
ed in [Location] is installed is displayed with an icon.
(4) The AeroDR Access Point name entered in [Ac-
cess Point Name] is displayed.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
10
352
3 Press [New].
10.15.4 Change of the AeroDR
Change the AeroDR Access Point information to be
connected with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.

screen.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• A new Manual Channel setting screen is dis-

played.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Even in cases where there is AeroDR Access Point in-
formation whose settings have not been saved, if [New]
is pressed, contents in the process of setting will be
cleared, and the default settings are restored. Perform 10
the operation after saving the information setting that
is not saved.

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Set the AeroDR Access Point.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Select the AeroDR Access Point whose
information you want to change.
353
6 Press [OK].
• The setting is displayed on [Selected Access

Point].
4 Input or select the items to be changed.
• The setting will be changed.
5 Press [Regist]. 7 Press [Close].
10
• A message screen to confirm overwriting is dis-

played.
354
10.15.5 Deletion of the AeroDR

4 Press [Delete].

Delete the AeroDR Access Point information to be con-
nected with the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.

screen.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the operation, refer to steps 1-3 of "10.15.2
AeroDR Access Point manual setting".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• A message screen to confirm deleting is dis-

played.
5 Press [OK].
10

3 Select the AeroDR Access Point that is to

be deleted.
• The AeroDR Access Point information is de-

leted.
355
6 Press [Close].
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The [Setting No.] of the deleted AeroDR Access Point
will be vacant.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

migration
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.20 Optional installation and data migra-
tion".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
10
To next page
356
• When the network segment of the institution differs by individual floor, the area-specific networks can be set by fol-
lowing procedures.
Set the network settings of the network adapter to connect to the institution network, and the IP address of the con-
nected device (RIS/HOST).
• Set the area-specific network settings by the static IP address.
• The network adapter can be set for both wired/wireless.
• When the network segment of the institution is not divided, area-specific network switching is not required and this
operation is not needed.
Setting example for wireless connection
Institution
Access point (3) CS-7 area setting (3)
• Segment: 192.168.23.xxx • IP address: 192.168.23.90
Institution • SSID: AP3 • AE title: KM_CS7_U0003
3rd floor • SSID: AP3
• Other party's device (RIS/HOST)
RIS/HOST

Change CS-7 area

2nd floor • Other party's device (RIS/HOST)
10
RIS/HOST

Change CS-7 area

1st floor • Other party's device (RIS/HOST)
RIS/HOST
* There is no SSID setting for the CS-7 area setting when connecting via a wired connection.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This function can only be set when [Portable Setting] of the CS-7 setting screen is enabled.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
357
10.16.1 Creating a new area
4 Press [Add] of [Area setting].
• The area name can now be entered.
5 Enter an area name of 10 characters or

less.
10
• A new area is created.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To create multiple areas, repeat steps 4 and 5.
• To change the area name, press [Edit] or right click on
the area name to switch to a state in which the area
name can be changed and change the name.
• When multiple areas are used, the display order of the
areas can be changed using [Up]/[Down].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
358
10.16.2 Network configuration

3 Set the following items in [Unit].
for each area
1 Press [Setting] for the network adaptor to

be set.

The device to be configured is dis-
[Unit]
played.
Select to switch the network configu-
ration to the configuration shown here
when the area is changed.
Do not use the same device as the
[switching switching target for multiple network
• The setting screen is displayed. target] adaptors.
Do not set a device whose RIS ser-
vice class is [Detached] to a switching
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
target.
• Give the network adapter an easy-to-recognize name The default setting is [OFF].
so that you can easily select the adapter to be config- Enter the IP address of this device.
ured. [IP address] Can only be set in devices for which
• You can modify the name of network adapters on the [switching target] is [ON].
control panel of Windows. Enter the AE title for this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Enter the item with 16 or less charac-
[AE title] ters.
Can only be set in devices for which
2 Set the following items in [CS-7]. [switching target] is [ON].
10
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The procedure for copying already-configured network
settings from an area into another area is as follows.

(a) Press [Copy] on the setting screen for the original
area.

[IP address] Enter IP address of this device. (a)
[Subnet
Enter the subnet mask of this device.
mask]
Enter the default gateway address of
[Default gate- this device.
way] If there is no gateway on the network,
enter "0.0.0.0".
(b) Select the copy destination area in the [Copy net-
Enter the AE title of this device.
work configuration for each area] dialog.
[AE title] Enter the item with 16 or less charac-
ters. (c) Press [Copy].
Enter the SSID of the wireless LAN

access point.
[SSID] Enter 32 or less characters. (b)
* [SSID] is displayed only when the (c)
wireless LAN adapter is used.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
359
4 Press [OK]. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• Pressing [Cancel] discards the entered content and
returns to the CS-7 setting screen.
• On completing the settings, [Network configuration
switching] of the configured network adaptor changes
from [Not configured] to [Configured].
• The setting state of the network adaptor and the set-

ting screen display button change according to the
state as follows.
Setting screen
display button
Setting state
Setting screen display button

[Setting]: Displays the setting screen. Displayed when
• The configuration is stored and the CS-7 setting the setting state is [Not configured] or [Configured in-
screen is displayed. completely].
• After selecting another area, set the network con- [Unsetting]: Temporarily deletes the completed net-
figuration for each area by repeating steps 1 to 4. working settings. Displayed when the setting state is
[Configured].
Setting state
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
[Not configured]: Displayed when no applicable network
• You should be aware that all the settings are cleared if adapters have been set for the area-specific network.
you press [Clear]. [Configured]: Displayed when the applicable network
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • adapters have been set correctly for the area-specific
10 network. Switching the area also switches the appli-
cable network adapter settings.
[Configured incompletely]: Displayed when the area-
specific network settings are being edited. The appli-

cable network adapter settings are not applied when
the area is switched.
• Pressing [Unsetting] will result in the settings being
[Configured incompletely], and the button will change
to [Setting]. Pressing the [Setting] button again will
display the setting screen, and allow the settings to be
edited.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

360
10.16.3 Initial area selection 10.16.4 Other settings
1 Restart this device. Deletion of the area for which settings have
been configured
2 Confirm that the device is connected to • To delete a configured area, select the area to be
the network. deleted in [Area setting] and press [Delete].
• You can connect the device to any network that
is set on the area selection screen.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When wired connection is used in the area where the
device is used, connect it with a hub.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Press [>>] on the initial screen of this de- Change of the configured settings for the
vice, then press the area selection button area-specific network
for which [AreaNotSet] is displayed. • To change the configured area-specific network
settings, press [Unsetting] for the network adaptor
that is to be changed. The [Configured] display will
change to [Configured incompletely], and [Unsetting]
will change to [Setting]. Press [Setting] and change
the settings.
10
4 Press the button of the area that is now

connected.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
vice".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5 Confirm that the name of the selected area

is displayed on the area selection button.
To next page
361

10.17.2 Delivery

tions.
1 Perform a series of exposures under the • Provide a description of User tool for administra-
2 Confirm that there is no problem with the IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

posed images. istrator of this device; you should however provide
operators with a description of the method as needed.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • When it is required to change the wireless channel,
describe the location to change the wireless.
• When using this device in Aero Sync mode, explain
tion.
the relationship between the exposure condition range
and the X-ray sensitivity based on the result of the
mission from institution management personnel.
Aero Sync signal acquisition. And if it is requested ac-
cording to the user's case of usage, modify the X-ray
–– When an order is received from a Radiology Infor-
detection level and Aero Sync button setting.
mation System (RIS).
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
10 2 Clean up to complete the installation.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • The installation of this device is now completed.
• Reconfirm the settings in this chapter if any problem
occurs. 10.17.3 Chassis registration

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
preparation
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The manufacturer's user registration may be neces-
sary depending on which chassis is used. As a prepa-
ration, you should record the serial number of the
chassis.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For information on the registration method, refer to the
operation manual for the chassis.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
362
Chapter
11
Device and AeroDR Stitching Unit
This chapter describes the installation of this device and AeroDR Stitching Unit.
363
11.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR
Stitching Unit
This section describes the installation procedure based on the connection example (Stitching/AeroDR Detector
Wired Connection/SRM) as follows.
O
OStitching/AeroDR Detector Wired Connection/SRM
Exposure room AeroDR

Stitching Unit
X-ray device
X-ray Tube
AeroDR
UF Cable Power Supply Unit AeroDR Stitching
AeroDR X-ray Auto Barrier Unit
I/F Cable
XIF/
XGIF
Power
source Hub
ECB
AeroDR Generator
AeroDR Interface Unit Interface Unit
Hub
Power
AeroDR I/F Cable
X-ray device
AeroDR UF Cable
operation panel
Ethernet cable(PoE) Ethernet-serial
AeroDR Stitching UT Cable
11
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To use the AeroDR Stitching Unit, make wired connection with the AeroDR Detector.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
11.1 Connection example of this device and AeroDR
Stitching Unit
364
11.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR
Stitching Unit
The installation operating process for this device and the AeroDR Stitching Unit is as follows.
Confirm that the AeroDR SYSTEM has already been installed before installing the AeroDR Stitching System.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• To install the AeroDR Stitching Unit, the AeroDR Detector must have already been installed. Make sure to start the proce-
dure after installing AeroDR SYSTEM devices other than the AeroDR Stitching Unit.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
The workflow to install the AeroDR Stitching Unit
1 11.3 Temporary connection of AeroDR Stitching System 1 3.4 Installation of respective devices
2 4.6 Registration of license 2 3.5 Startup checks of respective devices
3 11.4 Activation of AeroDR Stitching System 3 3.6 Setting the CS-7
4 11.5 AeroDR Stitching System setting
5 11.6 Saving of settings
6 11.7 Setting of user tool 4 3.7 Installation of the AeroDR Stitching System
7 11.8.1 Checking the AeroDR Stitching System
8 11.8.2 Adjusting SID
9 11.8.3 Illuminance selection 5 3.9 Illumination selection
11.8.4 Initializing exposure position correction value

10 11
(when correcting picture top position)
3.10.2 Measuring the picture top position
6
11 11.8.5 Measuring the picture top position correction value correction value
11.2 The workflow to install this device and AeroDR

12 11.8.6 Measuring the picture center position correction value 3.10.3 Measuring the picture center position
Stitching Unit
7
correction value
11.8.7 Initializing exposure position correction value
13
(when correcting picture lower position)
14 11.8.8 Measuring the picture lower position correction value 3.10.5 Measuring the picture lower position
8
correction value
15 11.8.9 Setting the correction values
9 3.10.7 Correction values confirmation
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation of the section enclosed with the dotted line in above flow, refer to each section of the "Chapter 4 Installation
Procedure for This Device and AeroDR SYSTEM (SRM connection)".
• For the installation procedure of AeroDR Stitching Unit, refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installation/Service Manual".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
365
11.3 Temporary connection of AeroDR Stitching System
Connect this device and the AeroDR Stitching System.
1 Make sure that this device is powered off.
2 Make temporary connection of AeroDR

Stitching System.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the temporary connection of AeroDR Stitching
System, refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installa-
tion/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Start AeroDR Stitching System, AeroDR

SYSTEM devices, and this device.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For turning the power on of the AeroDR Stitching Sys-
tem, refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installation/
Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
11
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• This operation is not necessary if you also registered
11.3 Temporary connection of AeroDR Stitching System
the license of the AeroDR Stitching System when in-

stalling the AeroDR SYSTEM.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.6 Registration of license".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
To next page
366
11.4 Activation of AeroDR Stitching System
Turn on the connection to the AeroDR Stitching Sys- 3 Press [Close].

tem to perform the settings.
1 Press the AeroDR Stitching System icon.

icon will change.
11
2 Select the connection check box.
11.4 Activation of AeroDR Stitching System
367
11.5 AeroDR Stitching System setting
11.5.1 Adjustment of the

Set the AeroDR Stitching Unit of the AeroDR Stitching
System.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the IP address, the subnet mask or the gateway
address of this device is changed, restore the default
settings before starting the settings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to set the IP address of this device, refer to
"4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Press the device icon of the AeroDR

Stitching System.

11
3 Set the following items of [Stitching Unit
Setting].

[Serial Num- Displays the serial number of the
ber] AeroDR Stitching Unit.
Input the name of the AeroDR
Stitching Unit. Input up to 10
characters.
[Display The display name set here is also
Name] used as the display name of the
• The sub-menu screen is displayed. AeroDR UF Cable in the AeroDR
Stitching Unit.
2 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. Default setting: "LongLength".
[IP Address] Stitching Unit.
Input the default gateway of the
[Default Gate-
AeroDR Stitching Unit.
way]
368

11.5.2 Setting the AeroDR UF Cable
[Subnet
Stitching Unit. in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
Mask]
Set the AeroDR UF cable included in the AeroDR
Stitching Unit.
4 Press [Upload].
1 Confirm that power of the AeroDR Detec-
tor is on, and insert it into the AeroDR
Stitching Unit.
2 Press [Download] under [Stitching Unit

Cable Setting].
• The settings are uploaded to the AeroDR Stitch-

ing Unit.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When setting the AeroDR Stitching Unit after restoring
the IP address of this device to its default value, per-
form the following operations.
* If the IP address of this device that suits the institu- • The AeroDR Detector selection screen is dis-
tion environment is the same as the default address, played.
this operation is not required. 11
(1) Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen to
save the settings.
and press [OK].
(2) Change the IP address of this device to an IP ad-

dress that suits the institution environment. For de-
tails, refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this
device".
(3) Restart this device.
• AeroDR Stitching Unit setting changes may take up to
a maximum of 30 seconds to take effect.
• When the IP address set for a segment is different
from that of this device, the "Processing" screen may
not disappear although settings are being uploaded
to the AeroDR Stitching Unit. After waiting for 30 sec-
onds or more, press [Cancel], then perform ping from
the Windows command prompt and confirm that there
is no response from the IP address before the change.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The device sub-ID of the AeroDR UF Cable in

the AeroDR Stitching Unit is automatically re-
trieved, and it will be displayed in [Device Sub
ID] of [Stitching Unit Cable Setting].
369
4 Set the following items in [Stitching Unit

Cable Setting].

Input the serial number of the AeroDR
UF Cable in the AeroDR Stitching
[Serial Num-
Unit, or read the bar code.
ber]
Input in "product code (4 digits) - serial
number. (5 digits)".
Displays the name of the AeroDR UF
Cable in the AeroDR Stitching Unit.
[Display The name that was registered as [Dis-
Name] play Name] in [Stitching Unit Settings]
is displayed.
Default setting: LongLength
Select [Image Orientation].
If [Insertion Opening] is [Right], select
[Image Orien- [Standard].
tation] If [Insertion Opening] is [Left], select
[Upside down].
Select the insertion direction of the
[Insertion
AeroDR Detector from [Left] or [Right].
Opening]
Default setting: Left
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To confirm the serial number of the AeroDR UF Cable
in the AeroDR Stitching Unit, remove the top cover
11 and check the seal located at the top left.
• When reading the serial number with a bar code
reader, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

WS1, 2 and 3 respectively indicate
the first, second and third stages of
the XIF or XGIF board in the AeroDR
Generator Interface Unit.
[Stitching Sets correspondences with the WS
Unit] allocated to the AeroDR Stitching Unit.
When 2 AeroDR Generator Interface
Units are used, the second (with only
1 XIF or XGIF board) AeroDR Genera-
tor Interface Unit is [WS4].
370
11.6 Saving of settings
When all settings of AeroDR Stitching System are

completed, save the settings and close the AeroDR
unit setting screen.

screen.

11
11.6 Saving of settings
371
Perform necessary settings for the AeroDR Stitching

System operation on the user tool screen.
• The Exam. Tag setting tool screen is displayed.
3 Press the [Property List] tab.

11
2 Press [Setting], and press [Detailed].
• The [Property List] screen is displayed.
372
4 Select [STITCHING] from [Bodypart].
5 Select [LongLength] from [Priority Modal-

ity].
6 Press [OK] on the [Property List] screen.

11
373
11.8 Adjustment of the AeroDR Stitching System
Adjust the AeroDR Stitching System.

11.8.2 Adjusting SID
11.8.1 Checking the AeroDR
Stitching System Adjust SID according to the installation environment of
the facility.
Confirm the status of the AeroDR Stitching System.
1 Confirm that power of the AeroDR Detec- Stitching System.
tor is on, and insert it into the AeroDR
Stitching Unit.
2 On the system monitor screen, confirm

that the AeroDR Stitching System and this
device are properly connected to each
other.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Confirm that this device is properly connected to the
11
AeroDR Stitching System.
2 Press [Adjustment] on the sub-menu

Normal Disconnected screen.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
374
11.8.3 Illuminance selection
• The AeroDR Stitching Unit adjustment screen is Measure illuminance with the AeroDR Stitching Sys-
displayed. tem and select the illuminance according to the result.
3 Select a SID value. 1 Press [Adjustment] on the sub-menu

screen.
• Select from [1500], [2000] or [2400].
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the setting value, refer to "AeroDR Stitching
System Installation/ Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Press [Upload].
5 Press [Close] to close the AeroDR Stitch-

ing Unit adjustment screen. • The AeroDR Stitching Unit adjustment screen is
displayed.
2 Select [Normal] from [illuminance select].
11

3 Press [Upload].
4 Press [Close] to close the AeroDR Stitch-

ing Unit adjustment screen.
375
5 Press [I/O Test] on the sub-menu screen. 9 Record the value shown for [Barrier Unit
On a photon detection sensor] (0 to 1023),
as Value A (The AD value when the light is
detected).
10 Move the X-ray Tube up and down so that

the horizontal line of the cross-shaped
shadow is over the light detector.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the adjustment of the X-ray tube, refer to "AeroDR
Stitching System Installation/Service Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The I/O test screen appears. 11 Record the value shown for [Barrier Unit
On a photon detection sensor] (0 to 1023),
as Value B (The AD value when the cross-
6 Select the [Mask board Mid pos] and
shaped shadow of the Collimator is de-
press [Execute].
tected).
11
7 Confirm that the Slit Panel of the AeroDR
Stitching X-ray Auto Barrier Unit stops at 12 When completing the measurement, press
[Close] to close the I/O test screen.
the middle position.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 13 Press [Adjustment] on the sub-menu

• For the stop position of the slit plate, refer to "AeroDR screen.
Stitching System Installation/Service Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
8 Measure the light intensity at the center of

the X-ray Tube.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the measurement of the light intensity, refer to
"AeroDR Stitching System Installation/Service Manu-
al".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
376
11.8.4 Initializing exposure

position correction
value (when correcting
• The AeroDR Stitching Unit adjustment screen is
displayed.
picture top position)
Before measuring and inputting exposure po-
14 Adjust the illuminance according to the sition correction values, initialize the correc-
measurement result. tion values.
1 Input the correction value for the expo-

sure position.
• Using Value A (The AD value when the light is

detected) recorded in Step 9 and Value B (The
AD value when the cross-shaped shadow of the
Collimator is detected) recorded in Step 11, per-
form the setting according to the table below. Setting item Settings
[Picture top position correction value] 0
Value A -
Value A Setting [Picture middle position correction
Value B 0
value]
Replace the halogen lamp
[Picture lower position correction value] 50
600 or less ― because the required light
intensity is not attained.
600 < A The system can be used
― IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
< 950 in "Normal" setting.
• Do not change any other settings than those shown
The system can be used
250 or more above. Altered settings may cause the exposure field
in "Normal" setting.
950 to 1023 to be improperly detected.
Change the setting to
250 or less ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
"High illumination".
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Press [Upload].
• If the Value A is 600 or less, it means that the light 11

intensity of the Collimator is not sufficient. Then the
halogen lamp needs to be replaced.
• If the Value A is 950 or more and the value of Value

A minus Value B is 250 or less, the cross-shaped
shadow is considered to be blurred due to too high 3 Press [Close] on the AeroDR Stitching
light intensity of the Collimator. In such cases, select Unit adjustment screen.
"High illumination" and lower the detection sensitivity
of the photo sensor, so that the cross-shaped shadow 4 Press [Close] on the sub-menu screen.
can be detected easily.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Press [Close] on the system monitor
screen.
15 Press [Upload]. • The patient registration screen or the list screen
appears.
377
11.8.5 Measuring the picture top

3 Select the set keys in the order of [AP
Middle] → [AP Lower] in the [Tot. Spine]
position correction value and press the [Perform].
Measure the picture top position correction value ac-
cording to the following procedure.
Operations with this device
1 Input an ID in the [Patient ID] column and

press the [Perform] on the patient regis-
tration screen.
4 Check that "Please detect radiation field"

appears on the exposure screen.
2 Press [SPECIAL] on the body part selec-

tion screen.
Operations with the AeroDR Stitching

System
11
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the operation with the AeroDR Stitching System,
refer to "AeroDR Stitching System Installation/Service

Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If page 1/2 appears, press the selector button to dis-
play page 2/2.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
378
Measuring displacement between the 5 Press [Tot. Spine AP Middle] on the expo-
captured shot and irradiating light sure screen, followed by the [Viewer].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Set radiation dose for exposure to 80kV-20.0mAs.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Select the [Tot. Spine AP Lower] and

check that "Ready" appears in the expo-
sure screen.
6 Check the ruler scale mark at the top edge

of the captured shot.
• Compare the scale marks of the exposure field
and captured shot, and record the difference as
the "picture top position correction value".
Scale mark
of captured
shot
2 Press the exposure switch of the X-ray
device (to take the first shot).
3 After taking the first shot, select the [Tot.

Spine AP Middle] and check that "Ready"
11
Scale mark of expo-
sure field

device (to take the 2nd shot).
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the confirmation procedure for the difference in the
scale between the exposure field and obtained image,
Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
379
7 Press [ ].
11.8.6 Measuring the picture
center position
correction value
Measure the picture center position correction value
according to the following procedure.
Operations with this device

tration screen.
2 Press [SPECIAL] on the body part selec-

tion screen.
11
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
play page 2/2.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
380
3 Select [AP Lower] in the [Tot. Spine] and Measuring displacement between the
press the [Perform]. captured shot and irradiating light
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Check that "Ready" appears in the expo-

sure screen.


3 Press [AP Middle] on the exposure screen,

followed by the [Viewer].

System
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 11

Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
381
4 Check the ruler scale mark at the top edge

11.8.7 Initializing exposure
of the captured shot.
• Compare the scale marks of the exposure field position correction
and captured shot, and record the difference as value (when correcting
the "picture center position correction value". picture lower position)
Before measuring image displacement and inputting
Scale mark exposure position correction values, initialize the cor-
of captured rection values.
shot
Stitching System.
Scale mark of
exposure field
11 Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the confirmation procedure for the difference in the

Manual".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
5 Press [ ]. 2 Press [Adjustment] on the sub-menu

screen.
382
11.8.8 Measuring the

picture lower position
correction value
displayed. Measure the picture lower position correction value ac-
cording to the following procedure.
3 Input the correction values for the expo-
sure position. Operations with this device

tration screen.
[Picture top position correction value] -50
[Picture middle position correction
0
value]
[Picture lower position correction value] 0
4 Press [Upload].
5 Press [Close] on the AeroDR Stitching 2 Press [SPECIAL] on the body part selec-
Unit adjustment screen. tion screen.
6 Press [Close] on the sub-menu screen.
7 Press [Close] on the system monitor 11

screen.
• T
he patient registration screen or the list screen
appears.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
play page 2/2.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
383
3 Select the set keys in the order of [AP Measuring displacement between the
Middle] → [AP Lower] in the [Tot. Spine] captured shot and irradiating light
and press the [Perform].
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Check that "Ready" appears in the expo-

sure screen.


3 After taking the first shot, check that

"Ready" appears on the exposure screen.

11 System
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
device (to take the 2nd shot).
5 Press [AP Middle] on the exposure screen,

followed by the [Viewer].
384
6 Check the ruler scale mark at the bottom

11.8.9 Setting the correction
edge of the captured shot.
• Compare the scale marks of the exposure field values
and captured shot, and record the difference as
Set the measured displacement as correction value.
the "picture lower position correction value".

Stitching System.
Scale mark
of captured
shot
Scale mark of
exposure field
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
11
• For the confirmation procedure for the difference in the • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
2

Press [Adjustment] on the sub-menu
Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • screen.
7 Press [ ].
385
11.8.10 Correction values

confirmation
displayed. 1 Confirm the set correction values.
3 Enter the measured picture top position Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

correction value, picture middle position • For confirmation of the correction value, refer to "Aero-
correction value and picture lower posi- DR Stitching System Installation/Service Manual".
tion correction value. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

[Picture top Enter a value in the range of -128 to
position cor- 127 for the correction value of the top device
rection value] screen.
[Picture
Enter a value in the range of -128 to
middle posi-
127 for the correction value of the
tion correc-
middle screen.
tion value] HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
[Picture lower Enter a value in the range of -128 to
• If other AeroDR SYSTEM devices than the AeroDR
position cor- 127 for the correction value of the
rection value] lower screen. Stitching System have not been delivered, refer to
"4.22.2 Delivery" to complete the delivery operation.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Press [Upload].
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
vice" first.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
11
386
Chapter
12
Installation of Options
This chapter describes the operations for installing options for this device.
387
(SYSMEX RA TA-402X)
The Ethernet-serial converter is an adapter for con- 3 Confirm that LEDs of the Ethernet-serial
verting RS-232C and Ethernet communications. converter are in the following status:
Status
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4
• SYSMEX RA TA-402X is used only in Japan. Use
Flashing Flashing Off Off
MOXA Nport 5110A in other countries.
12.1 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (SYSMEX RA TA-402X)
• The screens are shown in Japanese as the Japanese

• If the LED displays of the conversion box is dif-
model SYSMEX RA TA-402X is used as an example.
ferent from the above, there is a problem with
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • the hard disk. Refer to the operation manual of
the Ethernet-serial converter when troubleshoot-
Recommended parts and conditions for the ing.
Ethernet-serial converter
Item Conditions 4 Confirm that the mode switch (rotary
Number of switch) on the side of the Ethernet-serial
1 port
ports converter is set to "0".
Ethernet 100BASE-TX/ • If it is not "0", set it to "0".
Network terminal 10BASE-T
interface
Protocol IEEE 802.3
RJ-45 Category 5 or
12.1.2 Ethernet-serial converter
Connector
higher network settings
Electrical
specification
EIA-232C compliant Configure the network settings of the Ethernet-serial
Serial inter- converter. The settings are done on this device.
Number of
face 1 port
ports
Connector D-sub 9 pin 1 Close service tools and display the Win-
Environmental dows desktop screen.
Temperature 0 °C to 40 °C
condition
2 Copy the folder "C:\TA-402X\TARemote
SetupX" from the CS-7 DRIVER CD to the
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
desktop.
• The maximum length of the RS-232C cable is 15 m.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
3 Double click [TASetup.exe].
12
12.1.1 Start and check of the
Start the Ethernet-serial converter and check the op-
erational status.
1 Connect the power cable to the Ethernet-

serial converter. • The [TA Remote Setup X] screen will be dis-
played.
2 Plug the power cable into an outlet.
• Start the Ethernet-serial converter.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• There is no power switch on the Ethernet-serial con-
verter. It can be powered on/off by plugging/unplug-
ging the power cable.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
388
4 Select [Register new] from [Network] on

12.1.3 Change of the Ethernet-serial converter
the menu bar.
address and connection of this device
and the Ethernet-serial converter
Connect this device to the Ethernet-serial converter on
a local network.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Since the address cannot be changed on the Ether-
net-serial converter itself, change the address on the
local network environment.
• Set the appropriate address to prevent address con-
flicts between this device and the Ethernet-serial
converter. The default address of the Ethernet-serial
• The [Register a new network] screen will be dis-
converter is as follows.
played.
Address: 192.168.200.254
Subnet: 255.255.255.0
• Make sure to set the address of this device before set-
ting the address of the Ethernet-serial converter.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
12.1.4 Searching for Ethernet-

serial converters
Search for Ethernet-serial converters that are currently
operating within the network.
1 Select [Search] from [Manage TA] on the

menu bar of the [TA Remote Setup X]
screen.

Enter the network name to be man-
[Network name] aged by the Ethernet-serial converter. 12
Enter the default value [TA-100KR-X].
Enter the subnet mask of this device
[Subnet mask] that controls the Ethernet-serial con-
verter.
Enter the [Gateway address] when the
network of this device and the network
[Gateway ad-
of the Ethernet-serial converter are
dress]
different. If changes are unnecessary,
leave the settings to [2.2.2.2].
6 Press [OK].
• The Ethernet-serial converters that are currently

operating within the network will be displayed.
389
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 2 Select [Setup], then press [OK].

• The information acquired once from the search will be
displayed as is even if a search is performed again.
If you want to display only Ethernet-serial convert-
ers that are currently running, delete unnecessary
Ethernet-serial converter information and perform the
search again. To delete, select the Ethernet-serial con-
verter to be deleted and select [Delete] from [Manage
TA] on the menu bar.
3 Confirm that LEDs of the Ethernet-serial

converter are in the following status:
Status
On Off Off Off
12.1.6 LAN and serial settings

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Perform LAN and serial settings on the [Acquire set-
tings] screen.
12.1.5 Change of the mode 1 Select the Ethernet-serial converter that

is currently being set and select [Acquire
Change the Ethernet-serial converter mode. settings] from [Manage TA] on the menu
bar.
1 Select the Ethernet-serial converter that
is currently being set and select [Convert
mode] from [Manage TA] on the menu bar.
12
• The [Acquire settings] screen will be displayed.
• The [Change mode] screen will be displayed.
390
2 Press [OK]. Setting item Settings

LAN settings
[Local IP ad- Enter the IP address assigned to the
dress] Ethernet-serial converter.
[Destination IP Enter the IP address of this device that
address] controls the Ethernet-serial converter.
[Subnet mask] Enter the subnet mask.
Enter the gateway address that was set
[Gateway ad- in the [New network settings] screen.

dress] If changes are unnecessary, leave the
settings to [2.2.2.2].
Serial settings
[Baud rate] Select [4800bps].
[Data length] Select [8 bit].
[Stop bit] Select [1 bit].
[Parity] Select [Even].
[Flow control] Select [None].
* Use default values for settings other than the
above. If the settings are different from the
screen shown above, edit the settings to match
the above screen.
4 Press [Send].
• The [Acquire TA-100KR Series settings] screen

will be displayed.
12
12.1.7 Setting confirmation
Check the IP address of the Ethernet-serial converter

that was set in the [TA Remote Setup X] screen.
391
12.1.8 Changing the mode

12.1.10 Other settings
again
Change the mode again to [Normal operation] in the When the network of this device differs from the net-
[Change mode] screen. work of the Ethernet-serial converter, change the gate-
way address to the gateway address of the Ethernet-
serial converter on the following setting screen.
1 Select the Ethernet-serial converter that
is currently being set and select [Change
mode] from [Manage TA] on the menu bar.

• The [Change mode] screen will be displayed.
2 Select [Normal operation], then press

[OK].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The [Change mode] screen will be displayed with
[Normal operation] selected even during setup. How-
• Then set RemoteCOM.
ever, make sure to press [OK] to apply the change.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
12.1.11 New RemoteCOM
3 Confirm that LEDs of the Ethernet-serial registration
Status IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 • Before starting the settings, connect the Ethernet-
Flashing Flashing Off Off serial converter to the LAN.
12
• If the LED displays of the Ethernet-serial con- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
verter is different from the above, redo the set-
tings. 1 Copy the folder "C:\TA-402X\RmtCom"
• When there are multiple Ethernet-serial convert- from the CS-7 DRIVER CD to the desktop.
ers to be set, repeat the settings from "Change
of the mode" onwards.
2 Double click [SETUP.EXE].
• RemoteCOM will be installed.
12.1.9 Closing the TA remote
setup 3 Restart this device.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Select [Exit application] from [File] on the
menu bar. • When restarting, refer to "4.12 Restart of this device".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• TA remote setup will close.
392
4 Double click RemoteCOM on the Windows Setting item Settings

taskbar, or press RemoteCOM on the Win- Select the COM port number to be set.
dows Start menu to start RemoteCOM. * COM1 and COM2 cannot be used.
[COM port]
* If the selected COM port is currently
in use, select another COM port.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Enter the IP address of the Ethernet-
serial converter that was set in "10.1.2
• Make sure to start RemoteCOM only after completing [IP address]
Ethernet-serial converter network set-
the TA remote setup. tings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [Also set the

TA-100KR Select [Also set the TA-100KR server
server at the at the same time].
same time]
7 Press [OK].
• The [RemoteCOM] screen will be displayed.
5 Select [New] from [Settings] on the menu

bar.
8 When the Download complete screen ap-

pears, press [OK].
9 When the Restart screen appears, press

[Yes] to restart this device.
• When setting other COM ports, press [No] and
repeat the operation.
12
• The [New registration] screen will be displayed.
393
12.1.12 Change of RemoteCOM

4 Enter the IP address and press [OK].
settings
1 Start RemoteCOM.
2 Select the Ethernet-serial converters

whose settings will be changed from the
[RemoteCOM] screen list.
5 When the Download complete screen ap-

pears, press [OK].
3 Select [Update] from [Settings] on the
menu bar.
6 When the Restart screen appears, press
[Yes] to restart this device.
• When changing the setting of other COM ports,
press [No] and repeat the operation.
12
• The [Update settings] screen will be displayed.
394
12.1.13 Confirmation of the

4 Select the Ethernet-serial converters
whose settings will be checked from the
RemoteCOM settings list and select [Acquire settings] from
Confirm that the RemoteCOM server software has [Manage TA] on the menu bar.
been downloaded to the Ethernet-serial converter.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• Confirmation is done while RemoteCOM is running.
Start RemoteCOM if it has not been started yet.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Start TA remote setup.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the details on how to start TA remote setup, refer
to "12.1.2 Ethernet-serial converter network settings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Confirm that [TA-100KR] is selected from

[Network] on the menu bar.
• Select it if it has not been selected yet.
• The [Acquire settings] screen will be displayed.
5 Press [OK].
3 Select [Search] from [Manage TA] on the

menu bar, then search for Ethernet-serial
converters.
• Ethernet-serial converters will be displayed in a
12
list.
• The [Acquire TA-100KR Series settings] screen

will be displayed.
395
6 Press [Setting screen] in [Startup program

name].
• The server software will be downloaded.

(6) Perform settings for "Setting confirmation"
8 Press [Cancel].
• The [Startup program name settings] screen will

be displayed.
9 Press [Back].
7 Confirm that [RmtCom] is displayed in

[Startup program name 1].
12
• If [RmtCom] is not displayed, the server soft-

ware may not have been downloaded properly.
If this happens, redo the settings through the
following method: 10 Select [Exit application] from [File] on the
(1) Close TA remote setup. menu bar, then close TA remote setup.
(2) Start RemoteCom.
(3) Select the Ethernet-serial converters whose
settings will be changed from the [Remote- IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
COM] screen list. • Do not close RemoteCOM. Restart if you accidentally
closed it.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(4) Select [Update] from [Settings] on the menu

bar.
(5) Select [Also set the TA-100KR server at the
same time] on the [Update settings] screen
and press [OK].
396
12.1.14 Confirmation of
operation
1 Confirm that LEDs of the Ethernet-serial

Status

Flashing Flashing
(500 ms (500 ms Off Off
intervals) intervals)
* LED 1 and LED 2 do not flash simultaneously.
You might see them flashing simultaneously or
alternately depending on the timing, but both
cases are normal.
• If the LED displays of the conversion box is dif-

ferent from the above, redo the settings.
12
397
(MOXA Nport 5110A)
The Ethernet-serial converter is an adapter for con-

verting RS-232C and Ethernet communications. 12.2.2 Ethernet-serial
converter setting
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The MOXA Nport 5110A can only be used overseas.
1 Make sure that this device is turned on.
Use SYSMEX RA TA-402X in Japan.
12.2 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter (MOXA Nport 5110A)
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Change the IP address of this device to
Recommended parts and conditions for the "192.168.127.90".
Item Conditions Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Number of • Refer to "4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device"
1 port
ports for the change of the IP address of this device.
Ethernet 100BASE-TX/ ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Network terminal 10BASE-T
interface
Protocol IEEE 802.3 3 Display the intermediate screen.
RJ-45 Category 5 or
Connector
higher
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Electrical
EIA-232C compliant • For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to dis-
specification
Serial play the intermediate screen".
Number of
interface 1 port ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ports
Connector D-sub 9 pin
Environmental 4 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
Temperature 0 °C to 40 °C diate screen.
condition
12.2.1 Temporary connection of this

device and the Ethernet-serial
converter and the X-ray device
Connect this device to the Ethernet-serial converter
12 and the X-ray device on a local network.
Ethernet-serial
X-ray device
converter
Ethernet connection RS-232C connection
5 Start Internet Explorer, enter

192.168.127.254 in the address bar, and
press the [Enter] key.
• The Ethernet-serial converter setting screen will
be displayed.
398
6 Press [Quick Setup]. 9 Set the following items on [Serial Set-

tings], and press [Next].

• [Step 1/3] screen is displayed.
7 Set the following items on [Network Set- [Baud rate]

[Date bits]
Select [4800] bps.
Select [8] bits.
tings], and press [Next].
[Stop bits] Select [1] bit.
[Parity] Select [None].
[Interface] Select [RS-232].
• [Finish Settings] screen is displayed.
10 Check the setting items, and press [Save/

Restart].

Enter the IP address (192.168.20.xx)
[IP address] of the Ethernet-serial converter.
Example: 192.168.20.92
Enter the subnet mask of the Ethernet-
[Netmask] serial converter.
Example: 255.255.255.0
Enter any gateway address of the
[Gateway]
Ethernet-serial converter.
• [Step 2/3] screen is displayed. 11 Exit Internet Explorer.

12
8 Confirm that [Real COM] is selected, then HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

press [Next]. • Pressing [Home] on the setting screen will not return
• Select it if it has not been selected yet. to the Home screen since the IP address of this device
has been changed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• [Step 3/3] screen is displayed.
399
12 Revert the IP address of this device to the 18 Specify the destination to place the short-
default IP address, "192.168.20.90". cut and press [Next].
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
for the change of the IP address of this device.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
13 Insert the provided MOXA Software CD in

the CD/DVD drive.
14 Copy \Software\Windows\Npadm_Setup_
Ver1.14_Build_10050717.zip to your desktop
and extract the file.
19 Press [Install].
15 Double click Npadm_Setup_Ver1.14_ • Installation will start.
Build_10050717.exe.
• The setup screen will be displayed.
16 Press [Next].
20 Check the setting items, and press [Next].
17 Set the installation destination and press

12 [Next].
400
21 Press [Finish]. 24 Right-click on a cell and select [Add Tar-

get].
• [Add NPort] screen is displayed.

25 Select the detected Nport5110A and press
[OK].
• Nport Administrator Configuration will start.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When it does not start, press [Start] → [All Programs]
→ [Nport administration Suite] → [Nport administer] to
start it.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
22 Right-click on a cell and select [Broadcast

Search].
26 Right-click [Nport5110A] and select [COM

Settings].
12
• [COM Port Settings] screen is displayed.
• Nport5110A on the network will be detected.
23 Select [COM Mapping].
401
27 Select the [Basic Settings] tab and select 30 Press [Yes].

the COM Number to be used from [COM
Number].
• Select [COM2] here as an example.
31 Press [OK] to close the NPort administra-

tor configuration tool.
• Exit the setting tool.
28 Select the [Serial Parameters] tab, select 32 Start up the service tool.
[4800] from [BaudRate], and press [OK].
33 Set the COM port number of the X-ray de-
vice to be connected.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Refer to "X-ray device icon" of "CS-7 Installation/Ser-
vice Manual for Service Tool/User Tool Screen" for the
setting of the X-ray devices according to manufactur-
ers/models.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
34 Confirm that the IP address for this device

is the default address, "192.168.20.90".
12
35 Restart this device and confirm that it is
properly communicating with the X-ray
29 Right-click [Nport5110A] and select [Apply device.
Change].
402
12.3 Connection of this device and the hub for portable
X-ray device side
This option is for operating this device with a portable 3 Connect the Ethernet cable connected to
X-ray device. this device to the hub for the portable X-
To use this device with the AeroDR Portable RF Unit or ray device side.
AeroDR Portable UF Unit with wired LAN, connect this
12.3 Connection of this device and the hub for portable X-ray device side
device to the hub of the portable X-ray device.
Hub for portable X-ray device side
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• No setting is necessary for this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Connect the USB cable of the hub for por-

table X-ray device side to this device.
Ethernet cable connected to this device
Hub for portable
X-ray device side
This device USB cable
2 Connect the Ethernet cable to be connect-

ed to the hub for portable X-ray device
side to this device.
12
Ethernet cable
This device
403
12.4 Installation of add-in Ethernet board
This option is for operating this device in an exposure 2 With the screws used in step 1, attach the
room. low profile bracket to the add-in Ethernet
board.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Be careful not to touch the terminal of the add-in
Ethernet board when installing it.
• Be sure to wear a wristband before the installation.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If using a two system network, an add-in Ethernet
board is required.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Low profile bracket
12.4.1 Changing of the bracket
A bracket that fits the expansion slot of this device is

to be used for an add-in Ethernet board. Change the
bracket if required.
As an example, the procedure to change a full height
bracket to a low profile bracket is shown as follows.
1 Remove 2 screws that fasten the add-in

Ethernet board and the full height bracket.
12
Full height bracket
404
12.4.2 Add-in Ethernet board

8 Remove the expansion slot cover.
installation
The procedure to install an add-in Ethernet board is as
follows.
2 Unplug the power cable.
3 Unplug all cables from this device.
4 Remove the stand for vertical position, if

attached. 9 Install the add-in Ethernet board on the
PCI Express x16 slot.
5 Remove the cover lock, if attached.

6 Remove the cover.
1
2
PCI Express x16
10 Close the expansion slot latch.

7 Open the expansion slot latch.
11 Attach the cover.
12 Connect the cables of the monitor and the 12
optional items to this device.
13 Connect the power cable to this device.

14 Plug the power cable of this device into
the connector.
15 Turn on the monitor and this device in this

order.
16 Start this device.

• This completes the installation of add-in Ether-
net board. Next, perform the connection check
of add-in Ethernet board.
405
12.4.3 Add-in Ethernet board

5 Confirm that [Intel(R) Gigabit CT Desktop
Adapter] is displayed in [Network adapt-
connection check ers].
The method of checking the connection of add-in
Ethernet board is as follows.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • This completes the installation of an add-in Eth-
ernet board. Next, perform the network setting
2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- of add-in Ethernet board.
diate screen.
3 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

right-click [Computer], and press [Proper-
ties].
12
4 Press [Device Manager].
406
12.4.4 Network setting of add-

in Ethernet board
The network setting of add-in Ethernet board is as fol-
lows.
4 Right-click [Local Area Connection 2] and

press [Properties].

12
screen.
• The [Local Area Connection 2 Properties]

407
5 Press [Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/ 7 Select [Use the following IP address] and
IPv6)] to release the selection. set the following items.

IPv4)] and press [Properties]. Setting Item Settings

[IP address]
with the facility environment.
[Subnet Enter the subnet mask of the selected
mask] device.
[Default
Entry is not necessary if there is no
gateway]
gateway on the network.
8 Press [OK].
12

408
9 Press [OK]. 11 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.

12
• The settings are saved and the screen is closed.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Change of the IP address is not reflected unless the
CS-7 setting screen is opened and [OK] is pressed
when the IP address of this device is changed.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• When another optional item is to be attached,
shut down this device.
409
12.5 Installing additional memory
This option is for operating this device in an exposure 7 Lift off the drive cage.
room.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The 2 GB (DDR3) memory made by Hewlett-Packard
is used as an example here. The installation proce-
dure may vary depending on the device used.
• Use gold-plated contacts for the additional memory.
There are gold-plated components in the memory con-
tacts of this device. This is to prevent oxidation and
corrosion that occurs with different metal contacts.
• Make sure to wear a wristband before the installation.
• Be careful not to touch the terminals of the additional
memory during installation.
8 Open the latches on both sides of the
• When removing memory, unplug the power cable and
memory socket and insert additional
wait for 30 seconds or more. Removing the memory
memory into the socket.
without waiting may cause damage to the memory and
the system board.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3
1 Turn off the power of this device.
• Remove any media from the CD/DVD drive be-
fore turning the power off.
2 Unplug the power cable from the outlet.

1
2
3 Unplug all cables from this device.
1
4 Remove the stand for vertical position, if
attached.
Channel B Black
12
5 Remove the cover lock, if attached. (Label: DIMM1)
6 Remove the cover. Channel B White

(Label: DIMM2)
1 Channel A Black
(Label: DIMM3)
2
Channel A White
(Label: DIMM4)
410
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the mounted memory is 2 GB × 1, insert the addi-
tional memory into a socket of a different channel but
of the same color as the mounted memory. For ex-
ample, if the mounted memory is installed in the black
socket in Channel A, insert the additional memory into
the black socket in Channel B.
• If the mounted memory is 1 GB × 2, insert additional
memory with a combined capacity of 2 GB into the 2
available channel sockets.
• Install memory on black sockets before installing
memory on white sockets.
• When inserting additional memory into a socket,
match the additional memory's notches with the tabs
in the socket.
• As much as possible, the memory capacity in Channel
A should be the same as the capacity in Channel B.
• After inserting additional memory into a socket, make
sure that the additional memory is fixed in place and
that the latches on both sides of the socket are closed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

9 Return the drive cage to its original posi-
tion and attach the cover.
10 Connect the cables of the monitor and the

optional items to this device.
11 Connect the power cable to this device.

12 Plug the power cable of this device into
the connector.
13 Turn on the monitor and this device in this

order. 12
411
12.6 Installation of the USB wired LAN adapter
This option is for operating this device in an exposure 2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
room. diate screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Operate after logging in with a service account.
• Make sure the application being used has completely
ended.
• Prepare an external CD/DVD drive.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Recommended parts and conditions for the

USB wired LAN adapter
Item Conditions
USB USB 2.0
Communication
100 Mbps
speed
3 Connect the external CD/DVD drive to this
device for portable.
external CD/DVD drive
Item Conditions
4 Insert the driver CD provided with the USB
wired LAN adapter in the external CD/DVD
Language Support for the installed OS drive.
USB USB 2.0
Drive
Reading speed
The CD-ROM can be read.
16 speed or higher
5 Following the instructions on the screen,
install the USB wired LAN adapter driver.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• USB wired LAN adapter is required when 2 networks • For detailed procedure, refer to the operation manual
are used while using this device as a portable X-ray of the USB wired LAN adapter.
device. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
12 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6 Connect the USB wired LAN adapter to
12.6.1 Driver installation of this device for portable.
7 Remove the driver CD from the CD/DVD
The method of installing the USB wired LAN adapter drive.
driver is as follows. • This completes the installation of the USB wired
LAN adapter driver. Next, perform the network
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • setting of the USB wired LAN adapter.
• Do not connect the USB wired LAN adapter to this de-
vice before installing the driver.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
412

Performs network setting for the USB wired LAN
adapter.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the network setting of the USB wired LAN adapter,
refer to "12.4.4 Network setting of add-in Ethernet
board".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

12
413
12.7 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB type)
This option is for operating this device with a portable X-ray device.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Prepare the external CD/DVD drive.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Recommended condition of the wireless LAN adapter (USB type)

Item Conditions
USB USB 2.0
Standard IEEE802.11n
Security WPA2-PSK(AES) compliant

Supports client functionality (functions as a child unit) and access point functionality (functions as a parent
Access method unit). When the access point (parent unit) is functioning, the system should be used without ICS (Internet
Connection Sharing) settings.
Channel Must be able to specify channels 1 to 13.
Recommended condition of the external CD/DVD drive

Item Conditions
USB USB 2.0
Drive The CD-ROM can be read.
Reading speed 16 speed or higher
12.7.1 The workflow to install the wireless LAN adapter
The installation procedure for a wireless LAN adapter differs between a PDA wireless connection and other wireless
connection types.
O
OWhen connecting one wireless LAN adapter and connecting it to the access point of the institu-
12 tion (connect this device in child unit mode)
12.7.2 Installation of the wireless LAN

1 adapter driver
When using a Panasonic CF-C1, connect the wire-

less LAN adapter to the USB port on the right side.
To the USB port of this device, connect a
2 wireless LAN adapter that connects the de-
vice to the access point of the institution.
Wireless LAN
CS-7 adapter
3 12.7.3 Connection of the wireless LAN adapter
4 12.7.4 Setting of the wireless LAN adapter
414
O
OWhen connecting one wireless LAN adapter and connecting it to a PDA (connect this device in
AP mode)

1 adapter driver

less LAN adapter to the USB port on the left side.
To the USB port of this device, connect
2 a wireless LAN adapter that connects
the device to the PDA.
Wireless LAN
adapter CS-7

O
OWhen connecting two wireless LAN adapters and connecting them to the PDA and the access
point of the institution (connect this device in both AP mode and child unit mode)

1 adapter driver

less LAN adapter to the USB port on the left side.
To the USB port of this device, connect
2 a wireless LAN adapter that connects
the device to the PDA.
Wireless LAN
adapter CS-7
12
4 12.17.2 Setting of this device

less LAN adapter to the USB port on the right side.
To the USB port of this device, connect a
5 wireless LAN adapter that connects the
device to the access point of the institution.
Wireless LAN
CS-7 adapter
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If you connect wireless LAN adapters to both of the USB ports located side by side, the communication may slow down.
• Do not connect wireless LAN adapters to both of the USB ports located side by side on the left side of the Panasonic
CF-C1.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
415
12.7.2 Installation of the wireless

5 Turn off the built-in wireless LAN function
of this device.
LAN adapter driver
The method of installing the wireless LAN adapter 6 Insert the CD-ROM that you burnt in step
driver is as follows. 1 into the external CD/DVD drive.
• Press [Yes] if the [User Account Control] screen
is displayed.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Logitec LAN-W150N/U2BK is used as an example
here. The setting method may be different for the wire-
7 Use explorer to run [setup_cli_win.exe]
from the [LANW150NU2BKWH_WD111]
less LAN adapter (USB type) that is used. For details,
refer to the operation manual of the wireless LAN
folder stored on the CD-ROM.
adapter (USB type) that is used.
• The screens are shown in Japanese as the Japanese 8 Press [Install].

model Logitec LAN-W150N/U2BK is used as an ex-
ample.
• Do not connect the wireless LAN adapter before in-
stalling the driver.
• Install the latest drivers for your wireless LAN adapter.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Download the wireless LAN adapter

driver from the Logitec website (http://
w w w. l o g i t e c . c o . j p / D R I V E R S / W L A N /
LANW150NU2BKWH_WD111.EXE), and save • Installation will start.
the uncompressed data on to a CD-ROM. • Press [Install this driver software] when [Win-
dows Security] screen is displayed.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
12 3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-

diate screen.
9 Remove the CD-ROM from the CD/DVD
drive.

device.
416
10 Press [Finish]. 12.7.3 Connection of the

wireless LAN adapter
Connect the wireless LAN adapter to this device.
1 Confirm that Windows desktop is dis-

played.
2 Connect the wireless LAN adapter to this

device.
• This completes the installation of the driver of • The driver is automatically installed, and follow-
the wireless LAN adapter. Next, perform the ing message is displayed once it is completed.

connection setting of the wireless LAN adapter.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

and then press [Control Panel].
12
4 Press [View network status and tasks].
417
5 Press [Change adapter settings].

12.7.4 Setting of the wireless
LAN adapter
Connect this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
or AeroDR Portable UF Unit to the access point of your
institution (RIS/PACS, etc.) using the wireless LAN
adapter.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the setting method of the wireless LAN adapter,
6 Confirm that the connected wireless LAN refer to "13.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of
adapter is displayed. this device".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This completes the connection of the wireless

LAN adapter. Next, set the wireless LAN adapt-
er.
12
418
12.8 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter (card type)
This option is for operating this device with a portable 2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
X-ray device. diate screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The wireless LAN adapter (card type) cannot be con-
nected to the PDA.
• Here an example is described in which BUFFALO
WLP-CB-AG300 is used as the wireless LAN adapter
(card type). The setting method may be different for
the wireless LAN adapter (card type) that is used. For

details, refer to the operation manual of the wireless
LAN adapter (card type) that is used.
model BUFFALO WLP-CB-AG300 has been used as
an example.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Recommended parts and conditions for the device.
wireless LAN adapter (card type)
Item Conditions
4 Turn off the built-in wireless LAN function
Interface Card Bus
of this device.
Standard IEEE802.11a/n compliant
Security WPA2-PSK (AES) compliant 5 Insert the CD-ROM supplied with the prod-
uct into the external CD/DVD drive.
• When the [AutoPlay] dialog appears, press [Ex-
12.8.1 Installation of the wireless ecute AirNavi.exe].
LAN adapter driver

12
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the user account control dialog appears,

press [Yes] or [Continue].
419
6 Press [Option]. 10 Press [Next].
11 Select [Agree] and then press [Next].

7 Press [Advanced Install].
12 Select
[Always trust the software from
BUFFALO INC] and then press [Install].
8 Select [AirStation Wireless Client Driver]
and [Client Manager V].
13 When the following screen is displayed,

12 attach the wireless LAN adapter (card
type) to this device.
9 Press [Start Install].
420
14 Press [OK]. 18 Select

[Always trust the software from
BUFFALO INC] and then press [Install].
19 Press [Finish].
15 Press [Finish].

20 Press [Back].
16 Press [Next].
12
21 Press [×] and then close the screen.

17 Select [Agree] and then press [Next].
421
22 Remove the CD-ROM from the drive. 12.8.2 Setting of the wireless
• This completes the installation of the driver of
the wireless LAN adapter. Next, perform the set- LAN adapter
ting of the wireless LAN adapter.
institution (RIS/PACS, etc.) using the wireless LAN
adapter.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the setting method of the wireless LAN adapter,
refer to "13.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of
this device".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
12
422
12.9 Attaching of a high precision monitor
This option is for operating this device in an exposure 3 Connect the power cable to the high pre-
room. cision monitor.
The method of installation of the high definition monitor
is as follows. 4 Plug the power cable of the high precision
monitor into the outlet.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When using a high-resolution monitor, installation of 5 Plug the power cable of this device into
additional memory (2GB) is required. the outlet.
• The following description is an example. There is a • This completes the attaching of the high preci-
case where the installation and setting procedures sion monitor. Next, set the high precision monitor.
might differ from those of the optional items used. For
details, refer to the operation manual of the optional
items used.
• The option DP-DVI conversion cable (FH973AA) is
required for the following description.

• Apply the monitor LUT of the monitor used for check-
ing images as the LUT of the monitor used for check-
ing images. For details on how to operate, refer to
"17.11 Monitor brightness adjustment".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
12.9.1 Attaching of a high

precision monitor
1 Make sure that this device and the high

precision monitor are powered off and the
power cable of this device is unplugged.
2 Connect this device and the high preci-

sion monitor with a DVI cable and a DP-
DVI conversion connector. 12
This device (back)
Connector 2
DP-DVI conversion
connector
High precision monitor (back)
DVI cable
423
12.9.2 High precision monitor

5 If "SWITCHING EDID" information is dis-
played, press the "-" (minus) button on
setting the back of the high-definition monitor,
move the cursor, and then select [Land-
scape + Portrait].
1 Turn on the power of the main monitor
and the high precision monitor.
SWITCHING EDID
EDID Auto Selection
▲
Portrait
2 Press and hold the "+" (plus) and "-" Landscape + Portrait
(minus) buttons on the back of the high-
definition monitor at the same time.
High precision monitor (back)
SWITCHING EDID
EDID Auto Selection
+(plus) Portrait
Landscape + Portrait
▲
button
-(minus)
6 Press and hold the "+" (plus) and "-"
button
definition monitor at the same time for 2
High precision monitor (front) seconds or more.
7 Check that [(Fixed)] is displayed under

LED [Landscape + Portrait].
TOTOKU CCL25812/AR
SERIAL : L589A04274
VSPU : Rev.01
MPU : Rev.J
ACT TIME : 6H
LAST CAL : 6H
• The LED (green) on the front of the monitor EDID : Landscape + Portrait
(Fixed)
lights.
12 3 Check that the information is displayed.

TOTOKU CCL25812/AR
SERIAL : L589A04274
VSPU : Rev.01
MPU : Rev.J
ACT TIME : 6H Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
LAST CAL : 6H
EDID : Portrait • For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to dis-
(Auto Selection)
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The value for "SERIAL" and other settings are
just examples.
4 Press and hold the "+" (plus) and "-"

definition monitor at the same time for 2
seconds or more.
424
10 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- 13 Select[Monitor] from [Primary Display],

diate screen. and [Digital Display] from [Second Display].
14 Press [Apply].
15 Press [OK] on the confirmation screen.

11 Right-click the Windows desktop, and se-

lect [Graphics Properties].
16 Rotate the liquid crystal panel of the high

precision monitor by 90 degrees to the
vertical position.
17 From [Display] on the task tree, select 12

®
• The [Intel Graphics and Media Control Panel] [General Settings].
12 From [Display] on the task tree, select

[Multiple Displays].
18 Select [Digital Display] from [Display].
425
19 Set [Resolution], [Color Depth], [Refresh 23 Drag the monitor icon of [Positioning] to
Rate], and [Rotation]. set the positioning as follows.
• Resolution: [1200x1600]
*.[Resolution] is automatically set to the
optimal resolution, thus there is no need to
change this.
• Color depth: [32 Bit]
• Refresh rate: [60 Hz]
• Rotation: [Rotate To Normal]
High precision monitor
Main monitor
(touch panel
monitor)
Align the bottom

of the monitors
20 Press [Apply].
24 Press [Apply].
22 Select [Multiple Displays] from [Display]

on the task tree.
12
26 On the [Intel® Graphics and Media Control
Panel] screen, press [OK].
426
12.9.3 Setting the multi

4 Press [Hardware and Sound].
monitor environment
When you use multiple displays in a multi monitor en-
vironment, set the following.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to dis- 5 Press [Tablet PC Settings].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

diate screen.

6 Select the display name of the main moni-
tor from [Display].

12
427
7 Press [Setup].
8 When the following screen is displayed on

the main monitor, touch the main monitor

screen.
• If the screen is displayed on the high precision
monitor screen, press [Enter] and touch the
main monitor screen.
9 Press [Esc] to end the setting.

• Next, if installing a sub monitor, please leave the
power on for this device.
12
428
12.10 Attaching of the sub monitor
This option is for operating this device in an exposure 3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
room. diate screen.
IMPORTANT •• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• You must use monitors with the same resolution for
the main monitor and the sub monitor.
• For using touch panel operation, use the same model
of product for the main monitor and the sub monitor.
• Only touch-panel operation with the Nanao FlexScan
T1751 has been checked.
• Prepare an Ethernet cable of category 5e or above.
• In a sub monitor connection environment, turn off this
device's sleep, hibernate, and power-saving modes.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

12.10.1 Installation of the Sub
Monitor Adaptor driver
4 Insert the CS-7 DRIVER CD into the
The method of installing the Sub Monitor Adaptor driv- CD/DVD drive.
er is as follows.
5 Close the auto-play screen, and from
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Explorer, run [Autorun.exe] stored on the
• Install the driver using the distributed "CS-7 DRIVER CS-7 DRIVER CD.
CD". Do not use the installation CD bundled with the • Execute [Autorun.exe] which is stored in the
Sub Monitor Adaptor. folder for the housing.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6 Press [NetDA Manager installation].
1 Make sure that the main monitor and this
device are powered on.

12
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
7 Press [Next].
429
8 Press [Yes]. 12 Press [Restart].
• Next, install the DisplayLink driver.

9 Press [Start]. • Wait shortly until the DisplayLink driver installa-
tion screen appears.
13 Press [I Accept].
• Installation of the NetDA Manager will start.
10 Press [Install].
• Installation of the DisplayLink driver will start.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• It takes about 30 seconds to install. Do not do any op-
• Installation will start. erations during installation.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
12 11 Press [OK].
14 When the installation is completed, close
the menu screen of the Network Display
Adaptor Setup CD.
15 Eject the CS-7 DRIVER CD from the CD/

DVD drive.
• This completes the installation of the Sub Moni-
tor Adaptor driver. Next, perform the installation
of the sub monitor.
430
12.10.2 Checking of the bundled 12.10.3 Attachment of the sub

items monitor
Check the Sub Monitor Adaptor's bundled items. The method of installation of the sub monitor is as fol-
lows.
Item name Quantity Remarks
SX-ND2000F Series
Sub Monitor Adaptor 1
NetDA-1 (made by Silex) 1 Check that the power to this device and
to connected equipment is turned off.
AC adapter 1
Network Display
Adapter Setup 1 2 Connect the AeroDR Interface Unit hub
CD (CD-ROM) and this device with an Ethernet cable.
(Ferrite core) (1)
Attached documents 1 set This device (rear)
AeroDR Interface
Unit hub

• Please connect to the first port on the AeroDR
Interface Unit.
3 Attach the ferrite core to the Ethernet ca-

ble connecting the AeroDR Interface Unit
hub and the Sub Monitor Adaptor.
12
Ferrite core
• Attach the ferrite core on the AeroDR Interface

Unit side.
• Refer to the illustration, and attach the ferrite
core after turning the Ethernet cable around
once.
431
4 Connect the AeroDR Interface Unit hub 6 For using touch panel operation with the
and the Sub Monitor Adaptor with an Eth- sub monitor, connect the sub monitor
ernet cable. and the Sub Monitor Adaptor with a USB
cable.
AeroDR Interface
Unit hub USB terminal
Sub Monitor
Adaptor
Sub monitor
Sub Monitor
Adaptor
Ethernet terminal
7 If using a mouse or keyboard, connect a

USB mouse or USB keyboard to the Sub
Monitor Adaptor.
USB terminal
Sub Monitor
Adaptor
• Connect it to the AeroDR Interface Unit's port

No. 5 or port No. 7.
5 Connect the sub monitor and the Sub USB mouse

Monitor Adaptor with a signal cable (D-sub USB keyboard
12
15 pin).
Analog
input terminal IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Sub Monitor • One of the USB terminals is used for connection to the
Adaptor
sub monitor. The other USB terminal can only have
either a mouse or a keyboard connected to it.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Sub monitor
432
8 Connect the power cable to the sub moni-

12.10.4 Setting the Sub Monitor
tor and the AC adapter to the Sub Monitor
Adaptor. Adaptor
The method of setting the Sub Monitor Adaptor is as
Power connecter
follows.
Sub Monitor
Adaptor
1 Turn the power on for the AeroDR Inter-
face Unit, main monitor, and this device.
• There is no power switch on the Sub Monitor
Sub monitor Adaptor.
• There is no set order for turning the power on.
AC adapter
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Power cable
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
9 Plug the sub monitor power cable and the

3

Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
AC adapter of the Sub Monitor Adaptor diate screen.
into the wall outlet.
• This completes the connection of the sub moni-
tor. Next, perform setting of the Sub Monitor
Adaptor.
12

and then press [NetDA Manager] in [All
Programs].
• NetDA Manager starts up.
433
5 Double-click the sub monitor for which a 7 Press [Configure].

connection with this device is detected.
• A message confirming restarting will be dis-

played.
• The network setting screen is displayed.
8 Press [OK].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If installing multiple Sub Monitor Adaptors on a given
network, multiple devices are displayed. Configure
settings for one Sub Monitor Adaptor at a time.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
6 Set the IP address.

• The Sub Monitor Adaptor will restart. It takes ap-
proximately 20 seconds to restart.
12 9 Select the Sub Monitor Adaptor to be con-

nected to this device, and press [Display
Properties].
• If there are multiple Sub Monitor Adaptors dis-
played, please distinguish them with the dis-
played IP addresses.
• Configure the settings in any way that matches
the institution environment settings.
• If a DHCP server is connected, the IP address
will be automatically registered.
434
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Only configure automatic connection for the Sub Moni-
tor Adaptor being used. If there are multiple Sub Moni-
tor Adaptors on the same network, configuring the
same settings for multiple Sub Monitor Adaptors may
result in incorrect operation.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
12 Minimize the NetDA Manager, and restart

this device.
13 If the [Screen Resolution] screen is dis-

played after restarting, select [Landscape]
• The properties screen is displayed. from [Orientation], select [Duplicate these
displays] from [Multiple displays], and
10 Select [Automatically connect newly dis- press [OK].
covered NetDA devices].

14 Turnon the power on the sub monitor,
and check that the displayed screen is the
same as the one on the main monitor.
• It takes about 1 minute for the display to appear
11 Press [Apply], and press [OK]. on the sub monitor.
• If installing other optional items, shut down this
device. 12
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When this device starts up, it will automatically con-
nect to the sub monitor, and will display the same
screen on the sub monitor as the one on the main
monitor.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
435
12.10.5 Modification of the Sub

Monitor Adaptor IP address

After setting the initial IP address, if the IP address is
to be changed, reconfigure the IP address after revert-
ing the Sub Monitor Adaptor settings to their defaults.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to revert Sub Monitor Adaptor settings to their
defaults, refer to "15.11.4 To revert the Sub Monitor
Adaptor settings to their defaults".
• For how to reconfigure the IP address, refer to
"12.10.4 Setting the Sub Monitor Adaptor".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Press [Change adapter settings].
12.10.6 Additional Settings for

Using an Expansion
Ethernet Board
When you install an optional expansion Ethernet board

and restart this unit, a different network is recognized
and this device becomes unable to detect the Sub
Monitor Adaptor. Take the following steps.

12
• [Network Connections] screen is displayed.
4 Right-click the expansion LAN card

[Intel(R) Gigabit CT Desktop Adapter] Lo-
cal Area Connection and press [Disable].

and then press [NetDA Manager] in [All
Programs].
436
6 Press [Refresh]. 9 Select the [Enable broadcast addresses]

checkbox, and enter the IP address of the
NetDA-1 device that you will use. (Example
192.168.20.50)
• The "NetDA-1" device that you set is detected.
7 Press [Options].

10 Press [Add], and press [Apply].
• The option setting screen is displayed.
8 Select the [NetDA Search] tab.
12
437
11 Press [OK].
12 Minimize NetDA Manager.

13 Right-click the expansion LAN card

[Intel(R) Gigabit CT Desktop Adapter] Lo-
cal Area Connection in the [Network Con-
nections] screen, and press [Enable].
14 Restart this device, and confirm that

screens are displayed on the sub monitor.
12
438
12.11 Attaching of a monitor for checking images
This option is for operating this device with a portable 3 Connect the analog output terminal of this
X-ray device. device for portable and the analog input
The method of attaching of a monitor for checking im- terminal of the monitor for checking im-
ages is as follows. ages with a signal cable.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Monitor for checking images

• The monitor screen is positioned with a landscape ori-
entation.
• For the monitor cable, use an analog RGB connection
(analog signal input) cable. Analog input
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • terminal

monitor for checking images
Item Conditions
Connection Supports analog RGB connection
OS Supports Windows 7
Monitor type TFT color monitor
8 bit color, supporting more than 16.77
Display color This device for portable

million colors Analog output terminal
Supports 1280x800 or higher resolu-
Monitor resolu-
tions
tion
*Maximum: 1920x1200
Aspect ratio
16:10 4 Plug the power cables of this device for
*Any monitor with aspect ratio fixed mode portable and the monitor for checking im-
ages into the wall outlet.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • This completes the attaching of the monitor
for checking images. Next, set the monitor for
• The monitor for checking images is a monitor
connected to check the images when this device is checking images.
used as a portable X-ray device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
12.11.1 Attaching of a monitor

for checking images
12
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The specifications of this device and the monitor might
be different depending on the date of delivery and the
destination.
• Use the monitor for checking images that is used as a
monitor for normal exposure for this device.
• Check that the shape of the connector for the monitor
for checking images is of a shape that will enable it to
connect with this device.
• Apply the monitor LUT of the monitor used for check-
ing images as the LUT of the monitor used for check-
ing images. For details on how to operate, refer to
"17.11 Monitor brightness adjustment".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Make sure that this device for portable

and the monitor for checking images are
powered off.
2 Make sure that the power cable of this de-

vice for portable is unplugged.
439
12.11.2 Setting of a monitor for

6 Select [Show desktop only on 2] from
[Multiple displays].
checking images
1 Turn on the power of the monitor for

checking images.
2 Start this device for portable.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to dis- 7 Press [OK].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

diate screen.
8 Press [Keep changes].
12 5 Right-click the Windows desktop, and se-

lect [Screen resolution].
9 Check whether the screen is displayed on

the monitor for checking images normally.
440
12.12 Installation of the monitor for checking images (via NetDA-1)
This option is for operating this device with a portable

X-ray device. 12.12.1 Installation of the
The installation method for the monitor for checking NetDA-1 driver
images via NetDA-1 is as follows.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Install the driver using the distributed "CS-7 DRIVER

• When installing a monitor other than the monitor of
CD". Do not use the installation CD bundled with the
this device and optional monitors, a NetDA-1 connec-
NetDA-1.
tions is required according to the pharmaceutical law.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The installation methods of monitors for checking im-
ages via NeDA-1 is for Japan only.
• The monitor screen is positioned with a landscape ori-
entation.
• For the monitor cable, use an analog RGB connection 2 Display the intermediate screen.
(analog signal input) cable.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Recommended criteria for monitors for
checking images
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Item Conditions
Connection Supports analog RGB connection 3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
OS Supports Windows 7
diate screen.
Monitor type TFT color monitor
8 bit color, supporting more than 16.77
Display color
million colors
Supports 1280x800 or higher resolu-
Monitor resolu-
tions
tion
* Maximum: 1920x1200
16:10
Aspect ratio *Any monitor with aspect ratio fixed
mode
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The monitor for checking images is a monitor 12
connected to check the images when this device is
used as a portable X-ray device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Insert the CS-7 DRIVER CD into the

CD/DVD drive.
5 Close the auto-play screen, and from

Explorer, run [Autorun.exe] stored on the
CS-7 DRIVER CD.
• Execute [Autorun.exe] which is stored in the
casing-use folder.
441
6 Press [NetDA Manager installation]. 10 Press [Install].
• Installation will start.

11 Press [OK].
7 Press [Next].
12 Press [Restart].
8 Press [Yes].
• Next, install the DisplayLink driver.

• Wait shortly until the DisplayLink driver installa-
tion screen appears.
12
13 Press [I Accept].
9 Press [Start].
• Installation of the NetDA Manager will start.
• Installation of the DisplayLink driver will start.
442
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 12.12.2 Checking of the bundled

• It takes about 30 seconds to install. Do not do any op-
items of the NetDA-1
erations during installation.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Check the NetDA-1's bundled items.
14 When the installation is completed, close Item name Quantity Remarks
the menu screen of the Network Display SX-ND2000F Series

Sub Monitor Adaptor 1
NetDA-1 (made by Silex)
Adaptor Setup CD.
AC adapter 1

Network Display
15 Eject the CS-7 DRIVER CD from the CD/ Adapter Setup 1
DVD drive. CD (CD-ROM)
• This completes the installation of the NetDA-1 (Ferrite core) (1)
driver. Next, install the monitor for checking im-
ages via the NetDA-1.
12
443
12.12.3 Attaching of the

4 Connect the monitor for checking images
and the NetDA-1 with a signal cable (D-sub
NetDA-1 and monitor for 15 pin).
checking images
Analog
The method of installation of the NetDA-1 and monitor input terminal
for checking images is as follows. NetDA-1
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• You can connect the NetDA-1 and monitor for check-

Monitor for
ing images either to the hub for institution side or to checking images
the hub for portable X-ray device side. Here an ex-
ample is described in which the hub for institution side
is used.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Check that the NetDA-1 and this device

are turned off.
2 Connect the hub for institution side and

this device with an Ethernet cable.
3 Connect the hub for institution side and 5 Connect the power cable to the monitor
the NetDA-1 with an Ethernet cable. for checking images and the AC adapter
to the NetDA-1.
Hub for institution
Power connecter
side
NetDA-1
Monitor for
checking images
AC adapter
12
NetDA-1
Ethernet terminal Power cable
6 Plug the power cable of the monitor for

checking images and the AC adapter of
the NetDA-1 into the wall outlet.
• This completes the connection of the NetDA-1
and monitor for checking images. Next, perform
setting of the NetDA-1.
444
5 Double-click the NetDA-1 for which a con-

12.12.4 Setting the NetDA-1 nection with this device is detected.
The method of setting the NetDA-1 is as follows.

• There is no power switch on the NetDA-1.

Display the intermediate screen.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

diate screen.
• The network setting screen is displayed.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If installing multiple NetDA-1s on a given network,
multiple devices are displayed. Configure settings for
one NetDA-1 at a time.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6 Set the IP address.

and then press [NetDA Manager] in [All 12
Programs].
• Configure the settings in any way that matches

the institution environment settings.
• If a DHCP server is connected, the IP address
will be automatically registered.
445
7 Press [Configure]. 9 Select the NetDA-1 to be connected to this

device, and press [Display Properties].
• If there are multiple NetDA-1s displayed, please
distinguish them with the displayed IP addresses.
• A message confirming restarting will be dis-

played.
8 Press [OK].
• The properties screen is displayed.
• The NetDA-1 will restart. It takes approximately

10 Select [Automatically connect newly dis-
covered NetDA devices].
20 seconds to restart.
12
446
11 Press [Apply], and press [OK]. 12.12.5 Modification of the

NetDA-1 IP address
After setting the initial IP address, if the IP address is
to be changed, reconfigure the IP address after revert-
ing the NetDA-1 settings to their defaults.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• For how to revert NetDA-1 settings to their defaults,
refer to "15.11.4 To revert the Sub Monitor Adaptor
settings to their defaults".
• For how to reconfigure the IP address, refer to
"12.10.4 Setting the Sub Monitor Adaptor".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Only configure automatic connection for the NetDA-1
being used. If there are multiple NetDA-1s on the
same network, configuring the same settings for mul-
tiple NetDA-1s may result in incorrect operation.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
12
447
12.12.6 Change of the display

4 Change 1 to 0 for the Win+P key setting
tag.
setting of the monitor for
checking images
Change the settings file so that the display switching
to the monitor for checking images can be performed
using shortcut keys (Windows key + [P] key).
Change to
<ON>0</ON>
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the Windows key is disabled, press the [Ctrl]
key + the [P] key.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

5 Save the file.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
screen.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
7 After restarting, press the Windows key
2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- + [P] key on the keyboard and check that
diate screen. the following screen is displayed.
12
3 Open the "SysLorderOperationSetting.xml"

of "\Console\Config\System\SysLorder"
using Windows Notepad, etc.
448
12.13 Installation of the FPM-5171G monitor
The FPM-5171G (17-inch touch panel) monitor is pro- 3 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
vided as an option used when the AeroDR Portable diate screen.
CS7 17D Mount Kit is used with the AMX-4 (portable
X-ray device manufactured by GE).
* Not used in Japan.
The following instructions show how to install the FPM-
5171G (17-inch touch panel) monitor .
12.13.1 Installation of the touch

panel driver
The following instructions show how to install the driver
for the 17-inch touch panel monitor.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• FPM-5171G is used as an example here. The setting
method may be different for the 17-inch touch panel 4 Insert the installation CD provided with
monitor that is used. For details, refer to the operation the 17-inch touch panel monitor to the CD/
manual of the 17-inch touch panel monitor that is DVD drive.
used.
• Use the installation CD included in the package of the 5 From Windows Explorer, run [Touch-
17-inch touch panel monitor to install the driver. Screen-DRV\ELO Touch Driver\Win-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • dows Drivers\Windows XP-7-Vista
SW601379_TETouch_5.2.0\SW601379_
1 Confirm that this device and the monitor TETouch_5.2.0.exe], which is included in
are running. the installation CD provided with the 17-
inch touch panel monitor.
6 Press [Unzip].
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to dis- 12
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
449
7 Select [Default] and press [Next]. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• If the error shown in the figure below appears, check
that the USB/RS232C selection switch on the back of
the touch panel monitor is set to USB, and then, press
[OK].
• If the USB/RS232C selection switch is not correctly
set, perform step 10 again.
8 Select the [Install USB Touchscreen Driv-

ers] checkbox, and press [Next].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
13 When the installation is completed, eject

the installation CD from the CD/DVD drive.
14 The [PenMount Control Panel] shortcut is

created on the Windows desktop and this
device will automatically restart.
• Restart manually if it does not automatically re-
start.
9 Following the instructions shown on the

screen, install the driver.
10 From Windows Explorer, run [TouchScreen-DRV\

TouchWare_20110121\setup.exe] included in
the installation CD provided with the 17-inch
touch panel monitor.
12
screen, install the driver.
12 From Windows Explorer, run [TouchScreen-

DRV\PenMount Driver\Windows Drivers\
PenMount Windows Universal Driver
V2.2.0.283(Win7_32_64bit_WHQL)\setup.exe]
included in the installation CD provided with
the 17-inch touch panel monitor.
450
12.13.2 Adjustment of touch

4 Select [PenMount 6000 USB] on the [De-
vice] tab, and press [Configure].
sensor
The following instructions show how to adjust the
touch sensor of the 17-inch touch panel monitor.
The adjustment performed here is temporary. Actual
adjustment is performed after installing the 17-inch
touch panel monitor to the portable X-ray device.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Press [Standard Calibration] on the [Cali-

2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme- brate] tab.
diate screen.
3 Double-click on the [PenMount Control 12

Panel] shortcut on the Windows desktop.
• The touch sensor adjustment screen is dis-

played.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If the screen is in Japanese, delete [C:\Program Files\
PenMount Windows Universal Driver\LANG\JPN.lng]
to display the screen in English.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
451

touch sensor adjustment screen, touch 12.13.3 Windows setup
and hold the target objects.
Set up Windows so that all operations can be per-
formed when this device is placed into the portable X-
ray device.
1. Disabling the touch sensor of this de-

vice's display
Disable the touch sensor of this device's display to re-
• The touch sensor adjustment completes when ceive operations performed on the 17-inch touch moni-
this touch operation has been repeated 5 times. tor only.
7 Press [OK] to end [PenMount Control Pan- 1 Press the [USER] button at the lower right
el]. of the LCD on this device to open [Dash-
board for CF-C1].
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• [Dashboard for CF-C1] can also be opened by running
[C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Dboard\DBoard.exe].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Select [Pen Only] in [Screen input], and

12 press [Yes].
452
2. Disabling the touch sensor of this de- 4 From [When I close the lid], choose [Do
vice's display nothing] for the two drop-down lists.
Set this device so that it will not shut down when its
cover is closed.

5 Press [Save changes].

3. Display screen settings of this device
2 Open [System and Security].
Set up Windows according to the maximum resolution
of the 17-inch touch panel monitor (1280 x 1024 pix-
els).
1 Right-click on the Windows desktop with

the mouse, and select [Screen resolution].
12
3 Open [Power Options].
453
2 Select [Show desktop only on 2] from 5 Select [1280 x 1024 (recommended)] from
[Multiple displays]. [Resolution].
3 Press [OK]. 6 Press [OK].

• You return to the desktop and only the 17-inch

touch panel monitor becomes active. 7 Shut down Windows and unlock the dis-
play rotation lock of the Panasonic CF-C1.
4 Right-click on the Windows desktop, and
select [Screen resolution].
12
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When performing operation on the 17-inch touch mon-
itor, pressing and holding is equivalent to right clicking.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
454
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 12.13.4 Final adjustment of the

• Confirm that [Primary Landscape] is selected in
touch sensor
[Default Angle in Tablet Mode] in [Display Rotation
Tool] before unlocking the display rotation lock. Perform the final adjustment of the touch sensor when
all settings necessary to use the 17-inch touch panel
monitor are complete, and the 17-inch touch panel
monitor, cables, AeroDR Portable RF Unit and so on
have been connected to the portable X-ray device.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

8 Flip the Panasonic CF-C1 display.
diate screen.
• This completes Windows setup. From now on,

this setting is enabled when starting this device.
3 Double-click on the [PenMount Control 12

Panel] shortcut on the Windows desktop.
4 Select [PenMount 6000 USB] on the [De-

vice] tab, and press [Configure].
455
7 Press [OK] to end [PenMount Control Panel].
5 Press [Advanced Calibration] on the [Cali-

brate] tab.
12
• The touch sensor adjustment screen is dis-

played.

touch sensor adjustment screen, touch
and hold the target objects.
• The touch sensor adjustment completes when

this touch operation has been repeated 10
times. Then, you return to the desktop.
456
12.14 Installation of magnetic card reader
This option is for operating this device in an exposure 4 Connect the USB cable to the rear of this
room. device.
• This completes the installation of the magnetic
card reader. Next, perform the connection check
12.14.1 Installation of magnetic of the magnetic card reader.
card reader
The method of installation of the magnetic card reader
is as follows.
12.14 Installation of magnetic card reader (Only in Japan)

2 Install the magnetic card reader.

• Connect the smaller connector (RJ-45 connec-
tor) to the magnetic card reader.
Reader mounting plate

Magnetic card
reader
Fastening screw
USB cable
3 Fix the reader mounting plate on the rear

of the monitor with 4 provided screws.
Monitor
12
Reader mounting plate
Fastening screw
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Be sure to use the provided screws. Using screws that
are too long can damage the monitor.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
457
12.14.2 Magnetic card reader

5 Confirm that [USB Card Reader] is dis-
played in [Device].
connection check
The method of checking the connection of the mag-
netic card-reader is as follows.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

play the intermediate screen". • When another optional item is to be attached,
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • shut down this device.

diate screen.

12 and press [Devices and Printers].
458
12.15 Installation of bar code readers
This option is for operating this device in an exposure 4 Hook the bottom of the neck on the ped-
room. estal tab, and secure it with the 2 screws
and 2 washers provided.
12.15.1 Installation of a single
Tab
bar code reader
Neck
The method of installation of a single bar code reader
is as follows. Washer Pedestal
Fastening
screw
2 Connect the provided USB cable to the

single bar code reader.
• Connect it with the smaller connector (RJ-45
connector).
5 Put the single bar code reader on the

Single bar code reader holder of the dedicated stand.
Single bar code reader

USB cable
RJ-45 connector
Holder
3 Pass the stand neck of the dedicated

stand through the pedestal from the bot-
tom.
6 Connect the USB cable to the rear of this 12

device.
7 Adjust the holder to the angle for reading

Neck easily.
Pedestal • When another optional item is to be attached,
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When adding the bar code settings other than Code
128, refer to "19.2 How to add a bar code setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
459
O
OMounting on a desk or a wall
12.15.2 Installation of a multi- Multi-bar code reader can be mounted on a desk or a
bar code reader wall. For the mounting location, consult the institution
manager in advance.
The method of installation of a multi-bar code reader is
as follows.
1 With the 3 provided wood screws, mount
the mounting plate on a desk or a wall.
1 Make sure that this device is powered off. • Check the direction of laser irradiation.
Wood screw
2 Connect the provided USB cable to the
multi-bar code reader. Mounting plate
• Connect it with the smaller connector (RJ-45
connector).
Multi-bar code reader
Direction of laser irradiation

USB cable
2 With the 4 provided countersunk screws,

RJ-45 connector fix the base plate to the bottom of multi-
bar code reader.
Multi-bar code reader
Countersunk screw
3 Connect the USB cable to the rear of this
device.
4 Adjust the angle for reading easily.

Base plate
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
12
• When adding the bar code settings other than Code
128, refer to "19.2 How to add a bar code setting".
3 Place the multi-bar code reader over the
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • mounting plate, and turn it 90° in a coun-
terclockwise direction.
90°
460
12.16 Installation of the Bluetooth bar code reader
This option is for operating this device with a portable IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

X-ray device.
• If connection is disconnected when the unit is taken
The setting method of the Bluetooth bar code reader is
outside of the Bluetooth communication range, press
as follows.
[▲] on the left side of the Bluetooth bar code reader
to establish the connection again. Once connection is
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • established, the message "HID Connected" appears
• Koamtac KDC200i is used as an example here. The set- on the screen.
ting method may be different for the Bluetooth bar code • When Bluetooth connection is cut off, a beep sound
reader that is used. For details, refer to the operation occurs and the message "HID Disconnected" appears
manual of the Bluetooth bar code reader that is used. on the screen.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • Flatten the portion on which barcode is printed, when
reading a patient bar code. The optimum distance

Recommended part and condition for the Blue- between a bar code and the reader is about 5 to 10 cm.
tooth bar code reader ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Item Conditions
Bluetooth stan- Ver. 2.0 or later 12.16.2 Charging of the Bluetooth
dard Class 2 or higher
Laser standard Class 1 bar code reader
Supported
HID The charging method of the Bluetooth bar code reader
profile
Matching func- is as follows.
3 times or more
tionality
Line break set-
ting
Yes 1 Remove the cover at the bottom of the
Codebar (NW-7), Code39, Code128,
Bluetooth bar code reader, and connect
JAN/EAN, ITF, etc. the supplied USB cable to the USB termi-
Code set
* Must be able to read code used in nal.
the institution.
• Connect the smaller connector (ultra mini USB
connector) to the Bluetooth bar code reader.
12.16.1 Basic operation of the
Bluetooth bar code reader 2 Connect the supplied USB cable to the
USB terminal of this device.
The basic operation of the Bluetooth bar code reader • Connect the larger connector (A-type USB con-
is as follows. nector) to this device.
12
• Two LEDs at the front of the Bluetooth bar code
reader will light up in orange while charging.
1 Use [ ], [▲] and [▼] at the main body of
It will light up in green once the charging is com-
the Bluetooth bar code reader.
pleted. It will light up in red when the charge is
• Select the display items with [▲] and [▼].
low.
• Confirm the display items with [ ].
• Rough estimate of charging time is approxi-
mately 2 hours.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Power on this device to charge it from this device.
• Prepare the USB charger AC adapter to charge it from
the outlet.
• The estimated battery life is 300 times of charging.
However, it depends on how you use it.
• To replace the battery, ask the vendor of the Bluetooth
bard code reader in use.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[ ] [▲] [▼]
461
12.16.3 Turning on the power of the 12.16.5 Setting of the HID

Bluetooth bar code reader connection
The operation method to turn on the power of the The setting method of the HID connection is as fol-
Bluetooth bar code reader is as follows. lows.
1 Press [ ]. 1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.

• The Bluetooth bar code reader is powered on
and emits a laser.
12.16.4 Turning off the power of the

Bluetooth bar code reader
The operation method to turn off the power of the Blue-
tooth bar code reader is as follows.
1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.

• The initial setting screen is displayed on the
Bluetooth bar code reader. [▲] [▼]
2 Select and confirm [BT Service]. • The initial setting screen is displayed on the
Bluetooth bar code reader.
3 Select and confirm [Power].
2 Select and confirm [BT Config].
4 Select [Disabled], and select and confirm
[Save & Exit] at the bottom of the screen. 3 Select and confirm [ConnectDevice].
5 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit 4 Select [HID normal], and select and confirm
Menu]. [Save & Exit] at the bottom of the screen.
• Bluetooth communication is disconnected, and
the Bluetooth bar code reader will be powered 5 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit
off five minutes later. Menu].
12
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• W h e n t h i s d e v i c e i s p o w e r e d o ff , B l u e t o o t h
communication is disconnected and the Bluetooth bar
code reader will also be powered off five minutes later.
• To establish Bluetooth connection again, press [▲]
on the left side of the Bluetooth bar code reader.
Once connection is established, the message "HID
Connected" appears on the screen.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
462
12.16.6 Setting of the Bluetooth

5 Press [▲] and [▼] on the Bluetooth bar
code reader simultaneously.
connection • The initial setting screen is displayed.
The setting method of the Bluetooth connection is as

follows. 6 Select and confirm [BT Service].
1 Turn on this device. 7 Select and confirm [Pairing].
2 Display the intermediate screen. 8 Select [Custom Mode] and press [Next].
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

diate screen.
9 Select [KDC200[XXXXXX]] and press

[Next].

and then press [All Programs] - [Bluetooth]
12
- [Bluetooth Setting].
• [XXXXXX] is the serial number.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If [KDC200[XXXXXX]] is not displayed, press
[Refresh].
• [Bluetooth Settings] screen is displayed.

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
463
10 Select [Human Interface Device] and press 13 Press [Next].

[Next].
14 Press [Finish].
11 Press [OK].
• [Bluetooth Manager] screen is displayed in this

device when this device and the Bluetooth bar
code reader are paired.
12
12 Press [Yes].
• Connection will be completed and the Bluetooth

bar code reader will be displayed in the [Blue-
tooth Settings] screen.
464
12.16.7 Setting of multiple 12.16.8 Setting of the data

reading of bar codes format
The setting method of the multiple reading of bar The setting method of the data format is as follows.
codes is as follows.
1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously. • The initial setting screen is displayed on the
• The initial setting screen is displayed on the Bluetooth bar code reader.
2 Select and confirm [Data Process].
2 Select and confirm [Scan Options].
3 Select and confirm [Terminator].
3 Select and confirm [Sec. Level].
4 Select [CR], and select and confirm [Save &

4 Select and confirm [3 Level] by pressing Exit] at the bottom of the screen.
[▲] or [▼].
5 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit
5 Select and confirm [Save & Exit]. Menu].
6 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Menu]. • This setting reduces the number of enter addition after
reading a bar code from two to one.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Bar code read errors can be prevented by configuring
settings so that bar codes are read and referenced 3
times.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
12
465
12.16.9 Setting of the read time- 12.16.11 Setting of the minimum

out time number of digits for
The setting method of the read time-out time is as fol-
bar codes
lows. The following describes how to set the minimum num-
ber of digits for bar codes.
• The initial setting screen is displayed on the 1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.
Bluetooth bar code reader. • The initial setting screen is displayed on the
3 Select and confirm [Timeout].
3 Select and confirm [Min.length].
4 Select and confirm [5 second(s)] by press-

ing [▲] or [▼]. 4 Press [▲] or [▼] to select the minimum
number of digits, and confirm it.
5 Select and confirm [Save & Exit]. • The default setting is 2 digits.
6 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit 5 Select and confirm [Save & Exit].
Menu].
12.16.10 Setting of the NW7 Menu].
start/stop code
12.16.12 Selection and setting of
The following describes how to set the NW7 start/stop
code.
the bar code to be used
It is necessary to read a bar code to make this setting. The selection method of the code set to be used is as
To read a bar code, print this page and use the printed follows.
bar code.
By the default setting, the bar code reader adds start/
stop code when reading a NW7 (CODABAR) bar code.
• The initial setting screen is displayed on the
Change the setting so that it will not be added.
12
1 Read the barcode as follows.
2 Select and confirm [SetBarcodes].
Do not add the NW7 start/stop code.
3 Select and confirm the code set to be
used.

HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• You can deselect all other code sets, but not the one
2 Read a NW7 (CODABAR) bar code and
you are using.
check that no start/stop code is added to
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
the beginning or ending of the code.
4 Select and confirm [Save & Exit].
466

12.16.13 Setting of the date of
Menu].
bar code reader
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • The setting method of the date of the bar code reader
• The default code set of KDC200i is as follows. is as follows.
Top
Sub Menu Options Default
Menu 1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.
Enabled/ • The initial setting screen is displayed on the
EAN13 Enable
Disabled
Enabled/
EAN8 Enable
Disabled
UPCA
Enabled/
Enable
2 Select and confirm [Systemconfig].
Disabled
Enabled/
UPCE
Disabled
Enable 3 Select and confirm [Date/Time].
Enabled/

CODE39 Enable
Disabled 4 Select and confirm the date and time by
Enabled/
ITF14 Enable pressing [▲] or [▼].
Disabled
Enabled/
CODE128 Enable
Disabled 5 Select and confirm [Save & Exit].
Enabled/
I2of5 Enable
Disabled
Set Bar- Enabled/ 6 Select and confirm [Top Menu] - [Exit
CODABAR Enable
codes Disabled Menu].
Enabled/
GS1-128 Enable
Disabled
CODE93
Enabled/
Enable
12.16.14 Initialization of bar
Disabled
code reader
Enabled/
CODE35 Enable
Disabled
The initializing method of the bar code reader is as fol-
Enabled/
BooklandEAN Disable lows.
Disabled
Enabled/
EAN13withAddon Disable
Disabled 1 Press [▲] and [▼] simultaneously.
Enabled/ • The initial setting screen is displayed on the
EAN8withAddon Disable
Disabled
Enabled/
UPCAwithAddon Disable
Disabled
UPCEwithAddon
Enabled/
Disable 2 Select and confirm [Systemconfig].
12
Disabled
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • 3 Select and confirm [Fac.Default].
4 Select and confirm [Yes&Exit].

Menu].
467
12.17 Installation of the PDA Type1

X-ray device. 12.17.1 Basic operation of the
The setting method of the PDA Type1 is as follows. PDA Type1
The basic operation of the PDA Type1 is as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• PDA Type1 cannot be connected using the built-in Name of the PDA Type1 sections
wireless LAN of this device. Use the wireless LAN
adapter provided as an option. For information on how
to install the wireless LAN adapter, refer to "12.7 In- Power switch
stallation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB type)".
• Apple iPod touch fourth or fifth generation is used as
an example here. There is a case where the setting Toolbar
procedure differs from those of the version used.
• Prepare the personal computer for maintenance.
• Prepare an environment where a personal computer
used for maintenance can connect to the internet.
• Only 1 unit of PDA Type1 can be connected to this
Home screen
specific device at a time.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Icon
Home button
Dock connector
Startup and shutdown of the PDA Type1
O
OStarting up the PDA Type1
12 1 Press the power switch on top of the PDA

Type1 until the Apple logo is displayed.
• The Home screen is displayed after a while.
O
OShutting down the PDA Type1
1 Press the power switch on top of the PDA

Type1 until a red slider is displayed.
• Red slider is displayed after a while.
2 Drag the red slider.

• Power of the PDA Type1 is turned off.
468
Charge of the PDA Type1 O

OWhen charging using the USB power adapter
The charging method of the PDA Type1 is as follows.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
O
OWhen charging by connecting with this • USB power adapter is optional.
device ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Confirm that the power of this device is 1 Connect the supplied Dock Connector to
turned on. USB Cable to the PDA Type1.
2 Connect this device and the PDA Type1 2 Connect the Dock Connector to USB Ca-
with the supplied Dock Connector to USB ble to the USB power adapter.
Cable.
3 Plug the USB power adapter into the out-
let.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not turn the power of this device off until the charg-
ing is completed. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Charging is completed when the battery icon displayed
on the tool bar of the PDA Type1 changes to charged
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • mark.
on the tool bar of the PDA Type1 changes to charged Charging Charged
mark.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Charging Charged 12
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
469

12.17.2 Setting of this device
Setting of IP address for wireless LAN adapter

Set the IP address for the wireless LAN adapter.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Make settings after performing the following opera-
tions.
–– Install the wireless LAN adapter driver.
–– Connect the wireless LAN adapter.
• For the installation of the wireless LAN adapter, refer
to "12.7 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB
type)".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

played.

5 Right-click the wireless LAN adapter added

for the PDA Type1, and select [Properties].
12
470
7 Select [Use the following IP address], and

select following items.
• Properties screen for the wireless network con-

nection is displayed. Setting item Settings
[IP address] Enter "192.168.20.190".
6 S e l e c t [ I n t e r n e t P r o t o c o l Ve r s i o n 4 [Subnet mask] Enter "255.255.255.0".

(TCP/IPv4)] and press [Properties]. [Default gate-
Nothing needs to be entered.
way]
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The values for [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Default
gateway] given here are fixed. Values cannot be
changed to other than those given above.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
8 Press [OK].
12
• [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Proper-

ties] screen is displayed.
471
9 Press [Close]. 2 Confirm that the icon of the client utility is

displayed on the task tray of the desktop.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If the icon is not visible on the task tray, it will be dis-
played by pressing on the on the task tray.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3 Right-click the icon of the client utility,

and select [Change to AP mode].
10 Close [Network Connections] screen.

Connection setting with the PDA Type1

• [Logitec Software AP Utility] screen is displayed.
To connect with the PDA Type1, change the wireless
12
LAN adapter to AP mode, and then change the chan-
nel. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Close the screen if WAN adapter selection screen is
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • displayed.

less LAN adapter that is used. For details, refer to the
operation manual of the wireless LAN adapter that is
used.
model Logitec LAN-W150N/U2BK is used as an ex- • When the security warning screen is displayed, select
ample. both of the two check boxes and press [Allow access].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

played.
472
4 Select [Setting] tab and set following items.
• [Security settings] screen is displayed.
Setting item Settings 6 Set the following items.

Set the MAC address of the wireless
LAN adapter to the SSID by pressing
[SSID]
[Use MAC address].
Default setting: LogitecAP
Select the channel to be used from 1, 6, or 11.
[Channel]
Default setting: 1
Select this.

This is a setting to disallow the data
[No transfer be-
transfer between the wireless clients
tween wireless
via wireless LAN adapter when there
clients]
are multiple wireless clients connected
simultaneously.
Release the selection.
[Allow BW 40
This is a setting for the channel width
MHz]
of 11n (Draft).
Set the send power. Setting item Settings
[Send power]
Select [25%].
[Authentication
Select [WPA2-PSK].
method]
5 Press [Security settings]. [Encryption] Select [AES].
Enter the passphrase. Passphrase is
entered in single-byte alphanumeric
[WPA-PSK] characters. Upper case and lower case
are distinguished.
Enter [165gf1JS] normally.
12
7 Press [OK].
473
8 Press [Adapt].
3 Press [PDA] on the sub-menu screen.

9 Close the [Logitec Software AP Utility]
screen.
Setting of PDAs with the service tool (1)

Perform the setting of the PDA Type1 with the service
tool.
12
• The PDA setting screen is displayed.
4 Select [Use PDA].
474
5 Confirm that [Use PDA installation URL] is

12.17.3 Setting of maintenance
selected.
personal computer
Installation of the iTunes

Install the iTunes into the maintenance personal com-
puter.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6 Set the following items in [Basic Settings]. • The screens are shown in Japanese as the Japanese
version of iTunes is used as an example.
• When installing iTunes, the default device setting is
set to synchronize with the connected PDA Type1, so
the relationship of the PC for maintenance and the
PDA Type1 will be 1:1. When using a different PC for
maintenance, configure settings again.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Download the [iTunesSetup.exe] to the

maintenance personal computer from
Set the login linkage mode. To enable the
[Login Mode] login linkage, select [Login linkage ON]. the Apple site (http://www.apple.com/jp/
Default: [Login linkage OFF] itunes/download/).
Select this to enable automatic device
[Automatic rec- identification.
ognition of PDA Set this [ON] when using both iPod 2 Double-click the downloaded [iTunesSet-
models] and iPad. up.exe].
Default: [OFF] • Press [Run] if the [Security Warning] screen is
When [Automatic recognition of PDA displayed.
models] is set [OFF], set the terminal
[PDA Model
model to be used.
Setting]
Select [iPod]. 3 Press [Next].
Default: [iPod]
7 Press [OK] on the PDA setting screen.

12

closed.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the other settings on the PDA setting screen, refer
to "PDA setting" of "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual
for Service Tool/User Tool Screen".
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
475
4 Clear the selection in the [Add iTunes Initialization of the PDA Type1
shortcut to my desktop], [Use iTunes as
The initializing method of the PDA Type1 is as follows.
the default player for audio files], and [Au-
tomatically update iTunes and other Apple
software], and press [Install]. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu

of the maintenance personal computer,
and then press [iTunes] - [iTunes] in [All
Programs].
• iTunes will start.
2 Connect the PDA Type1 and the mainte-

• Installation of the iTunes starts. nance personal computer with the sup-
plied Dock Connector to USB Cable.
5 Press [Finish].
• PDA Type1 will be automatically initialized.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
6 Press [Agree]. • If the below screen appears when connecting the sec-
ond or a subsequent PDA Type1, select [Set as a new
iPod] and press [Continue].
12
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• iTunes will start and the [iTunes Tutorials]
7 Shut down iTunes and close the [iTunes

Tutorials] screen.
476
3 Input the PDA Type1 name, and press

12.17.4 Setting of the PDA
[Complete].
Type1
Setting for the initial startup
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The screens are shown in Japanese as a Japanese
PDA Type1 (iPod) is used as an example.
• Enter "<the name of this device to which you ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
connect it> iPod".
(Example) "CS7-12345 iPod" 1 Press the power switch on top of the PDA
• If the following message is displayed, press [No] Type1.
to close the screen.
2 Flick the bottom of the screen from left to
right.

4 Exit iTunes when the following message
appears at top of the screen.
5 Remove the PDA Type1 from the mainte-

nance computer.
3 Tap [Turn Location Services off], and then

tap [Next]. 12
477
4 Tap [OK].
• A screen showing the conditions of use appears

after a while.
5 Tap [Next].
7 Tap [Agree].
xxxxxxxxxxxx
6 Tap [Continue].
12 8 Tap [Agree].
xxxxxxxxxxxx
478
9 Tap [Do not send], and then tap [Next]. Confirming the PDA Type1 version
Confirm the PDA Type1 version.
1 Tap [Settings] in the Home screen of the

PDA Type1.

10 Tap [Use iPod touch].
2 Tap [General].

12
• The Home screen is displayed.
479
3 Tap [About]. Locking of screen rotation to portrait
1 Press the Home button on the PDA Type1

twice continuously.
4 Make sure that the [Version] is 5.0.1 or

above.
right, and tap the lock rotation icon .
• Orientation of the screen will be locked to por-

trait and lock rotation icon is displayed in the
Home screen of the PDA Type1.
Canceling of Auto-Lock
1 Tap the [Settings] in the Home screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
12 • Perform a version upgrade if the PDA Type1 version is
older than 5.0.1. For the operation method, refer to the
operation manual of PDA Type1.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
480
2 Tap [General]. Setting of the Wi-Fi of the PDA Type1

The setting method of the Wi-Fi of the PDA Type1 is as fol-
lows.
1 Make sure that the wireless LAN adapter

is connected to this device.

PDA Type1.
3 Tap [Auto-Lock].

4 Tap [Wi-Fi].
4 Tap [Never]. 12
5 Press Home button.
481
5 Turn [ON] the [Wi-Fi]. 8 Set the following items in [IP Address].

6 Tap [ ] of the access point to connect [IP Address] Input "192.168.20.191".
from the list of wireless network. [Subnet Mask] Input "255.255.255.0".
[Router] Input "192.168.20.190".
[DNS] Input is not required.

[Search Do-
Input is not required.
mains]
9 Tap [Wi-Fi Networks].
12 7 Tap [Static].
482
10 Tap the access point to connect from the

list of wireless network.
• Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the tool bar.

• If the [Ask to Join Networks] is set to [ON], turn
it [OFF].
11 Enter the password, and tap [Join]. 12 Press Home button.

XXXXXXXX
Setting of access control

The setting method of the access control is as follows.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Some screens are shown in Japanese as the Japa-
nese model Logitec LAN-W150N/U2BK is used as an
example.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

PDA Type1 to connect.
• Enter "165gf1JS" as the password.

12
483
2 Tap [General]. 6 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,

and then press [All Programs] – [Logitec]
– [Client Utility].
• Logitec software AP utility starts up.
7 Select [Access Control] tab and then se-

lect [Allow All] from access policy.
3 Tap [About].
8 Enter "MAC address" that is confirmed in

step 4 in [MAC Address] and then press
[Add].
4 Confirm [Wi-Fi Address] in the information

12 screen.
• (Example) If the PDA Type1 Wi-Fi address is
"A6:B5:C4:D3:E2:F1", enter "A6B5C4D3E2F1"
as the MAC address. Enter letters in uppercase,
and do not enter the " : ".
5 Confirm the Windows desktop of this de-

vice is displayed.
484
Creation of the CS-7 icon

Create a CS-7 icon in the Home screen of the PDA
Type1.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Some screens are shown in Japanese as a Japanese
PDA Type1 (iPod) is used as an example.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• "MAC address" is displayed in the access list.

2 Tap [Safari] in the Home screen of the
PDA Type1.
9 Press [Adapt].

• Safari will start.
• Tap [Done] when the Bookmarks screen is dis-
10 Close the [Logitec software AP utility] played.
screen.
3 Enter "http://192.168.20.190/login/index.
html" and tap [Go].
12
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To register several units of PDA, repeat steps 8 and 9.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the switching method of the character input, refer
to the operation manual of PDA Type1 .
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
485
4 Tap the Menu button. 7 Tap [OK].
5 Tap [Add to Home Screen].

• CS-7 icon is added to the Home screen.
12 6 Enter "CS-7" and tap [Add].
486

tool.
4 Deselect [Use PDA Installation URL].

3 Press [PDA] on the sub-menu screen. 12

closed.
487
Confirmation of starting of this device on

the PDA Type1 12.17.5 Other settings
Confirm if this device is starting on the PDA Type1.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Settings for the birthdate display format

• Some screens are shown in Japanese as a Japanese When you select a preset that includes a birthdate
PDA Type1 (iPod) is used as an example. from the displayed items in the list screen or exposure
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • screen, the format of the birthdate that is displayed
can be changed as follows.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Tap [CS-7] in the Home screen of the PDA
• The PDA Type1's birthdate display format does not
Type1. change in relation to the [Date Formatting] setting of
this device.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The default birthdate display format is "YYYY-MM-
DD".
• By performing these steps, birthdates can be dis-

played in a format different from that configured in this
device's [Date Formatting] setting.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How
to display the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

diate screen.
12
• The login screen is displayed on the PDA Type1.
3 Open "C:¥KonicaMinolta¥Console¥Config
¥System¥Platform¥System¥PluginSetting
¥ImageAcquisitionDomainExtender¥" with
Explorer.
488
4 Using Notepad, etc., in Windows, open the IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

preset file selected in [List Screen/Expo- • Back up the selected preset file before editing the pre-
sure Screen Display Items Setting] in the set values.
service tools' PDA setting. • There are at most 2 parts in which the preset values
• Open any of the following files. must be edited.
–– Preset D setting file: ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
PDAStudyInfoDisplaySetting_D.xml
–– Preset E setting file:
PDAStudyInfoDisplaySetting_E.xml
–– Preset F setting file:
PDAStudyInfoDisplaySetting_F.xml 7 Select the preset with the altered display
format with [List Screen/Exposure Screen
Display Items Setting] in the service tools'
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
PDA setting.
• When [Japanese] is set for [Language Setting], the
birthdate for Preset D is not displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For preset content, refer to "Setting of PDAs" of "CS-7
Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/User Tool

Screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Change the "DA000" string inside the file

to the preset value of the display format
you want to use, and save the file.
• Display format preset values are as follows.
Display format Preset value

M-D-YYYY DA001
MM-DD-YYYY DA002
D-M-YYYY DA003
DD-MM-YYYY DA004
12
Edit area
489

X-ray device. 12.18.1 Basic operation of the
The setting method of the PDA Type2 is as follows. PDA Type2
The basic operation of the PDA Type2 is as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• PDA Type2 cannot be connected using the built-in Name of the PDA Type2 sections
wireless LAN of this device. Use the wireless LAN
adapter provided as an option. For information on how
Power switch
to install the wireless LAN adapter, refer to "12.7 In-
stallation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB type)".
Toolbar
• Apple iPad third generation is used as an example
here. There is a case where the setting procedure dif-
fers from those of the version used.
• Prepare the personal computer for maintenance.
• Prepare an environment where a personal computer Home screen
used for maintenance can connect to the internet.
• Only 1 unit of PDA Type1 can be connected to this
specific device at a time. Icon
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Home button
Dock connector
Startup and shutdown of the PDA Type2
O
OStarting up the PDA Type2
12 1 Press the power switch on top of the PDA

Type2 until the Apple logo is displayed.
• The Home screen is displayed after a while.
O
OShutting down the PDA Type2
1 Press the power switch on top of the PDA

Type2 until a red slider is displayed.
• Red slider is displayed after a while.
2 Drag the red slider.

• Power of the PDA Type2 is turned off.
490
Charge of the PDA Type2 O

OWhen charging using the USB power adapter
The charging method of the PDA Type2 is as follows.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
O
OWhen charging by connecting with this de- • USB power adapter is optional.
vice ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Confirm that the power of this device is 1 Connect the supplied Dock Connector to
turned on. USB Cable to the PDA Type2.
2 Connect this device and the PDA Type2 2 Connect the Dock Connector to USB Ca-
with the supplied Dock Connector to USB ble to the USB power adapter.
Cable.
3 Plug the USB power adapter into the out-
let.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Do not turn the power of this device off until the charg-
ing is completed. HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
on the tool bar of the PDA Type2 changes to charged
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • mark.
on the tool bar of the PDA Type2 changes to charged Charging Charged
mark. 12
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Charging Charged
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
491

12.18.2 Setting of this device
Setting of IP address for wireless LAN adapter

Set the IP address for the wireless LAN adapter.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Make settings after performing the following opera-
tions.
–– Install the wireless LAN adapter driver.
–– Connect the wireless LAN adapter.
• For the installation of the wireless LAN adapter, refer
to "12.7 Installation of the wireless LAN adapter (USB
type)".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

played.


5 Right-click the wireless LAN adapter added
for the PDA Type2, and select [Properties].
12
• Properties screen for the wireless network connection is displayed.

492
6 S e l e c t [ I n t e r n e t P r o t o c o l Ve r s i o n 4 Setting item Settings

(TCP/IPv4)] and press [Properties]. [IP address] Enter "192.168.20.190".
[Subnet mask] Enter "255.255.255.0".
[Default gate-
Nothing needs to be entered.
way]
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The values for [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Default
gateway] given here are fixed. Values cannot be
changed to other than those given above.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
8 Press [OK].

9 Press [Close].
12
• [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Proper-
ties] screen is displayed.
7 Select [Use the following IP address], and

set following items.
493
10 Close [Network Connections] screen.
• [Logitec Software AP Utility] screen is displayed.

Connection setting with the PDA Type2
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
To connect with the PDA Type2, change the wireless
• Close the screen if WAN adapter selection screen is
LAN adapter to AP mode, and then change the chan-
displayed.
nel.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

less LAN adapter that is used. For details, refer to the
operation manual of the wireless LAN adapter that is • When the security warning screen is displayed, select
used. both of the two check boxes and press [Allow access].
• The screens are shown in Japanese as the Japanese ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
model Logitec LAN-W150N/U2BK is used as an ex-
ample. 4 Select [Setting] tab and set following items.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

played.
2 Confirm that the icon of the client utility is

displayed on the task tray of the desktop.
12
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the icon is not visible on the task tray, it will be dis-
played by pressing on the on the task tray.
Set the MAC address of the wireless
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • LAN adapter to the SSID by pressing
[SSID]
[Use MAC address].
3 Right-click the icon of the client utility, Default setting: LogitecAP
and select [Change to AP mode]. Select the channel to be used from 1, 6, or 11.
[Channel]
Default setting: 1
Select this.
This is a setting to disallow the data
[No transfer be-
transfer between the wireless clients
tween wireless
via wireless LAN adapter when there
clients]
are multiple wireless clients connected
simultaneously.
Release the selection.
[Allow BW 40
This is a setting for the channel width
MHz]
of 11n (Draft).
Set the send power.
[Send power]
Select [25%].
494
5 Press [Security settings]. 7 Press [OK].
8 Press [Adapt].

• [Security settings] screen is displayed.
9 Close the [Logitec Software AP Utility]
6 Set the following items. screen.
12

[Authentication
Select [WPA2-PSK].
method]
[Encryption] Select [AES].
Enter the passphrase. Passphrase is
entered in single-byte alphanumeric
[WPA-PSK] characters. Upper case and lower case
are distinguished.
Enter [165gf1JS] normally.
495

tool.
4 Select [Use PDA].

5 Confirm that [Use PDA installation URL] is

selected.
12
3 Press [PDA] on the sub-menu screen.
496
6 Set the following items in [Basic Settings].

12.18.3 Setting of maintenance
personal computer
Installation of the iTunes

Install the iTunes into the maintenance personal com-
puter.

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Set the login linkage mode. To enable
the login linkage, select [Login linkage • The screens are shown in Japanese as the Japanese
[Login Mode] version of iTunes is used as an example.
ON].
Default: [Login linkage OFF] • When installing iTunes, the default device setting is
Select this to enable automatic device set to synchronize with the connected PDA Type2, so
[Automatic identification. the relationship of the PC for maintenance and the
recognition of Set this [ON] when using both iPod
PDA Type2 will be 1:1. When using a different PC for
PDA models] and iPad.
Default: [OFF] maintenance, configure settings again.
When [Automatic recognition of PDA ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
models] is set [OFF], set the terminal
[PDA Model
Setting]
model to be used.
1 Download the [iTunesSetup.exe] to the

Select [iPad].
Default: [iPod] maintenance personal computer from
the Apple site (http://www.apple.com/jp/
itunes/download/).
2 Double-click the downloaded [iTunesSet-

up.exe].
• Press [Run] if the [Security Warning] screen is
displayed.
3 Press [Next].
12
• The settings are stored, and the screen is closed.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the other settings on the PDA setting screen, refer
to "PDA setting" of "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual
for Service Tool/User Tool Screen"
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
497
4 Clear the selection in the [Add iTunes Initialization of the PDA Type2
shortcut to my desktop], [Use iTunes as
The initializing method of the PDA Type2 is as follows.
the default player for audio files], and [Au-
tomatically update iTunes and other Apple
software], and press [Install]. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu

of the maintenance personal computer,
and then press [iTunes] - [iTunes] in [All
Programs].
• iTunes will start.
2 Connect the PDA Type2 and the mainte-

• Installation of the iTunes starts. nance personal computer with the sup-
plied Dock Connector to USB Cable.
5 Press [Finish].
• PDA Type2 will be automatically initialized.

6 Press [Agree]. • Check [Agree] in the software license agree-
ment.
12 HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If the below screen appears when connecting the sec-
ond or a subsequent PDA Type2, select [Set as a new
iPad] and press [Continue].
• iTunes will start and the [iTunes Tutorials]

7 Shut down iTunes and close the [iTunes

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Tutorials] screen.
498
3 Input the PDA Type2 name, and press

12.18.4 Setting of the PDA
[Complete].
Type2
Setting for the initial startup
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The screens are shown in Japanese as a Japanese
PDA Type2 (iPad) is used as an example.
• Enter "<the name of this device to which you ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
connect it> iPad".
(Example) "CS7-12345 iPad" 1 Press the power switch on top of the PDA
• If the following message is displayed, press [No] Type2.
right.

4 Exit iTunes when the following message
appears at top of the screen.
5 Remove the PDA Type2 from the mainte-

nance computer.
3 Set the country and region.

12
4 Tap [Turn Location Services off], and then
tap [Next].
499
5 Tap [OK].
• A screen showing the conditions of use appears

after a while.
6 Tap [Next].
8 Tap [Agree].
7 Tap [Continue].
12 9 Tap [Agree].
500
10 Tap [Use Audio imput], and then tap [Next].
• The Home screen is displayed.
11 Tap [Do not send], and then tap [Next]. Confirming the PDA Type2 version
Confirm the PDA Type2 version.

Tap [Settings] in the Home screen of the
PDA Type2.
12 Tap [Use iPad].

12
2 Tap [General].
501
3 Tap [About]. Locking of screen rotation to portrait
1 Press the Home button on the PDA Type2

twice continuously.
4 Make sure that the [Version] is 5.0.1 or

above.
right, and tap the lock rotation icon .
• Orientation of the screen will be locked to por-

trait and lock rotation icon is displayed in the
Home screen of the PDA Type2.
Canceling of Auto-Lock
1 Tap the [Settings] in the Home screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
12 • Perform a version upgrade if the PDA Type2 version is
older than 5.0.1. For the operation method, refer to the
operation manual of PDA Type2 .
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
502
2 Tap [General]. Fixing the screen operation
1 Tap [Setting] on the home screen.
3 Set [Auto-Lock] to [Never].
2 Tap [General].

4 Press Home button.
12
3 Set [Multitask Gesture] to [OFF].
4 Press the home button.
503
Setting of the Wi-Fi of the PDA Type2 5 Turn [ON] the [Wi-Fi].
The setting method of the Wi-Fi of the PDA Type2 is as fol-
lows.
1 Make sure that the wireless LAN adapter

is connected to this device.

PDA Type2.
6 Tap [ ] of the access point to connect

from the list of wireless network.
4 Tap [Wi-Fi].
7 Tap [Static].
12
504
8 Set the following items in [IP Address]. 10 Tap the access point to connect from the
list of wireless network.

[IP Address] Input "192.168.20.191".
[Subnet Mask] Input "255.255.255.0". 11 Enter the password, and tap [Join].
[Router] Input "192.168.20.190".

[DNS] Input is not required.
[Search Do-
Input is not required.
mains]
9 Tap [Wi-Fi Networks].
• Enter "165gf1JS" as the password.
12
505
2 Tap [General].
• Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the tool bar.
12 Press Home button. 3 Tap [About].
Setting of access control

The setting method of the access control is as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Some screens are shown in Japanese as the Japa-
nese model Logitec LAN-W150N/U2BK is used as an
example.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

PDA Type2 to connect.
4 Confirm [Wi-Fi Address] in the information

screen.
12
5 Confirm the Windows desktop of this de-

vice is displayed.
506

and then press [All Programs] – [Logitec]
– [Client Utility].
• Logitec software AP utility starts up.
7 Select [Access Control] tab and then se-

lect [Allow All] from access policy.
• "MAC address" is displayed in the access list.
9 Press [Adapt].

8 Enter "MAC address" that is confirmed in
step 4 in [MAC Address] and then press
[Add].
10 Close the [Logitec software AP utility]

screen.
12
• (Example) If the PDA Type2 Wi-Fi address is
"A6:B5:C4:D3:E2:F1", enter "A6B5C4D3E2F1"
as the MAC address. Enter letters in uppercase,
and do not enter the " : ".
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To register several units of PDA, repeat step 8 and 9.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
507
Creation of the CS-7 icon 4 Tap [OK].

Create a CS-7 icon in the Home screen of the PDA
Type2.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Tap [Safari] in the Home screen of the

PDA Type2.
5 Tap the Menu button.

• Safari will start.

• Tap [Done] when the Bookmarks screen is dis-
played.
6 Tap [Add to Home Screen].

3 Enter "http://192.168.20.190/login/index.
12 html" and tap [Go].
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the switching method of the character input, refer
to the operation manual of PDA Type2 .
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
508
7 Enter "CS-7" and tap [Add]. Setting of PDAs with the service tool (2)
tool.

• CS-7 icon is added to the Home screen. • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Press [PDA] on the sub-menu screen.

12
• If a message about rearranging the icons is displayed,
press [OK].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
509
Confirmation of starting of this device on

the PDA Type2
Confirm if this device is starting on the PDA Type2.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2 Tap [CS-7] in the Home screen of the PDA

4 Deselect [Use PDA installation URL].
Type2.
12
closed.
• The login screen is displayed on the PDA Type2.
510
4 Using Notepad, etc., in Windows, open the

12.18.5 Other settings preset file selected in [List Screen/Expo-
sure Screen Display Items Setting] in the
service tools' PDA setting.
• Open any of the following files.
Settings for the birthdate display format
–– Preset D setting file:
When you select a preset that includes a birthdate PDAStudyInfoDisplaySetting_D.xml
from the displayed items in the list screen or exposure –– Preset E setting file:
screen, the format of the birthdate that is displayed PDAStudyInfoDisplaySetting_E.xml
can be changed as follows. –– Preset F setting file:
PDAStudyInfoDisplaySetting_F.xml
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The PDA Type 2's birthdate display format does not
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
change in relation to the [Date Formatting] setting of • When [Japanese] is set for [Language Setting], the
this device. birthdate for Preset D is not displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For preset content, refer to "Setting of PDAs" of "CS-7
• The default birthdate display format is "YYYY-MM-

DD".
Screen".
• By performing these steps, birthdates can be dis-
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
played in a format different from that configured in this
device's [Date Formatting] setting.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 5 Change the "DA000" string inside the file
to the preset value of the display format
1 Display the intermediate screen. you want to use, and save the file.
• Display format preset values are as follows.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Display format Preset value

• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How M-D-YYYY DA001
to display the intermediate screen". MM-DD-YYYY DA002
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • D-M-YYYY DA003
DD-MM-YYYY DA004
diate screen.
12
Edit area
3 Open "C:¥KonicaMinolta¥Console¥Config
¥System¥Platform¥System¥PluginSetting
¥ImageAcquisitionDomainExtender¥" with
Explorer.
511
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Back up the selected preset file before editing the pre-
set values.
• There are at most 2 parts in which the preset values
must be edited.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
7 Select the preset with the altered display

format with [List Screen/Exposure Screen
Display Items Setting] in the service tools'
PDA setting.
12
512
12.19 UPS installation
This option is for operating this device in an exposure 5 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,
room. and then press [Control Panel].
1 Connect the UPS to this device using a

USB cable.
2 Turn on this device and the UPS in this or-

der.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

diate screen.
6 Press [System and Security].

7 Press [Power Options]. 12
513
8 Confirm that [High performance] is se- Setting item Settings

lected in [Select a power plan] then press [Low battery
Confirm [On battery: 50%].
[Change plan settings]. level]
[Critical battery
Confirm [On battery: 10%].
level]
[Critical battery
Confirm [On battery: Shutdown].
action]
[Low battery
Confirm [On battery: On].
notification]
[Low battery
Confirm [On battery: Do nothing].
action]
11 Press [+] beside [Hard disk] and set [On

9 Press [Change advanced power settings]. battery (Minutes)] to [0].
10 Press [+] beside [Battery] and check the

following items in order.
12 Press [Apply].
12
13 Press [OK].
514
14 From the [On battery] menu of [Turn off

the display], select [5 minutes], then press
[Save changes].
15 Close the screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the power supply drops or there is a power out-
age, the UPS will make a beeping sound, then the
battery will start operating. When the beeping sound is
heard, please tell the user to turn off this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the power supply switches to UPS due to a power
failure, you will see an icon on the taskbar.
• You can check the operational status of the battery by
pressing the icon.
12
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
515
516
Chapter
13
Installation of Function
System Options
This chapter describes the operation for installation of function system options
for this device.
517
13.1 Setting of the S-SRM
This option is for operating this device in an exposure

room.
When installing S-SRM, follow the procedures below. 13.1.2 Exposure room setting
* S-SRM is not used in Japan.
Set the sync mode of this device with the X-ray device
of the exposure room.
13.1.1 S-SRM installation
1 Turn on the AeroDR Interface Unit, moni-
The method of installation of the S-SRM is as follows. tor, and this device.
1 Install the S-SRM KIT in the X-ray device 2 Start the service tool.
and AeroDR Generator Interface Unit.
3 Press the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • icon.
• Set the dip switches on the ECB board to S-SRM.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the S-SRM installation, refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Connect the X-ray sensor connection jig

to the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit.

• This completes the S-SRM installation. Next, set
the exposure room.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the connection of the X-ray sensor connection jig,
al".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
13
518
4 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. 6 Press [OK].
• Returns to the sub-menu screen.

• This completes the exposure room setting. Next,
measure the delay time.

5 Select [SRM] in [Sync Mode] in [Exposure

Room Setting].
13
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Select [SRM] as [Sync Mode], because S-SRM set-
tings are made on the ECB board in the AeroDR Gen-
erator Interface Unit.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
519
13.1.3 Prep-Delay time

4 Press [Start] in [Prep-Delay Time Measure-
ment].
measurement
Measure the delay time (Prep-Delay time) from press-
ing the first stage of the exposure switch until the start
of exposure.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Perform the measurement of delay time between "4.13
Change of network of this device/addition of AeroDR
Detector after completing the settings" and "4.14 Anal-
ysis of AeroDR Detector".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Press [Delay Measurement] on the sub-

menu screen.
• The message "Prep-Delay Time is measuring.

Please Press ExposureSW1●SW2 Simultane-
ously and Expose. After the Exposure is re-
peated 3 times please press [End] button." is
displayed.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If an error message is displayed when [Start] or
[End] are pushed, check that the connection with the
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit was made.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5 Press the first stage and second stage of

the exposure switch at the same time to
perform the first exposure.
13 HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Release the exposure switch after the exposure sound
disappears.
• The delay time measurement screen is dis- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
played.
6 Repeat step 5 twice for a total exposure of
three times.
2 Set the X-ray device to non-interlock.
3 Set the exposure condition of the X-ray IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

device to a voltage of 80 kVp and a cur- • Wait for the rotor of the X-ray device to stop, and then
rent of 100 mA or higher. perform the next exposure.
• If exposure could not be completed, press [Cancel]
and restart from step 4.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
520
7 Press [End]. 10 Press [Yes].
• Saves the measured delay time and displays it

in units of 0.1 sec on a [Timer] of [XG BOX Set-
ting] in the AeroDR unit setting screen. If you
want to manually change the delay time, do so
using the [Timer] of [XG BOX Setting] in the
AeroDR unit setting screen.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When changing from the S-SRM link to the SRM link,
reset the [Timer] of [XG BOX Setting] on the AeroDR
unit setting screen to "0" msec.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ment values and the first through third measure-
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ment averages.
• For the changing of the delay time, refer to "4.10.11
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit setting".
8 Confirm the first through the third mea- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
surement averages.

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 11 Press [Close].
• Confirm that there are no substantial differences in
the measured values from first to third measurements.
Perform steps 4 through 7 again if the differences are
substantially large.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
9 Press [Save].
• This completes the Prep-Delay time measure- 13

ments. When the moving grid is connected to
the X-ray device, measure the following Bucky-
Delay time. When the moving grid is not con-
nected to the X-ray device, remove the X-ray
sensor connection jig from AeroDR Generator
Interface Unit.
521
13.1.4 Bucky-Delay time

6 Press the second stage of the exposure
switch to perform the first exposure in 5
measurement seconds later after pressing the first stage
When the moving grid is connected to the X-ray de- of the exposure switch.
vice, measure the delay time (Bucky-Delay time) from
pressing the second stage of the exposure switch until 7 Repeat step 5 twice for a total exposure of
the start of exposure. three times.
If the moving grid is not connected to the X-ray device,
this setting is not necessary. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the first stage of the exposure switch was pressed
1 Load the AeroDR Detector into the expo- then the second stage of the exposure switch was
sure stage as necessary. pressed within 5 seconds, press [Cancel] and restart
from step 5.
2 Display the delay time measurement ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
screen.
8 Press [End].
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the operations, refer to step 1 of "13.1.3 Prep-
Delay time measurement".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Select the exposure with the moving gird

on the X-ray device.
4 Set the exposure condition of the X-ray

device to a voltage of 80 kVp and a cur-

rent of 100 mA or higher.
5 Press [Start] in [Bucky-Delay Time Mea-

surement].

ment values and the first through third measure-
13 ment averages.
9 Confirm the first through the third mea-

surement averages.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Confirm that there are no substantial differences in the
measured values from the first to the third measure-
ments. Perform steps 5 through 8 again if the differ-
ences are substantially large.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The message "Bucky-Delay Time is measuring.

Please Press ExposureSW1 for 5 seconds and
then press SW2 Expose. After the Exposure is
repeated 3 times please press [End] button." is
displayed.
522
10 Confirm that the measurement average is 13.1.5 X-ray exposure sync

within 300 msec.
setting
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Set the X-ray exposure sync.
• If the measurement average is higher than 300 msec,
use an exposure time of less than [This charge stor- 1 Start the service tool.
age time - measurement average] msec and explain
this exposure time to the users.
(Ex.) If this charge storage time is 1 sec (default)
and the measurement average is 350 msec, the
max. exposure time will be
1000 msec-350 msec = 650 msec or less.
• The AeroDR System allows a max. exposure time of
700 msec. However, when the measurement average
of the Bucky-Delay time is 300 msec or higher, the
user needs to reduce the max. exposure time used.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the Bucky-Delay measurement average is 300 msec
or higher, then the message "Please explain to the
user to set the max exposure time as [(1000-Bucky-
Delay measurement average)] ms." will appear.
• If you measure the Bucky-Delay time once, when the
next delay time measurement screen is displayed,
the measurement results of the previous Bucky-Delay

time will be displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
11 Press [Close].
13
• Remove the X-ray sensor connection jig from

the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit.
523
4 Set the following item of [S-SRM X-ray Ex-

posure sync setting].

Select the setting from among [CR
[S-SRM X-ray
mode], [DR mode] and [Manual mode]
Exposure
in [S-SRM X-ray Exposure sync mode].
sync mode]
Default setting: [CR mode]
[Display the
message that Select this if the message indicating
the X-ray device is not synchronized

X-ray device is
appears while selecting the CR expo-
non-interlock
sure conditions in [Manual mode].
mode when
This item cannot be selected in [CR
CR Exam is mode] or [DR mode]
selected]
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• To set the [S-SRM X-ray Exposure sync mode] setting
to [CR mode] or [DR mode], leave No. 3 of the ECB
board dip switch "SW2" of the AeroDR Generator In-
terface Unit off.
13 • To set the [S-SRM X-ray Exposure sync mode] setting
to [Manual mode], switch on No. 3 of the ECB board
dip switch "SW2" of the AeroDR Generator Interface
Unit.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The settings are stored, and the screen is closed.
524
13.2 X-ray information linkage setting
13.2.1 Overview of X-ray information linkage function
This option is for operating this device in an exposure room.

The setting of X-ray information linkage enables this device to transmit the preset of X-ray exposure conditions (kV,
mA, mAs, etc.) to X-ray devices before exposures.
O
OX-ray device connection example
Exposure room
CS-7
Hub
“TA-402X” (recommended)

XIF/
XGIF
Power
source Hub ECB
AeroDR Interface Unit AeroDR Generator

Interface Unit
AeroDR Detector
AeroDR Detector
X-ray Tube
X-ray device

Ethernet cable
RS-232C/hardware connection
13
• It is required to set X-ray devices and the X-ray exposure conditions to transmit to them respectively in order to
perform the X-ray information linkage.
–– Perform the setting of X-ray devices with the service tool.
–– Perform the setting of X-ray exposure conditions with the user tool.
• Connect this device and X-ray devices via Ethernet or RS-232C. In case of an RS-232C connection, be sure to
prepare the recommended Ethernet-serial converter.
525
O
OList of link parameters for each manufacturer
The parameters that link with each manufacturer are as follows.
General purpose X-ray device

Name
Arcoma CPI POSKOM SEDECAL emd iba DAP TOSHIBA SHIMADZU HITACHI
(Communication DICOM tag
(Ethernet) (RS232C) (Ethernet) (RS232C) (RS232C) (Ethernet) (RS232C) (RS232C) (RS232C)
method)
Anatomical (APR) ○ ○ ○
Bucky(WS) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
kV 0018, 0060 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
mA 0018, 1151 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
msec 0018, 1150 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
mAs 0018, 1152 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Focus ○ ○ ▲ ▲ ○ ○ ○
AEC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Film Screen ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Density ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Body Size ○ ○ ○
Grid ○
Filter ○
SID ○
Centering ○
Detector Angle 0018, 1510 ○
Collimator 0018, 1602-4 ○
Entrace Dose(mGy) 0040, 8302 ○

Image Area
Dose(dGycm2)
0018, 115E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Heat Tube ○ ○ ○ ○
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Currently, "emd" information linking cannot be used.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
13
526
X-ray device for mammography

Name (Communica- TOSHIBA SHIMADZU HITACHI GE SIEMENS TOYO MEDIC LivingStone
DICOM tag
tion method) (RS232C) (RS232C) (RS232C) (Ethernet) (RS232C) (RS232C) (RS232C)
Bucky(WS) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
mA ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
msec ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
mAs ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Focus ○ ○ ○ ○
AEC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sensitivity ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Density ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SID(cm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Grid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Magnification ratio ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Entrace Dose(mGy) ○ ○ ○ ○
Image Area
Dose(dGycm2) ○ ○ ○ ○
Anode material ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Filter material ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Compressed breast
thickness (mm) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Compressing force (N) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Exposure support arm
angle ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Exposing direction
13
527
13.2.2 Workflow for setting X-ray information linkage
13.2.3 Confirmation of X-ray information Confirm the manufacturer and model name of an
1 linkage environment X-ray device.
In case of RS-232C connection, install the driver of

2 13.2.4 Installation of Ethernet-serial converter
the Ethernet-serial converter to this device.
* Only used in Japan
Perform the setting of an X-ray device with the ser-

3 13.2.5 X-ray device setting vice tool.
Perform the setting of X-ray exposure conditions with

4 13.2.6 X-ray exposure conditions setting the user tool.
5 13.2.7 Exposure confirmation Confirm that exposure can be performed correctly.

13
528
13.2.3 Confirmation of X-ray

13.2.5 X-ray device setting
information linkage
environment Perform the setting of an X-ray device with the service
Confirm the environment related to X-ray information tool.
linkage.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Manufacturer/model name of an X-ray device • 1 general X-ray device and 1 mammography X-ray de-
• Whether if the X-ray device connection test is com- vice can be connected to this device at the same time.
pleted • The setting items of an X-ray device differ depending
• Method for X-ray information linkage (anatomical on the selected manufacturer and model.
designation or direct exposure condition designation) ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connection method (Ethernet or RS-232C connection)
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• In the X-ray information linkage, it is necessary to de- 2 Press the X-ray device icon.
cide beforehand whether the values of X-ray exposure
conditions are generated at this device or at X-ray de-
vices. Be sure to coordinate it preliminarily with users
and X-ray device manufacturers.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

13.2.4 Installation of Ethernet-
serial converter
If the X-ray device is made by CPI, emd, TOSHIBA,
HITACHI, SHIMADZU, SIEMENS, PHILIPS, TOYO
MEDIC or GE, install the conversion box driver recom-
mended by the manufacturer in this device.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Currently, "emd" information linking cannot be used.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the installation method, refer to the operation
13
manual for the Ethernet-serial converter.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When performing the linkage with a general X-ray de-
vice, press the X-ray device icon of CH1.
CH1 CH2
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
529
3 Select a connection check box. 5 Set the X-ray device.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Setting contents differ according to manufacturer/
model connected.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
4 Press [Setting]. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• For setting contents, refer to "X-ray device icon" of the
"CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
User Tool Screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6 Press [OK].
13
• The X-ray device setting screen is displayed.
530
13.2.6 X-ray exposure

3 Press [Setting] and press [Detailed].
conditions setting
Set the X-ray exposure conditions with the user tool.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Confirm that the X-ray exposure conditions are cor-
rectly set by transmitting them to the X-ray device.
Wrong settings cause erroneous exposures.
• There is a case that some X-ray devices might ig-
nore the transmitted values without notifying errors or
alarms when the invalid data is transmitted. Provide
the explanation to users that X-ray device console
should be checked for sure before exposures during
operation.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Start up the service tool.

4 Select [Property List] tab, and select [Ex-

amTag Master] in [Selection Master/Sub-
Master].
13
5 Select [Exposure Condition CH] on the
[User Master] list.
531
6 Select the exposure condition CH that 8 Set exposure conditions.

links to the group of the exposure condi-
tion master.
Exposure
Settings
Condition CH
OFF Does not link to the X-ray information. • There are 2 methods to set exposure conditions.
–– Anatomical (ARPCode) designation: Manages the
Links X-ray information for tables containing the actual values such as kV, mA,
CH1
(XRay 1) set with the service tool. and ms at X-ray device and this device specifies and
transmits the table number for each Exam. Tag.
Links X-ray information for
CH2 –– Direct exposure condition designation: Man-
(XRay 2) set with the service tool.
ages kV, mA, ms, etc. for each Exam. Tag at
Regards the value set with the ex-
this device, and transmits them to an X-ray
posure condition sub master as the
Default exposure result. device directly.
* Not necessary to be linked with the
X-ray information. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Decide the exposure condition setting method in coor-

dination with the institution or an X-ray device manu-
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • facturer.
• For the operation to copy ExamTag, refer to "CS-7 • The ranges of exposure condition setting values (kV,
User Tool Operation Manual". mA, ms, mAs, AEC, etc.) are determined for each
• When you set the anatomical code, refer to "CS-7 manufacturer. The available setting items vary accord-
User Tool Operation Manual". ing to the manufacturer and model selected in the X-ray
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • device setting screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7 Double-click an item displayed in [User

Master]. 9 Press [OK].
13
• The X-ray exposure condition setting screen is

displayed.
532
13 Select an exposure condition to edit and

[X-Ray Exposure Condition].
(2)
(1)
• Returns to the Exam. Tag setting tool screen.
10 Select [ExamTag Master] in [Selection

Master/Sub-Master]. 14 Double-clickthe field where nothing is
displayed under [X-Ray Exposure Condi-
tion].

11 Select an exposure condition to edit and
[X-Ray CH].
(2)
(1)
13
12 Double-click the field where nothing is
displayed under [X-Ray CH] to set.
• The sub-master selection dialog is displayed.
533
15 Select the set exposure condition sub-

master. 13.2.7 Exposure confirmation
Perform a series of exposure operation to check they

are free from errors.
1 Perform a series of exposures under the

operating conditions in the institution.
2 Confirm that there is no problem with the

operation of any of the devices and the
acquired images.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
tion.
mission from the institution.
–– When an order is received from a Radiology Infor-
mation System (RIS).
–– When transmitting images to a server.

• Select a sub-master by double click. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
16 Press [OK].
13
534
13.3 Setting of the built-in wireless LAN of this device
This option is for operating this device with a portable 3 Press [Network Setting] on the sub-menu
X-ray device. screen.
institution (RIS/PACS, etc.) via the built-in wireless
LAN.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• PDAs cannot be connected using the built-in wireless
LAN of this device. Use the wireless LAN adapter pro-
vided as an option.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
13.3.1 Setting of the IP address

of the built-in wireless LAN
The setting method of the IP address of the built-in
wireless LAN is as follows.
4 Right-click [Wireless Network Connection]

and press [Properties].
13
535
• The [Wireless Network Connection Properties]

5 Press [Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/
IPv6)] to release the selection.

7 Select [Use the following IP address] and
set the following items.

IPv4)] and press [Properties].
Input an IP address according to the

[IP address]
13
[Subnet Enter the subnet mask of the se-
mask] lected device.

[Default
Entry is not necessary if there is no
gateway]
gateway on the network.
536
8 Press [OK].
built-in wireless LAN
The network setting of the built-in wireless LAN is as
follows.
1 Press [Access Point] on the sub-menu

screen.

9 Press [OK].
2 Press [Add].
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If there are 2 wireless network adapters, press [Change
adapter] and select the network adapter to be set.
13
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
537
3 Press [Manually create a network profile]. Setting item Settings

Enter the SSID of the access point to
connect.
• For connection with the AeroDR
Portable RF Unit, enter the [SSID]
setting".
[Network name] • For connection with the AeroDR
Portable UF Unit, enter the [SSID]
setting".
• For connection with the access point
of the institution, enter the SSID
4 Set the following items. matching the environment.
Select the type of the security for the
• For AeroDR Portable RF Unit or
AeroDR Portable UF Unit, select
[Security type]
[WPA2-Personal].
• For the access point of the institution,
select the security matching the
environment.
Select the type of the encryption for the
• For AeroDR Portable RF Unit or
[Encryption AeroDR Portable UF Unit, select
type] [AES].
select the encryption type matching
the environment.
Enter the security key for the SSID of
the access point to connect.
• For the AeroDR Portable RF Unit,
enter the [Passphrase] set in "8.10.5
tI89u93ftEfrzXwe19
[Security Key] • For the AeroDR Portable UF Unit,
enter the [Passphrase] set in "10.10.5
tI89u93ftEfrzXwe19
enter the security key matching the
environment.
13 [Start this con-
nection auto- Select this.
matically]
[Connect even Select this if the access point to con-
if the network is nect is set not to notify the SSID (ESS-
not broadcasting] ID stealth function is enabled).
538
5 Press [Next]. 7 Close the wireless network management

screen.

6 Press [Close].
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Repeat same procedure if there are multiple access
points.

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Set network adapter is displayed in the manage-

ment screen of the wireless network. 13
539
13.4 Setting of the remote maintenance
The method of setting the remote maintenance is as 3 Press [Remote Maintenance].

follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Collection of installation information with GET1 should
be performed after installation is completed. If the in-
formation is collected before installation is completed,
then the serial numbers and information of connected
devices are not collected.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

13.4 Setting of the remote maintenance
screen.
• The [Remote Maintenance] screen is displayed.
4 Select [RemoteMaintenance Execute].
13
5 Press [OK].
• The [WOL(Wake On Lan) Setting] screen is dis-

played.
540
13.5 Web electronic medical records settings
Function that enables electronic medical records to be 5 Press [Hardware and Sound].
used via Internet Explorer if this device employs a por-
table X-ray device.
This is not an option.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 6 Press [Tablet PC Settings].

diate screen.

7 Select the [Buttons] tab.

and press [Control Panel].
13
541
8 Select [Rotation] and press [Change]. 10 Press the input area of [Keys], then press
[Alt] and [Tab] on the keyboard.
9 Press the selected area of [Press], then

select [Press a key or key combination].
11 Press the selected area of [Press and

hold], then select [Open the home page].
13
542
12 Press [OK]. 15 Press [X].
16 Start Internet Explorer, and select [Internet

options] from the [Tools] menu.

13 Press [OK].
17 Enter the URL to start in [Home page] us-

ing the keyboard and press [OK].
13
14 Press [X].
18 Press [X].
543
13.6 Setting of examination sharing
Examination sharing is an option where examinations

can be shared and managed through the network by
multiple units of this device.
13.6.1 System setting of the

examination sharing
The system setting of the examination sharing is as
follows.

4 Set the following item of [Study Sharing].


Registers the terminal information of
this device which shares the exami-
nation, ([Nick Name], [IP Address],
[Host Name]). For the addition of new
[Terminal info]
terminal information, press [Add] on
the bottom of [Terminal info] column.
Press [Delete] to delete the terminal
information, press [Edit] to change.
By selecting this, the send button and
cancel button are displayed on the list
[Enable Study screen. Furthermore, a Study Sharing
13 Sharing tab and a Pending Reason tab on the list
on the list screen can be added (when these tabs
screen] on the list screen are attempted to be
added, [Display] must be selected for the
screen settings).
[Pattern of
Select the type of the pending button
buttons on
and finish button to be displayed on
3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen. the exposure
screen]
the exposure screen.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Register the IP addresses of all units of this device
sharing examinations, including this device, in
[Terminal info].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the detail of setting items of [Study Sharing], refer
to " Study Sharing of CS-7 setting" of "CS-7 Installa-
tion/Service Manual for Service Tool/User Tool Screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
544
13.6.2 Screen setting of the

examination sharing
The screen setting of the examination sharing is as fol-
lows.
3 Set the following item of [Study Sharing setting].

[Display The pending reason detail dialog is
pending reason
displayed when selected.
detail dialog]
[Destination When the pending reason detail dia-

terminal in log is set not to be shown, select the
case of not destination terminal. Select a terminal
displaying the from among the terminals entered in
pending reason [Terminal info] of "13.6.1 System set-
detail dialog] ting of the examination sharing".
[Pending reason When the pending reason detail dia-
in case of not log is set not to be shown, select the
displaying the pending reason. Select a pending rea-
2 Press [Setting], and press [Screen Set- pending reason
detail dialog]
son from among the pending reasons
set in the pending reason column.
ting].
Registers the pending reason to use.
Pending reason
Registers the pending reason from [Sys-
([System
tem defined pending reason] which was
defined 13
defined by the manufacturer, or [User
pending
defined pending reason] which was
reason],
defined by the user, and add the reason
[User defined
to [Pending reason display item]. Use
pending
[Add] on the bottom of display column
reason],
to add a new reason to [User defined
[Pending
pending reason]. Use [Delete] to delete
reason display
an added pending reason, and use [Edit]
item])
to change a reason.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When [Pattern of buttons on the exposure screen] is set
to [Complete/Suspend(not sharing)] in " Study Sharing"
of "CS-7 setting" of "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for
Service Tool/User Tool Screen", the setting items of [Display
pending reason detail dialog], [Destination terminal in
case of not displaying the pending reason detail dialog],
and [Pending reason in case of not displaying the pending
reason detail dialog] of [Study Sharing] are not displayed.
• Register the same items in all units of this device sharing
the examination in [Pending reason display item].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
545
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 5 Press [OK] on the screen setting tool

• For the detail of setting items of [Study Sharing
screen.
setting], refer to " Study Sharing setting" of "Screen
setting" of "User Tool Operation Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Set the following item of [Remote] and

[Reason for Pending] in [Display Item Set-
ting of each tab of List Screen].
closed.

When selected, the [Study Sharing] or
[Display] [Pending Reason] tabs can be dis-
played.
[Tab Display Enter the display name of [Pending
Name] Reason] tab on the list screen.
Select the pending reason of the
examination to be displayed in the
[Pending Reason] tab. Select a pend-
[Search ing reason among the pending rea-
Target sons set in the pending reason column
Pending in step 3. Pending examinations which
Reason] are pending and which have the same
pending reason as that selected one,
are displayed in the [Pending Reason]
tab.
Select the item to be displayed on the
[Search
filtered items on the top of the tab on
Items]
the list screen.
13 Select the item to display on the col-
[List Items]
umn of the list screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If [Enable Study Sharing on the list screen] in " Study
Sharing" of "CS-7 setting" of "CS-7 Installation/Service
Manual for Service Tool/User Tool Screen" is not
selected, each setting item of [Remote] and [Reason
for Pending] will not be displayed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the detail of setting items of [Remote], refer to "
Examination reception screen" of "[Screen Setting]"
of "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual for Service Tool/
User Tool Screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
546
Chapter
14
Other Installation Procedures
This chapter describes the other installation procedures.
547
14.1 Aero Sync signal acquisition
The procedure for the Aero Sync signal acquisition is Execution procedure
as follows.
14.1.1 Execution procedure 1 Set the exposure conditions to 50 kV and

50 mAs for the X-ray device.
for Aero Sync signal
acquisition IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the mAs value cannot be set to 50 mAs, set it to the
nearest value. If the maximum mAs is lower than 50
Advance preparation
mAs, set it to the maximum.
• If the tube current can be set, set it to 100 mA. If the
tube current cannot be set to 100 mA, set it to the
1 Confirm that AeroDR Detector subject to
nearest value. If the maximum mA is lower than 100
the Aero Sync signal acquisition is regis-
mA, set it to the maximum.
tered in this device. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Confirm that [Sync Mode] is set to [XARM]

2 Open the service tool screen.
for [Exposure Room].
3 Press the icon of AeroDR Detector.

3 Place the Detector at a location that
makes the distance from the X-ray focus
(SID) 1 m.
4 Arrange AeroDR Detector and X-ray tube

as shown in the picture bellow.
Perpendicular
to the tube
The line of white

projection
14
Portrait orientation
of AeroDR Detector
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
AeroDR Detector.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Confirm that the exposure field covers the

whole AeroDR Detector.
548
4 Press [AeroSync signal acquisition] on 7 Enter [Tube voltage], [mAs Value], and
the sub-menu screen. [SID].
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The sensitivity cannot be entered.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
8 Press [Execute] following the message

displayed on the screen.

• The Aero Sync signal acquisition screen is dis-
played.
5 Select AeroDR Detector subject to the

Aero Sync signal acquisition.
9 Press the first stage of the exposure 14

switch and press [OK].
6 Set [X-ray Exposure] to [Exposure].
549
10 Press the second stage of the exposure IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

switch while the progress bar is in the • Judge the measurement result from the graph. The
frame of [X-ray Exposure]. rising edge of the graph must be within the area be-
tween the red lines as shown in the figure below.
Graph display range
Signal start area
• If there is any problem with the measurement result,

• When the completion screen is displayed, press press [Delete] and obtain the signal again from step 8.
[OK]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
11 Press [Save].
• The detection result is displayed with a graph. • The measurement data (Four Aero Sync sig-
nal images and the exposure condition file) is
stored.
14
• When the completion screen is displayed, press

[OK].
550
12 Change the exposure conditions (by in- 17 Display the intermediate screen.
creasing the voltage of the X-ray device)
and repeat steps 7 through 11 to obtain Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
the data up to 120 kV.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For devices that cannot output a voltage of 120 kV,
obtain the data up to its maximum voltage. 18 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • diate screen.
13 After acquiring all the data, press […] to

determine the output destination of the
measurement data.
14 Press [Export] to export the measurement

data.
• The measurement data is exported.

19 Copy the measurement data stored in the
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • storage folder into the maintenance PC.

• Check the volume of the data before exporting it.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Measurement data is saved in a folder that is auto-
15 When the completion screen is displayed, matically created within the output directory that you
press [OK]. specify in step 13.
• The names of the automatically created folder and
measurement file are in the following format.
–– Folder name: XXkV_YYYYMMDDhhmmss
–– File name: XRaySurvey_FPDID_YYYYMMDD
hhmmss_FrameNN.raw, ExpCondition_XXkV.txt
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
20 Perform a characteristic analysis of the X-

ray device. 14
16 Press [Close] to quit the tool.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If you set [Sync Mode] in step 2 to [XARM] in "Ad-
vance preparation", revert to the original setting before
shutting down.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
551
14.2 Setting example for AeroDR UF Cable connection position
14.2.1 When using only one AeroDR UF Cable
Setting examples of the AeroDR UF Cable connection position when using only one AeroDR UF Cable are as follows.
Combination of AeroDR Detector direction and

Images displayed in this device
AeroDR UF Cable connection position
[UF Cable Setting] When exposing using When exposing using
AeroDR Detector is in AeroDR Detector is in
AeroDR Detector in AeroDR Detector in
portrait orientation landscape orientation
portrait orientation landscape orientation*
[Insertion Opening]: right

[Image orientation]: facing
When the line of forward

When the line of white projection is [UFC Type]: Standard
white projection on the right
is above
Flip mark
[Insertion Opening]: left

When the line of forward
white projection is [UFC Type]: Standard
on the left
Flip mark
[Insertion Opening]: right

When the line of reverse Flip mark
on the right
Flip mark
When the line of

white projection
is below [Insertion Opening]: left
When the line of reverse
14 on the left
Flip mark
*On the condition that the automatic orientation determination process is enabled.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Examples of displayed images are for when the flip mark is set in the same orientation as shown in the table. (The flip mark is dis-
played in the exposure conditions display area of the exposure screen. For details, refer to "CS-7 Operation Manual".)
• [Orientation] cannot be set when using only one AeroDR UF Cable.
• When exposing the AeroDR Detector in landscape orientation, it may affect the result of automatic orientation determination
process if the [Insertion Opening] is not set up correctly.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the setting of the AeroDR UF Cable, refer to "4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
552
14.2.2 When using 2 AeroDR UF Cables
Setting examples for using 2 AeroDR UF Cables on 1 exposure stage are shown below.
Setting differs depending on the connection position of the first and second AeroDR UF Cables. In this section, the
examples with the following conditions are explained.
• AeroDR Detector is in portrait orientation: Use the first AeroDR UF Cable.

• AeroDR Detector is in landscape orientation: Use the second AeroDR UF Cable.

When the line of white When the line of white

projection is above projection is on the right
[Orientation]: First: 0
Second: 90
[Image orientation]:
facing forward
[UFC Type]: UFC2
Second First Second First Flip mark

When the line of white Second Second
projection is above [Orientation]: First: 0
Second:
270
facing forward Flip mark
[UFC Type]: UFC2
When the line of white
First projection is on the left First Flip mark
First First

Second: 90
facing forward
[UFC Type]: UFC2
Second projection is below Second projection is on the right Flip mark
First Second First Second

Second: 270
facing forward Flip mark 14
[UFC Type]: UFC2
projection is below projection is on the left Flip mark
553

projection is above projection is on the right
Second: 270
facing reverse
[UFC Type]: UFC2
Second First Second First Flip mark

When the line of white Second Second
projection is above
Second: 90
facing reverse Flip mark

[UFC Type]: UFC2
When the line of white
First projection is on the left First Flip mark
First First
Second: 270
facing reverse
[UFC Type]: UFC2
Second projection is below Second projection is on the right Flip mark
First Second First Second
Second: 90
facing reverse Flip mark
[UFC Type]: UFC2
projection is below projection is on the left Flip mark
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Examples of displayed images are for when the flip mark is set in the same orientation as shown in the table. (The flip mark is dis-
played in the exposure conditions display area of the exposure screen. For details, refer to "CS-7 Operation Manual".)
• For [Type], select the same type for both the first and second AeroDR UF Cables.
• Do not set [Insertion Opening] when using 2 AeroDR UF Cables.
14 •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the setting of the AeroDR UF Cable, refer to "4.10.10 AeroDR UF Cable setting".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
554
14.3 How to migrate a CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag to this device
The CS-1/3/5 Exam. Tag can be converted to a usable format for this device by using the Exam. Tag migration tool
"Cs7Converter".
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The CS-2 Exam. Tag cannot be migrated.
• Migratable versions are: CS-1 V2.32R04 and CS-3/5 V3.02R02 or later. Settings data of an earlier version may not be cor-
rectly converted due to compatibility problems.
• Use a Exam. Tag migration tool only when requested by a customer who already installed CS-1/3/5 at the institution and
wants to make the Exam. Tag of this device the same as the CS-1/3/5.
• There are restrictions to the Exam. Tag that can be migrated by using the Exam. Tag migration tool. Use a Exam. Tag editing
tool to edit the Exam. Tag that cannot be migrated.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Whether or not to
Exam. Tag Restrictions and Remarks
migrate
Only one Exam. Tag among the cassette, wall stand, or table for the
Exposure conditions (Exp) 

reader can be migrated.
Only the image process parameter in use by the Exam. Tag to be
Image process parameter (lpp) 
migrated can be migrated.
Exposure conditions (Epm) 
Position conditions (Ppm) 
Contrast medium agent (Cnt) ○
Filter material (Fmt) ○
Grid material (Gmt) ○
Laterality (Ltr) ○
Orientation (Om)  The default value of this device is applied.
Part (Bdy) ○
Host output conditions (Hst) ○
Printer output conditions (Prt) ○
Use the overlay migration tool “OverlayConverter” to perform a
Overlay (Ovr)  migration of the overlay. For operating details, refer to "14.4 How to
migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to this device".
Only the set key of the reader selected by Favorite and the Exam. Tag
Set key (ExpSet.xml) 
can be migrated.
RIS code conversion table Only the conversion table for the reader selected by the Exam. Tag

(RisMwm2ExpDicom.ini) can be migrated.
○: Migratable : Migratable with restrictions : Not migratable

• Only one Exam. Tag among the cassette, wall stand, or table is migratable for exposure conditions (Exp). Basically select the cas- 14
sette at the institution where cassettes are used. A user at an institution where multiple readers are used should use a Exam. Tag
editing tool to set the Exam. Tag keys of readers not selected.
• Automatic migration by Exam. Tag migration tool is difficult for exposure conditions (Epm) and positions conditions (Ppm) because
complete information for CS-1/3/5 does not exist. For such information, conduct a hearing with the customer about exposure con-
ditions, and use the Exam. Tag editing tool to register as sub-master and link to the master.
555
14.3.1 Installing MSXML 14.3.2 Preparations before

4.0SP3 converting
MSXML 4.0 must be installed on the computer for Obtain the following files from the migration source
maintenance in order to use the Exam. Tag migration CS-1/3/5 and the migration destination unit of this de-
tool for a migration. Follow the procedure below to in- vice before using the Exam. Tag migration tool.
stall MSXML 4.0SP3. • Files to obtain from the migration source CS-1/3/5:
Exam. Tag, image process parameter and all system
settings
1 Double-click on [msxml.msi] in the "\MSX-
• File to obtain from the migration destination unit of
ML4SP3\English" folder.
this device: Exam. Tag manufacturer master
1 Backup the settings data of the migration

source CS-1/3/5 to the computer for main-
tenance.
2 Create an Exp folder and decompress the

Exp.lzh file in the folder.
• The setup screen is displayed.
2 Follow the messages to install MSXML.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• MSXML 4.0SP3 may already have been installed on
some computers to be used for maintenance.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Create an Ipp folder and decompress the

Ipp.lzh file in the folder.
14
556
4 Create a System folder and decompress

14.3.3 Converting the Exam.
the HostInf.lzh file, Overlay.lzh file, Print-
erInf.lzh file, RisInf.lzh file and SystemInf. Tag
lzh file in the folder. Convert the Exam. Tag to CS-7 format.
1 Double-click on Cs7Converter.exe in the

[Cs7Converter] folder.
2 Set the following items for the Exam. Tag

migration tool.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Some decompression software will automatically cre-
ate a folder and decompress the data in the folder. In
this case, move the decompressed data manually to
the specified folder.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Copy the "C:\Konicaminolta\Console\Con-

fig\ExpMaster.CS3" folder of the migration
destination unit of this device to the com-
puter for maintenance.
Setting item Setting details

Set the console type of the migration
[Console]
source.
[CS-1/3 Ver. Select for CS-1/3 version V2.20R00 or
>=V220R00 or later or CS-5 because RIS code con- 14
CS-5] version table formats differ with version.
[18x24cm/
24x30cm/
Select when in use.
24x30Mcm
Cassette]
[15x30cm
Select when in use.
Cassette]
Drag and drop the Exp folder obtained
[Exp Folder] from CS-1/3/5.
Or press [...] to select.
Drag and drop the Ipp folder obtained
[Ipp Folder] from CS-1/3/5.
Drag and drop the System folder ob-
[System Folder] tained from CS-1/3/5.
557
Setting item Setting details 6 Select the migration source output device
Drag and drop the ExpMaster folder for image processing ON/OFF.
[ExpMaster
obtained from this device.
Folder]
Drag and drop a folder in which files
[Output Folder] converted to CS-7 format are saved.
3 Press [Next].
• In this device, image processing ON/OFF uses

common settings for all output devices.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
4 Select only one type of reader to migrate. • Overlay information for an output device selected in
image processing is output to the base.txt file, direc-
Marker file, and lateMarker file used by the overlay
migration tool.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7 Press [Next].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Only one Exam. Tag among the cassette, wall stand,
or table migratable for exposure conditions (Exp). Ba-
sically select the cassette at the institution where cas-
settes are used. A user at an institution where multiple
readers are used should use a Exam. Tag editing tool
to set the Exam. Tag of readers not selected.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 8 Select a processing method for the case
the Exam. Tag of a reader which is not
converted to Favorite is included.
5 Press [Next].
14
• Make the setting if the Exam. Tag of a reader

not migrated to the favorite tab on a set key is
included when two or more types of readers are
used.
558
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• If the Exam. Tag migration tool is used in an institu- • Institutions where multiple readers are mixed should
tion using multiple readers, confirm whether all Exam. use a RIS code mapping tool of this device to confirm
Tags are included. If any of the Exam. Tag is missing, whether all RIS codes are included and add when in-
use the Exam. Tag editing tool of this device to add it. sufficient.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
11 Press [Next].
• In Default, the set key name will remain but an Exam.
Tag not to be targetted for migration will be deleted.
• "As for the Exam. Tag for the unconverted Reader,
leave it after converting to the Exam. Tag for the con-
verted Reader with the branch number 00." can be
selected to automatically associate with the Exam. Tag
after migration, but if a user was creating Exam. Tag
with a branch number, all keys will be associated as
default Exam. Tags.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

9 Press [Next].
12 Press [Convert].
• Conversion will start.

10 Select a processing method if the Exam.
Tag of a reader not to be migrated to the
RIS code conversion table is included. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The Exam Tag for any functions that do not support
this device at this time is set not to be migrated by the
default setting. Do not cancel the selection of this key
until this device supports these functions.
14
• Make the setting if the Exam. Tag of a reader

not to be migrated to the RIS code conversion
table is included when two or more types of
readers are used. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• In Default setting, the RIS code is kept but the Exam.
Tag ID targetted for mapping will be deleted.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
559
13 The following screen is displayed when 14.3.4 Reflecting the Exam.

conversion completes successfully.
Tag to this device
Reflect the Exam. Tag converted for this device to this
device.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Always perform the following procedure to replace the
folders instead of overwriting the folders for the Exam.
Tag. If overwrite is used, unnecessary data will remain
in this device.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Shut down this device to display the Win-

dows desktop screen.
2 Perform a back-up of the "C:\Konicaminol-

ta\Console\Config\ExpMaster.CS3" folder.
• The following folders and files are created in the
output folder. 3 Delete the following 13 folders in the "C:\
Konicaminolta\Console\Config\ExpMaster.
Storage folder CS3" folder.
for CS-7 Bdy
Exam. Tag files Cnt
Overlay Epm
information files Exp
Fmt
Gmt
Hst
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Ipp
• In some cases, the setting values of the Exam. Tag Ltr
defined in CS-1/3/5 may not be used in this device. Orn
If such tag setting values exists in conversion source Ovr
data during a conversion, the Exam. Tag migration tool Ppm
forcibly sets the default value and outputs information Prt
to the ConvLog.csv file. Check the ConvLog.csv file
after the conversion and use the Exam. Tag editing
tool to correct the settings if a problem exists.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
14
560
4 Copy the following 13 folders created by

14.3.5 Adjustment of the
the Exam. Tag migration tool in the "...\
Console\Config\ExpMaster.CS3" folder mammogram exposure
to the "C:\Konicaminolta\Console\Config\ condition key
ExpMaster.CS3" folder.
When the mammogram exposure condition key is
Bdy
transferred from a CS-3/5, the output position setting is
Cnt
not always converted correctly. In such cases, set the
Epm
exposure condition key and appropriately adjust the
Exp
output position by the following procedure.
Fmt
Gmt
Hst 1 Start up the service tool.
Ipp
Ltr 2 Select the [User Tool] tab.
Orn
Ovr
Ppm
Prt

5 Perform a back-up of the RisMwm2ExpDi-
com.ini file in the "C:\Konicaminolta\Con-
sole\Data\" folder.
6 Copy the RisMwm2ExpDicom.ini file cre-

ated by the Exam. Tag migration tool in
the "..\Console\Data" folder to the "C:\
Konicaminolta\Console\Data" folder.

• The migrated Exam. Tag can be used after re-
start.
14
561
3 Press [Setting] and press [Detailed]. 6 Check the sub-master of [HOST] and
[PRINTER].
7 Select [HOST] from [Selection Master/Sub-

Master].
8 Adjust [Trimming Position] of the sub-

master of the [HOST Output] checked in
step 6.
4 Select the [Property List] tab.
9 Adjust [Output Position] of the sub-master

of the [HOST Output] checked at step 6.
14 5 Select [ExamTag Master] from [Selection

Master/Sub-Master] and [Mammogram]
from [BodyPart].
562
10 Select [PRINTER Output Sub-Master] from

[Selection Master/Sub-Master].
11 Adjust [Trimming Position] of the sub-

master of the [PRINTER] checked in step 6.

• Adjust [Output Position] of the sub-master of the
[HOST Output] checked in step 6.
12 Adjust [Output Position] of the sub-master

of the [PRINTER Output] checked at step 6.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The trimming position and output position will differ de-
pending on whether the mammogram exposure condi-
tion is set to the left or right. Generally [Right-Center]
is set for right side exposure condition and [Left-Center]
is set for left side exposure condition. However, per-
form settings after checking the installation environ-
ment.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 14
563
14.4 How to migrate CS-1/3/5 overlay to this device
Overlay migration tool "OverlayConverter" can be used

to convert a CS-1/3/5 overlay to a format for this de- 14.4.1 Creating an overlay
vice. exposure deviation
information file
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Use overlay migration tool "OverlayConverter" to cre-
• Excel is required for the migration. ate overlay exposure deviation information.
• Part of the screen is shown in Japanese as a Japa- The overlay information files (base.txt, direcMarker.txt,
nese Excel file has been used as an example. and lateMarker.txt) created in "14.3.3 Converting the
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Exam. Tag" are necessary to create overlay exposure
deviation information.
1 Start OverlayConverter from Explorer.

• The OverlayConverter screen is displayed.
2 Select the folder containing the overlay

information files (base.txt, direcMarker.txt,
and lateMarker.txt).
3 Specify a name for the Excel file to be the

output destination of the overlay informa-
tion. An Excel file of the specified name is
created.
14
564
4 Select the following item to abbreviate the

14.4.2 Importing an Exam. Tag
stamp for the host output.
to an excel file
Use ExpMaker to import the CS-7 Exam. Tag created
in "14.3.3 Converting the Exam. Tag" to an Excel file.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For details about ExpMaker, see readme.html in Exp-
Maker.
5 Press [Execute]. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Start CreateDICOMFile.exe from Explorer.
• Creation of an overlay exposure deviation infor-

mation file will start.

• When the process completes successfully, • The ExpMaker screen is displayed.
"Conversion was completed" will be displayed.
2 Select the [IMPORT (Exp->Excel)] tab.

6 Confirm that the overlay exposure devia-
tion information file with the Excel file
name specified in step 3 was created.
• Two sheets labeled [(ExpOverlay)] and [Ovr] are
created in the Excel file.
[(ExpOverlay)] sheet
3 Select the "...\Console\Config\ExpMaster.

CS3" folder containing the CS-7 Exam.
Tag.
This sheet is for confirmation purposes and lists

support of the created overlay and the Exam. Tag.
[Ovr] sheet 14
This sheet lists the overlay sub-master value to be

created. The sheet is in ExpMaker format.
565
4 Specify a name for the Excel file to be the 7 Confirm that Excel file with the Excel file
output destination of the CS-7 Exam. Tag. name specified in step 4 was created.
An Excel file with the specified name is
created.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5 Press [Select All] to select all masters and • For sheet content details, see the ExpMaker operation
sub-masters for output. manual.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6 Press [Create Excel File].
• Import of the CS-7 Exam. Tag to the Excel file

will start.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The import process will take several minutes. The
message "Now in progress" is displayed during import.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
14
566
14.4.3 Integrating an Exam. Tag 2 Delete the [Ovr] sheet of the CS-7 Exam.
Tag file and copy the [Ovr] sheet of the
file and overlay exposure overlay exposure deviation information
deviation information file file to the CS-7 Exam. Tag file.
Use Excel editing operations to integrate the content CS-7 Exam. Tag file
of an overlay exposure deviation information file cre-
ated in "14.4.1 Creating an overlay exposure deviation
information file" and a CS-7 Exam. Tag file created in
"14.4.2 Importing an Exam. Tag to an excel file". (1) Delete
1 Open the CS-7 Exam. Tag file and the

overlay exposure deviation information
file in Excel.
Overlay exposure deviation
CS-7 Exam. Tag file
information file
(2) Copy

Overlay exposure deviation
information file 3 Copy the data column of the [ExpOverlay]
sheet in the overlay exposure deviation
information file to the data column of the
[Exp] sheet in the CS-7 Exam. Tag file to
link the Exam. Tag master and the overlay
sub-master according to the Table.
[ExpOverlay] sheet of
[Exp] sheet of the
the overlay exposure
CS-7 Exam. Tag file
deviation information file
Data Data
Copy
Data column column column
Data column
definition definition
(0031,1020)> HOST1
OverlayHostID
(0031,1136) Overlay
(0031,1021)> HOST2
OverlayHostID
(0031,1136) Overlay HOST1–4
(0031,1022)> HOST3 Overlay
OverlayHostID
(0031,1136) Overlay 14
(0031,1023)> HOST4
OverlayHostID
(0031,1136) Overlay
(0031,1028)> PRINTER OverlayPrint- PRINTER
(0031,1136) Overlay erID Overlay
567
• The following is an example of how to link an

Exam. Tag master (HOST1) and an overlay sub- 14.4.4 Creating an Exam. Tag
master. for this device
[Exp] sheet of the CS-7 Exam. Tag file Use ExpMaker to export the content of the Excel file
integrated in "14.4.3 Integrating an Exam. Tag file and
overlay exposure deviation information file" as a CS-7
Exam. Tag.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For details about ExpMaker, see readme.html in Exp-
Maker.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Copy only 1 Start CreateDICOMFile.exe from Explorer.

the data
column
[ExpOverlay] sheet of the overlay

exposure deviation information file
• The ExpMaker screen is displayed.
2 Select the [EXPORT (Excel->Exp)] tab.
• Use the same procedure to link an Exam. Tag

master (HOST1–4 or PRINTER) and an overlay
sub-master.
3 Specify the Excel file integrated in "12.3.3
Integrating an Exam. Tag File and Overlay
4 When edit is complete, save the CS-7 Exposure Deviation Information File".
Exam. Tag file.
14
568
4 Specify a name for the destination folder 7 Confirm that a folder with the same name
of the CS-7 Exam. Tag output. as the Excel file specified in "12.3.2 Im-
porting an Exam. Tag to an Excel File"
was created in the folder that was speci-
fied in step 4, and that the CS-7 Exam. Tag
is in this folder.
Ex.)
5 Press [Select All] to select all masters and

sub-masters for output.
Exam. Tag

Storage folder
6 Press [Create Exp Files].
• Export of the CS-7 Exam. Tag will start.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The export process will take several minutes. The
message "Now in progress" will be displayed during
export.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
14
569
14.4.5 Reflecting Exam. Tag to

this device
Reflect the Exam. Tag converted for this device to this
device.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Always perform the following procedure to replace the
folders instead of overwriting the folders for the Exam.
Tag. If overwrite is used, unnecessary data will remain
in this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Shut down this device to display the Win-

dows desktop screen.
2 Perform a backup of the "C:\Konicaminol-

ta\Console\Config\ExpMaster CS3" folder.
3 Delete the folder with the same name as

the folder in the OutputFile folder cre-
ated in "14.4.4 Creating an Exam. Tag for
this device" from the folder in the "C:\
Konicaminolta\Console\Config\ExpMaster
CS3" folder.
4 Copy all folders in the OutputFile folder

created in "14.4.4 Creating an Exam. Tag
for this device" to the "C:\Konicaminolta\
Console\Config\ExpMaster CS3" folder.

• The migrated Exam. Tag can be used after re-
start.
14
570
14.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is
using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM
When the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM is used in RIS/HOST, a communication error might occur.
In the network environment corresponding to the following conditions in "IMPORTANT", change the network settings
according to the procedures in this section.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• T
he environment in which tasks of this section are necessary is as follows.
(1) 2 or more wireless LAN adapters are connected in the same segment
(2) 2 or more wired LAN adapters are connected in the same segment
(3) The wireless LAN adapter and wired LAN adapter are connected in the same segment and it is necessary to give priority
to the wireless LAN adapter (when the wired LAN adapter of the same segment which is not connected to the Detector is
14.7 Method for adding the AeroDR SYSTEM not containing the
connected, etc.)
(4) The default gateway for 2 or more LAN adapters from (1) to (3) is configured and the RIS/HOST of the connecting device
is not associated with any LAN adapter segment
AeroDR Detector to the existing AeroDR SYSTEM environment

(5) A LAN adapter that is separate from the LAN adapter in the same segment as the RIS/HOST IP address is used, and a
connection is made to the RIS/HOST via a gateway
* An interface in the same segment is used; therefore, routing configuration is necessary.
• When the external wireless LAN adapter is used for wireless PDA connections, this operation is not needed because the IP
address will be fixed.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This section describes this device for portable is assumed to be used as a portable and for the exposure room.
• This device for portable's LAN adapters are defined by type as follows:
Built-in wireless LAN adapter: The standard built-in wireless LAN adapter of this device for portable
Built-in wired LAN adapter: The standard built-in wired LAN adapter of this device for portable
External wireless LAN adapter: The external wireless LAN adapter of this device for portable (USB or card type) (optional)
External wired LAN adapter: The external wired LAN adapter of this device for portable (optional)
• Perform the tasks outlined in this section after installing the External wired LAN adapter and External Wireless LAN adapter,
and restarting Windows twice with all External LAN adapters connected.
Performing this operation immediately after installation of the external LAN adapter may result in the interface number used
in this section changing after Windows reboots. The interface number may also change after installing the external LAN
adapter even after completing this operation, so be sure to perform this operation after installing and connecting all LAN
adapters being used. Performing this operation before installing and connecting the adapters will require this operation to be
performed again.
• LAN adapters are connected to the network in the following order.
(1) A LAN adapter for which routing settings have been specified (the setting configured here)
(2) A LAN adapter in the same segment as the connected device’s segment
(3) A LAN adapter for which a gateway has been configured
(4) Order based on type (internal wired LAN adapter -> external wired LAN adapter -> internal wireless LAN adapter ->
14
external wireless LAN adapter)
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
571
14.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM
14.5.1 Examples of network environments in which setting changes are necessary
Examples of network environments in which setting changes are necessary are as follows. The following (Ex. 1) is
explained in steps from "14.5.2 Table used for the setting".
O
O (Ex. 1) 2 or more LAN adapters are connected in the same segment

IP address: 192.168.20.241
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Built-in wireless LAN adapter

14.5 How to change the network settings when the RIS/HOST is using
IP address: 192.168.20.101
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Facility hub
the same network segment as the AeroDR SYSTEM
Facility access
point RIS
IP address: 192.168.20.55
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Built-in wired LAN adapter

IP address: 192.168.20.90
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
External wireless LAN adapter

IP address: 192.168.20.123
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
AeroDR Detector
IP address (when using wired connection): 192.168.20.201 HOST
IP address (when using wireless connection): 192.168.20.211 IP address: 192.168.20.56
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Wired LAN connection
Wireless LAN connection
IP address and subnet mask of this device's LAN adapter
IP address and subnet mask of the connected device
14
572
O
O (Ex. 2) A default gateway is configured for 2 or more LAN adapters
AeroDR Detector
IP address (when using wired connection): 192.168.20.201
IP address (when using wireless connection): 192.168.20.211
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Facility router
Hub
RIS
Facility access
point IP address: 192.168.100.55
Hub Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

IP address: 192.168.20.56
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

IP address: 192.168.20.90 RIS
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 IP address: 192.168.100.55
IP address: 192.168.30.123
Gtaeway: 192.168.20.1 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Gtaeway: 192.168.30.1
14
573
O
O (Ex. 3) A LAN adapter that is separate from the LAN adapter in the same segment as the RIS/
HOST IP address is used, and a connection is made
AeroDR Portable RF Unit Facility router

IP address: 192.168.20.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Facility access RIS

point IP address: 192.168.20.55
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

IP address: 192.168.20.90
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
IP address: 192.168.30.123
Gtaeway: 192.168.20.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Gtaeway: 192.168.30.1
RIS
IP address: 192.168.20.55
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
AeroDR Detector
IP address (when using wired connection): 192.168.20.201
IP address (when using wireless connection): 192.168.20.211
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
14
574
14.5.2 Table used for the setting
Use the following two tables for the setting.
Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information

IP address
LAN adapter type of Set- MAC address
Connected device Gateway Interface number
this device for portable tings (Physical address)
Subnet mask
• RIS/HOST
Built-in wireless LAN • AeroDR Portable UF Unit
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
• No connected device
• RIS/HOST
• AeroDR Portable RF/UF Unit
Built-in wired LAN • AeroDR Battery Charger (wired
adapter connection)

• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
External wireless LAN • RIS/HOST
(USB or card type) • No connected device
• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
adapter • No connected device
Table 2 - Setting list - IP address list

AeroDR SYSTEM and IP Communication in- Interface
Connection destination Gateway
RIS/HOST address terface IP address number
AeroDR Detector 1 (wired) AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection)
AeroDR Detector 1 (wireless) AeroDR Portable UF Unit
AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR Portable RF Unit
RIS-IN1 RIS/HOST
RIS-IN2 RIS/HOST
RIS-OUT1 RIS/HOST
RIS-OUT2 RIS/HOST
Host1 RIS/HOST 14
Host2 RIS/HOST
Host3 RIS/HOST
Host4 RIS/HOST
Host5 RIS/HOST
Printer1 RIS/HOST
Printer2 RIS/HOST
Printer3 RIS/HOST
Electronic medical record RIS/HOST
RM hybrid device* This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
Study-sharing unit of this
This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
device
* When setting an RM client unit of this device, set an RM hybrid unit of this device.
575
14.5.3 Checking interface information
Check the interface information and list necessary information in "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information".
Checking connected devices

Check the connected device of the LAN adapter used in this device for portable.
Check each connected device of the LAN adapter used in this device for portable and encircle the corresponding
connected device in "Connected device" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information".
Ex.
IP address

Subnet mask
• RIS/HOST
• RIS/HOST
Built-in wired LAN • AeroDR Battery Charger (wired
adapter connection)

• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
adapter
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In cases the "IP address", "Gateway", and "Subnet mask" of each LAN adapter can be confirmed, write down the information
here.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
14
576
Checking the connection pattern

Select the corresponding pattern from "1" to "7" of the following table based on the connected device information.
Example: Pattern "1" corresponds to the connection example

Connected device LAN adapter type of
this device used in LAN adapter type
Pattern AeroDR Portable
RIS/HOST (1) RIS/HOST (2) the AeroDR Detector that requires settings
RF/UF Unit connection
• External wireless
Built-in wireless LAN External wireless LAN Built-in wired LAN LAN adapter
1 None
adapter adapter adapter • Built-in wireless LAN
adapter
• External wired LAN
Built-in wireless LAN External wired LAN Built-in wired LAN adapter
2 None
adapter adapter adapter • Built-in wireless LAN
adapter

Built-in wireless LAN Built-in wired LAN (Built-in wired LAN • Built-in wireless LAN
3 None
adapter adapter adapter) adapter
• Built-in wired LAN
adapter
Built-in wireless LAN Built-in wired LAN External wireless LAN (Built-in wired LAN • External wireless
4
adapter adapter adapter adapter) LAN adapter
• Built-in wireless LAN
adapter
Built-in wired LAN Built-in wireless LAN (Built-in wired LAN • Built-in wireless LAN
5 None
adapter adapter adapter) adapter
• External wired LAN
Built-in wired LAN External wired LAN (Built-in wired LAN adapter
6 None
adapter adapter adapter) • Built-in wired LAN
adapter
• Built-in wireless LAN
adapter
Built-in wired LAN Built-in wireless LAN External wired LAN (Built-in wired LAN • External wired LAN
7
adapter adapter adapter adapter) adapter
• Built-in wired LAN
adapter
Confirmation of LAN adapter to be set

The LAN adapter listed in "LAN adapter type that requires settings" of the corresponding pattern will be set.
Put a ○
on items that require setting in "Settings" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information", and put an X on
unnecessary items.
Ex.
IP address
LAN adapter type of Set- MAC address 14
Subnet mask
• RIS/HOST
Built-in wireless LAN
adapter
• AeroDR Portable UF Unit
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○
• RIS/HOST
Built-in wired LAN
• AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection) 
adapter
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○
• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) 
adapter
577
14.5.4 Acquiring an interface number
Acquire an interface number from the Windows command prompt.
Displaying the Windows desktop

Press [Windows Desktop] on the intermediate screen.
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For displaying the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to display the intermediate screen".
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.6 Functions of the intermediate screen".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Starting the command prompt

Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu, and then press [All Programs] ⇒ [Accessories] ⇒ [Command Prompt].
Executing ipconfig/all
Execute "ipconfig/all" from the command prompt.
In the next screen, copy the IP address, subnet mask, and MAC address (physical address) of the LAN adapter you
put the ○
in "Settings" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information" into the "IP address", "Subnet mask", and
"MAC address (Physical address)" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information".
Ex.

Copy this to "MAC address

(Physical address)" of the ex-
External ternal wireless LAN adapter
wireless
LAN adapter Copy these to "IP address",
information "Gateway", and "Subnet
mask" of the external wireless
LAN adapter
Copy this to "MAC address

14
(Physical address)" of the
Built-in wire-
built-in wireless LAN adapter
less LAN
adapter
Copy these to "IP address",
information
"Gateway", and "Subnet
mask" of the built-in wireless
LAN adapter
Built-in wired
LAN adapter
information
* This does not cor-
respond to the con-
nection example.
578
Ex.
IP address
Subnet mask
• RIS/HOST 192.168.20.101
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○ 08-11-96-72-59-20
• No connected device 255.255.255.0
• RIS/HOST
Built-in wired LAN
adapter
External wireless LAN • RIS/HOST 192.168.20.123
00-01-8E-1F-C2-
adapter
(USB or card type)
○ 9E
255.255.255.0

• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
adapter
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• In cases the "IP address" and "subnet mask" of LAN adapter are written in advance, write down "MAC address (physical
address)" based on the "IP address" and "subnet mask".
• If "Default Gateway" is configured for the interface network setting, write the gateway IP address.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
14
579
Executing route print

Execute "route print" from the command prompt.
In the next screen, search for the interface number of the LAN adapter to be set based on the MAC address (physical
address) of the LAN adapter you put a ○
on in "Settings" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information", and enter it
in "Interface number" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information".
Ex.
Interface
number

By the MAC address (physical address), it can be found out that the exter-
nal wireless LAN adapter is on the upper side and the built-in wireless LAN
adapter is on the lower side. The corresponding interface numbers are:
• External wireless LAN adapter interface number: 20
• Built-in wireless LAN adapter interface number: 12
Enter in the table

Ex.
IP address
Subnet mask
• RIS/HOST 192.168.20.101
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○ 08-11-96-72-59-20 12
• RIS/HOST
Built-in wired LAN
adapter

00-01-8E-1F-C2-
adapter
(USB or card type)
○ 9E
20
255.255.255.0
• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
adapter
14
580
14.5.5 Confirming the IP address of the AeroDR SYSTEM and RIS/

HOST to be used
Survey the institution information, and write down IP address of AeroDR SYSTEM and RIS/HOST, on "Table 2- Set-
ting list – IP address list" .
Example: For the connection example

AeroDR SYSTEM and Communication in- Interface
Connection destination IP address Gateway
RIS/HOST terface IP address number
AeroDR Detector 1 AeroDR Battery Charger (wired con-
192.168.20.201
(wired) nection)
AeroDR Detector 1
AeroDR Portable UF Unit 192.168.20.211
(wireless)
(wired) nection)

AeroDR Detector 2
(wireless)
(wired) nection)
AeroDR Detector 3
(wireless)
(wired) nection)
AeroDR Detector 4
(wireless)
AeroDR Battery Charger AeroDR Portable RF Unit —
RIS-IN1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.55
RIS-IN2 RIS/HOST
RIS-OUT1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.55
RIS-OUT2 RIS/HOST
Host1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.56
Host2 RIS/HOST
Host3 RIS/HOST
Host4 RIS/HOST
Host5 RIS/HOST —
Printer1 RIS/HOST —
14
Study-sharing this device This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing)
* When setting an RM client unit of this device, set an RM hybrid unit of this device.
581
Copy the IP address, subnet mask, and interface number of the "Connected device" of the LAN adapter you put a
○ in "Settings" of "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information" into the "Communication interface IP address" and
"Interface number" of "Table 2 - Setting list - IP address list". If the segments differ for the connected device's IP ad-
dress and the communication interface's IP address, copy the address from "Gateway" in "Table 1 - Setting list - In-
terface information".
Ex.
IP address
Subnet mask
• RIS/HOST 192.168.20.101
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○ 08-11-96-72-59-20 12
• RIS/HOST
Built-in wired LAN
adapter
00-01-8E-1F-C2-
adapter
(USB or card type)
○ 9E
20
255.255.255.0
• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
adapter
Copy to the table below

AeroDR SYSTEM and Communication Interface
RIS/HOST interface IP address number
AeroDR Detector 1 (wired) AeroDR Battery Charger (wired connection) 192.168.20.201
AeroDR Detector 1 (wireless) AeroDR Portable UF Unit 192.168.20.211 192.168.20.101 12
RIS-IN1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.55 192.168.20.123 20
RIS-IN2 RIS/HOST —
RIS-OUT1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.55 192.168.20.123 20
RIS-OUT2 RIS/HOST —
14
Host1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.56 192.168.20.123 20
Host2 RIS/HOST — —
Host5 RIS/HOST — — —
Printer1 RIS/HOST — — —
* Study-sharing unit of this device.
582
14.5.6 Setting routing information
Executing route –p add

For the AeroDR SYSTEM and RIS/HOST with the "IP address" and "Interface number" listed in "Table 2 - Setting list
- IP address list", execute the following command to set routing information.
"route -p add [IP address] 0.0.0.0 IF [Interface number]"
If the segments differ for "IP address" and "Communication interface IP address" in "Table 2 - Setting list - IP address
list", configure the value of "Gateway" for the next command. If the segment is the same, configure "0.0.0.0".
"route -p add [IP address] [Gateway] IF [Interface number]"
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When there are multiple interface numbers, execute the command by interface number.

• For items with the same IP address, the command need not be executed more than once.
• For command arguments, execute route from the command prompt and read the displayed description.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Ex.
AeroDR SYSTEM and Communication in- Interface
RIS/HOST terface IP address number
192.168.20.201
(wired) nection)
AeroDR Detector 1 (wire-
AeroDR Portable UF Unit 192.168.20.211 192.168.20.101 12
less)
(wired) nection)
less)
(wired) nection)
less)
(wired) nection)
less)
RIS-IN1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.55 192.168.20.123 20
RIS-IN2 RIS/HOST —
RIS-OUT1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.55 192.168.20.123 20
RIS-OUT2 RIS/HOST —
Host1 RIS/HOST 192.168.20.56 192.168.20.123 20
Host2 RIS/HOST — — 14
Host5 RIS/HOST — — —
* Study-sharing unit of this device.
583
Set the routing information for the AeroDR SYSTEM and RIS/HOST of the parts boxed in red.
Ex.
Gateway
IP address Interface number

Execute the route print command and confirm that routing is correctly set. If "Gateway" is configured, the value of
"On-link" in the "Gateway" column is the configured gateway's address.
Example: For the connection example
Added routing
information
Added routing
information
14
584
14.5.7 Confirming the setting details
Restart Windows and confirm the settings are correct.
Restarting Windows
Restart Windows.
Displaying the Windows desktop

Press [Windows Desktop] on the intermediate screen.
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For displaying the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to display the intermediate screen".

• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.6 Functions of the intermediate screen".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Confirming the setting details

Execute the route print command from the command prompt and confirm that routing is correctly set.
When adding routing settings, repeat the procedure in "14.5.6 Setting routing information".
When an unnecessary routing is set by mistake, delete the unnecessary routing information.
Reference •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "14.5.8 Deleting unnecessary routing information" for deleting unnecessary routing information.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
14
585
14.5.8 Deleting unnecessary routing information
When unnecessary routing information was registered by mistake, delete it through the following procedure.

Execute the route print command to display the routing information.
Ex.
Routing information
registered incorrectly
From "Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information", it can be found out that the interface number of the LAN adapter
corresponding to the IP address "192.168.20.101" of "Interface" of the routing information is "12".
Portable device Set- IP address MAC address Interface num-
Connected device
LAN adapter type tings Subnet mask (Physical address) ber
• RIS/HOST 192.168.20.101
Built-in wireless LAN
adapter
• AeroDR Portable UF Unit
• This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○ 255.255.255.0
08-11-96-72-59-20 12
• RIS/HOST
Built-in wired LAN
14 adapter
adapter • This device (RM hybrid, Study sharing) ○ 255.255.255.0
00-01-8E-1F-C2-
9E
20
• RIS/HOST
External wired LAN
adapter
586
Executing deletion
Use the IP address of the [Network Destination] acquired from the routing information, and the "Interface number" in
"Table 1 - Setting list - Interface information" to execute the following command.
"route –p delete [IP address] 0.0.0.0 IF [Interface number]"
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For command arguments, execute route from the command prompt and read the displayed description.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Confirming deletion

Execute the route print command, and confirm that the routing information has been deleted.
Ex.

Confirm deletion
14
587
14.6 Multilingual environment settings
The setting method for a multilingual environment is as (2) When ASCII is used in the first element and
follows. local phonogram are used in the third element
* Multilingual environment settings are not required in The first element of DICOM communication is trans-
Japan. ferred to the single region of this device and the single
region is transmitted in the first element.
The third element is transferred to the phonogram re-
14.6.1 Basic method of language- gion of this device and the phonogram region is trans-
specific environment building mitted in the third element.
DICOM Internal data of

Languages having ASCII characters and ASCII communication this device
and language-specific characters (Latin) First element Single
This applies to ASCII, Latin 1 (Western Europe), Latin Second element Ideogram
2 (Central Europe), Latin 3 (South Europe), Latin 4
Third element Phonogram
(North Europe), Latin 5 (Turkish).
DICOM communication uses only a first element (1
byte region) and transfer is performed in the single re- Languages having multibyte characters
gion of this device.
This applies to Chinese, Korean and Japanese.
DICOM Internal data of The first element of DICOM communication is trans-
communication this device ferred to the single region of this device, the second
element to the ideogram region and the third element
First element Single
to the phonogram region.
Second element Ideogram
Third element Phonogram DICOM Internal data of

communication this device
Languages having phonogram which are
separate to ASCII Second element Ideogram

This applies to Cyrillic, Greek, Arabian, Hebrew and
Thai.
ASCII is transferred to the single region of this device
and a character string of one of the above languages
to the phonogram region.
The setting for DICOM communication differs in the
following 2 cases.
(1) When a local phonogram is used in the first

14 element
The first element of DICOM communication is trans-
ferred to the phonogram region of this device and the
phonogram region is transmitted as the first element.
DICOM Internal data of

communication this device
Second element Ideogram
588

14.6.2 Multilingual output setting
Make the multilingual output setting using the service

tool.
2 Press the icon of the device to be set.

• The HOST is used as an example here.
• The host setting screen is displayed.

4 Select a language from [Character Set]
with reference to the HINT table.
14
589
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 5 Press [OK] on the host setting screen.

• Setting name/language associations
Setting Specified char-
Supported language(s)
name acter group
ASCII English
French, Italian, German,
Latin1 ISO_IR 100 Spanish, Portuguese,
Finnish
Latin2 ISO_IR 101 Czech, Polish
Latin3 ISO_IR 109 (Esperanto)
Latin4 ISO_IR 110 Lithuanian
Turkish
ISO_IR 148 Turkish
(Latin5)
Cyrillic
(Phono)
ISO_IR 144 Russian
Cyrillic
(Single)
Greek
(Phono)
ISO_IR 126 Greek
Greek
(Single)
Arabic
(Phono)
ISO_IR 127 Arabic
Arabic
(Single)
Hebrew
(Phono)
ISO_IR 138 Hebrew
Hebrew
(Single)
Thai
(Phono)
ISO_IR 166 Thai
Thai
(Single)
ISO 2022 IR
Korean Korean
149
Chinese Chinese (simplified), Chi-
GB18030
(GB18030) nese (traditional)
Chinese (simplified), Chi-
Unicode nese (traditional), Korean,
ISO_IR 192 Japanese, others
Unicode Russian, Greek, Arabic,
14 (Single) Hebrew
–– Where an entry includes the term "(Single)",

reception and transmission is performed with a
phonetic characters, such as Japanese half-width
kana, entered in the first element of the DICOM
communication. In this case this device handles the
language as phonetic characters.
–– Where an entry includes the term "(Phono)",
reception and transmission is performed with ASCII
entered in the first element, and phonetic characters
entered in the third element of the DICOM
communication. When this device is connected
to an RIS/HOST using Russian, Greek, Arabic,
Hebrew, or Thai, check whether the local language
is entered in the first element or the third element
before performing the setting.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
590
14.6.3 Setting of patient registration HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
screen and property area • The phonetic characters for Chinese are pinyin and the
phonetic characters for Korean are hangul.
For Russian, Greek, Arabic, Hebrew, Thai, Chinese ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(simplified), Chinese (traditional) and Korean, set the
language on the patient registration screen and in the 4 Press [OK] on [Screen Setting].
property area using the user tool.
1 Start the user tool.
2 Press [Screen Setting].
• [Screen Setting] is displayed.
O Russian, Greek, Arabic, Hebrew and

OFor
Thai
3 Add [PatientName(Phoneric)] to [Patien-

tRegistrationScreen] and [Visible Items] of
[PatientPropertyArea].
O
OFor Chinese (simplified), Chinese (tradition-
al) and Korean
3 Add [PatientName(Phoneric)] and

[PatientName(Multi-byte)] to [PatientReg-
istrationScreen] and [Visible Items] of [Pa-
tientPropertyArea].
14
591
14.6.4 Visibility setting of input

items of the user tool
For Russian, Greek, Arabic, Hebrew, Thai, Chinese
(simplified), Chinese (traditional) and Korean, use the
CS-7 setting screen to set the language of the patient
DB and operator name editing screen.
3 Set [Name input items] in [Visibility set-

ting of input items of the User tool].
• For Russian, Greek, Arabic, Hebrew and Thai

Set [Phonetic] to [ON] and [Multi-byte] to [OFF].
• For Japanese, Chinese (simplified), Chinese
(traditional) and Korean
Set [Phonetic] and [Multi-byte] to [ON].
• For other languages

Set [Phonetic] and [Multi-byte] to [OFF].
14
592
Normally, the AeroDR Detector is required when setting an additional AeroDR SYSTEM to register the AeroDR Bat-
tery Charger etc. If the AeroDR SYSTEM which does not contain the AeroDR Detector is added, it needs to be in-
stalled using the AeroDR Detector of the existing AeroDR SYSTEM.
14.7.1 Configuration example
Procedures are described based on the following configuration example.
Exposure room #A Exposure room #B

For portable
CS-7#C
AeroDR AeroDR
RM client machine
Detector#A Detector#B

No
Add AeroDR
Detector
CS-7#A CS-7#B
RM hybrid machine RM client machine
OOExisting AeroDR SYSTEM

• Exposure room #A
–– This device: RM hybrid machine, unique ID is 1
–– 1 AeroDR Detector: Described as "AeroDR Detector#A" here.
• Exposure room #B
–– This device: RM client machine, unique ID is 2
–– 1 AeroDR Detector: Described as "AeroDR Detector#B" here.
• Roaming environment has been established with exposure room #A and exposure room #B
OOAdditional AeroDR SYSTEM

• Portable unit of this device: RM client machine, unique ID is 3
• AeroDR Battery Charger: 1 unit
• AeroDR Portable RF Unit: 1 unit
14
593
14.7 Method for adding the AeroDR SYSTEM not containing the AeroDR Detector to the existing AeroDR SYSTEM environment
14.7.2 Installation procedure (When the device sub ID cannot be

entered)
The installation overview is as follows:
(1) To use an existing AeroDR Detector with an additional AeroDR SYSTEM installation, temporarily set and tempo-
rarily merge with the additional unit of this device.
In this example, registration of the serial number of the AeroDR Battery Charger and setting change of the Aero-
DR Generator Interface Unit are performed with CS-7#C, and temporary merging is performed.
(2) Delete registration of the AeroDR Detector used in (1) using the existing unit of this device.
In this example, delete the registration of AeroDR Detector#A.
(3) Formally merge the additional unit of this device.
In this example, read the sub device ID of the additional AeroDR Battery Charger using AeroDR Detector#A, and
formally merge using CS-7#A
The installation procedure is as follows:

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Descriptions surrounded by < > in the table below indicate the status of this device.
• Descriptions written in red in the table below indicate operations different from the normal settings. Please pay extra attention.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Proce-
CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C
dure
1 Check the startup of CS-7#C.
2 Install the license, and shut down CS-7#C.
Start CS-7#C, AeroDR Battery Charger, and AeroDR Portable RF
3
Unit after temporarily connecting them with the local network.
Start the service tool, and set [Unique ID] of CS-7#C to [3] with the
4
CS-7 setting tool.
Select the connection check box on each sub-menu screen of Aero-
5 DR Access Point, AeroDR Battery Charger, and AeroDR Generator
Interface Unit to enable the devices.
6 Start the AeroDR setting tool on the RM sub-menu screen.
In the RM setting, set [Mode] to [Hybrid], and [IP address] to the IP
7
address of CS-7#C.
Set the exposure room setting according to the institution environ-
8
ment.
<Normal workflow <Normal workflow
9 in progress> in progress> Set the access point setting according to the institution environment.
Registration of AeroDR Detector correction data, and AeroDR
10 Detector communication confirmation (download/upload) are not
performed.
14 Set the serial number in the AeroDR Battery Charger setting.
11
Do not press [Download].
Set the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit setting according to the
12
institution environment, and press [Upload].
The AeroDR Detector setting (IP address change and upload) is not
13
performed.
Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen, and exit from the
14
AeroDR setting tool.
Press [Network Setting] on the sub-menu screen of this device, and
15
change the IP address of CS-7#C.
16 Restart CS-7#C, and start the service tool.
594
Proce-
dure
Press [Delay Measurement] on the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
sub-menu screen, and measure Delay on the setting screen.
17 *This setting is unnecessary within Japan.
*This operation is required only at institutions where S-SRM link is
used.
18 Shut down CS-7#C, and connect to the institution network.
<Normal workflow
19 in progress> Start CS-7#C, and start the AeroDR setting tool in the service tool.
In the RM setting, change [Mode] to [Client], and [IP address] to the
20
IP address of CS-7#A, then press [OK].
When the setting data transmission confirmation dialog is displayed,
21
press [OK].
22 When the processing dialog disappears, shut down CS-7#C.
Start the service tool, and
press [Merge] on the RM
23

sub-menu screen to start
the merge tool.
Select CS-7#C data from
<Shutting down CS-7#C>
24 the list of [Mergeable
Data], and press [Merge].
Exit the service tool, and
25 display the system moni-
tor screen.
<Must be on the system
26 Start CS-7#C.
monitor screen>
27 Restart CS-7#A.
Delete the registration of <Must be on a screen other than the service tool>
<Normal workflow
28 AeroDR Detector#A on
in progress>
the system monitor.
Start the AeroDR setting tool in the service tool.
29 Check that correction data for AeroDR Detector#A and AeroDR
Detector#B is displayed in [Correction Data Setting].
Insert AeroDR Detector#A into the AeroDR Battery Charger, and
30 press [Download] and [Upload] without changing any settings in the
AeroDR Detector setting.
31 <Must be on a Press [Download] in the AeroDR Battery Charger setting.
screen other than
When the Detector selection dialog is displayed, select AeroDR
the service tool>
32 Detector#A and press [OK].
The device sub-ID is displayed.
33 Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR setting tool.
34
press [OK].
35 When the processing dialog disappears, shut down CS-7#C. 14
Start the service tool, and
press [Merge] on the RM
36
sub-menu screen to start
the merge tool.
Select CS-7#C data from
37 the list of [Mergeable
Data], and press [Merge].
Exit the service tool, and
38 display the system moni-
tor screen.
39 <Must be on the system Start CS-7#C.
40 monitor screen> Restart CS-7#B.
41 Restart CS-7#A.
595
14.7.3 Installation procedure (When the device sub ID can be entered)
When the device sub ID can be entered manually or using a barcode, temporary setting is not required for the
AeroDR Detector.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Before starting the procedure, disconnect the connections to the institution network.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When reading device sub IDs with a bar code reader, use CODE39 for the bar code format.
• When 3 or more devices are installed in an existing AeroDR SYSTEM, restart devices that have [Mode] set to [Client] in the
RM settings of the service tool one device at a time.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Procedure CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C

1 Check the startup of CS-7#C.
2 Install the license, and shut down CS-7#C.
Start CS-7#C, AeroDR Battery Charger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit
3
after temporarily connecting them with the local network.
Start the service tool, and set [Unique ID] of CS-7#C to [3] with the
4
CS-7 setting tool.
Select the connection check box on each sub-menu screen of AeroDR
5 Access Point, AeroDR Battery Charger, and AeroDR Generator Inter-
face Unit to enable the devices.
6 Start the AeroDR setting tool on the RM sub-menu screen.
In the RM setting, set [Mode] to [Hybrid], and [IP Address of RM hybrid
7
machine] to the IP address of CS-7#C.
8 Set the exposure room setting according to the institution environment.
9 Set the access point setting according to the institution environment.
Enter the serial number and device sub ID manually or using barcodes
10
in the AeroDR cradle setting.
<Normal Set the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit setting according to the
11 <Normal workflow in
workflow in institution environment, and press [Upload].
progress>
progress> Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen, and exit from the
12
AeroDR setting tool.
Press [Network Setting] on the sub-menu screen of this device, and
13
change the IP address of CS-7#C.
14 Restart CS-7#C, and start the service tool.
Press [Delay Measurement] on the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
14 sub-menu screen, and measure Delay on the setting screen.
15 *This setting is unnecessary within Japan.
*This operation is required only at institutions where S-SRM link is
used.
Shut down CS-7#C, and connect to the institution network.
16
Press [OK] when the RM setting change dialog is displayed.
17 Start CS-7#C, and start the AeroDR setting tool in the service tool.
In the RM setting, change [Mode] to [Client], and [IP Address of RM
18
hybrid machine] to the IP address of CS-7#A, then press [OK].
19
press [OK].
20 When the processing dialog disappears, shut down CS-7#C.
596
Procedure CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C

Start up the service tool
and press [Merge] on the
21
RM sub menu screen to
activate the merge tool.
Select the data of CS- <Normal <Shutting down CS-7#C>
22 7#C from the [Mergeable workflow in
Data] list. progress>
Terminate the service tool
23 and display the system
monitor screen.
24 <Must be on the system Restart CS-7#C.
25 monitor screen> Restart CS-7#B.
26 Restart CS-7#A.
14
597
14.8 Installation method when there are fewer AeroDR
Detectors than units of this device
When there are fewer AeroDR Detectors than units of this device, all units of this device must be installed with 1
AeroDR Detector.
14.8.1 Configuration example

14.8 Installation method when there are fewer AeroDR Detectors than units of this device
AeroDR Detector
Exposure room #A Exposure room #B Exposure room #C

RM hybrid machine RM client machine RM client machine
14
598
14.8.2 Installation procedure (When the device sub ID cannot be

entered)
(1) Change the IP address of the AeroDR Detector using only one RM client machine.
Here, change the IP address of the AeroDR Detector using CS-7#C.
(2) Delete the AeroDR Detector correction data with units of this device that do not change the IP address of the
AeroDR Detector.
Here, delete the correction data of the AeroDR Detector IP address with CS-7#A and CS-7#B.
(3) Merge the RM client machine using the RM hybrid machine.
Here, merge CS-7#B and CS-7#C using CS-7#A.
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Procedures 1 to 22 can be set to any timing with each unit of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Proce-
dure
1 Check the startup of CS-7#A. Check the startup of CS-7#B. Check the startup of CS-7#C.
Install the license, and shut down CS- Install the license, and shut down CS- Install the license, and shut down CS-
2
7#A. 7#B. 7#C.
Start CS-7#A, AeroDR Battery Start CS-7#B, AeroDR Battery Start CS-7#C, AeroDR Battery
Charger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit Charger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit Charger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit
3
after temporarily connecting them with after temporarily connecting them with after temporarily connecting them with
the local network. the local network. the local network.
Start the service tool, and set [Unique Start the service tool, and set [Unique Start the service tool, and set [Unique
4 ID] of CS-7#A to [1] with the CS-7 ID] of CS-7#B to [2] with the CS-7 ID] of CS-7#C to [3] with the CS-7
setting tool. setting tool. setting tool.
Select the connection check box on Select the connection check box on Select the connection check box on
each sub-menu screen of AeroDR each sub-menu screen of AeroDR each sub-menu screen of AeroDR
5 Access Point, AeroDR Battery Charger, Access Point, AeroDR Battery Charger, Access Point, AeroDR Battery Charger,
and AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
to enable the devices. to enable the devices. to enable the devices.
Start the AeroDR setting tool on the Start the AeroDR setting tool on the Start the AeroDR setting tool on the
6
RM sub-menu screen. RM sub-menu screen. RM sub-menu screen.
In the RM setting, set [Mode] to In the RM setting, set [Mode] to In the RM setting, set [Mode] to
7 [Hybrid], and [IP address] to the IP [Hybrid], and [IP address] to the IP [Hybrid], and [IP address] to the IP
address of CS-7#A. address of CS-7#B. address of CS-7#C.
Set the exposure room setting Set the exposure room setting Set the exposure room setting 14
8 according to the institution according to the institution according to the institution
environment. environment. environment.
Set the access point setting according Set the access point setting according Set the access point setting according
9
to the institution environment. to the institution environment. to the institution environment.
Insert the media that comes with Insert the media that comes with Insert the media that comes with
the AeroDR Detector into the CD/ the AeroDR Detector into the CD/ the AeroDR Detector into the CD/
10
DVD drive, and register the AeroDR DVD drive, and register the AeroDR DVD drive, and register the AeroDR
Detector correction data. Detector correction data. Detector correction data.
Press [Upload] and [Download] in Press [Upload] and [Download] in Press [Upload] and [Download] in
11
[AeroDR Detector Setting]. [AeroDR Detector Setting]. [AeroDR Detector Setting].
Input the serial number in the AeroDR Input the serial number in the AeroDR Input the serial number in the AeroDR
Battery Charger setting, and when the Battery Charger setting, and when the Battery Charger setting, and when the
12 Detector selection dialog is displayed, Detector selection dialog is displayed, Detector selection dialog is displayed,
press [OK]. press [OK]. press [OK].
The device sub-ID is displayed. The device sub-ID is displayed. The device sub-ID is displayed.
599
Proce-
dure
Set the AeroDR Generator Interface Set the AeroDR Generator Interface Set the AeroDR Generator Interface
13 Unit setting according to the institution Unit setting according to the institution Unit setting according to the institution
environment, and press [Upload]. environment, and press [Upload]. environment, and press [Upload].
The AeroDR Detector setting (IP The AeroDR Detector setting (IP
address change and upload) is not address change and upload) is not
Change the IP address with [AeroDR
14 performed. performed.
Detector Setting], and press [Upload].

Select the AeroDR Detector in [Correction Select the AeroDR Detector in [Correction
Data Setting], and press [Delete]. Data Setting], and press [Delete].
Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting
15 screen, and exit from the AeroDR screen, and exit from the AeroDR screen, and exit from the AeroDR
Press [Network Setting] on the sub- Press [Network Setting] on the sub- Press [Network Setting] on the sub-
16 menu screen of this device, and menu screen of this device, and change menu screen of this device, and
change the IP address of CS-7#A. the IP address of CS-7#B. change the IP address of CS-7#C.
17 Restart CS-7#A, and start the service tool. Restart CS-7#B, and start the service tool. Restart CS-7#C, and start the service tool.
Press [Delay Measurement] on the Press [Delay Measurement] on the Press [Delay Measurement] on the
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit sub- AeroDR Generator Interface Unit sub- AeroDR Generator Interface Unit sub-
menu screen, and measure Delay on menu screen, and measure Delay on menu screen, and measure Delay on
18 the setting screen. the setting screen. the setting screen.
*This setting is unnecessary within Japan. *This setting is unnecessary within Japan. *This setting is unnecessary within Japan.
*This operation is required only at *This operation is required only at *This operation is required only at
institutions where S-SRM link is used. institutions where S-SRM link is used. institutions where S-SRM link is used.
Shut down CS-7#A, and connect to the Shut down CS-7#B, and connect to the
19 Analyze the AeroDR Detector.
institution network. institution network.
20 Start CS-7#A. Perform calibration.
Start CS-7#B, and start the AeroDR Shut down CS-7#C, and connect to
21
setting tool in the service tool. the institution network.
In the RM setting, change [Mode] to
Start CS-7#C, and start the AeroDR
22 [Client], and [IP address] to the IP
setting tool in the service tool.
address of CS-7#A.
Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR setting
23 [Client], and [IP address] to the IP
tool.
address of CS-7#A.
<Must be on a screen other than the
When the setting data transmission Without changing any settings in
service tool>
24 confirmation dialog is displayed, press the AeroDR Detector setting, press
[OK]. [Download] and [Upload].
When the processing dialog disappears, Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR setting
25
shut down CS-7#B. tool.
When the setting data transmission
26
confirmation dialog is displayed, press [OK].
When the processing dialog
27
disappears, shut down CS-7#C.
Start the service tool, and press
14
28 [Merge] on the RM sub-menu screen
to start the merge tool. <Shutting down CS-7#B>
Select CS-7#B data from the list of
29
[Mergeable Data], and press [Merge].
Select CS-7#C data from the list of
30
Exit the service tool, and display the
31
system monitor screen.
32 Start CS-7#B.
<System monitor screen>
33 Start CS-7#C.
34 Restart CS-7#A.
600
14.8.3 Installation procedure (When the device sub ID can be entered)

(1) Perform registration and setting configuration of an AeroDR Detector with only 1 unit of this device.
Here, perform registration and setting configuration of the AeroDR Detector using CS-7#C.
(2) Configure settings of the AeroDR Battery Charger's device sub ID by manual input or by barcode input.
(3) Merge the RM client machine using the RM hybrid machine.
Here, merge CS-7#B and CS-7#C using CS-7#A.
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Procedures 1 to 22 can be set to any timing with each unit of this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Proce-
dure
1 Check the startup of CS-7#A. Check the startup of CS-7#B. Check the startup of CS-7#C.
Install the license, and shut down CS- Install the license, and shut down CS- Install the license, and shut down CS-
2
7#A. 7#B. 7#C.
Start CS-7#A, AeroDR Battery Start CS-7#B, AeroDR Battery Start CS-7#C, AeroDR Battery
Charger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit Charger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit Charger, and AeroDR Portable RF Unit
3
after temporarily connecting them with after temporarily connecting them with after temporarily connecting them with
the local network. the local network. the local network.
Start the service tool, and set [Unique Start the service tool, and set [Unique Start the service tool, and set [Unique
4 ID] of CS-7#A to [1] with the CS-7 ID] of CS-7#B to [2] with the CS-7 ID] of CS-7#C to [3] with the CS-7
Select the connection check box on Select the connection check box on Select the connection check box on
each sub-menu screen of AeroDR each sub-menu screen of AeroDR each sub-menu screen of AeroDR
5 Access Point, AeroDR cradle, and Access Point, AeroDR cradle, and Access Point, AeroDR cradle, and
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit to AeroDR Generator Interface Unit to AeroDR Generator Interface Unit to
enable the devices. enable the devices. enable the devices.
Start the AeroDR setting tool on the Start the AeroDR setting tool on the Start the AeroDR setting tool on the
6
RM sub-menu screen. RM sub-menu screen. RM sub-menu screen.
In the RM setting, set [Mode] to In the RM setting, set [Mode] to In the RM setting, set [Mode] to
7 [Hybrid], and [IP Address of RM hybrid [Hybrid], and [IP Address of RM hybrid [Hybrid], and [IP Address of RM hybrid
machine] to the IP address of CS-7#A. machine] to the IP address of CS-7#B. machine] to the IP address of CS-7#C.
Set the exposure room setting Set the exposure room setting Set the exposure room setting
8 according to the institution according to the institution according to the institution
environment. environment. environment.
14
Set the access point setting according Set the access point setting according Set the access point setting according
9
to the institution environment. to the institution environment. to the institution environment.
Insert the media that comes with
Do not register the correction data of Do not register the correction data of the AeroDR Detector into the CD/
10
the AeroDR Detector. the AeroDR Detector. DVD drive, and register the AeroDR
Detector correction data.
Press [Upload] and [Download] in
11
[AeroDR Detector Setting].
Enter the serial number and device Enter the serial number and device Enter the serial number and device
12 sub ID manually or using barcodes in sub ID manually or using barcodes in sub ID manually or using barcodes in
the AeroDR cradle setting. the AeroDR cradle setting. the AeroDR cradle setting.
Set the AeroDR Generator Interface Set the AeroDR Generator Interface Set the AeroDR Generator Interface
13 Unit setting according to the institution Unit setting according to the institution Unit setting according to the institution
environment, and press [Upload]. environment, and press [Upload]. environment, and press [Upload].
Change the IP address with [AeroDR
14
Detector Setting], and press [Upload].
601
Proce-
dure
Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting
15 screen, and exit from the AeroDR screen, and exit from the AeroDR screen, and exit from the AeroDR
Press [Network Setting] on the sub- Press [Network Setting] on the sub- Press [Network Setting] on the sub-
16 menu screen of this device, and menu screen of this device, and change menu screen of this device, and
change the IP address of CS-7#A. the IP address of CS-7#B. change the IP address of CS-7#C.
17 Restart CS-7#A, and start the service tool. Restart CS-7#B, and start the service tool. Restart CS-7#C, and start the service tool.
Press [Delay Measurement] on the Press [Delay Measurement] on the Press [Delay Measurement] on the
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit sub- AeroDR Generator Interface Unit sub- AeroDR Generator Interface Unit sub-
menu screen, and measure Delay on menu screen, and measure Delay on menu screen, and measure Delay on
18 the setting screen. the setting screen. the setting screen.
*This setting is unnecessary within Japan. *This setting is unnecessary within Japan. *This setting is unnecessary within Japan.
*This operation is required only at *This operation is required only at *This operation is required only at
institutions where S-SRM link is used. institutions where S-SRM link is used. institutions where S-SRM link is used.
Shut down CS-7#A, and connect to the Shut down CS-7#B, and connect to the
19 Analyze the AeroDR Detector.
institution network. institution network.
20 Start CS-7#A. Perform calibration.
Start CS-7#B, and start the AeroDR Shut down CS-7#C, and connect to
21
setting tool in the service tool. the institution network.
Start CS-7#C, and start the AeroDR
22 [Client], and [IP Address of RM hybrid
setting tool in the service tool.
machine] to the IP address of CS-7#A.
Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR setting
23 [Client], and [IP Address of RM hybrid
tool.
machine] to the IP address of CS-7#A.
<Must be on a screen other than the
When the setting data transmission Without changing any settings in
service tool>
24 confirmation dialog is displayed, press the AeroDR Detector setting, press
[OK]. [Download] and [Upload].
When the processing dialog disappears, Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR setting
25
shut down CS-7#B. tool.
When the setting data transmission
26
confirmation dialog is displayed, press [OK].
When the processing dialog
27
disappears, shut down CS-7#C.
Start the service tool, and press
28 [Merge] on the RM sub-menu screen
to start the merge tool. <Shutting down CS-7#B>
Select CS-7#B data from the list of
29
Select CS-7#C data from the list of
30
Exit the service tool, and display the
31
14 system monitor screen.
32 Start CS-7#B.
<System monitor screen>
33 Start CS-7#C.
34 Restart CS-7#A.
602
14.9 Settings for REGIUS common environment in CS-3/5
and this device mixed environment
This is a setting method for the case where the exist-

ing CS-3/5 is replaced with this device or this device is
added in an environment where CS-3/5 and REGIUS
are installed.
14.9 Settings for REGIUS common environment in CS-3/5 and this device mixed environment
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When using REGIUS in an environment where CS-3/5
and this device are mixed, update CS-3/5 version to 4.5 Setting of touch panel
version V3.02R02 or higher.
• When using REGIUS in an environment where CS-3/5 4.6 Registration of license
and this device are mixed, set the periodic replace-
ment notification function to off in CS-3/5. These func- 4.11 Setting of the IP address of this device
tions cannot be used at the same time.
• When CS-3/5 and this device are used on the same 5.3 System setting of this device
network without a mixed environment, set the port
numbers of this device using [CS-X Communication 5.4 Activation of REGIUS icon
Setting] of [JM Settings] and the port numbers of [Sys-
tem Info.] → [My Network] → [Communication Setting]
using the CS-3/5 service tool so that they use different
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
port numbers.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Refer to "4.3 Check of bundled items" and "6.3 Sys-
tem setting of this device" first.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
14.9.1 Settings for REGIUS
common environment in
CS-3/5 and this device
mixed environment
1 Shut down all CS-3/5 which are to be re- 3 Connect all additional units of this device
placed with this device and disconnect to the network.
from the institution network.
Configure the following settings for all additional units
of this device.
2 Update any CS-3/5 not to be replaced to a
version of V3.02R2 or higher.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For how to update the version, refer to the Installation/
14
Service Manual of CS-3 and CS-5.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 5.5 REGIUS setting

of this device. Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "6.5 REGIUS setting".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
603
4 Delete the information associated with the 5 When the deletion of the information for
replaced CS-3/5 from the Hosts file in RE- all of the replaced CS-3/5 has finished,
GIUS using one of this device. press [×] to close the screen.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 6 To delete the CS-3/5 information remain-

• For the method of deletion, refer to "6.5.4 REGIUS ing in the [relations] table, move the cur-
setting". sor over the relevant line and press the
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • [Delete] key.
• The next procedure to perform differs depending
on whether this device or CS-3/5 is used for the
main JM or backup JM.
7 Press [Yes] on the deletion screen.
→When this device is used
→Main JM or backup JM is this device 8 When the deletion of the information for
→When CS-3/5 is used all of the replaced CS-3/5 has finished,
→Main JM or backup JM is CS-3/5 press [×] to close the screen.
O
OMain JM or backup JM is CS-7 9 Press [×] on the [PostgreSQL access]
screen to close the JM database.
1 Add the information of the existing CS-3/5
to the [c_status] table and the [relations] 10 Press and hold down all the REGIUS op-
table of the JM database of this device. eration switches for 5 seconds to turn off
REGIUS.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the method of addition, refer to "JM edit" of "CS-7 11 Restart all of CS-3/5 and this device.
Screen" and "Set Up of JM Data Base" of the Installa-
12 Press all of the REGIUS operation switch-
tion/Service Manual of CS-3. es to turn on REGIUS.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
O
OMain JM or backup JM is CS-3/5
of this device.
Delete all of the replaced CS-3/5 information from the [c_
status] table and the [relations] table of the JM database
of CS-3/5 with following procedure.
1 Display the intermediate screen from CS-3/5.
2 Start the service tool, select the [Adjust- 4.16 Peripheral devices setting
ment] tab and press [Configure] of [Data-
base]. 4.17 Activation

14 3 To delete the CS-3/5 information remain- device
ing in the [c_status] table, move the cur-
sor over the relevant line and press the 4.20 Optional installation and data migration
[Delete] key.
4 Press [Yes] on the deletion screen.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
604
Perform the following settings in CS-7#1 and CS-7#2.

14.9.2 Installation example
The following describes an installation procedure for

an example in which CS-3#1 and CS-3#3 are replaced
by this device in a system which has already been in-
stalled. 4.3 Check of bundled items
CS-7#1 CS-7#2 CS-7#3 4.4 Check of startup
Main JM Backup JM
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.3 Check of bundled items" and "6.3 Sys-
tem setting of this device" first.
REGIUS 190 REGIUS 210
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
The names of existing equipment and newly added
units of this device, the host names on the JM and IP
addresses are as follows.
Equipment Host name

IP address Remarks
name on JM
Main JM,
CS-3#1 CS3-0001 192.168.20.90 replacement 3 Connect CS-7#1 and CS-7#2 to the institu-
target tion network.
CS-3#2 CS3-0002 192.168.20.91 Backup JM
CS-3#3 CS3-0003 192.168.20.92

Replacement
target
4 Perform the following settings in CS-7#1.
(1) Start the service tool.
There is power (2) Press the JM icon on the service tool screen.
linkage with all CSs, (3) Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.
REGIUS
r190-0001 192.168.20.170 and error notifica-
190
tion can be received
–– The CR unit setting screen is displayed.
from all of them (4) Select [BarCodeRegistration] from [Cassette
There is power
Barcode Registration Method] in [Basic Set- 14
linkage with all CSs, tings]
REGIUS
r210-0001 192.168.20.171 and error notifica- (5) Enter "CS7-0001" in the [Console Host Name].
210
tion can be received (6) Set the following items in [JM Settings].
from all of them –– Set [Built-In] to ON in the Main JM settings.
New addition, –– Set [Device Registration] to ON in the Backup
CS-7#1 CS7-0001 192.168.20.90 replace with
JM settings.
CS-3#1
–– Enter "192.168.20.91" in [IP Address] of the
New addition,
Backup JM settings.
CS-7#2 CS7-0002 192.168.20.92 replace with
CS-3#3 –– Set [Use CS-3 JM] to ON in the Backup JM
settings.
1 Shut down CS-3#1 and CS-3#3 and dis-

connect from institution network.
2 Update CS-3#2 to V3.02R02.
605
(7) Set the following items in the [CR Cassette (7) Set the following items in the [CR Cassette
Reader Settings] of the first device. Reader Settings] of the first device.
–– Enter "192.168.20.170" in [Reader IP Address] –– Enter "192.168.20.170" in [Reader IP Address]
of the first device. of the first device.
–– Press [Download] of the first device. –– Press [Download] of the first device.
–– Select [REGIUS170/190] in [Reader Type] of –– Select [REGIUS170/190] in [Reader Type] of
the first device. the first device.

–– Enter "r190-0001" in [Reader Host Name] of –– Enter "r190-0001" in [Reader Host Name] of
the first device. the first device.
–– Set [Power Control] of the first device to ON. –– Set [Power Control] of the first device to ON.
–– Set [Error Notice] of the first device to ON. –– Set [Error Notice] of the first device to ON.
–– Press [Hosts] in the reader of the first device, –– Press [Upload] of the first device.
select the line where the [Host Name] is CS3- (8) Set the following items in the [CR Cassette
0001 and press [Delete]. Reader Settings] of the second device.
–– In the same way, select the line where the –– Enter "192.168.20.171" in [Reader IP Address]
[Host Name] is CS3-0002 and press [Delete]. of the second device.
–– Press [×] on the Hosts screen to close. –– Press [Download] of the second device.
–– Press [Upload] of the first device. –– Select [REGIUS210] in [Reader Type] of the
(8) Set the following items in the [CR Cassette second device.
Reader Settings] of the second device. –– Enter "r210-0001" in [Reader Host Name] of
–– Enter "192.168.20.171" in [Reader IP Address] the second device.
of the second device. –– Select [Power Control] of the second device.
–– Press [Download] of the second device. –– Select [Error Notice] of the second device.
–– Select [REGIUS210] in [Reader Type] of the –– Press [Upload] of the second device.
second device.
–– Enter "r210-0001" in [Reader Host Name] of
the second device.
6 Press [OK] on the CR unit setting screen
–– Set [Power Control] of the second device to
ON.
–– Set [Error Notice] of the second device to ON. 7 Start up the service tool of CS-7#1.
–– Press [Upload] of the second device.
(9) Press [OK] on the CR unit setting screen to 8 Press the JM icon on the service tool
close the screen. screen.
5 Perform the following settings in CS-7#2. 9 Press [DB] on the sub-menu screen.
(1) Start the service tool. • [PostgreSQL Access] screen is displayed.
(2) Press the JM icon on the service tool screen.
(3) Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen.
10 Press [kddm_jm] in the tree.
–– The CR unit setting screen is displayed.
(4) Select [Bar Code Registration] from [Cassette
Barbados Registration Method] in [Basic Set-
tings]
14 (5) Enter "CS7-0002" in the [Console Host Name].
(6) Set the following items in [JM Settings].
–– Set [Built-In] to OFF in the Main JM settings.
–– Set [Device Registration] to ON in the Backup
JM settings.
–– Enter "192.168.20.91" in [IP Address] of the
Backup JM settings.
–– Set [Use CS-3 JM] to ON in the Backup JM
settings.
606
11 Double click the [c_status] table. 15 On the [relations] screen, add the CS-3#2,
REGIUS 190 and REGIUS 210 information
as described below and then press [Re-
load].
• The [c_status] screen is displayed.
12 On the [c_status] screen, add the CS-3#2

information as follows and press [Reload].
16 Check the entered content and then press

[×].
• The [c_status] screen closes and the display re-
turns to the [PostgreSQL Access] screen.
17 Press [×] on the [PostgreSQL Access]

screen.
18 Display the intermediate screen from CS-

13 Check the entered content and then press 3/5.
[×].
• The [c_status] screen closes and the display re-
turns to the [PostgreSQL Access] screen.
19 Start the service tool, select the [Adjust-
ment] tab and press [Configure] of [Data-
base].
14 Double click the [relations] table.
• The [relations] screen is displayed.

• The [PostgreSQL access] screen is displayed.
14
607
20 Double click the [c_status] table. 24 Double click [relations].

• The [c_status] screen is displayed. • The [relations] screen is displayed.
21 Todelete the CS-3#1 and CS-3#3 infor- 25 Todelete the CS-3#1 and CS-3#3 infor-
mation remaining in the [c_status] table, mation remaining in the [relations] table,
move the cursor over the relevant lines move the cursor over the relevant lines
and press the [Delete] key. and press the [Delete] key.
22 Press [Yes] on the deletion screen. 26 Press [Yes] on the deletion screen.
14
23 When the deletion of the information for 27 When the deletion of the information for
all of the replaced CS-3/5 has finished, all of the replaced CS-3/5 has finished,
press [×] to close the screen. press [×] to close the screen.
• The [PostgreSQL access] screen is displayed.
28 Press [×] on the [PostgreSQL access]
screen to close the JM database.
608
29 Press and hold down the REGIUS 190 and

REGIUS 210 operation switches for 5 sec-
onds to turn off the REGIUS power.
30 Restart CS-3#2, CS-7#1 and CS-7#2.
31 Press the REGIUS 190 and REGIUS 210
operation switches to turn on the REGIUS
power.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Refer to "4.16 Peripheral devices setting".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
14
609
14.10 Method to display Windows taskbar on the service
tool screen
The following describes how to display the Windows 4 Press [Taskbar Hide] to set to OFF.
taskbar on the service tool screen. • It is set to ON (hide taskbar) by default.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When the Windows taskbar is turned on, the Windows
key is also enabled.
• If this device is forced to shutdown via the Task
Manager due to freezing or other issues, the Windows
taskbar will remain hidden. To redisplay the taskbar,
start Explorer from the Recycle Bin at the top left of the
desktop screen, and run [C:\Konicaminolta\Console\Bin\
14.10 Method to display Windows taskbar on the service tool screen
BackProcess\SysLoader\Taskbar\Show_taskbar.exe].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Display the intermediate screen. 5 Press [OK].
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How
to display the intermediate screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

screen.
14 3 Press [OS Control Setting].
• The [OS Control Setting] screen is displayed.
610
14.11 Access control of external storage devices
The procedure for access control of an external stor- 4 Confirm that the [Removable Disks: Deny
age devices is as follows. write access] is set to [Enabled].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When you back up data in an external device by using
the user tool of this device, do not perform these set-
tings.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Press [Start] on the start menu of Win-

dows, then press [Search for programs
and files] to search gpedit.msc.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
2 Select [Computer Configuration], [Admin-
• If you connect an external device and try to copy the
istrative Templates], [System], [Removable
data stored in this device, the following dialog " Access
Storage Access], then [Removable Disks:
to the subject folder is refused." will be displayed.
Deny write access] on the [Local Group ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Policy Editor] screen.
14.11 Access control of external storage devices

3 Select [Enabled] in the [Removable Disks:
Deny write access] dialog, then press
[OK].
14
611
612
Chapter
15
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes corrective actions in the event a problem occurs.
613
15.1 Replacement of the AeroDR Detector
This section describes the AeroDR Detector replacement procedure.

Here the existing AeroDR Detector shall be referred to as "Panel A", and the AeroDR Detector for replacement shall
be referred to as "Panel B".
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This procedure applies to versions of this device beginning with V1.02R03. In the case of version V1.02R02 and ear-
lier, you must upgrade the version before performing the procedure.
• If AeroDR Detector auto update has been set in advance for this device, you must cancel the auto update setting be-
fore performing the procedure. If the setting is not canceled, the update process will start when the AeroDR Detector
data is loaded. You should be aware that, in the environment where the AeroDR Detector is inserted on an exposure
stage or AeroDR Battery Charger, it may be difficult to find the AeroDR Detector LED, which prevents you from dis-
cerning the processing status of the AeroDR Detector.
• If using the factory-set IP address (192.168.20.201/192.168.20.211), turn the set AeroDR Detector's power off before
performing the procedure.
• The factory-set IP address is the same for all AeroDR Detectors. If there is more than one AeroDR Detector to be re-
placed, turn on each AeroDR Detector one at a time and set to avoid duplicating IP addresses.
• Deletion operation for AeroDR Detectors (correction data) is valid only for AeroDR Detector registered for exposure
room of this device being operated or those for which exposure room has not been registered.
• If the IP address of the AeroDR Detector is unknown, refer to "Recovery to the default status" in the "�� AeroDR SYS-
TEM Installation/Service Manual" to initialize the IP address before performing operation.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
15
614
15.1.1 AeroDR Detector replacement flow
The AeroDR Detector replacement procedure differs according to the installation environment of this device (the
number of units of this device, roaming environment, operation environment). The replacement flow according to pat-
tern is as follows.
O
OAeroDR Detector replacement in environment with RM hybrid machine only
Replacement procedure for case where this device is a single RM hybrid machine and roaming environment has not
been set.
For the detailed procedure, refer to "15.1.2 AeroDR Detector replacement in environment with RM hybrid machine
only".
1 Startup of the service tool
2 Initialization of network settings of this device
Cancellation of registration of Panel A registered

3 to exposure room of this device
4 Deletion of correction data for Panel A
5 Restart of this device

6 Panel B connection
7 Startup of the service tool

If there are more than one
Panel B, repeat steps 6 to 10.
(*In the case of 5 or more pan-
8 Panel B correction data registration els, the RM hybrid machine
must be rebooted.)
9 Panel B communications check and setting
10 Saving settings
11 Reset of network settings of this device
12 Restart of this device, AeroDR Interface Unit and Panel B
15
13 Panel B version check and auto update
615
O
OAeroDR Detector replacement in roaming environment for single RM hybrid machine with RM
client machine turned off
The replacement procedure for when multiple units of this device are used in a roaming environment and an RM cli-
ent machine is temporarily turned off during the replacement procedure is as follows.
For the detailed procedure, refer to "15.1.3 AeroDR Detector replacement in roaming environment for single RM hy-
brid machine with RM client machine turned off".
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Step 1 of the procedure is not required if the AeroDR Detector to be replaced has not been registered for the expo-
sure room of the RM client machine.
• Step 5 of the procedure is not required if the AeroDR Detector to be replaced is not registered to the exposure room
of the RM hybrid machine.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

<RM hybrid machine> <RM client machine>
Cancellation of registration of AeroDR Detector A

1 registered to exposure room of RM client machine
2 Quitting all RM client machines
3 Startup of RM hybrid machine service tool
4 Initialization of RM hybrid machine network settings

5 registered to exposure room of RM hybrid machine
6 Deletion of correction data for AeroDR Detector A
7 Restart of the RM hybrid machine

Quit in progress
Connection of AeroDR Detector B to
8 RM hybrid machine

If there are more than one AeroDR
Detector B, repeat steps 9 to 13.
10 AeroDR Detector B correction data registration (* In the case of 5 or more AeroDR
Detectors, the RM hybrid machine must
be rebooted.)
11 AeroDR Detector B communications check and setting
12 Saving settings
13 Resetting of RM hybrid machine network settings
14 Startup of all RM client machines
Startup of all RM client machines

15 15 service tool
Service tool launch in progress
16 Deletion of correction data for all AeroDR Detector A's
Restart of the RM hybrid machine,

18 AeroDR Interface Unit and AeroDR Detector B Quit in progress
Displays screen other than service tool 19 Startup of all RM client machines (one at a time)
20 AeroDR Detector B version check and auto update To normal workflow
616
O
OAeroDR Detector replacement for RM hybrid machine with RM client machine running
The replacement procedure for when multiple units of this device are used in a roaming environment and an RM cli-
ent machine is running during the replacement procedure is as follows.
For the detailed procedure, refer to "15.1.4 AeroDR Detector replacement in roaming environment for RM hybrid ma-
chine with RM client machine running".
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Because the RM client machine must be temporarily turned off during the replacement procedure, the impact on in-
stitution operation must be taken into account.
• Do not conduct AeroDR Detector analysis and calibration for all exposure rooms during the replacement procedure.
• AeroDR Detector roaming or movement between devices cannot be conducted during the replacement procedure.
• Step 1 of the procedure is not required if there is no AeroDR Detector to be replaced for the exposure room of the
RM client machine.
• If the AeroDR Detector to be replaced is not registered to the exposure room of the RM hybrid machine, procedure 6 is not necessary.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

1 registered to exposure room of RM client machine
2 Quitting the RM hybrid machine
Disconnecting from other exposure room network of

3 AeroDR SYSTEM in exposure room of RM hybrid machine
5 Initialization of RM hybrid machine network settings

6

registered to exposure room of RM hybrid machine
7 Deletion of correction data for AeroDR Detector A
8 Restart of the RM hybrid machine
Normal workflow in progress
9 Connection of Panel B to RM hybrid machine

If there are more than one AeroDR
Detector B, repeat steps 9 to 13.
(* In the case of 5 or more AeroDR
11 AeroDR Detector B correction data registration
Detectors, this device must be
rebooted.)
12 AeroDR Detector B communications check and setting
13 Saving settings
14 Resetting of RM hybrid machine network settings
15
Restart of the RM hybrid machine, 15
AeroDR Interface Unit and Panel B Startup of all RM client machines
16 service tool
Off-line 17 Deletion of correction data for all AeroDR Detector A's
Connecting to other exposure room network of AeroDR

19 SYSTEM in exposure room of RM hybrid machine Quit in progress
20 Startup of all RM client machines (one at a time)
21 AeroDR Detector B version check and auto update To normal workflow
617
O
OMeasures in case where deleted AeroDR Detector correction data is restored
In some cases, deleted correction data may be restored by mistake if replacing an AeroDR Detector in a roaming en-
vironment. Although it does not affect operation, you can delete correction data by the following procedure.
For the detailed procedure, refer to "15.1.5 Measures in case where deleted AeroDR Detector correction data is restored".

1 Startup of the RM hybrid machine service tool
Deletion of all unnecessary

2 AeroDR Detector correction data Startup of all RM client machines
3 service tool
Deletion of all unnecessary

4 AeroDR Detectors correction data
Service tool launch in progress
Quitting all RM client machines

5 service tool
6 Quitting the RM hybrid machine service tool To normal workflow

15
618
Deletion of correction data for Panel A

15.1.2 AeroDR Detector replace-
ment in environment with 1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen.
RM hybrid machine only
The AeroDR Detector replacement procedure for the Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
case this device is a single RM hybrid machine and • For the AeroDR unit setting screen display method,
roaming environment has not been set is as follows. refer to "4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
screen".
Startup of the service tool ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Select the serial number of Panel A on the

1 Start up the service tool of this device. AeroDR Detector list of [Correction Data
Setting] and press [Delete].
Initialization of network settings of this device • If there are more than one Panel A, delete all cor-
rection data.
1 Change the network settings of this de-
vice to the default settings on the [Network
Connections] screen.

• Displays the deletion confirmation screen.
3 Press [OK].
• The network default settings are as follows.
–– IP address: 192.168.20.90
–– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
–– Default gateway: None
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the setting method, refer to "4.11 Setting of the
IP address of this device".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Cancellation of registration of Panel A regis- 15

tered to exposure room of this device
1 Press the Panel A icon of the [Network

status] tab on the system monitor screen,
• The panel A to be deleted will be grayed out.
and press [Unregister].
4 Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR unit setting
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • screen.
• If the AeroDR Detector to be replaced is not
registered to the exposure room of this device, this
operation is not necessary.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
619
Restart of this device 3 Press [Upload] of Panel B on the AeroDR

Detector list of [AeroDR Detector Setting].
1 Quit the user tool, and restart this device.
Panel B connection
1 Connect Panel B to either the AeroDR I/F

Cable, AeroDR Battery Charger or AeroDR
UF Cable.
• The set institution information is uploaded to Panel B.
Startup of the service tool
Saving settings
1 Start up the service tool of this device.
1 Press [OK] of the AeroDR unit setting
Panel B correction data registration screen to save the settings.
1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• If there are more than one Panel B, repeat the
process from "Panel B connection" to "Saving
2 Register Panel B correction data.
settings" for each panel.
• Be sure to register one Panel B at a time.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Up to 4 Panel Bs can be registered at a time. If
• For the correction data registration method, refer to there are more than 4 Panel Bs, restart this device
"4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registra- after registering the fourth. Then use the exposure
tion". room registration release function to release a
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • given Panel B, and repeat the procedure from

"Panel B connection" to "Saving settings".
Panel B communications check and setting ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reset of network settings of this device

1 Press [Download] of Panel B on the Aero-
DR Detector list of [AeroDR Detector Set-
ting]. 1 Reset the network settings of this device
to the settings used by the institution.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Panel B data is downloaded to this device. Restart of this device, AeroDR Interface
Unit and Panel B
15
2 Change the settings of [AeroDR Detector
Setting] to Institution information. 1 Quit the service tool, and restart this de-
vice, AeroDR Interface Unit and Panel B.
Panel B version check and auto update
1 Confirm the version of Panel B with the

AeroDR Detector log and execute auto up-
date if necessary.
620
15.1.3 AeroDR Detector replacement

in roaming environment for
single RM hybrid machine with
RM client machine turned off
Replacement procedure for the case multiple units of this
device used in a roaming environment and RM client ma-
chine turned off during the replacement procedure is as
follows.
Cancellation of registration of Panel A regis-

tered to exposure room of RM client machine
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • The network default settings are as follows.

–– IP address: 192.168.20.90
• This procedure is not required if the AeroDR Detec-
–– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
tor to be replaced has not been registered for the
exposure room of the RM client machine.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Press the Panel A icon of the [Network Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Status] tab of the system monitor and • For the setting method, refer to "4.11 Setting of the
press [Unregister]. IP address of this device".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Quitting all RM client machines

1 tered to RM hybrid machine

Quit all RM client machines.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Press the Panel A icon of the [Network

status] tab on the system monitor screen,
• Absolutely DO NOT subsequently start any RM
client machine during "Startup of RM hybrid
machine service tool" through "Resetting of RM
hybrid machine network settings". IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the AeroDR Detector to be replaced is not
registered to the exposure room of the RM hybrid
Startup of RM hybrid machine service tool machine, this operation is not necessary.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Start up the RM hybrid machine service
tool. Deletion of correction data for Panel A
Initialization of RM hybrid machine network

settings
1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Change the network settings of RM hybrid
15
machine to the default settings on the • For the AeroDR unit setting screen display method,
[Network Connections] screen. refer to "4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
621
2 Select the serial number of Panel A on the Connection of Panel B to RM hybrid machine
AeroDR Detector list of [Correction Data
Setting] and press [Delete]. 1 Connect Panel B to either the AeroDR I/F
UF Cable.
Startup of the RM hybrid machine service tool

tool.
Panel B correction data registration

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3 Press [OK]. • For the correction data registration method, refer to
"4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registra-
tion".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Panel B communications check and setting

1 Press [Download] of Panel B on the

AeroDR Detector list of [AeroDR Detector
Setting].
4 Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR unit setting • Panel B data is downloaded to RM hybrid machine.
screen.
Restart of the RM hybrid machine Setting] to Institution information.
15
1 Quit the RM hybrid machine service tool.
3 Press [Upload] of Panel B on the AeroDR
2 Restart the RM hybrid machine.
• The set institution information is uploaded to Panel

B.
622
Saving settings Deletion of correction data for all Panel A's
1 Press [OK] of the AeroDR unit setting 1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen.
screen to save the settings.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • For the AeroDR unit setting screen display method,
• If there is more than one Panel B, repeat the pro- refer to "4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
cess from "Connection of Panel B to RM hybrid screen".
machine" to "Saving settings" for each panel. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Up to 4 Panel Bs can be registered at a time. If
there is more than 4 Panel Bs, after registering
2 Select the serial number of Panel A on the
AeroDR Detector list of [Correction Data
the fourth, restart this device, and after releasing
any Panel B with the exposure room registration
Setting] and press [Delete].
release function, repeat "Connection of Panel B to
RM hybrid machine" to "Saving settings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Resetting of RM hybrid machine network

settings
1 Reset the network settings of the RM hy-

brid machine to settings used by the insti-
tution.

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Displays the deletion confirmation screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Press [OK].

• Subsequently allow the service tool of the RM
hybrid machine to remain launched for the RM cli-
ent machine from "Boot all RM client machines" to
"Quit all RM client machines".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Startup of all RM client machines
1 Start up all RM client machines.
Startup of all RM client machines service

tool 15
1 Start up all RM client machine service • The panel A to be deleted will be grayed out.
tools.
623
4 Press [OK] to exit from the AeroDR unit

15.1.4 AeroDR Detector replace-
setting screen.
ment in roaming environment
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • for RM hybrid machine with
• If the setting data transmission confirmation mes- RM client machine running
sage is displayed, press [Cancel].
The replacement procedure for when multiple units of
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
this device are used in a roaming environment and an
RM client machine is temporarily turned off during the
Quitting all RM client machines replacement procedure is as follows.
1 End all RM client machines. Cancellation of registration of Panel A regis-

tered to exposure room of RM client machine
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Next, conduct "Restart of the RM hybrid machine,
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
AeroDR Interface Unit and Panel B". Absolutely DO
NOT boot all RM client machines during this time. • This procedure is not required if the AeroDR Detec-
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • tor to be replaced has not been registered for the
exposure room of the RM client machine.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Restart of the RM hybrid machine, AeroDR
Interface Unit and Panel B
Status] tab of the system monitor and
1 End the service tool, and restart the RM press [Unregister].
hybrid machine, AeroDR Interface Unit
and Panel B. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Subsequently, an RM client machine can perform
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • workflows other than the following, even while an

• Next, execute "Startup of all RM client machines RM hybrid machine performing the procedure from
(one at a time)". During this time, display screens "Disconnecting from other exposure room network
other than the service tool screen for RM hybrid of AeroDR SYSTEM in exposure room of RM hybrid
machines. machine" to "Restart of the RM hybrid machine,
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • AeroDR Interface Unit and Panel B".
–– AeroDR Detector analysis and calibration
Startup of all RM client machines (one at a –– AeroDR Detector roaming and movement between
time) devices
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Start up all RM client machines (one at a Quitting the RM hybrid machine

time).
1 End the RM hybrid machine.
Panel B version check and auto update
Disconnecting from other exposure room
1 Confirm the version of Panel B with the network of AeroDR SYSTEM in exposure
15 AeroDR Detector log on RM hybrid ma- room of RM hybrid machine
chine and execute auto update if neces-
sary.
1 Disconnect network of AeroDR SYSTEM
in exposure room of RM hybrid machine
from networks of other exposure rooms.
624
Startup of the RM hybrid machine service tool Deletion of correction data for Panel A
1 Start up the RM hybrid machine. 1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen.
2 Start up the RM hybrid machine service Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

tool.
• For the AeroDR unit setting screen display method,
refer to "4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting
Initialization of RM hybrid machine network screen".
settings ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Select the serial number of Panel A from

1 Change network settings of RM hybrid
the AeroDR Detector list of [Correction
machine to the default settings on the
Data Setting] and press [Delete].
[Network Connections] screen.

• The network default settings are as follows.
–– IP address: 192.168.20.90
–– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
3 Press [OK].
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

tered to RM hybrid machine

status] tab on the system monitor screen, 15
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the AeroDR Detector to be replaced is not 4 Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR unit setting
registered to the exposure room of the RM hybrid screen.
machine, this operation is not necessary.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
625
Restart of the RM hybrid machine 3 Press [Upload] of Panel B of the AeroDR

1 End the RM hybrid machine service tool.
2 Restart the RM hybrid machine.
Connection of Panel B to RM hybrid ma-

chine
• The set institution information is uploaded to Panel

1 Connect Panel B to either the AeroDR I/F
B.
UF Cable.
Saving settings
1 Press [OK] of the AeroDR unit setting
screen to save the settings.
tool.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Panel B correction data registration • If there is more than one Panel B, repeat the pro-
cess from "Connection of Panel B to RM hybrid
machine" to "Saving settings" for each AeroDR De-
tector.
• Up to 4 Panel Bs can be registered at a time. If
there is more than 4 Panel Bs, after registering
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • the fourth, restart this device, and after releasing
• For the correction data registration method, refer to any Panel B with the exposure room registration
"4.10.6 AeroDR Detector correction data registra- release function, repeat "Connection of Panel B to
tion". RM hybrid machine" to "Saving settings".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Panel B communications check and setting Resetting of RM hybrid machine network

settings
1 Press [Download] of Panel B of the AeroDR
Detector list of [AeroDR Detector Setting]. 1 Reset the network settings of the RM
hybrid machine to settings used by the
institution.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
15 • Panel B data is downloaded to RM hybrid machine.

Setting] to Institution information.
626
Restart of the RM hybrid machine, AeroDR 3 Press [OK].

Interface Unit and Panel B
1 End the service tool, and restart the RM

hybrid machine, AeroDR Interface Unit
and Panel B.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Next, conduct tasks from "Startup of all RM client
machines service tool" through "Quitting all RM cli-
ent machines" with the RM client machine. During
this time, set the RM hybrid machine to offline sta-
tus.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Startup of all RM client machines service tool • The panel A to be deleted will be grayed out.
1 Start up all RM client machine service

screen.
tools.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Deletion of correction data for all Panel A's
• If the setting data transmission confirmation mes-
sage is displayed, press [Cancel].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Quitting all RM client machines
refer to "4.10.2 Displaying the AeroDR unit setting 1 End all RM client machines.
screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Next, conduct "Connecting to other exposure room
2 Select the serial number of Panel A on the network of AeroDR SYSTEM in exposure room of
AeroDR Detector list of [Correction Data RM hybrid machine". Absolutely DO NOT boot all
Setting] and press [Delete]. RM client machines during this time.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Connecting to other exposure room net-

work of AeroDR SYSTEM in exposure room
of RM hybrid machine
1 Connect network of AeroDR SYSTEM in

exposure room of RM hybrid machine to
15
networks of other exposure rooms.
627
Startup of all RM client machines (one at a

time) 15.1.5 Measures in case where
deleted AeroDR Detector
correction data is restored
1 Start up all RM client machines (one at a
time). If deleted correction data is restored by mistake when
replacing an AeroDR Detector in a roaming environ-
Panel B version check and auto update ment, it can be deleted by the following procedure.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1 Check the version of Panel B with the
AeroDR Detector log on RM hybrid ma- • While the RM hybrid machine is performing the
chine and execute auto update if neces- procedure from "RM hybrid machine service tool
launch" to "deletion of all unnecessary AeroDR
sary.
Detector correction data", the RM client machine can
perform other workflows than the following operations.
–– AeroDR Detector analysis and calibration
–– AeroDR Detector roaming and movement between
devices
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

tool.
Deletion of all unnecessary AeroDR Detec-

tor correction data
1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen of

the RM hybrid machine.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Select the unnecessary serial number of

Panel A from the AeroDR Detector list of
[Correction Data Setting] and press [Delete].
15
628
3 Press [OK]. 2 Select the unnecessary serial number of

Panel A from the AeroDR Detector list of
[Correction Data Setting] and press [De-
lete].
• The AeroDR Detector to be deleted will be grayed out.

screen. • Displays the deletion confirmation screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Press [OK].
• Next, conduct tasks from "Startup of all RM client

machines service tool" through "Quitting all RM cli-
ent machines service tool" with the RM client ma-
chine. During this time, keep the service tool of RM

hybrid machine logged in.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Startup of all RM client machines service tool
1 Start up all RM client machine service

tools.
Deletion of all unnecessary AeroDR Detec-

tor correction data
1 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen of

the RM client machine. 4 Press [OK] to exit the AeroDR unit setting
screen.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the setting data transmission confirmation mes- 15
screen". sage is displayed, press [Cancel].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
629
Quitting all RM client machines service tool
1 End all RM client machines service tool.
Quitting the RM hybrid machine service tool
1 End the RM hybrid machine service tool.

15
630
15.2 Change of roaming environment
15.2.1 Changing the settings of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices after

change of roaming environment
After change of the roaming environment, the required changes in settings of AeroDR SYSTEM related devices are
as follows.
Setting of AeroDR Detector

• Change the settings of the AeroDR Detector (changes/additions).
• We recommend that setting changes of the AeroDR Detector (changes/additions) be performed with the RM hybrid
machine. Performing the task with the RM hybrid machine can improve efficiency because the status becomes
equivalent to after merge.
• After setting changes, restart the RM client machine and the RM hybrid machine.
* The settings can also be changed with the RM client machine, but merge is required when performed.
Setting other than AeroDR Detector (RM hybrid machine)

• It is not necessary to perform merge after setting changes on the RM hybrid machine.
• After setting changes, restart the RM client machine and the RM hybrid machine.
• In the same way as "Setting of AeroDR Detector", when the task is performed with the RM hybrid machine, the sta-
tus after change becomes equivalent to after merge.
Setting other than AeroDR Detector (RM client machine)

• On the RM client machine, setting data needs to be reintegrated using the merge tool after setting changes.
• After merge, restart the RM client machine and the RM hybrid machine.

Replacement of this device with alternative machine
• Change the version of this device of the alternative machine to match the existing environment.
• Change the IP address of the alternative machine to the IP address of the existing machine.
• Restore the settings of the existing machine backed up in advance.
* Perform the same operation when installing the existing machine back after repair.
Replacement of this device with alternative machine other than this device
• When replacing this device with a machine other than this device, perform addition of the machine instead of
changing the settings.
• When installing the existing machine back after repair, delete the settings of the unnecessary alternative machine.
* It is more efficient than changing the existing settings for the alternative machine and restoring the previous set-
tings after repair.
* Setting changes are required when the number of machines exceeds the upper limit of the registration machines
on the service tool.
15
631
15.2.2 Method for transferring hybrid functions to another unit of this

device
Perform the following settings when transferring the RM hybrid machine functions to another unit of this device in the
existing environment.
Configuration example
Exposure room #A Exposure room #B Exposure room #C
AeroDR AeroDR AeroDR

Detector#A Detector#B Detector#C

RM hybrid machine RM client machine RM client machine
↓ ↓
RM client machine RM hybrid machine
Transfer hybrid functions from CS-7#A to CS-7#B
Installation procedure
(1) Change the existing RM hybrid machine to be a client.
In this example, change CS-7#A to be a client.
(2) Change the existing RM client machine to be a hybrid.
In this example, change CS-7#B to be a hybrid.

(3) Change the RM setting of the existing RM client machine.
(4) Change the settings of all AeroDR Detectors.
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Since the data changed with this setting does not include the merge data, merge is not required.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Proce-
CS-7#A/#C CS-7#B
dure
Start the service tool, and start the AeroDR setting tool on Start the service tool, and start the AeroDR setting tool on
1
the RM sub-menu screen. the RM sub-menu screen.
In the RM setting, set [Mode] to [Client], and [IP address] In the RM setting, set [Mode] to [Hybrid], and [IP address] to
2
to the IP address of CS-7#B. the IP address of CS-7#B.
In [AeroDR Detector Setting], press [Download] and [Up-
In [AeroDR Detector Setting], press [Download] and [Upload]
15 3 load] for the AeroDR Detectors registered in CS-7#A and
for the AeroDR Detector registered in CS-7#B.
CS-7#C.
Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen, and exit Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen, and exit from
4
from the AeroDR setting tool. the AeroDR setting tool.
When the setting data transmission confirmation dialog is
5 Restart CS-7#B.
displayed, press [Cancel].
6 Restart CS-7#A and CS-7#C.
632
15.2.3 Releasing roaming environment
All units of this device in a roaming environment retain the same information. For this reason, the following settings
are required when releasing part of the roaming environment of the existing environment.
Configuration example
The procedure is described below with an example of changing from the roaming environment for CS-7#A, CS-7#B,
CS-7#C, and CS-7#D to that for CS-7#A and CS-7#B and that for CS-7#C and CS-7#D.
Before change
Existing roaming configuration
Exposure room #A Exposure room #B Exposure room #C Exposure room #D
AeroDR AeroDR AeroDR AeroDR

Detector#A Detector#B Detector#C Detector#D
CS-7#A CS-7#B CS-7#C CS-7#D

RM hybrid machine RM client machine RM client machine RM client machine
After change
New roaming configuration #A New roaming configuration #B
Exposure room #A Exposure room #B Exposure room #C Exposure room #D
AeroDR AeroDR AeroDR AeroDR

Detector#A Detector#B Detector#C Detector#D

RM hybrid machine RM client machine RM hybrid machine RM client machine
Installation procedure
(1) On the existing RM hybrid machine, delete the information of the exposure room and AeroDR Detector to be re-
moved from the roaming environment.
(2) On the RM hybrid machine in the new roaming environment, delete the unnecessary exposure room and AeroDR
Detector information.
(3) Register any 1 unit of this device to remove from the roaming environment as an RM hybrid machine.
(4) Change the settings of the AeroDR Detector used by this device removed from the roaming environment.
15
633
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Proce-
dure
Start up the service tool and Start up the service tool and Start up the service tool and
activate the AeroDR setting activate the AeroDR setting activate the AeroDR setting
1
tool on the RM sub menu tool on the RM sub menu tool on the RM sub menu
screen. screen. screen.
In the RM setting, set [Mode] In the RM setting, set [Mode]
Select the information about
to [Client], and [IP Address of to [Client], and [IP Address of
2 the exposure rooms C and D
RM hybrid machine] to the IP RM hybrid machine] to the IP
then press [Delete].
address of CS-7#C. address of CS-7#C.
<Normal workflow in Select the serial numbers
Start up the AeroDR setting progress> Press [Merge] on the RM sub of AeroDR Detector#A and
3 tool on the RM sub menu menu screen to activate the AeroDR Detector#B in [Correc-
screen. merge tool. tion Data Setting], and press
[Delete].
Select the serial numbers
In [AeroDR Detector Setting],
of AeroDR Detector#C and Select the information about
press [Download] and [Upload]
4 AeroDR Detector#D in [Correc- the exposure rooms A and B,
for the AeroDR Detector regis-
tion Data Setting], and press then press [Delete].
tered in CS-7#D.
[Delete].
Start up the AeroDR setting
5 Close the service tool. Restart CS-7#B. tool on the RM sub menu Close the service tool.
screen.
Select the serial numbers
of AeroDR Detector#A and When the setting data trans-
6 Restart CS-7#A. AeroDR Detector#B in [Correc- mission confirmation dialog is

tion Data Setting], and press displayed, press [Cancel].
[Delete].
<Normal workflow in In [AeroDR Detector Setting],
progress> press [Download] and [Upload]
7 for the AeroDR Detector regis- <System monitor screen>
<Normal workflow in progress> tered
in CS-7#C.
8 Close the service tool. Restart CS-7#D.
9 Restart CS-7#C.
15
634
15.3 Method for deleting AeroDR Detector settings
The deletion method for the AeroDR Detector settings is as follows.
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Proce-
RM hybrid machine RM client machine
dure
In this device that has an AeroDR Detector to be deleted, press the icon of the applicable AeroDR Detector on the [Network
1
status] tab on the system monitor screen, and press [Unregister].
3 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen of RM icon.
Select the serial number of unnecessary AeroDR Detector <Normal workflow in progress>
4
in [Correction Data Setting], and press [Delete].
Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen to exit from
5
the AeroDR setting tool.
7 Press [Setting] on the sub-menu screen of RM icon.
Select the serial number of unnecessary AeroDR Detector
8
in [Correction Data Setting], and press [Delete].
<During service tool login>
15.3 Method for deleting AeroDR Detector settings

9 Press [OK] on the AeroDR unit setting screen.
When the setting data transmission confirmation dialog is
10
displayed, press [Cancel].
12 Close the service tool. <Normal workflow in progress>
15
635
15.4 Measures in case where AeroDR Detector is not
properly displayed on this device
When connecting the AeroDR Detector to the AeroDR I/F Cable or when moving to another exposure room, if its icon
is not displayed on the application bar or icons do not switch, then the following might be the cause.
• Connections between each unit of this device (RM) and the AeroDR Detector are not established.
• The RM setting set on the AeroDR Detector is wrong.
• The device-sub ID of the set AeroDR Detector is wrong.
In those cases, handle the problem following the chart below.
15.4.1 Handling chart

15.4 Measures in case where AeroDR Detector is not properly displayed on this device
Is the LED display of No Refer to "AeroDR SYSTEM Installation/Service

AeroDR Detector normal? Manual" for understanding and handling the situation.
Yes
Run ping with each unit of this device and

AeroDR Detector
No Check the power and connection status of each

Is there a response?
device.
Yes
After running diagnosis of

AeroDR Detector with a diagnosis tool, is there Yes
Correct the wrong setting.
a difference in the settings of this device
and AeroDR Detector?
No
Open the FpdManage.csv file, and reconnect

the AeroDR Detector to the AeroDR I/F Cable.
The settings and the operation of RM itself are normal.

Yes
Is the FpdManege.csv file If the problem recurs after restart, back up the
updated? environment and contact the development
department.
No • For the confirmation method of FpdManege.

csv, refer to "15.4.2 FpdManege.csv file
confirmation method".
(1) Login to the service tool with the RM hybrid
machine. • After handling the problem, restore the previous setting.
(2) Open the RmConfig.xml file, and change • For the confirmation method of debug window, refer to
<StartMode> to HT. "15.4.3 RM debug window confirmation method".
(3) Log out from the service tool.
RM is not started.
No If the problem recurs after restart, back up the
Is the debug window displayed?
environment and contact the development
department.
Yes
Reconnect the AeroDR Detector to the

AeroDR I/F Cable.
No The RM IP address setting of the AeroDR Detec-

Is data displayed in the tor might be wrong.
15 debug window? Check the setting again.
Yes
The registered AeroDR Detector and the con-

Is DeviceID Error Yes nected detector do not agree.
displayed? Check the setting and the serial number of the
AeroDR Detector.
No
The device-sub ID of the connected device

Is DeviceSubID Error Yes (AeroDR I/F Cable etc.) is not registered.
displayed? Check the device-sub ID setting of the connected
device.
If the problem recurs after restart, back up the

environment and contact the development
department.
636
Confirmation method of debug content is as follows.

15.4.2 FpdManege.csv file con-
firmation method O
ONormal display when RM is started (when
this device is started or logging off from
AeroDR Detector location information is registered in a the service tool)
FpdManege.csv file.
1 Using Windows Notepad etc., open [C:\ (1)

KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\System\ (2)
(3)
RmFiles\FpdManege.csv].
(1) Time when an AeroDR Detector is connected and
2 Confirm the location information of the the serial number of the AeroDR Detector
detector. (2) Device-sub ID of device to which AeroDR Detec-
tor is connected
(1) (2) (3) (3) SSID of the exposure room where the AeroDR
DEVICE01 1 1 1 A20P-99991 Detector is registered
DEVICE02 1 1 1 A20P-99992
* Nothing is displayed in the following cases.
(1) Serial number of AeroDR Detector –– This device is not connected to the AeroDR Detec-
(2) Exposure room ID tor.
(3) Serial number of device to which AeroDR Detec- –– The RM IP address within the AeroDR Detector
tor is connected is not set correctly.
O
O Display when an AeroDR Detector which is
not registered in the system is connected.
15.4.3 RM debug window con-
firmation method
1 Using Windows Notepad etc., open [C:\ (1)

KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\System\
RmFiles\RmConfig.xml]. (1) DeviceID Error is displayed.
O
O Display when an AeroDR Detector is con-
2 In the file, change "<StartMode>H</Start nected to a device not registered in the
Mode>" to "<StartMode>HT</Start system
Mode>", and save the file.
3 When RM is started (when starting this de-

vice or logging off from the service tool), (1)
the screen below is displayed.
(1) DeviceSubID Error is displayed.
15
637
15.5 If the RM setting data is corrupted
Perform the following when RM setting data is dam-

aged. 15.5.2 If there are multiple units of this
device, and the RM setting data of
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • the RM client machine is corrupted
• An RM hybrid machine is this device with [RM set- Perform the following when the RM setting data of the
ting] set to [Hybrid].
RM client machine is corrupted.
• An RM client machine is this device with [RM set-
ting] set to [Client].
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 1 Display the intermediate screens on all
15.5.1 For 1 unit of this device Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to
Perform the following if there is a single unit of this de-
display the intermediate screen".
vice. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Use the backup data created when set- 2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
tings were completed, and restore the RM diate screen.
setting data.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For restoration of system information, refer to
"17.4.2 System information restoring".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
3 Copy the [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\

Config\System\RmFiles] folder on the RM
hybrid machine to an external storage me-
dia, etc.
15 4 Replace the corrupted setting data in the

[C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\System\
RmFiles] folder in the RM client machine
with the folder copied in step 3.
5 Change <StartMode>H</StartMode>
of [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\
System\RmFiles\RmConfig.xml] to
<StartMode>C</StartMode>.
638
6 Restart all units of this device.

15.5.3 If there are multiple units of this
device, and the RM setting data of
7 Disconnect all AeroDR Detectors, and the RM hybrid machine is corrupted
then reconnect them.
Perform the following when the RM setting data of the
RM hybrid machine is corrupted.
8 Check whether the RM operates normally.
1 Display the intermediate screens on all

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

diate screen.

3 Copy the [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Con-
fig\System\RmFiles] folder on the RM cli-
ent machine to an external storage media,
etc.
4 Replace the corrupted setting data in the

[C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\System\
RmFiles] folder in the RM hybrid machine
with the folder copied in step 3. 15
5 Change <StartMode>C</StartMode>
of [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\
System\RmFiles\RmConfig.xml] to
<StartMode>H</StartMode>.
639
6 Restart all units of this device.
7 Disconnect all AeroDR Detectors, and

then reconnect them.
8 Check whether the RM operates normally.

15
640
15.6 Logs (operation history)
The logs (operation history) of the devices are record-

ed in the hard disk of this device. The recorded logs
can be confirmed and collected.
15.6.1 Confirmation of the log
Confirm the logs (operation history) recorded in this

device as follows.
2 Press the CS-7 icon. • The log viewer screen is displayed.
4 Press [Setting].
15
3 Press [Log].
641
5 Set conditions for the logs to display, and HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

press [OK].
• If the times for this device and connected periph-
eral devices do not match, then there may be a
disparity between contents of the displayed log
and the time. In this case, input an adjustment time
into [Module filter setting] in the setting screen, and
press [OK].
• The log of activity before the time of this device
synchronized with the one of the AeroDR Detector
and the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit cannot
be displayed. View the log file directly to see the
log of activity before the times synchronized.
–– AeroDR Detector log file: C:\KonicaMinolta\
Console\Data\log\DrCassette\yyyymmdd_
<AeroDR Detector serial number>.txt
–– AeroDR Generator Interface Unit log file: C:\
KonicaMinolta\Console\Data\log\AgiBox\
yyyymmdd_< AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
serial number>.txt
The times synchronize when the communications
of this device and the AeroDR Detector and Aero-
• The following conditions can be set. DR Generator Interface Unit start.
–– Display period ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
–– Event filter
–– Module filter
6 Logs meeting the conditions are dis-

played in [Log Data].
15
642
3 Press [Backup/Restore], and press [Back-

15.6.2 Log collection up].
Collect the logs (operation history) recorded in this de-

vice as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Pressing [Delete examination personal information] does
not delete personal information contained in logs.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Select [Log].

5 Press [Browse] and choose where to store

the collected logs. 15
643
6 To collect logs on a specific date or pe-

riod, select [Specify Duration].
9 Press [OK].
7 Press on the calendar icon and set the

date or period on the displayed calendar.
• Collecting of logs will start.
10 Press [OK].
• Press on the calendar icon to select the start date

and the end date.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
11 When log collection is completed, press
• Collecting the logs on the date before and after an [Close].
error is useful for error analysis.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
8 Press [Execute].
15
12 Write the log files collected in the save

folder to external memory media, etc.
644
15.7 Logs (AeroDR Detector)
The logs (operation history) of the AeroDR Detector

are recorded in the hard disk of this device. The re-
corded logs can be collected and confirmed.
15.7.1 Log collection
Collect the logs (operation history) of the AeroDR De-

tector recorded in this device as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Detector registered in the exposure
room is the only AeroDR Detector from which logs • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
can be collected.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Press [Log] on the sub-menu screen.
1 Display the system monitor screen, and

register an AeroDR Detector from which
logs will be collected in the exposure
room.
2 Turn on the AeroDR Detector from which

logs will be collected.

4 Press the AeroDR Detector icon.
15
• The AeroDR Detector log screen is displayed.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• The AeroDR Detector log screen shows the serial
number and name of the AeroDR Detector regis-
tered in the exposure room.
• To get logs of an AeroDR Detector not registered in
the exposure room, close the service tools, register
the AeroDR Detector from which you want to get
logs on the system monitor screen, and then dis-
play the AeroDR Detector log screen again.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
645
6 Press [Log Acquisition] of the AeroDR De-

tector from which you want to get logs. 15.7.2 Confirmation of the log
Confirm the logs (operation history) of the AeroDR De-

tector recorded in this device as follows.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

diate screen.
• Displays a message indicating that log acquisition

was successful.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The log will be saved in "C:\KonicaMinolta\Con-
sole\Data\Log\DrCassetteIf ".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
7 Press [OK].
3 Open [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Data\
Log\DrCassetteIf] with Explorer.
4 Open a text file in the folder with Notepad.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
8 Press [Close]. • Log files are saved with the name "<Serial number
of AeroDR Detector>.txt".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
15
646
15.8 Collection of images
The procedure for collecting images is as follows. 3 Press [Backup/Restore], and press [Backup].
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Images are backed up together with the examina-
tion data.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
4 Select [Study].
• The user tool screen is displayed. 15.8 Collection of images
• A list of studies which can be collected are dis-

played in [Study List]. 15
647
5 Press [Browse] and choose where to store 9 Select the studies to collect from the
the collected images. [Study List].
10 Press [Execute].
6 To collect images taken on a specific date
or period, select [Specify Duration].
7 Press on the calendar icon and set the

date or period when the image was taken
on the displayed calendar.
11 Press [OK].
• Press on the calendar icon to select the start date

15 and the end date.
• Collecting of images will start.
8 Press [Protect Personal Information] as

needed.
• Personal information of the patient is deleted from
the image.
648
12 Press [OK].
13 When image collection is completed,

press [Close].
14 Write the image files collected in the save

folder to external memory media, etc.
15
649
15.9 Analysis of false detection of a panel, etc.
This section describes the procedure for analyzing 3 Press [AeroSync signal acquisition] on
false detection of panels, etc. the sub-menu screen.
15.9.1 Procedure for ing false

detection of a panel, etc.
Advance preparation
1 Confirm that AeroDR Detector subject to

analysis of false detection is registered in
this device.
2 Confirm that [Sync Mode] is set to [XARM]

for [Exposure Room].
3 Arrange AeroDR Detector to reproduce the

exposure environment where the problem,
such as false detection, occurred.
Execution procedure
1 Open the service tool screen.
• The Aero Sync signal acquisition screen is dis-

played.
4 Select AeroDR Detector subject to expo-

sure.
15
650
5 Set [X-ray Exposure] to [No Exposure].
• Do not enter [Exposure Conditions].

• The measured result is displayed.
6 Press [Execute].
9 Press [Save].
• The measurement data (Four Aero Sync signal im-

ages and the exposure condition file) is stored.

7 Press [OK].
• When the completion screen is displayed, press
[OK].
10 After the completion of exposure, press

[…] to determine the output destination of
the measurement data.
8 Wait until the Aero Sync signal acquisi-

tion finishes, then press [OK] when the 11 Press [Export] to export the measurement
completion screen is displayed. data.
15
• The measurement data is exported.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Check the volume of the data before exporting it.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
651
12 When the completion message is dis- 16 Backup the complete set of the data that
played, press [OK]. is automatically stored in the storage fold-
er of this device, and send it to the analy-
sis department.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Measurement data is saved in a folder that is au-
tomatically created within the output directory that
you specify in step 10.
• The names of the automatically created folder and
measurement file are in the following format.
13 Press [Close] to quit the tool. –– Folder name: NoExposure
–– File name: XRaySurvey_FPDID_YYYYMMD-
Dhhmmss_FrameNN.raw
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If you set [Sync Mode] in step 2 to [XARM] in
"Advance preparation", revert to the original setting
before shutting down.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

diate screen.
15
652
15.10 Linkage problem between this device and REGIUS
Perform the following when a problem occurs with the 3 Press [DB].
linkage between this device and REGIUS.
15.10.1 When unable to connect

with REGIUS
If unable to connect with REGIUS, check and edit the
JM database.
O
OStart-up of the JM edit screen
2 Press the JM icon.

• The JM edit screen is displayed.
O
OConfirmation of the device host name
1 Double-click [c_status] on the JM edit

screen.
• The sub-menu screen is displayed. 15
• The c_status screen is displayed.
653
2 Confirm that the host name set in [Console O

OConfirmation of the REGIUS host name
Host Name] of [CR Unit Setting] is cor-
rectly displayed in [c_name]. 1 Double-click [r_status] on the JM edit
screen.
3 If the host name is incorrect, select the

host name displayed in [c_name] and in-
put the correct host name.
4 Press [Reload].
O
OConfirmation of image re-transfer settings
1 Confirm the [img_ack] value of the c_sta-

tus screen.
• The r_status screen is displayed.
2 Confirm that the host name set in [Reader

Host Name] of [CR Unit Setting] is cor-
rectly displayed in [r_name].
• Confirm that the value corresponds to the REGIUS
set in [Reader Type] of [CR Unit Setting].
REGIUS "img_ack" value

When using REGIUS 110
(earlier than Ver.1.10) or 0
REGIUS 170/190
When not using REGIUS 110
(Ver.1.10 or later) nor 1
REGIUS 170/190 3 If the host name is incorrect, select the
host name displayed in [r_name] and in-
put the correct host name.
2 If the [img_ack] value is incorrect, select
the numerical value of [img_ack] and in-
put the correct value.
4 Press [Reload].
5 Press [Close].
3 Press [Close]. • This closes the r_status screen and returns to the
15 • This closes the c_status screen and returns to the
JM edit screen.
JM edit screen.
654
O
OConfirmation of the cassette barcode regis- 5 Press [Queries] on the JM edit screen.
tration method
1 Double-click [sys_config] on the JM edit

screen.
6 Move the cursor to the right window, right-

click to display a menu and select [New]
from the menu.

• The sys_config screen is displayed.
2 Confirm the [reg_type] value.
• Confirm that the value corresponds to the registra-

tion method set in [Cassette Barcode Registration
Method] of [CR Unit Setting].
Cassette barcode registration • The [Query builder] screen opens.

[reg_type] value
method
Barcode registration 0
Reading order specification 1
7 Input "update sys_config set reg_type=0
where reg_type=1" in the [Query builder]
screen and press [Execute query].
3 If the [reg_type] value is incorrect, select

the numerical value of [reg_type] and in- 15
put the correct value.
4 Press [Close].
• This closes the sys_config screen and returns to
the JM edit screen.
• [sys_config] is edited.
655
8 Close the JM edit screen. 3 Confirm the host names in [c_name] and
[r_name].
9 Check whether the connection to REGIUS

can be established normally.
15.10.2 If the power control and error noti- • If the startup and shutdown synchronization was
fication of REGIUS is not activated set by [Power Control] of [CR Unit Setting], confirm
whether the host names of this device and RE-
If the power control and error notification of REGIUS
GIUS are correctly displayed in [c_name] and [r_
are not operating correctly, check and edit the JM da-
name].
tabase.
1 Display the JM edit screen. 4 If the host name is incorrect, select the
host name displayed in [c_name] or [r_
name], and input the correct host name.
5 Confirm the [alert] value.

• If the error notification synchronization has been

set by [Notify Error] of [CR Unit Setting], confirm
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
whether the numerical value of [alert] is [1] (error
• For the operation, refer to "When unable to connect
notification on).
with REGIUS" of "CS-7 Installation/Service Manual
for Service Tool/User Tool Screen".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 6 If the numerical value is incorrect, select
the [alert] number and input "1".
2 Double-click [relations] on the JM edit
screen.
7 Press [Close].
• This closes the relations screen and returns to the
JM edit screen.
8 Exit the JM edit screen.
9 Confirm that the power control and error

notification of REGIUS are operating cor-
rectly.
15
• The relations screen is displayed.
656
15.11 If a fault occurs with the sub monitor
15.11.1 If the screen goes black or 15.11.2 If the screen is dis-

freezes after disconnect- played vertically
ing the Ethernet cable Perform the following when the sub monitor screen is
Perform the following when the sub monitor screen is displayed vertically.
black and freezes.

1 Remove the Sub Monitor Adaptor's AC
adapter from the wall outlet, and then re- Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
insert it. • For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to
• The Sub Monitor Adaptor will restart. display the intermediate screen".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2 Check whether the screen is displayed

normally. 2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
diate screen.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If the above procedure does not solve the problem,
restart this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• If the screen turns black, the following procedure
can be used to solve the problem.
(1) Press [Ctrl] key + [Alt] key + [Delete] key on the
keyboard.
(2) Press [Cancel], close the displayed screen and
refresh the screen.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

15
657
4 Select [Landscape] from [Orientation],

15.11.3 If the screen is not displayed
and press [Apply].
on the sub monitor at the
time of starting this device
The mirror setting may be turned off. Enable the mirror
setting using the following procedure.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5 Press [Keep changes].
diate screen.
6 Select [Duplicate these displays] from

[Multiple displays], and press [Apply].

7 Press [OK].
15

normally.
658
4 Select [Duplicate these displays] from

15.11.4 To revert the Sub Monitor Adap-
[Multiple displays], and press [Apply].
tor settings to their defaults
When it is necessary to return the Sub Monitor Adaptor
to default settings, initialize the Sub Monitor Adaptor.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the Sub Monitor Adaptor is initialized, the
settings will return to the following default values.
Setting Item Default values
DHCP ON
IP address 0.0.0.0
Subnet mask 0.0.0.0
5 Check whether the driver is correctly in- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
stalled.
1 Remove the Sub Monitor Adaptor's AC

6 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu, adapter from the wall outlet.
and then press [NetDA Manager] within
[All Programs].
2 While pressing [RESET] on the Sub Moni-
tor Adaptor, insert the AC adapter into the
7 Check whether the Sub Monitor Adaptor's wall outlet.
IP address is correctly configured, and
whether the Sub Monitor Adaptor is con- RESET

nected. Sub Monitor
Adaptor
3 Check that the sub monitor's [STATUS]

lamp is lit, and then release [RESET].
• The Sub Monitor Adaptor is initialized.
• If the IP address setting or the connection status is

not correct, configure the Sub Monitor Adaptor set-
ting again.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the procedure, refer to "12.10.4 Setting the Sub
Monitor Adaptor".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
15
normally.
659
15.12 Adjusting the print area of the requested image
dimensions (Using third party printers)
Requested image dimensions are used when a con- 1 Close the service tools.
nection is made to third party printers. Also, if the
stamp is set to ON, a stamp is written on the image 2 Display the intermediate screen.
through this device and sent to the printer as a single
image.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
15.12 Adjusting the print area of the requested image dimensions (Using third party printers)
Stamp
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3 Press [Windows Desktop].
In this case, the dimensions of the image sent may be

trimmed to the size based on the DRYPRO793 setting
data, depending on the film used. So when the print
area of DRYPRO793 and a third party printer is greatly
deviated, the image may be output in the following
condition.
Stamp
Position
Gap
4 Prepare the setting file.

• C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Config\System\Platform\
System\PluginSetting\ImagerOutputDataAccessor\
_ print1.xml ... Setting file for Printer 1
Stamp Cut
In such cases, adjust the print area in the following

procedure.
15
660
5 Back up the setting files.
6 Open the setting files using Windows

Notepad, etc.
7 Change the setting values.
Do not change
this setting value
Adjust the hori-

zontal dimension
of the film by units
of 0.1 mm.
Adjust the vertical

dimension of the
film by units of
0.1 mm.
8 Save the setting files.
15
661
15.13 Acquiring setting values of each device
If there are differences in the setting values of the 4 Confirm the setting values.
AeroDR Detector, AeroDR Generator Interface Unit
(AeroDR Portable RF Unit), and AeroDR Stitching Setting Item Settings
Unit, and the setting values registered in this device for
[Serial Num- The serial number of the selected
these units, the system will not operate properly. In this ber] AeroDR Detector is displayed.
case, please use the following method to display a list
of the setting values in each device and those in this The display name of the selected
[Display Name]
device, check for differences, and correct the setting AeroDR Detector is displayed.
values as required. [Parameter] The setting items are displayed.
[Default The default values of the setting items
value(Range)] are displayed.
15.13.1 Acquiring AeroDR Detec-
[Parameters Setting values registered in this device
tor setting values set in CS-7] are displayed.
[Parameters The setting values in the AeroDR
1 Start the service tool. set in panel] Detector are displayed.
[Hints for If there are difference in the [Param-
changing the eters set in CS-7] and the [Parameters
2 Display the AeroDR unit setting screen. setting param-
eters]
set in panel], a setting correction
procedure will be displayed as a hint.
3 In the AeroDR Detector list of [AeroDR

Detector Setting], press [Diagnose] on the
AeroDR Detector from which the setting
5 After checking, press [Close] to close the
screen.
values will be acquired.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• Make the necessary corrections with reference to
[Hints for changing the setting parameters].
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
15 • The setting values are displayed in a list.
662
15.13.2 Acquiring the setting 15.13.3 Acquiring the setting

values for the AeroDR values for the AeroDR
Generator Interface Unit Stitching Unit
(AeroDR Portable RF Unit)
3 Press [Diagnose] on the [Stitching Unit
3 Press [Diagnose] on the [XG BOX Setting] Setting] screen.
screen.
• The setting values are displayed in a list.
• The setting values are displayed in a list.

4 Confirm the setting values.
4 Confirm the setting values. [Serial Num- The serial number of the selected
ber] AeroDR Stitching Unit is displayed.
The serial number of the selected The display name of the selected
[Serial Num- [Display Name]
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit is AeroDR Stitching Unit is displayed.
ber]
displayed.
[Parameter] The setting items are displayed.
The display name of the selected
[Display Name] AeroDR Generator Interface Unit is [Default The default values of the setting items
displayed. value(Range)] are displayed.
[Parameter] The setting items are displayed. [Parameters Setting values registered in this device
set in CS-7] are displayed.
[Default The default values of the setting items
value(Range)] are displayed. [Param set in The setting values in the AeroDR
Stitchin' unit] Stitching Unit are displayed.
[Parameters Setting values registered in this device
set in CS-7] are displayed. [Hints for If there are differences in the [Param-
changing the eters set in CS-7] and the [Param set
[Param set in The setting values in the AeroDR Gen-
setting param- in Stitchin' unit], a setting correction
XG-BOX] erator Interface Unit are displayed.
eters] procedure will be displayed as a hint.
[Hints for If there are differences in the [Param-
changing the eters set in CS-7] and the [Param 15
setting param- set in XG-BOX], a setting correction
eters] procedure will be displayed as a hint. 5 After checking, press [Close] to close the
screen.
5 After checking, press [Close] to close the HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

screen. • Make the necessary corrections with reference to
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Make the necessary corrections with reference to
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
663
15.14 Trouble caused by multiple use of wireless LAN adapter
When two wireless LAN adapters are installed on this

device and wireless LAN adapter (main) is connected
to a PDA, if the wireless LAN adapter (main) is discon-
nected, the wireless LAN adapter (extension) will be
mistakenly recognized as the wireless LAN adapter
(main), and a normal connection will no longer be pos-
sible. In this case, please perform the following recov-
ery procedure.
Built-in wireless
LAN adapter
または
Access point of
the institution
Example of display dur- Example of display when
ing normal operation an error has occurred
CS-7
2 Right-click [Logitec Client Utility] in the

task tray and select [Change to Client
Wireless LAN adapter Wireless LAN adapter Mode].
(main) (extension)
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• This procedure is only effective in Japan.
• The Logitec LAN-W150N/U2BK is used as the
wireless LAN adapter as an example here. The
setting method may be different for the wireless
LAN adapter that is used. For details, refer to the
operation manual of the wireless LAN adapter that
is used.
• The screens are shown in Japanese as the Japa-
nese model Logitec LAN-W150N/U2BK is used as
an example.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 3 Attach the wireless LAN adapter (main) to
the USB port on the left side of this device.
1 Press the wireless LAN icon in the task
tray and check the network connection in- 4 Disconnect the wireless LAN adapter (ex-
formation. tension).
• The [Select a Wireless LAN card] screen is dis-
played.
15
• The network connection information will be dis-

5 Press [OK] on the [Select a Wireless LAN
card] screen.
played. If an error has occurred, the connection
destination of the wireless LAN adapter(extension)
will be displayed as "SoftAP-5E" etc..
664
6 Right-click [Client Utility] in the task tray

and select [Change to AP Mode].
• The [ICS Select WAN Adapter] screen is displayed.
7 Press [×] on the [ICS Select WAN Adapter]

screen.

• The [Logitec Software AP Utility] screen is dis-
played.
8 Press [Adopt] on the [Logitec Software AP

Utility] screen and then press [x].
15
9 Attach the wireless LAN adapter (exten-
sion) to the USB port on the right side of
this device.
665
15.15 How to migrate data when replacing the device housing
When replacing the hard disk or computer housings, 4 Double-click "C:\konicaminolta\JM\jm_

use the following procedures to migrate data on this backup_all.bat".
device without using backup tools or restore tools. • The command prompt is displayed.
15.15.1 Operation using re- HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

placement source • When the processing has finished, the command
prompt will disappear and the following file will be
created in "C:\Konicaminolta\JM\backup".
1 Check and take a note of [Institution –– c_startus.tar
Name], [Institution Address], [Telephone –– exchange_parts_tbl.tar
Number], [Department Name], [Station AE –– kddm_jm.tar
Title] and [Console Name] of this device –– r_status.tar
set on the CS-7 setting screen. –– r_version.tar
–– relations.tar
–– sys_config.tar
2 Display the intermediate screen. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 5 Copy each of the following folders directly

• For the intermediate screen, refer to "2.7.5 How to under "C:\Konicaminolta\" to an external
display the intermediate screen". HDD or the like.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Console
• CS-3\Env\Data\Correct
• JM\backup
diate screen.
15
666
15.15.2 Operation using re-

6 Delete the following folder directly under
"C:\Konicaminolta\Console", and copy
placement destination each of the folders from directly under
"C:\Konicaminolta\Console.org".
• Config\System\LMS
1 Newly install this device of the same ver-
• Config\System\Platform\System\Platform\
sion as the replacement source.
InstitutionInformation
• Config\System\Platform\System\Platform\License
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
7 Restart the replacement destination unit
of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 8 Open the CR unit setting screen and press
[OK] to close the screen.

diate screen. 9 Display the intermediate screen.
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
10 Import the license.

Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the import of the license, refer to "4.6 Registra-
tion of license".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
11 Restart the replacement destination unit

of this device.
4 Change the name of "C:\Konicaminolta\
Console" to "Console.org".
12 Double-click "C:\konicaminolta\JM\jm_
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • restore_all.bat" and restore the content of
the JM.
• If a message such as "Since this file or folder is
• The command prompt is displayed.
open with other program, the operation cannot be
completed." is displayed, and folder name cannot
be changed, close Rmif.exe using the Task Man- HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
ager and then change the folder name. • When the processing has finished, the command
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • prompt will disappear.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 15
5 Copy the following folders, which are
backed up on the replacement source, to 13 Restart the replacement destination unit
directly under "C:\Konicaminolta\". of this device.
• Console
• CS-3\Env\Data\Correct
• JM\backup
667
14 Open the setting screen of this device and

input [Institution Name], [Institution Ad-
dress], [Telephone Number], [Department
Name], [Station AE Title] and [Console
Name] of the replacement source.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• [Institution Name], [Institution Address] and [Tele-
phone Number] will be imported from the license
registration details when importing the license.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
15 Open the equipment information screen

and perform activation.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the activation, refer to "4.17 Activation".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
15
668
15.16 Collecting images for analysis
The method for collecting the images for analysis with- IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
out using the backup tool is as follows.
• When there are multiple examination dates, copy
all the folders of the relevant examination dates.
1 From the examination list screen, make a • If there is only a small number of images, it does
note of the examination date of the exami- not present a problem to make a full copy of "C:\
nation including the image you want to Konicaminolta\Data".
• If there are a large number of images, check which
back up.
image files belong to the examination and contact
the destination of the request for analysis.
2 Display the intermediate screen. • Send the backup data created by backing up the
DB and log with a backup tool to ask for the analy-
sis.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

diate screen.
15.16 Collecting images for analysis

4 Copy each of the following folders directly
under "C:\Konicaminolta\Data" to an ex-
ternal HDD or the like.
• DB
• AutoProc\<ExaminationDate(YYYYMMDD)>
• Display\<ExaminationDate(YYYYMMDD)>
• Header\<ExaminationDate(YYYYMMDD)>
15
• Image\<ExaminationDate(YYYYMMDD)>
• PastImage\<ExaminationDate(YYYYMMDD)>
669
15.17 How to reset passwords
The procedure for resetting a service tool password 2 Press [Windows Desktop] on the interme-
and user tool password is as follows. diate screen.
O
OHow to reset the service tool password
1 Shut down this device.
2 Start up this device and press F8 key on

the keyboard before the Windows logo ap-
pears.
3 Select Safe mode after the detailed boot

option screen appears.
• When Windows has started without displaying the
detailed boot option screen, retry from step 1.
4 When Windows 7 starts in Safe mode, ex-

3 Execute [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Bin\
ecute [C:\KonicaMinolta\Console\Bin\Tool\
Tool\PWReset\pw_reset_u.bat] from the
PWReset\pw_reset_m.bat].
desktop of Windows.
5 When the window appears and a message

4 When the window appears and a message
"Do you want to reset maintenance pass-
"Do you want to reset UserTool pass-
word? (Y/N)" appears, enter [Y].
word? (Y/N)" appears, enter [Y].

O
OHow to reset the user tool password
17.17 How to reset passwords
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
15
670
15.18 AeroDR Stitching Unit Version Upgrade Failure Recovery
If the AeroDR Stitching Unit fails to upgrade the ver-

sion of its system firmware, perform recovery accord-
ing to the following procedure.

• The Update AeroDR stitching system firmware
Stitching System.
4 Press [File import] and then select the
firmware upgrade file.
17.18 AeroDR Stitching Unit Version Upgrade Failure Recovery

5 After selecting the firmware upgrade file,
turn on the power switch of the AeroDR
Stitching Unit's power supply unit.
6 Press [Update].
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Press the [Update] button within 30 seconds of
activating the AeroDR Stitching Unit. If the [Update]
button is not pressed within 30 seconds, the con-
nection with the AeroDR Stitching Unit is discon-
nected. In such a case, repeat steps 5 and 6.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3 Press [Firmware Update] on the sub-menu
screen.
15
671
672
Chapter
16
Error Code
This chapter describes the error codes and countermeasures.
673
16.1 Types of error codes and recognition methods
16.1.1 Types of error codes

Error messages are all displayed in a dialog box. The types and description of error messages are as follows.
Types Description
Communication errors An error has been caused in communications.
Software errors An error has been caused in this device.
AeroDR Detector errors An error has been caused in the AeroDR Detector.
AeroDR Generator Interface Unit errors An error has been caused in the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit.
AeroDR Portable RF Unit errors An error has been caused in the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
AeroDR Stitching System errors An error has been caused in the AeroDR Stitching System.
REGIUS errors An error has been caused in the REGIUS series.
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• There is no error code for the AeroDR Portable UF Unit.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
16.1.2 Recognition method for error codes

The initial letters have been decided for each type of error code. When an error message has been displayed, identify
the type of error in accordance with the flow and check the error description and the countermeasures in each item.
16.1 Types of error codes and recognition methods
Error code
Check the initial letters of the error code.
"C2" is dis- "C3" is dis- "F" is displayed "G" is displayed "S" is displayed A numerical value
played as the played as the as the initial let- as the initial let- as the initial let- is displayed as
initial letters of initial letters of ter of the error ter of the error ter of the error the initial letter of
the error code. the error code. code. code. code. the error code.
Using the Aero- Using the Aero-

DR Generator DR Portable RF
Interface Unit. Unit.
16
Check "16.2.1 Check "16.2.2 Check " 1 6 . 2 . 3 Check "16.2.4 Check "16.2.5 Check "16.2.6 Check "16.2.7
Communication Software errors" AeroDR Detec- AeroDR Generator AeroDR Portable AeroDR Stitching REGIUS series
errors" and per- and perform the tor errors" and Interface Unit er- RF Unit errors" System errors" errors" and per-
form the corre- corresponding perform the cor- rors" and perform and perform the and perform the form the corre-
sponding coun- countermea- responding coun- the corresponding corresponding corresponding sponding coun-
termeasures. sures. termeasures. countermeasures. countermeasures. countermeasures. termeasures.
674
16.2 Error codes and countermeasures
If the following error codes appear, take the respective countermeasures.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• After performing countermeasures, if the problem does not go away, collect the error environment data and logs to
ask for the analysis.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The "*" at the tail of the error code are indicating a character from 0 to 9 or from A to Z.
• For the operation of AeroDR SYSTEM and REGIUS series, refer to the respective operation manuals or installation/
service manuals.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
16.2.1 Communication errors
Error codes starting with "C2" are indicating communication errors.
Error code Displayed message Error description Corrective actions

(1) Put the examination
on hold and restart
Exposure conditions command the X-ray device.
C21522 X-ray system error detected.
sending for X-ray system failed. (2) After restarting, start
the examination from
the beginning.
X-ray system connection error. Check the network
C21524 X-ray system connection error
Check the network. status.
Check the exposure

C21526 Parameter setting to the X-ray system error. Setting error conditions set on this
device.
C21541 X-ray system error detected. Device error Restart the X-ray device
C21559 Internal error occurred in X-ray communication process. Internal error and this device.
C27600 Initialization error Existence check of the AJS failed
C27601
Initialization error Connection to the Sanyo failed
C27602
Creation of built-in socket server
C27603 Initialization error
failed
Restart of built-in socket server
C27604 Initialization error
failed
C27605 Health check error
Existence check of the AJS failed
C27606 Scheduled check error
C27607
Scheduled check error Connection to the Sanyo failed (1) Restart the device.
C27608
(2) Check the connec-
C27618 Error in study completed notification to RIS Command sending to the AJS failed tion settings.
Command sending process to the
C27619 Error in study completed notification to RIS
AJS failed 16
C27620 Patient search error Connection to the Sanyo failed
C27621 Patient search error Sending to the Sanyo failed
C27622 Patient search error Reception of error from the Sanyo
C27623
C27624 Patient search error Sending to the Sanyo failed
C27625
Disconnection of communication
C27626 Patient search error
to the Sanyo failed
675

C27628 Folder check error Folder is not found
C27629 Folder check error Creating a file failed
C27630 Folder check error Writing in a file failed
C27631 Folder check error Closing a file failed
C27632 Folder check error Opening a file failed
C27633 Folder check error Reading a file failed
C27634 Folder check error Closing a file failed
C27635 Folder check error Changing a file name failed
C27636 Folder check error Deleting a file failed
Connecting to a network folder (1) Restart the device.
C27637 Folder check error (2) Check the connec-
failed
tion settings.
Creating a file in a network folder
C27638 Folder check error
failed
Deleting a file in a network folder
failed
Disconnecting a network folder
failed
C27641 Folder check error FTP connection failed
Storing a file on the FTP connec-
tion destination failed
Updating a file on the FTP con-
nection destination failed
Communication error occurred in RIS-OUT communi-
C2770* cation. Communication error
Check the communication destination.
Communication error occurred in RIS-OUT communi-
C27730 cation. N-CREATE communication failed
Communication error occurred in RIS-OUT communi- Check the network
C27731 cation. N-SET communication failed status.

Communication error occurred in RIS-IN communica-
C27740 C-FIND communication failed
tion. Check the communication destination.
Communication error occurred in RIS-IN communica-
C27741 tion. D-FIND communication failed
16
676
16.2.2 Software errors
Error codes starting with "C3" are indicating software errors.

C35500 Failed to initialize. Initialization error Restart this device.
There was an error with reading the set- Reconfirm the MWM settings and
C35501 Setting reading error
ting file. store them again.
(1) Check the connection destina-
C35502 A time-out occurred. Time-out error tion.
(2) Check the connection settings.
Error occurred in the DICOM com- tion, network status, and con-
C35503 A socket error occurred.
munication nection settings.
(2) Restart this device.
Collect the error environment data
C35520 Failed to initialize. Initialization error
and logs to ask for the analysis.
Reconfirm the connection settings
There was an error with reading the set-
C35521 Setting reading error for the higher system and store
ting file.
them again.
Detach result notification response
C35522 A time-out occurred. tion.
time-out
(2) Check the settings.
C35540 Failed to initialize. Initialization error
There was an error with reading the set- Reconfirm the connection settings for
C35541 Setting reading error
ting file. the higher system and store them again.
C35542 A time-out occurred. Time-out tion.
(2) Check the connection settings.
[AeroDR Detector name] Connecting
C37001

detector
AeroDR Detector connection error
[AeroDR Detector name] disconnection
C37002 Check the connection status of
error
AeroDR Detector and communica-
Error relating to the setting re- tion cables including internal con-
[AeroDR Detector name] Disconnected
C37005 quest to AeroDR Detector before nections of the device.
energy saving not set.
the detection of its disconnection
[AeroDR Detector name] wireless forbid- Network connection not estab-
C37006
den error lished
(1) Check the connection status of
[AeroDR Detector name] versionup error AeroDR Detector and communi-
Version upgrade failed. Network error or disconnection cation cables including internal
C37007
Check the connection and restart the while updating connections of the device.
AeroDR cassette. (2) Restart AeroDR Detector and
this device.
[AeroDR Detector name] calibration error AeroDR Detector and communi-
Network error or disconnection
C37008 Calibration failed. cation cables including internal
while transferring images
Check the connection and retry. connections of the device.
(2) Restart a calibration tool.
16
[AeroDR Detector name]
AeroDR Detector and communi-
Wired/Wireless connection is changed
Network error or disconnection cation cables including internal
C37009 during image transfer.
while transferring images connections of the device.
Return the panel to previous connection.
(2) Re-acquire images from the
Prepare to retrieve the image.
AeroDR Detector.
[AeroDR Detector name] Correction pro-
cessing error Unexpected error occurred in the
C37010 Restart this device and retake.
Correction processing error. process of correcting images
Restart the CS-7 and retake.
677

Exposure field setting error. (1) Check the connection status of
Communication error in exposure
C37054 Check the network connection and touch network devices and communi-
field setting command sending
this exposure condition. cation cables including internal
Communication error. connections of the devices.
Communication error in Console- (2) Press exposure conditions when
C37055 Check the network connection and touch
Ready sending "Ready" is displayed.
this exposure condition.
network devices and communi-
Version up failed.
Network error or disconnection cation cables including internal
C37056 Check the connection and restart the
while updating connections of the devices.
(2) Restart the AeroDR Interface
Unit and this device.
Failed to set the Setting data.
C37058 Setting value error of the AGI
Please check network connection and Execute the operation again.
C37059 device
retry.
Check the connection status of net-
Exposure sync setting error. Communication error in X-ray
work devices and communication
C37060 Check the network connection and touch synchronization setting command
cables including internal connec-
this exposure condition. sending
tions of the devices.
C37103 Unknown AeroDR Detector. Installation and settings of AeroDR Install and set AeroDR Detector.
C37104 Unknown exposure device. Detector not completed Install and set an exposure device.
RM management table error.
C37105 RM management table damaged Restore the setting data of RM.
Contact a service representative.
Version discrepancy between
Version up does not match. Update the version of AeroDR De-
C37106 AeroDR Detector and RM (this
Contact a service representative. tector or this device.
device)
RM management table error.
C37107 RM management table damaged Restore the setting data of RM.
RM management table error. (1) Check the network status.
C37108 Disconnection of a network cable
Contact a service representative. (2) Check the status of this device
in synchronization or RM server
RM management table error. set up for the RM hybrid and
C37109 down
Check the network connection. restart it.
C37300 Termination status Termination error

C3730* (1) Check the connection status.
C3731* Initialization error Initialization error (2) Restart this device.
C3732* (3) Check the higher system set-
C3733* tings.
Conversion error Conversion error
C3734*
Internal error occurred in DICOM commu-
C37350 Collect the error environment data
nication.
C37351 and logs to ask for the analysis.
Internal error
Failed to get DICOM communication
C37352 setting. Please confirm communication Check the registration of the device.
setting.
Failed in communication. Please confirm
Failed in communication with the Collect the error environment data
C37353 communication setting and server is work-
connection destination and logs to ask for the analysis.
ing.
Failed in A-ASSOCIATE. Please confirm
Failed in service confirmation of
C37354 communication setting and server is work-
the connection destination
ing. Confirm the settings of this device
16 and the connection destination.
Rejected from server in A-ASSOCIATE
Not allowed by the connection
C37355 due to invalid setting. Please confirm com-
destination
munication setting.
678

Internal error occurred in DICOM commu-
C37356 nication. Internal error
Contact a service representative. Collect the error environment data
Failed in the confirmation when
C37357 It failed in the communication of release.
the communication is completed
Communication denied by the Check whether there is no error at
C37358 A-ABORT was received.
connection destination the connection destination.
C37360 Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT com-
C37361 munication. Incorrect Detach request queue
C37362 Contact a service representative.
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT com-
C37363 munication. Fewer setting information Reconfirm the RIS-OUT settings.
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT com- (1) Check the connection destina-
C37364 munication. Failed in data sending tion.
Contact a service representative. (2) Check the RIS-OUT settings.
C37365 munication. Incorrect Detach request queue
Internal error occurred in RIS-OUT com- and logs to ask for the analysis.
C37366 munication. Failed in sending data setting
C37368
munication. Incorrect Detach request queue
C37369
C37370 munication. Failed in sending data setting

16
679

C37400
C37401 Conversion error Conversion error
C37402
C37403
C37404
C37405
C37406
C37407
Health check error Health check error
C37408
C37409
C3741*
C37420
C37421
C37422
C37423
C37424
C37425
C37426 Scheduled check error Scheduled check error
C37427
C37428
C37429
C37430
C37431
C37432 (1) Check the connection status.
C37433 (2) Restart this device.
C37434 (3) Check the higher system set-
C37435 Termination error Termination error tings.
C37436
C37437
C37438
C3744*
C37454
C37455 Study performing error Study performing error
C37456
C37457
C37458
C37459
Error in study completed notification to Error in study completed notifica-
C3746*
RIS tion to RIS
C37470
C37471
C37472
C37473
C37474
C37475
C37476
C37477 Patient search error Patient search error
C37478
C37479
C3748*
C37495
C37600 munication. Incorrect MPPS request queue
16 C37601 munication. Fewer setting information
680

C37603 munication. Incorrect MPPS request queue
C37604 munication. Fewer setting information
Internal error occurred in RIS-IN commu-
C37610 nication. Incorrect MPPS request queue
Internal error occurred in RIS-IN commu- and logs to ask for the analysis.
C37611 nication. Fewer setting information
Internal error occurred in RIS-IN commu-
C37612 nication. Creating an empty tag failed Check the empty tag setting file.
Internal error occurred in RIS-IN commu- (1) Check the connection destina-
C37613 nication. Failed in data sending tion.
Contact a service representative. (2) Check the settings.
Internal error occurred in HOST communi-
C37662 cation. Failed in data sending (1) Check the connection destina-
Contact a service representative. tion.
(2) Check the host settings.
C37698 Unknown error is happened. Internal error
An undefined error occurred. Collect the error environment data
C37699 An undefined error occurred.[STATUS]
[STATUS] and logs to ask for the analysis.
16
681
16.2.3 AeroDR Detector errors
Error codes starting with "F" are indicating AeroDR Detector errors.

[AeroDR Detector name] internal error
F0100* Internal device has malfunctioned. EEPROM Write error
F0101* Internal device has malfunctioned. EEPROM Read error
F0200* Internal device has malfunctioned. Flash reading size error
F0201* Internal device has malfunctioned. Flash Write error
[AeroDR Detector name] version update error
F0202*
It has failed to update the version. Flash Read error
F0203*
FPGA active signal on wait time-
F0300* Internal device has malfunctioned.
out
F0400* It has failed to update the version. FPGA write driver error
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status
F0900* Device generation error
became worse. Replace the AeroDR
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status Detector.
F0901* Device startup error
became worse.
F0902* Protocol stack registration error
became worse.

F0907* SDIO driver initialization error
became worse.
F0916* BSS filter setting error
became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status Priority connection channel setting
F0917*
became worse. error
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status Disconnection timeout setting er-
F0918*
became worse. ror
F0919* Error report mask setting
became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status Management frame reception filter
F0920*
became worse. setting error
F0921* SSID setting error
became worse.
F0922* Transmission output setting error
became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status After cutoff fixed frequency scan
F0923*
16
682

F0924* Transmission rate setting error
became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status Roaming prohibit mode setting
F0925*
became worse. error
Connection destination AeroDR
F0927* Access Point MAC address acqui-
became worse.
sition error
F0928* SSID acquisition error
became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status Transmission output acquisition
F0929*
became worse. error
F0930* Destination acquisition error
became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status Statistics information acquisition
F0931*
became worse. error
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status Module MAC address acquisition
F0933*
became worse. error
F0934* Transmission error
became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status WPA disconnection event wait
F0938*
became worse. timeout error
F0939* Wireless LAN module error
became worse.
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status Replace the AeroDR
F0940* WLAN driver error Detector.
became worse.
FPGA reset completion interrup-
F0H00* Internal device has malfunctioned.
tion missing
FPGA reading completion inter-
ruption missing

FPGA startup completion interrup-
tion missing
FPGA reading completion inter-
ruption notification incorrect
No X-ray exposure allow notice
interruption from FPGA
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error No X-ray exposure detection no-
F0H05* Internal device has malfunctioned. tice interruption from FPGA (when
Contact a service representative. X-ray standby timeout occurred)
Incorrect notification of reset
completion interruption from FPGA
Error of the X-ray exposure allow
notification interruption from FPGA
16
683

Error of the X-ray detection notifi-
cation interruption from FPGA
No FPGA reset cancel completion
interruption
F0H10* Internal device has malfunctioned. No FPGA reset stop interruption
[AeroDR Detector name] power source error
F0I00* There is a fault in the power source unit. Internal charging start error
F0I01* There is a fault in the power source unit. Internal charging stop error
[AeroDR Detector name] power source error Internal charging start, stop,
F0I02* There is a fault in the power source unit. potential difference error (during
Contact a service representative. power off)
[AeroDR Detector name] power source error Internal charging start, stop,
F0I03* There is a fault in the power source unit. potential difference error (during
Contact a service representative. power on)
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Internal CC charging, excessive
F0I04* There is a degradation or fault in the capacitor. voltage rise error (during power
Contact a service representative. off)
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Internal CC charging, insufficient
F0I05* There is a degradation or fault in the capacitor. voltage rise error (during power
Contact a service representative. off) Replace the AeroDR
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Internal CC charging, excessive Detector.
F0I06* There is a fault in the capacitor. voltage rise error (during power
Contact a service representative. on)
Internal CC charging, insufficient
[AeroDR Detector name] There is a degradation in the
F0I07* voltage rise error (during power
capacitor. Contact a service representative.
on)
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Excessive power consumption at

F0I08* There is a degradation in the capacitor. exposure error (during internal CC
Contact a service representative. charging)
F0I09* There is a degradation in the capacitor. exposure error (during internal CV
Contact a service representative. charging)
F0I10* There is a degradation in the capacitor. exposure error (during charging
Contact a service representative. stop)
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Excessive power consumption
F0I11* There is a degradation in the capacitor. during power off error (during
Contact a service representative. charging stop)
F0I12* There is a degradation in the capacitor. during sensor off error (during
F0I13* There is a degradation in the capacitor. during sensor on error (during
High voltage error (during internal
16 F0I16* There is a fault in the power source unit.
charging)
AeroDR Battery Charger error
High voltage error (during external Replace the AeroDR
F0I17* There is a fault in the AeroDR Battery Charger.
charging) Battery Charger.
[AeroDR Detector name] Power source error
Replace the AeroDR
There is a fault in the Battery Charger or the power High voltage error (during charg-
F0I18* Detector or AeroDR
source unit of the [AeroDR Detector name]. ing stop)
Battery Charger.
684

F0I19* There is a fault in the power source unit. Low voltage error
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error
Lithium ion capacitor overheat
F0I24* There is a degradation in the capacitor.
detection (during internal charging)
Contact a service representative. Replace the AeroDR
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error Detector.
Lithium ion capacitor overheat
detection (during external charging)
[AeroDR Detector name] capacitor error
Over-voltage protection status
detection (during internal charging)
AeroDR Battery Charger error
Over-voltage protection status de- Replace the AeroDR
F0I28* There is a fault in the AeroDR Battery Charger.
tection (during external charging) Battery Charger.
F0I34* 1-Wire bus error
F0I35* 1-Wire ReadROM error
[AeroDR Detector name] cable connection error
Reconnect the wired
F0I36* There is a cable connection error. 1-Wire PIO_w error
cable.
Please reconnect.
F0I37* 1-Wire PIO_r error
F0I38* 1-Wire bus signal level error
Power source computer Flash
F0I39* There is a fault in the power source unit.
writing error
F0J11* Internal device has malfunctioned. Config data check sum error
F0P01* Internal device has malfunctioned. Flash Write error
Power source computer request
F2E01* Internal device has malfunctioned.
error

F2E17* It has failed to update the version. Timeout error
F3205* Internal device has malfunctioned. Flash driver initialization error
Contact a service representative. Replace the AeroDR
[AeroDR Detector name] internal error Detector.
F3500* Internal device has malfunctioned. GPIO driver initialization error
Channel start error (when DMA
increment)
Channel transfer setting error
(when DMA increment)
DMA transfer end callback func-
tion registration error
F3605* Internal device has malfunctioned. SDMA driver uninitialized error 16
F3606* Internal device has malfunctioned. SDMA driver initialization error
685

F3700* Internal device has malfunctioned. SPI driver initialization error
F3800* Reception error frame open error
F3801* Reception buffer setting error
[AeroDR Detector name] wired LAN error Failed to open the driver due to
F3802* Wired LAN has malfunctioned. operation error of PrCONNECT/
Contact a service representative. Pro
[AeroDR Detector name] wired LAN error Failed to perform initial setting of
F3803* Wired LAN has malfunctioned. net structure due to operation er-
Contact a service representative. ror of PrCONNECT/Pro
[AeroDR Detector name] wired LAN error Failed to perform initial setting of
F3804* Wired LAN has malfunctioned. net structure due to operation er-
Contact a service representative. ror of KSZ8851 driver
Wireless LAN driver initialization
error: Initialization for middleware
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status common environment required
F3909*
became worse. for operation of MatrixQuestW-
LAN/Atheros6002 drivers (K_
HEAP_INIT) failed
F3910*
LAN/Atheros6002 drivers (K_INT_
INIT) failed
Replace the AeroDR
F3911* Detector.
TASK_INIT) failed

F3912*
SEM_INIT) failed
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status common environment required for
F3913*
became worse. operation of MatrixQuestWLAN/
Atheros6002 drivers (K_MSG-
BUF_INIT) failed
F3914*
Atheros6002 drivers (K_WDOG_
INIT) failed
16 F3915*
Atheros6002 drivers (K_IO_INIT)
failed
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status WLAN module enabled/disabled
F3926*
F3935* WPA connection initialization error
became worse.
686

F3936* WPA connection error
became worse.
F3937* WPA disconnection error
became worse.
PrCONNECT/Pro initialization er-
F3C00* Internal device has malfunctioned.
ror
Reception packet to PrCONNECT/
F3C11* Internal device has malfunctioned.
Pro setting error
F3C12* Internal device has malfunctioned. Socket error
Replace the AeroDR
[AeroDR Detector name] Temporarily wireless status Encryption setting acquisition er- Detector.
F3J00*
became worse. ror
Power Firmware version informa-
F3L27* Internal device has malfunctioned.
tion error
Log management task initializa-
F3P00* Internal device has malfunctioned.
tion error
F3Y00* Internal device has malfunctioned. CPU exception error
F3Z02* Internal device has malfunctioned. Service call error
Release the power
switch of the AeroDR
Detector.
[AeroDR Detector name] power switch push error The power switch of the AeroDR
When the power switch
F4I32* Power switch of the AeroDR Detector is held pressed. Detector is pressed and held for
is not depressed, the
Release the power switch. 30 seconds or more.
switch might be broken.

Replace the AeroDR
Detector.
Release the selection
switch of the AeroDR
[AeroDR Detector name] Selection switch push error Detector.
The selection switch of the
The selection switch on AeroDR Detector is continu- When the selection
F4I33* AeroDR Detector is pressed and
ally pressed. switch is not depressed,
held for 30 seconds or more.
Release the selection switch. the switch might be
broken. Replace the
AeroDR Detector.
16
687
16.2.4 AeroDR Generator Interface Unit errors
Error codes starting with "G" are indicating AeroDR Generator Interface Unit errors.
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and AeroDR Portable RF Unit use the same error codes.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

At startup, switch 1 input of XIF1
G2010S [AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] startup error is on.
There is a startup error.
Release the exposure switch. At startup, switch 2 input of XIF1
G2011S
is on.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] startup error
At startup, MAINGATE (during
G2012S There is a startup error.
exposure) input of XIF1 is on.
G2020S [AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] startup error is on.
Release the exposure switch. At startup, switch 2 input of XIF2
G2021S
is on.
Check the connec-
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] startup error
At startup, MAINGATE (during tion between the X-ray
exposure) input of XIF2 is on. device and the AeroDR
Generator Interface
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] startup error Unit.
G2030S There is a startup error. Replace the XIF board.
is on.
Release the exposure switch. Check whether there is
At startup, switch 2 input of XIF3 any error in the X-ray
G2031S [AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] startup error is on. device.
Contact a service representative. At startup, MAINGATE (during
G2032S
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] exposure MAINGATE signal on (during
error exposure) was detected before

G22000
There is a X-ray device exposure link error. KM-Ready signal on (exposure
Restart the X-ray device and AeroDR Interface Unit. interlock release).
MAINGATE signal did not go off
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] exposure
before the time set to timer2 (180
error
G2201U seconds) elapsed after MAIN-
There is a X-ray device exposure link error.
GATE signal of the X-ray device
went on.
X-ray on/off setting request (un-
Replace the ECB board.
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] exposure error lock) command was received from
Check the communi-
There is an internal device error or a communication the AeroDR Detector before a
cation route between
G2300U error. ConsoleReady setting command
the AeroDR Genera-
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR Interface Unit and was received from this device and
tor Interface Unit and
CS-7. before the exposure switch 2 was
AeroDR Detector.
pressed.
16
688

X-ray on/off setting request (unlock)
command was not received from
AeroDR Detector before the time
set to timer3 (10 seconds) elapsed
G2301U
after a ConsoleReady setting Check the communi-
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] exposure error command was received from this
cation route between
There is an internal device error or a communication device and the exposure switch 2 the AeroDR Genera-
error. was pressed. tor Interface Unit and
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR Interface Unit and
X-ray on/off setting request (lock) AeroDR Detector.
CS-7.
command was not received from Replace the ECB board.
the AeroDR Detector before the
G2302U
time set to timer3 (10 seconds)
elapsed after exposure was com-
pleted.
Since the AeroDR Detector started
accumulating image data, the Check the communica-
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] exposure error XrayOn/Off setting request (un- tion route between the
G2303U Exposure link failed, X-rays are not exposed. lock) command was not received AeroDR Generator
Please take exposure once again. from the AeroDR Detector before Interface Unit and
the time set to timer6(500ms) AeroDR Detector.
elapsed.
Exposure completion was not de-
tected before the time set to timer4
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] exposure error
(15 seconds) elapsed after the X-ray
G2500U There is an internal device error. Replace the ECB board.
on/off setting request (unlock) com-
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit.
mand was received from the AeroDR
Detector.
The state does not return to the
initial state (all XIF input signals go
There is an internal device error or a communication
G2501U off) before the time set to timer2
error.
(180 seconds) elapsed after the
exposure switch 1 was released.
The exposure switch 2 was not Check the connec-
released before the time set to tion between the X-ray
G4100U timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed device and the AeroDR
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] exposure error after the exposure switch 1 was

Generator Interface
Exposure switch is not released. pressed. Unit.
Release the exposure switch. The exposure switch 2 was not Replace the XIF board.
released before the time set to Check whether there is
G4101U any error in the X-ray
timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
after exposure was completed. device.
The exposure switch 1 was not
[AeroDR Generator Interface Unit name] exposure error released before the time set to
G4102U Exposure switch is not released. timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
Release the exposure switch. after the exposure switch 2 was
released.
Check the user opera-
tion.
After the AeroDR Detector started Check the communica-
accumulating image data, the ex- tion route between the
posure switch was released when AeroDR Generator
G4103U Exposure link failed, X-rays are not exposed.
the XrayOn/Off setting request Interface Unit and
Please take exposure once again.
(unlock) command was received AeroDR Detector.
from the AeroDR Detector. Check whether there is
any error in the X-ray
device.
16
689
16.2.5 AeroDR Portable RF Unit errors
Error codes starting with "G" are indicating AeroDR Portable RF Unit errors.
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• AeroDR Portable RF Unit and AeroDR Generator Interface Unit use the same error codes.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] startup error
At startup, SW1 input of ESC
board is on.
Release the exposure switch.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] startup error Replace the exposure
At startup, SW2 input of ESC
G2011S There is a startup error. switch or the ECB
board is on.
Release the exposure switch. board.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] startup error At startup, MAINGATE (during
G2012S There is a startup error. exposure) input of ESC board is
Contact a service representative. on.
is on.
is on.
G2022S There is a startup error. Check the connection
Contact a service representative. between the ECB board
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] startup error and the ESC board.
At startup, switch 1 input of XIF3 Replace the ECB board.
is on.
is on.
MAINGATE signal on (during
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] exposure error
exposure) was detected before
G22000 There is an X-ray device exposure link error.
KM-Ready signal on (exposure
Restart the X-ray device and AeroDR Interface Unit.
interlock release).
MAINGATE signal did not go off Replace the ECB board.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] exposure error before the time set to timer2 (180
G2201U There is an X-ray device exposure link error. seconds) elapsed after MAIN-
Contact a service representative. GATE signal of the X-ray device
went on.
X-ray on/off setting request (un-
Replace the ECB board.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] exposure error lock) command was received from
Check the communica-
There is an internal device error or a communication the AeroDR Detector before a
tion route between the
G2300U error. ConsoleReady setting command
AeroDR Portable RF
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR Interface Unit and was received from this device and
Unit and AeroDR Detec-
CS-7. before the exposure switch 2 was
tor.
16 pressed.
690

X-ray on/off setting request (unlock)
AeroDR Detector before the time
set to timer3 (10 seconds) elapsed
G2301U error.
after a ConsoleReady setting
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR Interface Unit and Check the communica-
command was received from this
CS-7. tion route between the
device and the exposure switch 2
was pressed. AeroDR Portable RF Unit
and AeroDR Detector.
X-ray on/off setting request (lock) Replace the ECB board.
the AeroDR Detector before the
G2302U error.
time set to timer3 (10 seconds)
Restart the AeroDR Detector, AeroDR Interface Unit and
elapsed after exposure was com-
CS-7.
pleted.
Since the AeroDR Detector started
accumulating image data, the
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] exposure error XrayOn/Off setting request (un-
tion route between the
G2303U Exposure link failed, X-rays are not exposed. lock) command was not received
Please take exposure once again. from the AeroDR Detector before
and AeroDR Detector.
the time set to timer6(500ms)
elapsed.
Exposure completion was not de-
tected before the time set to timer4
(15 seconds) elapsed after the X-ray
G2500U There is an internal device error. Replace the ECB board.
on/off setting request (unlock) com-
Restart the AeroDR Interface Unit.
mand was received from the AeroDR
Detector.
The state does not return to the
initial state (all XIF input signals go
G2501U off) before the time set to timer2
error.
(180 seconds) elapsed after the
exposure switch 1 was released.
The exposure switch 2 was not Check the connection
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] exposure error released before the time set to between the portable
G4100U Exposure switch is not released. timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed X-ray device and the

AeroDR Portable RF
pressed. Unit.
The exposure switch 2 was not Replace the XIF board.
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] exposure error Check whether there is
released before the time set to
G4101U Exposure switch is not released. any error in the portable
timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
Release the exposure switch. X-ray device.
after exposure was completed.
The exposure switch 1 was not
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] exposure error released before the time set to
G4102U Exposure switch is not released. timer2 (180 seconds) elapsed
released.
Check the user opera-
tion.
After the AeroDR Detector started
accumulating image data, the ex-
[AeroDR Portable RF Unit name] exposure error tion route between the
posure switch was released when
G4103U Exposure link failed, X-rays are not exposed. AeroDR Portable RF Unit
the XrayOn/Off setting request
Please take exposure once again. and AeroDR Detector.
(unlock) command was received
Check whether there is
from the AeroDR Detector.
any error in the X-ray
device.
16
691
16.2.6 AeroDR Stitching System errors
Error codes starting with "S" are indicating AeroDR Stitching System errors.

A communication error has been
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error detected in EEPROM on the
S00010
Contact a service representative. AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto-
barrier Unit.
A flash writing error has been
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error
S00020 detected in the AeroDR Stitching (1) Check that there is no foreign mat-
X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit ter on the MCB board of the AeroDR
A flash deletion error has been Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
S00030 detected in the AeroDR Stitching (2) Check the movement after remov-
X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit ing foreign matter.
A flash verification error has been (3) Replace the MCB board.
S00040 detected in the AeroDR Stitching
X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
A CPLD writing error has been
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error (1) Check for connector disconnection,
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching An encoder pulse error has been wiring breakage, cog wheel damage,
S00110 unit. Please confirm the auto barrier unit detected in the AeroDR Stitching cog wheel warping, and check the
movement area before switch the power X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit movement of the drive motor. If prob-
to ON. lems are found, replace the offending
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error parts.
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching An encoder position loss error (2) Replace the encoder.
S00120 unit. Please confirm the auto barrier unit has been detected in the AeroDR (3) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
movement area before switch the power Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
to ON. Unit.
(1) Check that there is no foreign mat-
ter on the MCB board of the AeroDR
A CPU clock stop error has been
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
Contact a service representative. (2) Check the movement after remov-
ing foreign matter.
(3) Replace the MCB board.

(1) Check for connector disconnection,
wiring breakage, cog wheel dam-
age, cog wheel warping, and check
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error
An encoder interrupt input error the movement of the drive motor.
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching
has been detected in the AeroDR If problems are found, replace the
S00140 unit. Please confirm the auto barrier unit
Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit offending parts.
movement area before switch the power
(2) Replace the encoder.
to ON.
(3) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
Unit.
16
692

[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An encoder reset error has been (1) Using the I/O test screen of this
S00200 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- detected in the AeroDR Stitching device, check the function of bottom
ing unit. X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit limit sensor.
wiring breakage, cog wheel dam-
age, cog wheel warping, and check
A bottom limit position sensing the movement of the drive motor
timeout error has been detected in in the stated order. If problems are
the AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto- found, replace the offending parts.
barrier Unit (3) Replace the encoder.
to ON.
Unit.
(1) Using the I/O test screen of this
device, check for connector discon-
nection, wiring breakage, cog wheel
damage, cog wheel warping, and
An encoder position sensing foreign matter trapped in the moving
timeout error has been detected in parts. If problems are found, replace
the AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto- the offending parts.
barrier Unit (2) Replace the drive motor.
to ON.
Unit.
device, check the function of bottom
limit sensor.
(2) Check for foreign matter in the sen-
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Sensor Er-
A limit sensor error has been sor portion, connector disconnection,
ror
S00230 detected in the AeroDR Stitching and wiring breakage in this order. If
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch-
X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit problems are found replace the of-
ing unit.
fending parts.
Unit.
device, check the function of bottom

limit sensor.
wiring breakage, foreign matter
trapped in moving parts, cog wheel
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching A rise timeout error has been
damage, and cog wheel warping
S00240 unit. Please confirm the auto barrier unit detected in the AeroDR Stitching
in the stated order. If problems are
movement area before switch the power X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
found, replace the offending parts.
to ON.
(3) Replace the drive motor.
Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An encoder zero position error (1) Check for cog wheel damage, cog
S00250 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- has been detected in the AeroDR wheel warping, foreign matter trapped
ing unit. Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit in moving parts, moving part breakage,
brake slippage, and brake dragging. If
problems are found, replace the offend-
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Sensor Er- An upper limit position accession ing parts.
ror error has been detected in the (2) Replace the brake portion.
S00260
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto- (3) Replace the drive motor.
ing unit. barrier Unit (4) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier 16
Unit.
A potentiometer communication Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error error has been detected in the (2) Check the movement after remov-
S00400
Contact a service representative. AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto- ing foreign matter.
barrier Unit (3) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
Unit.
693

(1) Check for cog wheel damage, cog
wheel warping, foreign matter trapped
in moving parts, moving part breakage,
brake slippage, and brake dragging. If
An upper limit timing encoder
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error problems are found, replace the offend-
value error has been detected in
S00420 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- ing parts.
the AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto-
ing unit. (2) Replace the brake portion.
barrier Unit
Unit.
device, check the function of the
contact sensor.
(2) Check for disconnection of the
A wire breakage in the lower limit
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Sensor Er- connectors and wiring breakage.
contact sensor has been detected
S00510 ror If problems are found, replace the
in the AeroDR Stitching X-Ray
Contact a service representative. offending parts.
Auto-barrier Unit
(3) Replace the contact sensor.
Unit.
A board fault in the lower limit con- Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Sensor Er-
tact sensor has been detected in (2) Check the movement after remov-
S00530 ror
the AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto- ing foreign matter.
barrier Unit (3) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
Unit.
A communication error has been
S00810 detected in the EEPROM of the
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error A flash writing error has been de- (1) Check that there is no foreign mat-
S00820 ter on the MCB board of the AeroDR
Contact a service representative. tected in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
Stitching Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error A flash deletion error has been de-
S00830 (2) Check the movement after remov-
Contact a service representative. tected in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
ing foreign matter.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error A flash verification error has been (3) Replace the MCB board in the
S00840
Contact a service representative. detected in the AeroDR Stitching Unit AeroDR Stitching Unit.
A CPLD writing error has been
Unit
An encoder pulse error has been (1) Using the maintenance PC and
S00910 detected in the AeroDR Stitching visually, check for connector dis-
Unit connection, wiring breakage, cog
wheel damage, cog wheel warping,
and check the movement of the
An encoder position loss error drive motor. If problems are found,
S00920 has been detected in the AeroDR replace the offending parts.
Stitching Unit (2) Replace the encoder.
(3) Replace the MCB board in the
A CPU clock stop error has been Stitching Unit.
S00930 detected in the AeroDR Stitching (2) Check the movement after remov-
Unit ing foreign matter.
16 AeroDR Stitching Unit.
(1) Using the maintenance PC and
visually, check for connector dis-
connection, wiring breakage, cog
wheel damage, cog wheel warping,
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An encoder interrupt input error
and check the movement of the
S00940 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- has been detected in the AeroDR
drive motor. If problems are found,
ing unit. Stitching Unit
replace the offending parts.
694

(1) Check for cog wheel damage,
cog wheel warping, foreign matter
trapped in moving parts, moving
part breakage, brake slippage, and
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An encoder reset error has been
brake dragging. If problems are
S00A00 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- detected in the AeroDR Stitching
ing unit. Unit
(2) Replace the brake portion.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error A lower limit position sensing time-
S00A10 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- out error has been detected in the
ing unit. AeroDR Stitching Unit (1) Check for connector disconnec-
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An encoder position sensing time- tion, cog wheel damage, cog wheel
S00A20 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- out error has been detected in the warping, and foreign matter trapped
ing unit. AeroDR Stitching Unit in moving parts. If problems are
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Sensor Er- found, replace the offending parts.
ror A limit sensor error has been de- (2) Replace the drive motor.
S00A30
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- tected in the AeroDR Stitching Unit (3) Replace the encoder.
ing unit. (4) Replace the MCB board in the
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error AeroDR Stitching Unit.
A rise timeout error has been de-
S00A40 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch-
tected in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
ing unit.
(1) Check for cog wheel damage,
cog wheel warping, foreign matter
trapped in moving parts, moving
part breakage, brake slippage, and
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An encoder zero position error
brake dragging. If problems are
S00A50 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- has been detected in the AeroDR
ing unit. Stitching Unit
(1) Using the maintenance tool, check
for connector disconnection, cog
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Sensor Er- wheel damage, and cog wheel
An upper limit position reach error
ror warping, and check the movement
S00A60 has been detected in the AeroDR

Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- of the drive motor. If problems are
Stitching Unit
ing unit. found, replace the offending parts.
(1) Check for cog wheel damage, cog
wheel warping, foreign matter trapped
in moving parts, and brake dragging.
If problems are found, replace the of-
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Motor Error An upper limit position sensing
fending parts.
S00C90 Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- error has been detected in the
ing unit. AeroDR Stitching Unit
(1) Close the side cover and cancel the
error.
interlock switch.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Side Cover
(3) Check for disconnection of the con-
Open A cover open error has been de-
S00CA0 nectors, wiring breakage and defor-
Please close the AeroDR stitching unit tected in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
mation of the side cover. If problems 16
cover and press RESET switch.
are found, replace the offending
parts.
(4) Replace the interlock switch.
695

error.
AeroDR Detector sensor.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Panel Error
An AeroDR Detector jam has been (3) Check for disconnection of the
Properly set the grid inside AeroDR
S00CB0 detected in the AeroDR Stitching connectors and wiring breakage.
stitching unit, close the over and press
Unit If problems are found, replace the
the RESET switch.
offending parts.
(4) Replace the AeroDR Detector sen-
sor.
error.
(2) Using the I/O test screen of this de-
vice, check the sensing of the grid
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Grid Error sensor.
Properly set the grid inside AeroDR A grid jam has been detected in (3) Check for disconnection of the
S00CC0
stitching unit, close the over and press the AeroDR Stitching Unit connectors and wiring breakage.
the RESET switch. If problems are found, replace the
offending parts.
(4) Replace the grid sensor.
internal lid sensor.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Panel Error (2) Check for disconnection of the
An internal lid jam in the AeroDR
Properly close the inner cover of AeroDR connectors and wiring breakage.
S00CD0 Detector holder has been detected
stitching unit and switch the power OFF/ If problems are found, replace the
in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
ON. offending parts.
(3) Replace the internal lid sensor.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal
connection error
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching A 422 communication flow error
S20060 unit. has been detected in the AeroDR

Please confirm the connectivity of Power Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
box and auto barrier unit before switch-
ing the power to ON.
connection error
(1) Check for breakage in the relay
Please power OFF of AeroDR Stitching A 422 communication error has
cables, disconnection of the con-
S20070 unit. been detected in the AeroDR
nectors and wiring breakage in the
Please confirm the connectivity of Power Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit
unit. If problems are found, replace
box and auto barrier unit before switch-
the offending parts.
ing the power to ON.
AeroDR Stitching X-Ray Auto-bar-
Error
A 422 communication flow error rier Unit and the MCB board in the
S20860 has been detected in the AeroDR AeroDR Stitching Unit.
unit. Please confirm the connectivity of
Stitching Unit
Power box and Stitiching unit before
switching the power to ON.
Error
A 422 communication error has
S20870 been detected in the AeroDR
unit. Please confirm the connectivity of
16 Stitching Unit
Power box and Stitiching unit before
switching the power to ON.
696

[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Network
Error
A network connection error has
S20C50 Please confirm the network of AeroDR
been detected (1) Check for connector disconnection.
stitching unit and CS-7, switch on the
(2) Check the network connection
power OFF/ON of AeroDR stitching unit.
equipment and the network cables.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Network
Error
A network connection error has AeroDR Stitching Unit.
S20C60 Please confirm the network of AeroDR
been detected
stitching unit and CS-7, press the
AeroDR Stitching unit RESET switch.
vice, shine light on the SENS board
and check the A/D value.
(2) Since there is a possibility that the
intensity of the exposure field lamp
has changed, change the intensity
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Height
setting.
detection (out of range)
A stitching height detection failure (3) Check for connector disconnecting,
S30460 Please press the AeroDR Stitching unit
(out of range) has been detected the wiring breakage, and contami-
RESET switch. Repeat the height detec-
nation of the light receiving surface
tion.
of the SENS board. If problems are
(4) Replace the SENS board.
Unit.
Error An error of the number of image Collect the error environment data and
S30470
Please power OFF/ON of AeroDR Stitch- specification has been detected logs to ask for analysis.
ing unit.
Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier Unit.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]MCB Error A potentiometer setting value error (2) Check the movement after remov-
S30540
Contact a service representative. has been detected ing foreign matter.

Unit.
A mechcon task request state error
S307D0 has been detected in the AeroDR
A status transition task state error
Error
S307E0 has been detected in the AeroDR
ing unit.
An OS API error has been detect-
S307F0 ed in the AeroDR Stitching X-Ray
Collect the error environment data and
Auto-barrier Unit.
logs to ask for analysis.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Internal A mechcon task request state error
S30FD0 Error has been detected in the AeroDR
Contact a service representative. Stitching Unit.
A status transition task state error
S30FE0 has been detected in the AeroDR
Error
Stitching Unit.
An OS API error has been detected
S30FF0 ing unit.
in the AeroDR Stitching Unit
16
697

[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Height (1) Using the I/O test screen of this de-
detection failed (lamp is off) vice, shine light on the SENS board
A stitching height detection failure
S40430 Please press the AeroDR Stitching unit and check the A/D value.
(lamp off) has been detected
RESET switch. Repeat the height detec- (2) Since there is a possibility that the
tion. intensity of the exposure field lamp
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Height has changed, change the intensity
detection failed(cross mark mismatch) setting.
A stitching height detection failure (3) Check for connector disconnecting,
S40440 Please press the AeroDR Stitching unit
(cross overlay) has been detected the wiring breakage, and contami-
RESET switch. Repeat the height detec-
tion. nation of the light receiving surface
of the SENS board. If problems are
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Height found, replace the offending parts.
detection failed(other reason)
A stitching height detection failure (4) Replace the SENS board.
S40450 Please press the AeroDR Stitching unit (5) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
(other) has been detected
RESET switch. Repeat the height detec- DR Stitching X-Ray Auto-barrier
tion. Unit.
contact sensor.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Obstacle in (2) Check whether the contact sensor
the movement is not being pressed as a result of
S40480 Obstacle detected in the AeroDR Stitch- Contact sensing has been detected deformation of the metal plate etc.
ing unit movement. Please press the If problems are found, replace the
RESET switch. offending parts.
Unit.
device, check the sensing of Set
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Switch Er-
switch on the OPB board.
ror
(2) Check for cable breakage. If prob-
AeorDR stitching unit switch is in
A start time height detection switch lems are found, replace the offend-
S40490 pressed state.
ON error has been detected ing parts.
Confirm the switch not pressed state and
(3) Replace the OPB board.
switch the power OFF/ON of AeroDR
stitching unit.
Unit
device, check the sensing of the Im-

age Area switch on the OPB board.
ror
A start time exposure switch ON lems are found, replace the offend-
S404A0 pressed state.
error has been detected ing parts.
stitching unit.
Unit
vice, check the sensing of the Reset
switch on the OPB board.
ror
A start time reset switch ON error lems are found, replace the offend-
S404B0 pressed state.
has been detected ing parts.
stitching unit.
Unit.
device, check the sensing of the
16 [AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Emergency emergency stop switch.
Stop (2) Check for cable breakage. If prob-
An error of pressing down the
AeroDR stitching unit emergency stop lems are found, replace the offend-
S404D0 emergency stop switch has been
switch is ON. ing parts.
detected
Release the emergency stop and press (3) Replace the emergency stop switch.
the RESET switch. (4) Replace the MCB board in the Aero-
Unit.
698

contact sensor.
[AeroDR Stitching Unit name]Obstacle in
the movement
Contact lower sensing has been lems are found, replace the offend-
S404F0 Obstacle detected in the AeroDR Stitch-
detected ing parts.
ing unit movement. Please press the
(3) Replace the contact sensor.
RESET switch.
Unit.
16
699
16.2.7 REGIUS series errors
Error codes starting with a numerical value are indicating REGIUS series errors.
Error code Displayed message Corrective actions

04001
HP1 Sensor NG (Transport Unit)
04002
04011
04012
04013 HP2 Sensor NG (Transport Unit)
04014
04015
04020 Alignment Sensor NG (Start)
04021 Alignment Sensor NG (Feeder)
04022 Alignment Sensor NG (Adhesion)
04023 Alignment Sensor NG (Shelter)
04024 Alignment Sensor NG (Discharge)
04025 Alignment Sensor NG
04026 Alignment Left-side Sensor NG (Initialize)
04027 Alignment Right-side Sensor NG (Initialize)
04030 Elevator Detective Sensor NG (Start)
04031 Elevator Detective Sensor NG (Feeder)
04032 Elevator Detective Sensor NG (Adhesion)
04033 Elevator Detective Sensor NG (Shelter)
04034 Elevator Detective Sensor NG (Before Elevating)
04035 Lock HP Sensor NG
04036 Elevator HP Sensor NG
(1) Restart the REGIUS series.
04037 Elevator Detective Sensor NG (After Elevating) (2) If the problem recurs after the restart, restart this
04041 Feeder's Shutter Opening Sensor NG device and the REGIUS series.
04042 Feeder's Shutter Closing Sensor NG If the problem still occurs, refer to "Installation/
Service Manual" for the REGIUS series.
04043 Feeder's Shutter Opening Sensor NG
04044 Feeder's Shutter Closing Sensor NG
04045 Cassette Back Plate Sensor NG
04046 Backboard's Warp Detective Sensor NG
04047 Backboard's Adhesion Detective Sensor NG
04048 Ejection Shutter Close Sensor NG
04051 Discharge's Door Closing Sensor NG
04061 Slow Scan HP Sensor NG
04062 Backboard's Adhesion Detective Sensor NG
04063 Backboard's Warp Detective Sensor NG
04064 V-Sync Sensor NG
04065
04066
04067
Backboard's Adhesion Detective Sensor NG
16 04068
04069
04070
04071 Feeder's Central Detective Sensor NG
04072 Feeder's Left Detective Sensor NG
04073 Cassette Back Plate Sensor NG (Initialize)
04074 Backboard's Warp Detective Sensor NG (Initialize)
04075 Backboard's Adhesion Detective Sensor NG (Initialize)
700

04076 24V Power NG (Usually)
04077 24V Power NG (Door Close)
04081 Erase-lamp's Current Detective Sensor 1 NG
04082 Erase-lamp's Current Detective Sensor 2 NG
04091 Front Door Opening Sensor NG
04101 Slow Scan Motor NG
04102 Transport Unit Motor NG
04103 Elevator Motor NG
04104 Alignment Motor NG
04105 Feeder's Shutter Open/Close Timeout
04106 Lock Timeout
04107 Load Motor NG
04150 Lock Initial Processing
04151 Feeder's Shutter Initial Processing
04152 Elevator Initial Processing
04153 Alignment Initial Processing
04154 Transport Unit Initial Processing
04155 Slow Scan Initial Processing
04156 Transfer Action 1 Starting NG
04157 Transfer Action 2 Starting NG
04158 Feeder's Discharge Action Starting NG
04159 Discharge Action Starting NG
04160 Feeder's Shutter Opening NG
04161 Feeder's Shutter Closing NG (2) If the problem recurs after the restart, restart this
04162 Lock Starting NG device and the REGIUS series.
04163 Cassette Falling Detective Time NG If the problem still occurs, refer to "Installation/

04164 No Notice of Permission on Erase-lamp ON
04165 No Notice of Permission on Erase-lamp OFF
04167 Load Motor Initial Processing
04200 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Initialize)
04201 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Ready)
04202 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Detect Barcode)
04203 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (High-voltage ON)
04204 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Laser ON)
04205 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Cancel Barcode)
04206 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Processing)
04207 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Pause)
04208 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Open Front Door)
04209 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Close Front Door)
04210 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Error)
04211 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Standby)
04212 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Transporting of Erase Mode) 16
04213 GetStatus Receiving Timeout (Power off after Ready)
04214 Registration OK Receiving Timeout
04215 GetStatus Receiving Error (Laser ON)
04216 GoBackward Receiving Timeout
04217 Laser ON without Sending High-voltage ON (1)
04218 Laser ON without Sending High-voltage ON (2)
04219 Invalid Command
701

04221 StartSubScan Receiving Timeout
04900 Cassette Exists (Elevator)
04901 Cassette Exists (Alignment)
04902 Cassette Exists (Open Door of Discharge)
04903 Cassette Exists (Backboard Adhesion)
04904 Turn Off Erase-lamps (2)
04905 SCB Communication Error
04906 Warped Cassette [%s]
04907 Cassette Opening Error [%s]
04908 Falling Cassette [%s]
04909 Cassette Gap Detection (Back plate magnetize) [%s]
04910 Cassette Gap Detection (Cassette peeling) [%s]
04914 Opening Extraction (Initialize)
04917 Feeder's Shutter Opening NG (Unlock)
04918 FAN Disconnection NG 1
04920 FAN Disconnection NG 3
04921 Erase-lamp NG
06000 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP)
06001 Justifier Motor Control NG (Move to HP)
06002 Justifier HP sensor NG (Cassette Fixed position)
06003 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Fixed position)
06004 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Support Position)
06005 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Fixed position -2)
06006 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2) (2) If the problem recurs after the restart, restart this
06007 Justifier Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2) device and the REGIUS series.
06008 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP -3) If the problem still occurs, refer to "Installation/
06009 Justifier Motor Control NG (Move to HP -3)
06010 Justifier HP sensor NG (Cassette Support Position)

06011 Justifier Motor Control NG (Cassette Support Position -2)
06021 Justifier HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2)
16
702

06050 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to HP)
06051 Elevator Motor Control NG (Move to HP)
06052 Receiver HP sensor NG (Position 1)
06053 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 1)
06055 Elevator Motor Control NG (Slight descent at Position 2)
06056 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 1 -2)
06057 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2)
06058 Elevator Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2)
06061 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to Position 2)
06071 Elevator Motor Control NG (Position 1 -2) (2) If the problem recurs after the restart, restart this
06072 Receiver HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2) device and the REGIUS series.
06073 Elevator Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2) If the problem still occurs, refer to "Installation/

06091 Receiver HP sensor NG (Position 2) 16
06100 Transporter Sensor NG (Reading Position)
06101 Transporter Motor Control NG (Reading Position)
06102 Transporter Sensor NG (Move to HP)
06103 Transporter HP sensor NG (Move to HP)
06104 Transporter Motor Control NG (Move to HP)
06105 Transporter HP sensor NG (Pressing Position)
703

06106 Transporter Motor Control NG (Pressing Position)
06107 Transporter Sensor NG (Reading Position 2)
06108 Transporter Motor Control NG (Reading Position 2)
06109 Transporter Sensor NG (Pressing Position 2)
06110 Transporter Motor Control NG (Pressing Position 2)
06111 Transporter Motor Control NG (HP Passing Position)
06112 Transporter HP sensor NG (Move to HP -2)
06113 Transporter Motor Control NG (Move to HP -2)
06116 Transporter Motor Control NG (Reading Position)
06117 Transporter Sensor NG (Move to HP)
06118 Transporter HP sensor NG (Move to HP)
06122 Transporter Sensor NG (Reading Position -2)
06123 Transporter Motor Control NG (Reading Position -2)
06124 Transporter Sensor NG (Pressing Position -2)
06125 Transporter Motor Control NG (Pressing Position -2)
06131 Transporter Motor Control NG (Reading Position) (2) If the problem recurs after the restart, restart this
06132 Transporter Sensor NG (Move to HP) device and the REGIUS series.
06133 Transporter HP sensor NG (Move to HP) If the problem still occurs, refer to "Installation/

06137 Transporter Sensor NG (Reading Position -2)
06138 Transporter Motor Control NG (Reading Position -2)
06139 Transporter Sensor NG (Pressing Position -2)
06140 Transporter Motor Control NG (Pressing Position -2)
06150 Encoder Initializing NG
06151 Subscan Motor Control NG (Mechanical HP)
06152 Subscan Motor Control NG (Reading Completion Position)
06153 Subscan Motor Control NG (Mechanical HP -2)
16
06200 Open Insertion Shutter NG
704

06201 Close Insertion Shutter NG
06250 Motor Lock Release NG (Initialize)
06251 Motor Lock Release NG (Lock)
06252 Motor Lock Release NG (Release)
06265 Motor Lock Release NG (Initialize)
06280 Motor Lock Release NG (Initiale)
06300 Justifier Sensor NG (Fixed Action)
06301 Justifier Sensor NG (Fixed)
06302 Cassette Exists(Sensor Justifier)
06303 Cassette Exists (Sensor Justifier)
06318 Cassette Exists (Sensor Justifier)
06333 Cassette Exists (Sensor Justifier) (2) If the problem recurs after the restart, restart this
06350 Receiver Sensor NG (Feeder) device and the REGIUS series.
If the problem still occurs, refer to "Installation/
06351 Receiver Sensor NG (Send) Service Manual" for the REGIUS series.

06352 Receiver Sensor NG (Discharge)
06353 Receiver Sensor NG (Removed)
06354 Cassette Exists (Receiver)
06365 Receiver Sensor NG (Feeder)
06366 Receiver Sensor NG (Send)
06380 Receiver Sensor NG (Feeder)
06381 Receiver Sensor NG (Send)
Back Plate detection Sensor NG (Before moving to Reading
06400
Position)
16
Back Plate detection Sensor NG (Reading Position is Stop-
06401
ping)
Back Plate detection Sensor NG (After moving to Pressing
06402
Position)
06415
Position)
06416
ping)
705

06417
Position)
06430
Position
06431
ping)
06432
Position)
Peel Sensor Plate (Reading or Erasing). Please refrain from
06450
using the cassette.
06451 Peel Sensor NG (Non-operation)
06452 Peel Sensor NG (Start)
06453 Peel Sensor NG (Initialize)
06465 Peel Sensor Plate (Reading or Erasing)
06480 Peel Sensor Plate (Reading or Erasing)
06500 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Initialize)
06501 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Load)
06502 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Discharge)
06503 Back Plate Cassette detection
06504 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Discharge -2)
06515 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Initialize) (1) Restart the REGIUS series.
06516 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Load) (2) If the problem recurs after the restart, restart this
device and the REGIUS series.
06517 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Discharge) If the problem still occurs, refer to "Installation/
06518 Back Plate Cassette detection Service Manual" for the REGIUS series.

06530 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Initialize)
06531 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Load)
06532 Cassette Insertion Sensor NG (Discharge)
06533 Back Plate Cassette detection
06550 Polygon Rotation NG
06551 Not receiving Reading Completion signal
06552 2 Erase lamps turn off (Start)
2 Erase lamps turn off (Erase). Cassette Erase is incomplete.
06553
Please retry.
06554 1 Erase lamp turns off (Start)
06567 2 Erase lamps turn off (Start)
06568 2 Erase lamps turn off (Erase)
16 06582 2 Erase lamps turn off (Start)
06600 Cooler fan's digital power supply disconnected
06650 FPGA Error (Event Driver Access failed)
06651 FPGA Error (Fail to access MDU)
06652 FPGA Error (Fail to access LMC)
06653 FPGA Error (I/O Control failed)
06654 FPGA Error (Fail to open Image Driver)
706

06655 FPGA Error (Fail to access PMU)
06668
FPGA Error (I/O Control failed)
06683 (1) Restart the REGIUS series.
06750 (2) If the problem recurs after the restart, restart this
Reception desk board opening and shutting position sensor device and the REGIUS series.
06765
NG If the problem still occurs, refer to "Installation/
06780
06751
06766 Reception desk board HP location sensor NG
06785
10000 Memory Error
11000 Hardware Error
12000 Msg Receiving Timeout (High Voltage ON)
12001 Msg Receiving Timeout (Laser ON) Restart this device and the REGIUS series.
If the problem still occurs, refer to "Installation/Ser-
12002 Msg Receiving Timeout (Mech. Ready) vice Manual" for the REGIUS series.
12003 Msg Receiving Timeout (Mech. Standby)
12010 Serial communication Error (Mech. Resend Overflow)
12011 Serial communication Error (Mech. CRC error Overflow)
12012 Serial communication Error (Mech. Overrun)
12013 Serial communication Error (Mech. Timeout)
12020 Msg Error (Mech. illegal Msg)
12200 Msg Receiving Timeout (Net Initialize)
12201 Msg Receiving Timeout (Net Ready)
12202 Msg Receiving Timeout (Put Shading)
12203 Msg Receiving Timeout (Status Check)
12204 Msg Receiving Timeout (Barcode Seek)
12205 Msg Receiving Timeout (Net Command)
12206 Msg Receiving Timeout (Reader End)
12207 Msg Receiving Timeout (Put Qrv)

12208 Msg Receiving Timeout (Put Config)
12209 Msg Receiving Timeout (Put Information)
12210 Serial communication Error (Net Resend Overflow)
12211 Serial communication Error (Net CRC error Overflow)
12212 Serial communication Error (Net Overrun) (1) Restart the REGIUS series.
12213 Serial communication Error (Net Timeout) (2) If the problem recurs after the restart, restart this
device and REGIUS series.
12220 Msg Error (Net illegal Msg) If the problem still occurs, refer to "Installation/
13000 Optical Unit Error (H_Sync) Service Manual" for the REGIUS series.
13001 Optical Unit Error (Polygon ID)
13003 Optical Unit Error (Polygon Stability)
13005 Optical Unit Error (Laser Intensity)
13030 SCB Control Error (DMA transfer)
13031 SCB Control Error (SCOM communication)
14000 Signal Proc Error (Gain Overflow)
14001 Signal Proc Error (Gain Underflow)
16
14002 Signal Proc Error (Offset Overflow)
14003 Signal Proc Error (Offset Underflow)
14010 Signal Proc Error (QRV Overflow)
14011 Signal Proc Error (QRV Underflow)
14012 Signal Proc Error (QRV No Convergency)
14013 Signal Proc Error (Shading No Data)
14014 Signal Proc Error (QRV No Data)
15000 Signal Proc Error (Initialization Failure)
707

22101 Serial Communication Error (N1 Counter Over)
23000 Program Error (Main Control)
23100 Program Error (Sequence Control)
23200 Program Error (Data File Size)
23900 Program Error (Firmware Update)
24000 Network Error (JM Connection)
24500 Network Error (JM Configuration)
25000 Network Error (Non-Timeout)
25100 Network Error (Timeout:in General Communication) (2) If the problem recurs after the restart, restart this
25110 Network Error (Rejection:in General Communication) device and REGIUS series.
25200 Network Error (Timeout:in Image Transmission) If the problem still occurs, refer to "Installation/
25210 Network Error (Timeout:after Image Scanning)
25300 Network Error (Timeout/Rejection:in Image Transmission)
25500 Network Error (Destination:Not Found)
26000 Operation Error (Invalid Job)
26010 Operation Error (Invalid Job Parameter)
26100 Operation Error (Modeless Job)
26200 Operation Error (Invalid Console)
26300 Operation Error (Reader Busy)
26900 Operation Error (PowerOFF under Job Execution)
26999 Operation Error (Not-Supported Command)
16
708
Chapter
17
Maintenance
This section describes the maintenance and inspection items
for ensuring the optimum use of this device.
709
17.1 Maintenance and inspection items
This chapter describes the inspections and cleaning. Maintenance task Maintenance interval
Number of the connections of When performing periodic
AeroDR UF Cable maintenance
17.1.1 Maintenance and in- Number of the connections of
When performing periodic
spection interval UF Cable in the AeroDR Stitch-
maintenance
ing Unit
O
OMaintenance items performed by the user Number of the connections of
AeroDR Battery Charger spring
maintenance
Maintenance task Maintenance interval connector
Check operation of cooling fan Weekly Number of the XIF or XGIF ex- When performing periodic
posures maintenance
Check built-in clock time Weekly
Number of switch exposures
Clean operation unit display Weekly When performing periodic
when installing S-SRM
maintenance
Clean keyboard Monthly * S-SRM is not used in Japan
Clean mouse Monthly Number of switch exposures
when using the AeroDR Por-
maintenance
table RF Unit.
O
OMaintenance items handled by a service engineer When a new version is
Upgrading of REGIUS
offered
Maintenance items for this device Unevenness calibration When an error occurs
Maintenance task Maintenance interval Sensitivity calibration When an error occurs
Every 5 years, or 20,000 Upgrading of Sub Monitor Adap- When a new version is
Replacement of the hard disk tor firmware offered
hours of operation
System backup Every 6 months When replacing device or
Deletion of device information
discontinuing use
Defragmentation of the hard disk Once a year
When replacing a RE-
When a new version is GIUS halogen lamp,
Upgrading of this device Reset of the counter/duration of
offered REGIUS plate or AeroDR
use
Adjustment of the position of the Generator Interface Unit
When an error occurs XIF or XGIF board
touch panel
Uninstallation of the touch panel driver When an error occurs Number of exposures
maintenance
Monitor brightness adjustment When an error occurs
Confirming the number of days When performing peri-
the computer has been operating odic maintenance

Number of days the computer's
battery has been operating when When performing peri-
operating with a portable X-ray odic maintenance
diagnostic device
Maintenance items for all devices

Maintenance task Maintenance interval
When a new version is
Upgrading of AeroDR Detector
offered
Upgrading of AeroDR Genera- When a new version is
tor Interface Unit offered
Upgrading of AeroDR Portable When a new version is
RF Unit offered
Offset calibration Every 3 months
Gain calibration Every 3 months
17 AeroDR Detector analysis (elec-
trical noise analysis, uneven- When an error occurs
ness analysis, defect analysis)
Number of the connections of When performing periodic
AeroDR I/F Cable maintenance
710
17.1.2 Confirmation and

cleaning
Check and clean the following items daily.
OO Check operation of the cooling fan

Check that the cooling fan has not stopped, and is not
making abnormal sounds (rattling). Periodically clean
the cooling fan exhaust outlet with a vacuum cleaner.
OO Check built-in clock time

Check and correct the built-in clock time with user
tools. Check periodically.
OO Clean the operation unit display

The operation unit display requires periodic cleaning.
At that time, be careful of the following points.
• Wipe with a soft cloth.
• Do not use a chemical cloth or wet cloth.
• Do not spray water or other liquids directly onto
the display.
OO Clean the keyboard

Check that the power for the whole system includ-
ing this device and all peripheral devices is turned off
(power lamp is out), then wipe the surface of the key-
board with a dry cloth.
OO Clean the mouse

In order for the optical mouse to function properly,
the internal optical sensor must be able to properly
measure the direction and amount of movement. To
prevent the sensor from getting dirty, use in a low-dust
environment, and clean periodically with a dry cloth.
17
711
17.2 Replacement of the hard disk
The procedure for replacing the hard disk is as follows. 8 Lift off the power supply device.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The HP 8100 Elite is used as an example here. The
installation process may differ depending on the de-
vice you use.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Turn off the power of this device.

• Remove any media from the CD/DVD drive be-
fore shutting off power.
• The hard disk is under the power supply device.

2 Remove the power cable from the wall
outlet.
9 Remove the power and data cables from
the hard disk.
3 Remove all cables from this device.
4 Remove the upright stand if attached.

10 Remove the hard disk.
5 Remove the cover lock, if attached.
6 Remove the cover.
1
1
2
2
11 Remove the fastening screws from the

old hard disk, and attach them to the new

hard disk.
7 Lift off the drive cage.
17
712
12 Attach the hard disk.
13 Connect the power and data cables to the

hard disk.
14 Replace the drive cage to its original posi-

tion, and attach the cover.
15 Check whether this device starts normally.
17
713
17.3 Defragmentation of the hard disk
The procedure for defragging the hard disk is as fol- 4 Right-click the hard disk to perform the
lows. defragmentation, and press [Properties].
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

diate screen.
5 Select the [Tools] tab, and press [Defragment now...].

and then press [Computer].
17.3 Defragmentation of the hard disk
6 Press [Defragment disk].
17 • Defragmentation is started. Please wait until completed.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Depending on the use environment, it may take from
several minutes to a few hours to complete.
• Process speed of this device may be slower during
the defragmentation.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
714
17.4 System information backup and restoring
Please back up the system information of this device

on a regular basis. In the event of malfunction, the sys- 17.4.2 System information
tem can be restored. It is also useful for error analysis restoring
in the event of an error.
Back up the system information; when the system in-
formation is corrupted, it can be restored.
17.4.1 System information Moreover, the system information can be used for an-
backup other unit of this device.
Be sure to back up the system information of this device in

IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
case of system failure.
• Unique information of this device, such as the host
name and IP address, will have the same setting when
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • restored, so it cannot be connected to the same net-
• For the system information backup, refer to "4.21 work. First disconnect from the network and reset the
Backup of the setting data of this device". unique information of this device.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • Please do not restore the license file to another unit
of this device. The restored unit of this device will not
start.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

diate screen.
3 Create a restore folder on the Windows

desktop to copy the system information
files already backed up.
17
715
• The restore screen is displayed.
8 Press [Browse], and then specify the

folder to restore.

9 Select [Setting].
7 Press [Backup/Restore], then press [Restore].
• Multiple [Options] cannot be selected at the

same time.
• The data that can be restored is displayed in the
list.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• To restore the study data including images, select
[Study]. To restore the patient database, select [DB].
17 ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
716
10 Select the data to restore from the list. 13 Press [OK].
14 Press [Close].
11 Press [Execute].
• Returns to the user tool screen.
15 Exit the user tool, and restart this device.

12 Press [OK].
• The restore operation starts.
17
717
17.5 Upgrading of AeroDR SYSTEM
The procedure for upgrading the AeroDR SYSTEM is 2 Connect the AeroDR Detector to the
as follows. AeroDR I/F Cable.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• Before updating, confirm that the device to be updated • It is all right to connect the AeroDR Detector to the
is correctly connected and that power is on. AeroDR UF Cable, or to insert it into the AeroDR Bat-
• While upgrading, pay attention to the following. tery Charger.
–– Do not operate this device. ••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
–– Do not turn off this device, the AeroDR Interface
Unit, the AeroDR Detector or the AeroDR Stitching 3 Start the service tool.
Unit.
–– Do not remove the Ethernet cable of this device,
the AeroDR Generator Interface Unit or the AeroDR
Stitching Unit.
–– Do not remove the AeroDR I/F Cables or AeroDR
UF Cables connected to the AeroDR Detector.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
17.5.1 Upgrading of AeroDR

Detector
The procedure for upgrading the AeroDR Detector is
as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The AeroDR Detector can be connected only using
a wired connection. Connect it using the AeroDR I/F
Cable.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Insert the CD for updating to the latest

version into the CD/DVD drive.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When this device is used with the portable X-ray de-
vice, connect an external CD/DVD drive and insert the
update CD for the latest version.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
• If an auto-play screen appears, press [Cancel] • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
17
718
5 Press [Firmware Update]. 8 Press [Update] on the AeroDR Detector

that is to be updated.
• During the update, [Progress] is displayed in

[Device Ver.].
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If the version is not displayed, press [Retrieve ver-
sion].
• Update is not necessary if [Device Ver.] and [Updated
Ver.] agree.
Only when [Device Ver.] and [Updated Ver.] do not
agree, [Device Ver.] is displayed in red and [Update]
becomes available.
• The display message [Updating. Please wait for a mo-
ment.] may be shown for a while.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The firmware update screen is displayed.
6 Press [File import].
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

• The time required for upgrading and the operation dur-
ing upgrading are as follows.
Time
Operation
required
During update
Approx.
Busy/error LED (orange): Fast
10 min-
AeroDR flashing
utes at
Detector Update completed
the maxi-
Status LED (green): Slow
mum
flashing
• When downgrading the firmware, press [Update] to

• The [Select firmware file] screen is displayed. display the following screen. To execute the down-
grade, press [OK].
7 Select the firmware file, and press [OK].
17
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
719
10 Press [OK]. 17.5.2 Upgrading of AeroDR

• Confirm that the [Device Ver.] and [Updated
Ver.] match. Generator Interface Unit
The procedure for upgrading the AeroDR Generator
11 Press [Close]. Interface Unit is as follows.
12 Eject the update CD from the CD/DVD 1 Insert the CD for updating to the latest
drive. version into the CD/DVD drive.
• If an auto-play screen appears, press [Cancel]

icon.
17
720
4 Press [Firmware Update] on the sub-menu 7 Press [Update].

screen.

[Device Ver.].
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
sion].
Ver.] agree.
becomes available.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Time
Operation

required
During update
AeroDR
Status LED (green): Flashing
Gen-
Approx. 3 Busy/error LED (orange):
erator
minutes Flashing (for several seconds)
Interface
Update completed
Unit
Status LED (green): Lit
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
9 Press [OK].
Ver.] match.
• The [Select firmware file] screen is displayed.

10 Press [Close].
11 Eject the update CD from the CD/DVD
drive. 17
721

Portable RF Unit
The procedure for upgrading the AeroDR Portable RF
Unit is as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When using a wireless connection between this device
and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit, check the charge
condition of this device and the AeroDR Portable
RF Unit. Recharge them to a sufficient level before
performing operations. Also, be sure to perform op-
erations with favorable signal strength between this
device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When the AeroDR Portable RF Unit is operating, the
1 Connect an external CD/DVD drive to this AeroDR Generator Interface Unit icon will appear in
device for portable. place of the AeroDR Portable RF Unit icon.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

version into the CD/DVD drive. 5 Press [Firmware Update] on the sub-menu
• If an auto-play screen appears, press [Cancel] screen.

icon.
17
722
6 Press [File import]. 9 Press [OK] on the confirmation screen.
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When this device and the AeroDR Portable RF Unit
are wirelessly connected, the version update may take
some time.
• There is no LED to indicate on the AeroDR Portable
RF Unit to indicate that an update is in progress.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
10 Press [OK].
• The [Select firmware file] screen is displayed. Ver.] match.
7 Select the firmware file, and press [OK]. 11 Press [Close].

8 Press [Update]. 12 Eject the update CD from the external CD/
DVD drive.

[Device Ver.].

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
sion].
Ver.] agree.
becomes available.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
17
723

4 Press [Firmware Update] on the sub-menu
screen.
Stitching System
The procedure for upgrading the AeroDR Stitching
System is as follows.

version into the CD/DVD drive.
• If an auto-play screen appears, press [Cancel]
3 Press the device icon of AeroDR Stitching

System.

• The [Select firmware file] screen is displayed.

17
724
7 Press [Update].

[Device Ver.].
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
sion].
Ver.] agree.
becomes available.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Time
Operation

required
During upgrade
Busy/error LED (orange) of
AeroDR Stitching Unit and
AeroDR AeroDR Stitching X-ray Auto-
Approx. 8
Stitching barrier Unit: Flashing
minutes
Unit Upgrade completed
Ready LED (green) of AeroDR
Stitching X-ray Auto-barrier
Unit: Lit
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
9 Press [OK].
Ver.] match.
10 Press [Close].
17
11 Eject the update CD from the CD/DVD
drive.
725
17.6 Upgrading of REGIUS
The procedure for upgrading REGIUS is as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• While upgrading, pay attention to the following.
― Do not operate this device.
― Do not turn off REGIUS.
• When upgrading cannot be performed and the RE-
GIUS cannot be started, one of the following tasks is
necessary.
― Replace MCB2/MCB, SCB2/SCB of REGIUS.
― Replace the CF card, and upgrade the MCB2/MCB
version. • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
• If upgrading REGIUS in n-to-m connection, do not per-
form any other operations. 5 Press [Install].
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 Restart all devices connected to the same

system.
• Shut off the power in the following order.
All units of this device→REGIUS→The unit of
this device with the JM
• Turn on the power in the following order.
The unit of this device with the JM →All units of
this device→REGIUS
2 Insert the CD-ROM with the installation

file of the newer version of REGIUS into
the CD/DVD drive.
4 Press the device icon of REGIUS to be up-

graded.
• The select install files screen is displayed.
17
726
6 Press [...] (Browse). 8 Press [OK].
• "Program installing" is displayed.

• The screen will close and return to the sub-
menu screen once the installation is completed.
9 Press [Update].

played.
7 Select the installation file for the newer

version of REGIUS, and press [Open].
• The file name of the selected installation file is • The change reader program selection screen is
displayed in [File Name]. displayed.
• The file name of the installation file for REGIUS
is "CcuProgx.xxRxxTxx.lzh".
• "x" will differ for each version.
17
727
10 Select the program with most current

version, and press [OK].
• When the program update is complete, a confir-

mation screen is displayed.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Never turn off REGIUS.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
11 Press [Yes].
• Returns to the sub-menu screen.
12 Exit the service tool, and restart the up-

graded REGIUS.
13 After
restarting REGIUS, confirm that
"READY" is displayed on the LCD of
REGIUS.
• Upgrade all REGIUS devices using the same
procedure.
17
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Confirm the current version of the program operating
in REGIUS by viewing [Version] in [Status/Setting dis-
play field] on the sub-menu screen.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
728
17.7 Upgrading of Sub Monitor Adaptor firmware
The procedure for upgrading the Sub Monitor Adaptor 4 Select the Sub Monitor Adaptor to
is as follows. upgrade the version, and press [display
Web page].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The following method is an example. The operation
might be different depending on the Sub Monitor
Adaptor you use. For details, refer to the operation
manual of the Sub Monitor Adaptor you use.
• After upgrading firmware, the Sub Monitor Adaptor
returns to its default settings. Be sure to reset the IP
address after upgrading is completed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Press [firm update] in the left panel.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

diate screen.
6 Enter the user name and password, and
press [OK].
• User name: root
• Password: By default, not set

7 Press [Browse], and specify the firmware
update file saved in this device.
3 Press [Start] on the Windows Start

menu, and press [NetDA Manager] in [All
Programs].
17
729
8 Press [update].
• Firmware update starts.

• The Sub Monitor Adaptor is restarted when the
update is completed.
9 Check that the version in the lower left of

the screen is the new version.
10 Set the IP address of the Sub Monitor

Adaptor.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• After upgrading the firmware, the Sub Monitor Adaptor
returns to its default settings. Be sure to reset the IP
address after upgrading is completed.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the setting of the IP address of the Sub Monitor
Adaptor, refer to "12.10.4 Setting the Sub Monitor
Adaptor".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
17
730
17.8 Maintenance of AeroDR Detector
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 17.8.2 Gain calibration of AeroDR

• When several different [Sync Mode] are set in [Expo-
Detector
sure Room Setting] for the device for which roaming
environment has been set, perform calibration in each Every 3 months, acquire multiple exposed images and
link system. perform calibration.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
17.8.1 Offset calibration for • For the gain calibration of AeroDR Detector, refer to
AeroDR Detector "CS-7 User Tool Operation Manual".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Offset calibration is usually performed by the user, but
the service engineer may need to perform it if neces-
sary.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• When [Sync Mode] is set to [XARM], offset calibration
is not necessary.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the offset calibration for AeroDR Detector, refer to
"CS-7 User Tool Operation Manual".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
17.8 Maintenance of AeroDR Detector
17
731
17.9 Maintenance of REGIUS
17.9.1 Unevenness calibration
Conduct REGIUS unevenness calibration for the fol-

lowing cases. 2m
• When REGIUS optical components are replaced
• When unevenness of newly implemented plate ver-
sion (PV) and plate version of the one currently be- Perpendicular
ing calibrated are in a different group to tube Vertical direction
Put blue line
downward
• For the plate type, PV, and unevenness group, refer
to the following.
Plate types for regular

exposure
PV Unevenness
group
RP-3S 00
RP-3T 00
3 Press the device icon of the REGIUS to be
calibrated.
RP-3L 00
S1
RP-4S 03
RP-4T 03
RP-4L 03
• Conduct unevenness calibration on the plate to be

used if unevenness is highly visible. Unevenness
may be improved.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Use the largest CR cassette size on site for uneven-
ness calibration. Correction data will not be applied
for larger size CR cassettes than the ones used in
unevenness calibration.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • •
1 Expose a solid image with the calibration

CR cassette.
• Exposure conditions are as follows.

– Voltage: 80 kV (Fixed)
– mAs: 10-20 mAs (Average 1,500-3,000 step dose)
– Distance between plate and tube: More than 2
m recommended
• Expose while aligning the perpendicular direc-
tion of the tube with the vertical direction of the
CR cassette. The blue line of the CR cassette
will be at the bottom. • The sub-menu screen is displayed.
17
732
4 Press [Uneven. Cal.]. 5 Select a resolution for the calibration from

[Resolution].
REGIUS Resolution
[87.5 μm (General High)] or
REGIUS 110/110HQ
[175 μm (General Std)]
REGIUS 170/190/210 [175 μm (General Std)]
6 For barcode registration, read the barcode

on the CR cassette with a bar code reader.
• The barcode value will be displayed on [Barcode
Registration].
• For reading order specification, barcode reading
is not necessary.
• The unevenness calibration screen is displayed.

7 Press [OK].
• "Calibrating unevenness" will be displayed.
17
733
8 Insert the CR cassette to REGIUS.

• After unevenness calibration, result of the cali- 17.9.2 Sensitivity calibration
bration will appear in the [Result] field.
Conduct the sensitivity calibration of REGIUS for the

IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • following cases.
• For REGIUS 110/110HQ, calibration will not start until • When condition of the X-ray device was changed
the ejected CR cassette is removed after reading the • When correcting the sensitivity difference by REGIUS
image in the CR cassette. • When correcting the sensitivity difference by plate
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • type
• When the newly implemented plate version (PV) and
9 For REGIUS 170/190/210, select [87.5 μm the plate version currently under the sensitivity cali-
(General High/Mammo Standard)] in [Res- bration are different
olution] and repeat steps 6-8.
• For REGIUS 110/110HQ, go to step 10. • For the plate type and PV, refer to the following.
Plate types for regular

PV
10 Press [Exit]. exposure
RP-3S 00
RP-3T 00
RP-3L 00
RP-4S 03
RP-4T 03
RP-4L 03
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Conduct the sensitivity calibration within 5 minutes
after X-ray exposure (Insert a CR cassette to REGIUS
within 5 minutes).
• Use the largest CR cassette size on site for sensitivity
• The result of the unevenness calibration will be
calibration.
stored in the unevenness calibration data table
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
of this device.
1 Expose a solid image with the calibration

HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • CR cassette.
• For REGIUS 110/110HQ, conduct unevenness calibra- • Exposure conditions are as follows.
tion of regular CR cassettes both in [87.5 μm (General – Voltage: 80 kV (Fixed)
High)] and [175 μm (General Std)] resolutions. – Exposure dose: 10 mR ± 2

• For REGIUS 170/190/210, the order of unevenness – Grid: None
calibration of [175 μm (General Std)] and [87.5 μm • Expose while aligning the perpendicular direc-
(General High/Mammo Standard)] can be reversed. tion of the tube with the vertical direction of the
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • CR cassette. The blue line of the CR cassette
will be at the bottom.
2m
17
Perpendicular
to tube Vertical direction
Put blue line
downward
734
2 Start the service tool. 4 Press [Sensitivity Cal.].
3 Press the device icon of the REGIUS to be

calibrated.
• The sensitivity calibration screen is displayed.

5 Select [Automatic calculation from high
resolution data] and [87.5 μm (General
High) A] in [Resolution].
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When [Automatic calculation from high resolution data]
is selected, the calibration data of [General Std] will be
automatically generated using [General High] calibra-
17
tion data (Calibration is completed in 1 exposure).
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
735
6 For REGIUS 110/110HQ, enter "0.96" in 9 Press [OK].

[Sensitive].
• "Calibrating sensitive" will appear.
7 Enter the dose exposed in [Exposure 10 Insert the CR cassette to REGIUS.

Dose].
• For REGIUS 210, make sure [Sensitive] is IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
"0.94".
• For REGIUS 110/110HQ, calibration will not start until
the ejected CR cassette is removed after reading the
image in the CR cassette.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• After sensitivity calibration, the result of the cali-

bration will appear in the [Result] field.
11 Press [Exit].
8 For barcode registration, read the barcode

on the CR cassette with a bar code reader.
• The barcode value will be displayed on [Barcode
Registration].
• For reading order specification, barcode reading
is not necessary.
• The result of the sensitivity calibration will be

stored in the sensitivity calibration data table of
this device.
17
736
17.10 Adjustment of the position of the touch panel
When there is a discrepancy in the touch panel coordi-

nates, adjust the position of the touch panel.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the calibration of the touch panel, refer to "4.5.2
Adjusting the position of the touch panel".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
17.10 Adjustment of the position of the touch panel
17
737
17.11 Monitor brightness adjustment
17.11.1 Work flow of monitor 17.11.2 Brightness adjustment

brightness adjustment for Chroma5
The work flow of monitor brightness adjustment is as The procedure for adjusting brightness for Chroma5 is
follows. as follows.
Chroma5 can be used for the measurement device.
O
OInstallation of Chroma5 driver
Start
Install the driver when conducting a gradation test with
Chroma5.
1. Connecting measurement instrument
1 Connect Chroma5 to this device.

2. Gradation testing If the gradation
testing fails even
after conducting
calibration twice, 2 Insert the CS-7 DRIVER CD into the CD/
Failed confirm the testing
Result procedures and the DVD drive.
instrument
OK connection. • If an auto-play screen appears, press [Cancel]
3. Calibration
and close the screen.
2. Gradation testing
Failed Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Result
OK
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
End

diate screen.
17
738
5 Right-click [Computer] on the Windows

Start menu, and press [Manage].
6 Select [Device Manager] from the left side 9 Press [Next].

of the screen, right click [Calibrator], and
press [Update Driver Software].
7 Press [Browse my computer for driver

software].
10 Press [Install].
8 Press [Browse] to select the following 11 Press [Close] when the installation is 17.11 Monitor brightness adjustment
folder that contains the driver, and press completed.
[OK]. • This completes the installation of the Chroma5
• "D:\CalibTool\SensorUSBDrivers\Chroma5" driver. Next, perform the gradation test with
Choroma5.
17
739
O
OGradation test with Chroma5 4 Press [LCD].
The gradation test with Chroma5 is as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Wait at least 30 minutes after turning on the monitor
before carrying out the gradation test.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Connect Chroma5 to this device.
• The LCD calibration screen is displayed.

17
740
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 7 Press [Grayscale Test].

• When first starting, a "LUT for this monitor does not
exist. Do you want to apply default LUT settings?"
message is displayed. In this case, set the following.
(1) Select [Yes].
(2) Select [Maker] and [Model Number] and enter

[Serial Number] of the monitors.
• The gradation test screen is displayed.
(3) Press [Save].

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
8 Place Chroma5 within the square box in
the center of the gradation test screen.
5 Press [Config] and [Photometer], and se-
lect [Chroma5].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If you select other colorimeters than the one to be
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
used, a message will be displayed at the measure-
• Slightly tilt the monitor before placing Chroma5.
ment and measurement cannot be completed.
If the monitor stays straight, the sensor may not con-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
tact closely to the monitor, which may lead to low ac-
curacy.
6 If multiple monitors are connected, press
• Make sure fluorescent light and outside light do not
[Config] and [Monitor] and select a moni-
reflect directly on the monitor.
tor to be gradation-tested. • Make sure that the monitor is not dirty.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
17
741
9 Press [Start]. 3 Press [Calibration].

• Measurement will start and the result will be dis-
played in approximately 1 minute.
10 Confirm the determination result.

• When [OK] is displayed in [Judgement Result],
the monitor brightness adjustment is completed.
Press [Safely Remove Hardware] at the bottom
right of the Windows screen to remove Chroma5
from the USB port according to the safely re-
move hardware procedure.
• When [NG] is displayed in [Judgement Result],
calibration is required.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For calibration, refer to "Calibration with Chroma5".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
O
OCalibration with Chroma5
If the gradation test result is NG, perform calibration
with Chroma5.
1 Make sure that Chroma5 is connected to

this device.
2 Display the LCD calibration screen. • The calibration screen is displayed.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 4 Place Chroma5 within the square box in

• For the procedure, refer to steps 2 to 4 in "Gradation the center of the calibration screen.
test with Chroma5".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • Reference • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the installation process, refer to step 8 in "Grada-
tion test with Chroma5".
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5 Press [Start].
• Measurement will start and the result will be dis-
played in a few minutes.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Never press [Detail Setting] on the calibration screen.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
6 Conduct the gradation test again.

• When [OK] is displayed in [Judgement Result],
the monitor brightness adjustment is completed.
Press [Safely Remove Hardware] at the bottom
right of the Windows screen to remove Chroma5
17 from the USB port according to the safely
remove hardware procedure.
• When [NG] is displayed in [Judgement Result],
calibrate again.
742
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
17.11.3 Display of history • Perform the following from the [History] screen.
–– History display by measurement type, computer and
The procedure for displaying the calibration history is monitor
as follows. –– Graph display of measurement results
–– Reference to the temporal change of maximum
1 Display the LCD calibration screen. brightness (It can be referenced only when a spe-
cific monitor is extracted and displayed.)
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• For the procedure, refer to steps 2-4 in "Gradation test
with Chroma5".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Press [History].
• The [History] screen is displayed.
17
743
17.11.4 Application of LUT to

3 Press [View] for calibration to create LUT.
the monitor
You can create LUT from results of calibrations per-
formed in the past, and apply it to the monitor.
1 Display the LCD calibration screen.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
with Chroma5".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Press [History].
• The [Calibration Result] screen is displayed.

4 Press [File], and press [Apply this LUT to

the monitor.].
• The [History] screen is displayed.
17
744
17.11.5 Setting of environmen-

4 Press [Save].
tal information
The procedure for editing the environmental informa-
tion is as follows.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• Environmental information refers to items such as "In-
stitution Name" and "Person in charge" etc. displayed
in the gradation test results and calibration results.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• The environmental information is changed.
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
with Chroma5".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Press [Config], and press [Information].
• The [Information] screen is displayed.
3 Edit the items displayed on the right of

the screen.
• Depending on the items selected on the left of 17

the screen, items displayed on the right of the
screen will change.
745
17.11.6 Setting to disable display HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
gradation correction • If you enter the "Serial Number", the serial number of
the display will be displayed on the calibration results
The procedure for setting to disable display gradation screen and measurement results screen for the grada-
correction is as follows. tion test. When a display is replaced, etc., the serial
number allows you to identify the display.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• If monitor display gradation correction setting is dis-
4 Select [Apply linear LUT] and press [Save].
abled, the LUT information reflected on the monitor is
disabled and the monitor can be returned to the pre-
correction setting.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
with Chroma5".
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
2 Press [Config], and select [Monitor Installa-

tion/Monitor Exchange] from [Maintenance].
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• When [Apply linear LUT] is selected, the linear LUT is
applied and displayed according to the properties of

the original display.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The [Monitor Setting] screen is displayed.
3 Select [Maker] and [Model Number] and

enter [Serial Number] of the monitors to
disable their display gradation correc-
tions.
17 • The input of [Serial Number] is arbitrary.
746
5 Press [OK].
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [Yes] to delete the history and [No]

to retain it.
17
747
17.12 Deletion of the device information
The procedure for deleting the device information is as

follows.
• The equipment information screen is displayed.
4 Select the device whose registration in-

formation is to be deleted from the equip-
ment information list.
5 Press [Delete].
17.12 Deletion of the device information
3 Press [Equipment Information]. IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Remove the check from the connection checkbox in
the sub-menu screen before deleting information on
AeroDR SYSTEM-related devices.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
17
748
17.13 Reset/change/deletion of the counter
Use the following procedure to reset the frequency of 2 Press [Warranty Component] tab.
use and usage start date after periodic replacement of
parts such as the REGIUS CR cassette plate, REGIUS
CR cassette reader and AeroDR Generator Interface
Unit or after periodic maintenance is conducted. You
can also change and remove them.
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The following procedure is that when the automatic
login function is on. When the automatic login function
is off, [Edit] in step 3 is not displayed; therefore you
have to re-log in in Maintenance mode. When you log
in in Maintenance mode, password entry in step 4 is
omitted.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
1 Press [System] to display the system

3 Press [Edit].
monitor screen.

4 Enter the password and press [OK].
17
749
HINT • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• If editing or deletion of the REGIUS Cassette, REGI-
US Plate, or REGIUS reader maintenance information
fails, information on whether the main JM or backup
JM processing failed is displayed in the error mes-
sage.
• If editing or deletion via the backup JM fails, only
maintenance information of the main JM is updated;
after the backup JM is restored, perform editing or de-
letion again.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7 Press [End].
• The edit screen is displayed.
5 Select the device whose counter is to be

reset, changed, or deleted on the equip-
ment information list, and select the item
to edit.
IMPORTANT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If you read the REGIUS cassette and REGIUS plate
again using the REGIUS reader and restart the device,
the maintenance information of the REGIUS cassette,
REGIUS plate, and REGIUS reader is displayed.

• If the JM used for this device has been switched to the
backup JM and you update the REGIUS Cassette or
6 Edit the counter. REGIUS Plate maintenance information, make sure to
confirm the maintenance information in the main JM.
••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
17
• Press [Reset] to reset the counter.
• To change the value of the counter, enter the
intended value using numerical keypads, then
press [Apply].
• To delete the replacement unit from the list,
press [Delete].
750
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• AeroDR Generator Interface Unit and AeroDR Portable RF Unit use the same error codes.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Update Reset op- Delete op-

Device name Item
operation eration eration
Number of times the connector has been re-
1 AeroDR I/F Cable moved and connected
AeroDR Battery Charger (for Number of times the connector has been re-
2 charging/registration) moved and connected
Not possible Not possible
AeroDR Battery Charger (for Number of times the connector has been re-
3 charging only) moved and connected
Number of times the connector has been re-
4 AeroDR UF Cable moved and connected
5 Number of times WS1 SW1 has been switched
Number of times WS1 XRayOK has been
7 switched
Number of times WS1 XRayON has been
8 switched
Not possible
AeroDR Generator Interface Number of times WS2 XRayOK has been
11 Unit switched
12 switched
Number of times WS3 XRayOK has been
15 switched

Possible Possible
16 switched
17 Number of times the erase-lamp has been used
18 CR cassette reader Number of days the grease has been used
Number of days the transport rollers have been
19 used
20 Number of days the image plate has been used
CR cassette Number of days the cassette cover has been Possible
21 used
22 Number of days this device has been used
23 Number of days the HDD has been used
24 Number of days the monitor has been used
This device Not possible
Number of days this device's battery has been
25 used while in portable operation
Number of days the AeroDR Portable Unit battery
26 has been used
• You can change the counter values of items for which update operation is "Possible" by using the numerical key-
pad and the [Apply] button. 16
• You can reset the counter of items for which reset operation is "Possible" by pressing the [Reset] button.
• You can delete a device name for which delete operation is "Possible" from the equipment information list by
pressing the [Delete] button.
751
17.14 Uninstallation of the touch panel driver
The procedure for uninstalling the touch panel driver is 3 Press [Start] on the Windows Start menu,
as follows. and press [Control Panel].
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• The following description is an example. The operation
might be different depending on the monitor used. For
details, refer to the operation manual of the monitor
used.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
Reference • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

diate screen.
4 Press [Programs].
5 Select [NextWindow 3000 Drivers], and

press [Uninstall].
17
752
6 Press [Yes].
7 Exit [Control Panel], and restart this de-

vice.
17
753
754
Chapter
18
Specifications
This chapter describes the specifications of this device.
755
18.1 Specifications
18.1.1 Software specifications
Item Description
Product name DIRECT DIGITIZER CS-7
• MDD: Class II a, Rule10
Product classification
FDA: 510 (k) Class II
EN60601-1-4:1996+A1:1999, EN60601-1-6:2007
Harmonized standards
EN62366:2008, EN 980:2008, EN 1041:2008
(for MDD)
EN ISO 14971:2009, EN62304:2006
Remarks (for MDD) CE marking, indicating conformity with the Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC
DICOM Storage SCU
DICOM Basic Grayscale Print Management SCU
DICOM support
DICOM Modality Worklist Management SCU
DICOM Modality Performed Procedure Step SCU
Auto-gradation process
Frequency processing (F process)
Equalization processing (E process)
Image processing Hybrid processing (HF process - HE process)
Hybrid smoothing process (HS process)
Grid removal process
Automatic exposure field recognition process
1) AeroDR Detector
Readable devices 2) REGIUS MODEL 170, REGIUS MODEL 190, REGIUS MODEL 210, REGIUS MODEL 110/110S,
REGIUS MODEL 110HQ
Sampling pitch 175 μm, 87.5 μm (REGIUS series only)
Host: max 4 ch
Image output
Printer: max 2 ch
1) Application : CS-7 application software
2) OS : Windows 7 Professional 32-bit-------SOUP
3) Middleware : .NET framework 4.0---------------------SOUP
Software components Microsoft JET (Access)-----------------SOUP
Postgre SQL-------------------------------SOUP
4) Driver : CD-R/DVD-R writing library-----------SOUP
* OS is installed in PC. It is not included in CS-7 product.
1) Order registration/Order cooperation
The order registration method of CS-7 can be selected according to the connection environment of
the facility.
2) Exam. Tag
Select the Exam. Tag to select the optimal reading condition, image-processing condition, and output
Software main functions condition for each body part.
3) Image reading
4) Linkage with X-ray equipment
Linkage of exposure between X-ray equipment, Digital Radiography, and CS-7.
18.1 Specifications
5) Image processing
6) Image sending to printer/PACS/image storage media
18
756
18.1 Specifications
18.1.2 Hardware specifications
Item Description
CPU Intel Core i3 processor 2.93 GHz or higher
Memory Standard 2 GB
OS Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (32-bit)
Hard disk 250 GB or more
CD/DVD super multi drive or higher
Optical drive
(CD/DVD read, write enabled)
PCI slot 2 empty slots or more (PCIx1, PCI-Express)
Ethernet 10base-T/100base-TX/1000base-T
Input/output port
USB: 6 ports or more *
Keyboard Full size keyboard
Mouse Optical wheel mouse (USB)
Sound Audio function available
Power requirements AC 90 V-264 V (Single phase 50/60 Hz)
Power consumption 46 W
External dimensions 338 (W)x378 (D)x100 (H) mm
Weight 7.6 kg
Standard (for MDD) Conforms to the standards that the CE marking requires.
Control unit power cable
Operation unit (monitor) power cable
Major accessories Connector cable between control unit and operation unit (monitor)
Keyboard
Mouse
Temperature Humidity
10 to 35°C 35 10 to 90% RH 90%RH
During operation
(0 m ~ 3,048 m (ensure no water con-
Recommended storage in maximum altitude) densation) 10%RH
and usage environment

conditions Temperature Humidity
–30 to 60°C 10 to 90% RH 90%RH
In storage
(0 m ~ 9,144 m (ensure no water con-
in maximum altitude) -30
densation) 10%RH
* Required for mouse, keyboard, and touch panel.
IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• These product specifications may change for improvement without prior notice.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
18.1 Specifications
18
757
18.1 Specifications
18.1.3 Hardware specifications (during the portable X-ray device operation)
Item Description
CPU Intel Core i5-2520M vPro processor 2.50 GHz or higher
Memory Standard 4 GB
OS Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (32 bit)
Hard disk 250 GB or more
Ethernet: 10base-T/100base-TX/1000base-T
Input/output port
USB: 3 ports or more
Keyboard PC built-in keyboard
Monitor 12.1 inches or above, 1280×800 or above
Sound Audio function available
Power requirements AC100V-240V (50/60Hz)
Power consumption 80 W
External dimensions 299.2 (W)×226.5 (D)×30.6 (H) mm
Weight 1.49 kg (+0.29kg: AC adapter)
Standard (for MDD) Conforms to the standards that the CE marking requires.
Major accessories Power cable
Temperature Humidity
35
30 to 80% RH 80%RH
During operation
5 to 35°C (ensure no water con-
Recommended storage 5 densation) 30%RH
and usage environment

conditions Temperature Humidity
50 30 to 80% RH 80%RH
In storage
–20 to 50°C (ensure no water con-
-20
densation) 30%RH
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• These product specifications may change for improvement without prior notice.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
18.1 Specifications
18
758
18.1 Specifications
18.1.4 Optional products
Category Product name

LCD monitor 17 inch high field of vision LCD multi-touch monitor
21 inch color LCD monitor
High precision monitor
DP-DVI conversion cable
CS multi-bar code reader
Bar code Reader CS bar code reader 3
Bluetooth bar code reader (during the portable X-ray device operation)
Magnetic card reader CS magnetic card reader
Add-in Ethernet board
Add-in LAN
Wireless LAN adapter (during the portable X-ray device operation)
Additional memory Additional memory module
Sub monitor Network display adaptor NetDA-1
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• For the specifications of the monitor and options of this device, refer to the operation manual of each product.
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
18.1 Specifications
18
759
760
Chapter
19
Appendix
This chapter describes additional materials.
761
3. Disable Code 39
100101
19.1 Using bar code reader for REGIUS to register

10 Page 1 of 2
100101
devices 4. Disable Code 93
eywell
10 Configuration Bar Codes Page 1 of 2
an the codes in the numbered order.
We recommend using a bar code reader to register 4. Disable Code 93
4. Disable Code 93
the serial numbers of the AeroDR SYSTEM related de-
eywell
10
Program Configuration
Mode Bar Codes
vices, etc. for efficient operation and the prevention of
Page 1 2ofof2 5
6. Disable Interleaved
an the codes in the numbered order. 100102
input errors.
When using the bar code reader exclusive for REGIUS,
eywell
10
Program Mode use the following
Configuration Barprocedures
Codes to change the settings. Page 1 2ofof2 5
You willorder.
an the codes in the numbered need to scan the bar codes. Please print the 100102
appropriate pages to ensure proper operation. 5. Disable Codabar
100105
5. Disable Codabar
eywell Configuration Bar Codes
10
Program Mode Page 1 2ofof2 5
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
an the codes in the numbered order.
• Once registration is completed, make sure to change 100105

5. Disable Codabar
eywell Configuration Bar Codes
Program Mode
lan
Low
the bar code reader settings back to the exclusive 6. Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
theSpeed
codesUSB
in theDefaults
numberedsettings
order. for REGIUS. 7. Disable UPC/EAN
100104
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 100105
6. Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
Program Mode 6. Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
l Low Speed USB Defaults
19.1.1 Procedure to change the 7. Disable UPC/EAN
MetroSet 3.2.0.38
100104
Copyright 2010, Honeywell Internationa
bar code reader settings 100105

100106
The 12/10/2010
l Low Speed USB Defaults procedure for changing the settings is as follows. 7. Disable UPC/EAN
MetroSet 3.2.0.38 Page 2010,
Copyright 1 of 2 Honeywell Internationa
100105
100106
l Low Speed USB Defaults12/10/2010

1 Scan the bar code below. 7. Disable UPC/EAN
7. Disable UPC/EAN
e Code 39
2. All Defaults
Honeywell Configuration Bar Codes 8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes
Page 1 of 2
Please scan the codes in the numbered order.
100106
l Low Speed USB Defaults12/10/2010 7. Disable UPC/EAN

e Code 39 1. Enter Program Mode Honeywell Configuration Bar Codes Page 1 of 2
8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes 6. Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
100106
105517
8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes
e Code 39 2 Honeywell
Scan
1. Enter the
Program Configuration
following
Mode Barfrom
bar codes in order Codes
1 8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes 6. Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
to 15.
19.1 Using bar code reader for REGIUS to register devices
100106
999999 105517 100105
1. Enter Program Mode
e Code 39 1. Enter Program Mode 8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes 6. Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
e Code 93 9. User Defined Code 128 Code ID
999999 105517 100105
e Code 39 9.
8. User Defined
Use User Code
Code IDs 128 Code ID
as Suffixes
e Code 93 2. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults 9. User Defined Code 128 Code ID 7. Disable UPC/EAN
999999 105517 100105

8061130
2. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults
e Code 93 2. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults 9. User Defined Code 128 Code ID 7. Disable UPC/EAN
105517
999941 8061130 100106
e Code 93 2. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults 10. Japanese

9. User Keyboard
Defined Code 128 Code ID 7. Disable UPC/EAN
e Codabar 10. Japanese Keyboard
999941 8061130 100106
e Code 93 3. Disable Code 39 9. User Defined Code 128 Code ID

e Codabar 3. Disable Code 39 10. Japanese Keyboard 8. Use User Code IDs as Suffixes
999941 8061130 100106

4162100
3.2.0.38 Copyright 2010, Honeywell International, Inc. 8061130

konika.mst
100101 4162100 105517
19
3.2.0.38 100101 Copyright 2010, Honeywell International, Inc. konika.mst 105517
4162100
762
e Codabar 10. Japanese Keyboard
4. Disable Code 93 9. User Defined Code 128 Code ID
3.2.0.38 100101 Copyright 2010, Honeywell International, Inc. konika.mst 105517

4162100
116602
Honeywell Configuration Bar Codes

12/10/2010
11. Disable Line Feed Page 2 of 2
116602
Honeywell Configuration Bar 19.1 Using

11. Disable Line Feed
12. Disable Carriage Return
Codes bar code reader for REGIUS to register devices
116602
19.1.2 Procedure to reset the bar
code reader settings to
REGIUS read-only settings
116602
116603

The procedure for restoring the setting to REGIUS
116602 read-only is as follows.
116603
13. No Beep
1 Scan the bar code below.
116603
2. All Defaults
13. No Beep
116603
318505
13. No Beep
13. No Beep
116603
318505 2 Scan the following bar codes in order
from 1 to 23.
13. No Beep
14. Same Symbol Timeout
318505
14. Same
13. No BeepSymbol Timeout
318505
7189400
14. Same Symbol Timeout 2. All Defaults

318505
7189400
15. Exit Program

14. Same Mode
Symbol Timeout
15. Exit Program Mode
7189400 3. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults


7189400
999999

4. Configuration Code 1
3 Check 3.2.0.38
7189400
MetroSet
999999 whetherthe bar code reader can
Copyright beHoneywell International, Inc.
2010, konika.mst
used for registering the devices.

MetroSet 3.2.0.38 Copyright 2010, Honeywell International, Inc. konika.mst

999999

999999

999999
19
763
7. Configuration Code 4 16. Configuration Code 13
12. Configuration Code 9 21. Enable Manual Activation Mode

13. Configuration Code 10 22. No Beep
14. Configuration Code 11 23. Exit Program Mode

3 Check whether the bar code of a CR
cassette can be read with the bar code
reader.
19
764
19.2 How to add a bar code setting
A bar code setting can be added to the CS-7 bar code reader so that bar codes other than Code 128 can be read.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• This setting is effective only on the CS-7 bar code reader. It cannot be set on other bar code readers.
• Read the bar codes on each setting sheet in numerical order. If the procedure fails, return the setting to default with “Setting
sheet (3) (default setting)", and try the setting again.
• Sounds will be output when setting sheets are read, but all sounds are not the same.
• Code 128 cannot be read and added.
• For Code 128, bar codes other than 14-digit bar codes cannot be read.
• The enter addition setting cannot be set for Code 128.
• No sound is output when reading a user-specified bar code.
• After the setting is done, perform reading check with the bar code (such as CR cassette) of the device to be used.
• Use setting sheets by printing them out.
• When using the patient list search function of CS-1/2/3, you must add “Enter".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
19
765
19.2.1 Work flow
The work flow is as follows.
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If you make a mistake during the setting operation, start from the beginning again.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Start
Perform
"Setting sheet (3)
(default setting)"
Add Perform Add Perform No. 1-1 of

Add enter? "Setting sheet (1) Add NW-7 setting? "19.2.3 Additional
(enter addition setting)" bar code list"
Do not add
Do not add
Add Perform No. 2-1 of

Add Code 39 setting? "19.2.3 Additional
bar code list"
Do not add
Add Perform No. 3-1 of

Add UPC/EAN setting? "19.2.3 Additional
bar code list"
Do not add
Add Perform No. 4-1 of Perform “Setting

Add ITF setting? "19.2.3 Additional sheet (2) (ITF reading

bar code list" digit number setting)”
Do not add
Add Perform "Setting

Add 1 digit setting? sheet (4) (minimum
reading digit setting)"
End
19
766
19.2.2 Added bar code reading operation check
Check whether the added bar code can be read successfully.
O
OReading operation check with this device
Read bar codes of the device used on site, and check whether they can be read successfully.
• If the setting is [Do not add enter], then read bar codes by placing the cursor on the [Patient ID] screen. This is
successful if the number displayed on the [Patient ID] screen is the same as the bar code number.
• If the setting is [Add enter], then check with the scheduled examination search function. Temporarily register
a bar code number to be read by this device to a patient ID in advance, place the cursor on the [Patient ID]
screen, and read the bar code. This is successful if the number displayed on the [Patient ID] screen is the same
as the bar code number.
O
O[Do not add enter] setting check
Because the [Do not add enter] setting cannot be checked with CS-7, check the setting with Windows Notepad.
• Open Windows Notepad, and read a bar code. If the setting is [Do not add enter] and there is no linefeed after
the bar code number is displayed on Notepad, then this is successful.
• Set the input method of Notepad to single-byte input before checking.
19.2.3 Additional bar code list
Bar codes that can be added are as follows.
No. Item Details Set bar code

Enables reading of NW-7.
• When adding enter to data, perform “Setting sheet (1) (enter
NW-7
addition setting)”.
1-1 permission
• To change the minimum reading digit number, perform “Setting
setting
sheet (4) (minimum reading digit setting)” after reading this bar
code. Permission
Enables reading of Code 39.

• When adding enter to data, perform “Setting sheet (1) (enter
Code 39
addition setting)”.
2-1 permission
• To change the minimum reading digit number, perform “Setting
setting
sheet (4) (minimum reading digit setting)” after reading this bar
code. Permission
Enables reading of JAN/EAN-8, JAN/EAN-13, UPC-A, and UPC-E.

UPC/EAN • When adding enter to data, perform “Setting sheet (1) (enter
3-1 permission addition setting)”.
setting
Permission
Enables reading of ITF.

• For ITF, always perform “Setting sheet (2) (ITF reading digit
setting)” after reading this bar code.
ITF
4-1 • When adding enter to data, perform “Setting sheet (1) (enter
Read permission
addition setting)” after reading this bar code. Permission
• To change the minimum reading digit number, perform “Setting sheet
(4) (minimum reading digit setting)” after reading this bar code.
19
767
O
O"Setting sheet (1) (enter addition setting)" 11. Configuration Code 8
To add enter to data, read all of the following bar codes
from 1 in order.

2. All Defaults
3. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults

19
768
27. Configuration Code 24 38. Enable Manual Activation Mode

O
O"Setting sheet (2) (ITF reading digit setting)"
For ITF, cancellation of significant digits occurs fre-
quently unless reading digits are fixed, therefore set
the number of digits.

1 Read the bar code for starting the setting.
19
769
2 Read the bar code of ITF reading digit O

O"Setting sheet (3) (default setting)"
setting #1. To return the settings to their defaults, read all of the
following bar codes from 1 in order.
3 Set the number of digits to read. Refer to

the following digit number setting table 2. All Defaults
and read Code Byte bar codes.
(Example) when setting to 14 digits

[1st], [2nd], and [3rd] for [14 digits] in the table
are [0], [1], and [4], therefore, read Code Byte bar 3. Internal Low Speed USB Defaults
codes in the order of [0] → [1] → [4].
Digit number 1st 2nd 3rd
6 digits 0 0 6
8 digits 0 0 8
10 digits 0 1 0
12 digits 0 1 2
14 digits 0 1 4
16 digits 0 1 6
Code Byte bar codes
4 Read the bar code to complete the setting.

19
770

O
O"Setting sheet (4) (minimum reading digit
setting)"
The minimum reading digits of NW-7, Code 39, and
ITF are 3 digits by default. When using a bar code for
14. Configuration Code 11 1-digit or 2-digit patient ID, set the minimum reading
digit to [1 digit] with this setting sheet.
Read all of the following bar codes from 1 in order.
* UPC/EAN are fixed to 8 or 13 digits. Thus this set-
ting cannot be applied to these.

1. Setting start
2. Enable Control Set #1

3. Minimum Symbol Length

4. 0
21. Enable Manual Activation Mode
19
771
5. 0
6. 1
7. Setting completion
19
772
19.3 Precautions for network connections
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Replace the following terms depending on the device performing the task.
—— "this device" → "the portable device"
—— "AeroDR Access Point" → "AeroDR Portable RF Unit built-in AeroDR Access Point", or "AeroDR Portable UF Unit built-in
AeroDR Access Point"
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
19.3.1 Network connections for this device
Subnet
The subnet indicates the same address system. It indicates the range of IP addresses capable of direct communica-
tion via hubs and AeroDR Access Point.
• When the subnet is "192.168.100.xx/24", the range of IP addresses capable of direct communication becomes
"192.168.100.1" to "192.168.100.254".
• When the subnet is "10.xx.xx.xx/8", the range of IP addresses capable of direct communication becomes "10.1.1.1"
to "10.254.254.254".
• When connecting to a terminal in a different address system, it is necessary to connect via router.
Router
Hub
192.168.100.1
192.168.200.1
AeroDR Detector
PACS
(Host)
192.168.200.10
CS-7 CS-7
192.168.100.10 192.168.100.12
192.168.100.11
192.168.100.xx/24 address system

HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• The AeroDR SYSTEM cannot be used between different subnets. It is necessary to set up the IP address of this device and
the AeroDR SYSTEM (including AeroDR Battery Charger) within the same subnet.
• When this device is used in plural number, RM client machines between different subnets cannot be connected to RM hybrid
machines. Configure RM client machines to connect to RM hybrid machines within the same subnet.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
19
773
Network port usable with this device
O
OBasic configuration
• This device has 1 wireless LAN connection port and 1 wired LAN connection port built-in. The wired LAN port and
wireless LAN port built into this device are used to connect with the AeroDR SYSTEM.
• When connecting to PDA, use 1 optional wireless LAN adapter. When connecting to other devices, either the op-
tional wireless LAN adapter or the USB wired LAN adapter can be used.
$HUR'5%DWWHU\&KDUJHU
$HUR'5
6<67(0 $HUR'5
ZLUHG/$1 $FFHVV
$HUR'56<67(0 3RLQW $HUR'5,QWHUIDFH8QLW
+XE EXLOWLQZLUHOHVV/$1
$HUR'5'HWHFWRU
&6
86%ZLUHG
/$1DGDSWHU
$GGLQ/$1WR
3'$DGGLQ
FRQQHFWWRWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ
(LWKHUZLUHGFRQQHFWLRQ :LUHOHVV :LUHOHVV ZLUHOHVV/$1
RUZLUHOHVVFRQQHFWLRQ /$1DGDSWHU /$1DGDSWHU
3'$
O
OWhen the IP address of the institution is set in the AeroDR SYSTEM
When the IP address of the institution is set in the AeroDR SYSTEM, the wired LAN of the AeroDR SYSTEM can be
connected to the LAN of the institution.
$HUR'5%DWWHU\&KDUJHU
$HUR'5
$HUR'56<67(0 $FFHVV
$HUR'56<67(0 3RLQW $HUR'5,QWHUIDFH8QLW
,QVWLWXWLRQ ZLUHG/$1
/$1 EXLOWLQZLUHOHVV/$1
+XE
$HUR'5'HWHFWRU
&6
%XLOWLQZLUHOHVV
3'$DGGLQ
/$1WRFRQQHFW
WRWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ :LUHOHVV :LUHOHVV ZLUHOHVV/$1
/$1DGDSWHU /$1DGDSWHU
3'$
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Different IP addresses are assigned when the institution is connected from the AeroDR SYSTEM wired LAN (2), and
when connected from the add-in wireless LAN (4) for connecting to the institution. When connecting to RIS/HOST in this
environment, check with the RIS/HOST manufacturer whether it is possible to set different addresses for the same AE title.
For details, refer to "Support for different addresses for the same AE title".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
19
774
O
OWhen connecting AeroDR SYSTEM with wired LAN
When connecting AeroDR SYSTEM with wired LAN, the built-in wireless LAN in this device can connect to the ac-
cess point of the institution.
AeroDR
(1)AeroDR SYSTEM Access
wired LAN Point AeroDR Interface Unit
Institution
LAN
Hub Hub
AeroDR Detector
CS-7
(2)Add-in wireless LAN to connect

to the institution
(3)PDA add-in
Wireless wireless LAN
LAN adapter
PDA
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When connecting AeroDR SYSTEM with wired LAN, it is necessary to move this device, the AeroDR Interface Unit and the
hub together. It is also necessary to connect the AeroDR Battery Charger with a different hub from this device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Setting of network address
O
OSetting of network address
It is necessary to set different IP addresses to their respective network ports.
They cannot connect to the network unless the IP addresses are set.
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Regarding the setting of DHCP within the institution, operation cannot be guaranteed because it cannot be checked with the
RIS/PACS connection.
• When both wired and wireless institution LAN are on the same subnet, they can be assigned the same subnet with their re-

spective settings. However, the IP addresses will be different.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
O
ORestrictions on network address changes
• Network address changes can only be made from the service tools.
• Users cannot change network addresses.
• When making rounds between different subnets, network connection is not possible.
19
775
Connection to RIS/PACS from ward LAN
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• When the LAN of a ward (rounds location) is not connected to RIS/PACS, connection to RIS/PACS from the ward is not pos-
sible. Connect by returning to a location where it is possible to connect to RIS/PACS.
• When the LAN that can connect to the ward (rounds location) is not a dedicated RIS/PACS (radiology) LAN, sometimes
large image data cannot be transmitted due to the regulation of the institution. Check with the institution beforehand.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
O
OWhen this device and RIS/PACS are on different subnets
• When this device and RIS/PACS are on different subnets, they must be connected to LAN via router.
• When a default router is not registered for RIS/PACS, it cannot receive responses. Check that a default router is
registered for RIS/PACS.
192.168.200.1/24 Router 192.168.10.1/24
CS-7 PACS
(Host)
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Perform a ping from the connection point with the Windows command prompt. If a response is returned, a default router has
been registered.
• If a default router is not registered, communication with devices connected to the router is not possible.
• When the router is changed, it might involve costs with the RIS/PACS manufacturer.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
O
OOpening the connection port of the router
From the viewpoint of security, the router is sometimes set so that communication is not possible except on allowed
ports. When a port used for PACS (Storage)/RIS (MWM/MPPS) is closed, request the hospital network administrator
to open the port.
O
OSupport for different addresses for the same AE title
When connecting from this device using multiple network ports, connect to RIS/PACS as different IP addresses with the
same AE title. In that event, the following cases apply. Check if support is possible with the RIS/PACS manufacturer.
• Different IPs for the same AE title are not permitted because IP + AE title check is performed (connection from in-
stitution's LAN is not permitted).
• Different IPs for the same AE title can be registered separately although IP + AE title check is performed (connection
is charged separately).
• Only IP is checked. Multiple registration is possible (connection is charged separately).
• Connection is possible without a problem because IP is not checked (connection may be charged separately de-
pending on the policy of the manufacturer).
:DUG/$1 5,63$&6/$1
5RXWHU

$FFHVV
SRLQWRIWKH
LQVWLWXWLRQ
3$&6
+RVW
.0B&6B8 .0B&6B8
&6 &6
19
776
19.3.2 Subnet configuration within the institution
Whole institution is on the same network
O
OWired LAN connection
When connecting with a wired LAN, use the same port as within the radiology department to connect to RIS/PACS.
O
OWireless LAN connection
When connecting with a wireless LAN, connection is made with an IP address different from the wired LAN connec-
tion. It requires RIS/PACS support for different IPs for the same AE title. For details, refer to "Support for different ad-
dresses for the same AE title".
[[[[[[ [[[[[[
)
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ
)
5RXWHU
)
[[[[[[
5DGLRORJ\
)
3$&6
+RVW
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connection via wireless LAN requires the setting to connect this device with a static IP address. Consult with the institution
network administrator.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
19
777
LAN within the institution (wired/wireless) is on the same network
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Regarding the wired LAN, LAN for RIS/PACS is sometimes wired at the location of the portable X-ray device.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
O
OConnecting with both wired LAN and wireless LAN
• Wired LAN needs to be set on the same subnet as the AeroDR SYSTEM. Acquire the IP address for AeroDR SYS-
TEM beforehand.
• Different IP addresses need to be set for wired LAN and wireless LAN. It also requires RIS/PACS support for differ-
ent IPs for the same AE title. For details, refer to "Support for different addresses for the same AE title".
[[ [[
)
)
5RXWHU
)
[[
5DGLRORJ\
)
3$&6
+RVW
IMPORTANT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Connection via wireless LAN requires the setting to connect this device with a static IP address. Consult with the institution
network administrator.
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
19
778
O
OConnecting with wired LAN on the same subnet as the radiology (RIS/PACS)
If wired LAN on the same subnet as the radiology (RIS/PACS) is wired on each floor of the ward, connection to RIS/
PACS using the radiology LAN is possible even on different subnets.
_
[[ [[ [[
4F
3F
5RXWHU
2F
5DGLRORJ\
1F
3$&6
+RVW
19
779
Wireless LAN is on the same network
O
OInstitution LAN is divided into multiple subnets
If institution LAN for wired LAN is divided into multiple subnets, network connection is not possible.
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the network of the radiology department is wired in the "nurse station" or "treatment room" on each floor, connection
with RIS/PACS may be possible by connecting to the network port. For available network, contact the institution network
administrator. For details, refer to "LAN within the institution (wired/wireless) is on the same network".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
O
OWireless LAN connection
Connection via wireless LAN uses a different IP address from the wired LAN, and requires RIS/PACS support for dif-
ferent IPs for the same AE title.
[[
)
[[
)
[[
5RXWHU
)
[[ [[
5DGLRORJ\
)
3$&6
[[ +RVW
19
780
Network for wired LAN/wireless LAN differs on each floor

If institution LAN is divided into multiple subnets for both wired LAN and wireless LAN, connection to the institution
LAN is not possible.
) [[
[[
) [[
[[
[[ 5RXWHU
)
[[
$FFHVVSRLQWRIWKHLQVWLWXWLRQ [[
) [[ 5DGLRORJ\
3$&6
[[ +RVW
HINT •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• If the network of the radiology department is wired in the "nurse station" or "treatment room" on each floor, connection with
RIS/PACS may be possible by connecting to the network port. For available network, contact the institution network adminis-
trator. For details, refer to "LAN within the institution (wired/wireless) is on the same network".
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
19
781
19.4 Study deletion
The procedure for deleting unnecessary studies from

the study list is as follows.
IMPORTANT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
• In the study list display area, only deletable studies
are displayed.
• Studies in the output summary (queue) and guarded
studies are not displayed.
• Studies deleted using the study deletion tool cannot
be restored.
• Even if a study is deleted using the study deletion
tool, the study data will be kept in a state which does
not appear in the study list. The study data is deleted
by the automatic deletion function when this device is 3 Press [Study Deletion].
shut down.
• To delete a study for which IN PROGRESS has been
output to the RIS in institutions operating MWM-
MPPS, suspend and delete the study on the RIS side.
If this is not done and the system is set to update
the study list using MWM in particular, the deleted
studies will be reacquired. For the reacquired studies,
the message "Study is Already Performed in Another
Console." will be displayed and it will not be possible
to begin the study. Also, although it will be possible to
delete the study in the study list screen, message of
"Unknown error is happened" will appear.
• In institutions where study sharing is in operation, do
not acquire studies from other terminals during a study
deletion operation. Note also that if a study is deleted
during transmission, the study may still be transmitted.
In this case, start the study deletion tool on the
terminal which requested acquisition of the study and
delete the study from the terminal.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •

• The study deletion screen is displayed.
19.4 Study deletion
19
782
19.4 Study deletion
4 Select the study to delete and press 7 Press [Close].

[Delete].
HINT • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • 8 Close the sub-menu screen.

• You can select multiple studies with holding down the
[Shift] key on the keyboard.
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • •
5 Press [OK] on the deletion confirmation

screen.
6 Press [OK] on the completion confirmation

screen.
19.4 Study deletion
19
783
784
Revision History
785
Revision history
Version Date Reason for changes

A 2011-04-08 • New release
B 2011-05-20 • Addition of error codes, etc.
C 2011-06-24 • Addition of CR unit setting, etc.
D 2011-10-14 • Addition of AeroDR Portable RF Unit setting, etc.
E 2011-12-13 • Addition of AeroDR Portable UF Unit setting, etc.
F 2012-02-17 • Addition of the AeroDR Stitching Unit setting, etc.
G 2012-05-07 • Addition of V1.06 functions, error correction, changes of chapter com-
position, etc.
H 2012-11-02 • Addition of V1.07 functions, separation of the chapter of service tool
and user tool screen
19.4 Study deletion
19
786
A47FYF220H
20121102CT

KONICA MINOLTA CS7 Installation & Service Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

KONICA MINOLTA CS7 Installation & Service Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Installation/Service Manual

Preparation for Installation 3

Installation Procedure for This Device and

Installation Procedure for This Device and

Installation Procedure for

The Mixed Installation Procedure for This Device,

Installation Procedure for This Device and

Installation Procedure for This Device

Installation Procedure for This Device

Installation of Function System Options 13

Other Installation Procedures 14

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.7.5 How to display the intermediate

12.11 Attaching of a monitor for checking 12.17.3 Setting of maintenance personal

15.9.1 Procedure for ing false detection of a

Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . 785

• "..." attached to the end of characters or message is omitted.

The meanings of terms used in this manual are as follows:

CR An acronym for computed radiography

DR An acronym for digital radiography

JM An acronym for job manager

RM An acronym for roaming manager

Refer to the REGIUS series.

Abbreviation for Radiology Information System

Host A server to save image information

An X-ray exposure device constructed of an X-ray generator device, an operation panel,

Image processing to reduce noise

Image processing for adjusting the sharpness of an image

Image processing for compressing the dynamic range

Exposure condition key Another name of the exposure condition master

(1) 8.4 Check of startup

Before the actual connection, make sure that this de-

(3) Reference ••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • The initial screen

8 1 Attach the pen to this device with the pen (5)

1 Flip over this device.

2 Hold the battery pack so the connector is

IMPORTANT ••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Number Item Description Icon

(3) Reference Describes reference items. Refer to these as necessary. Reference

(6) Hint Describes important information. HINT

Indicates the off position for the main

Indicates the power on or standby posi-

Signal words indicate the degree of potential hazards

1.2 Warning labels/instruction displays

1.2.2 This device (during the portable X-ray device operation)

1 1 all safety precautions thoroughly before using this device.

normal sound, abnormal odor, or smoke coming out

CAUTION 1.3.5 Precaution when

1.3 Safety precautions

1.3.3 LCD monitor precautions

1.3.4 Precaution when tempo-

2.1.1 System configuration example

X-Ray Device Console

2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

Connection example by connection type

AeroDR AeroDR Generator

AeroDR I/F Cable

AeroDR I/F Cable

2.2 Connection example of AeroDR SYSTEM

AeroDR AeroDR Generator

AeroDR I/F Cable

Exposure room AeroDR Detector

AeroDR I/F Cable

AeroDR AeroDR Generator